SECTION-5

Technical Specifications
for
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC)
Work For Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (EPC) Work For Construction of Air-
filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village
Pathakavadi, Ta.Dolvan, Dist. Tapi.

1
 SECTION-5

A. Work & Site Condition

B. Special Condition

C. Technical specification

2
PREAMBLE TO THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 GENERAL

(1) The following Specifications are part of the requirements for the work
related to the Permanent and Temporary Works, which are to be
complied with by the Contractor according to the stipulations of
the Contract. "Permanent Works" means the permanent works to
be executed in accordance with the Contract. "Temporary
Works" shall mean all temporary works of every kind required in or
about the execution of the Works. Hence, the instructions given herein
form an integral part of, and are applicable to, all technical and
Contract Documents issued for the Works. Addenda to these
Specifications may be issued as required during bidding and
construction phases.
(2) These Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the
Conditions of Contract, the Drawings and the Price Schedule - and
the Contractor shall comply with all provisions contained
within the Contract Documents and Engineer-in-Charge's
instructions.
(3) It is the intent of these Specifications, together with other relevant
documents issued as part of the Tender and Contract Documents or
to follow later on, to provide the Contractor with sufficient
information for guidance purpose and subsequent instructions
necessary to enable him to submit a well-planned Tender, to
carry out the design, where and when required, and to execute
properly the work prescribed.
(4) It is the intent of these Specifications to establish acceptable
standards of quality. Minor deviations in details due to manufacturer's
standard shop process will be considered for acceptance provided
that, in the opinion of the Engineer- in-charge, the proposed
substitutions are equal in quality to those specified. All deviations
shall be called out in writing in the Tender, and shall be specifically
indicated on the shop drawings.

3
 (5) All work shall be executed according to the approved Construction Drawings
and requirements released for construction, in a professional and diligent
manner, and all supplies and work shall comply with the quality requirements
defined in the relevant Sections of these Specifications and other Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall endeavour to provide all such necessary
efforts in order to comply with the intent of these Specifications to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

(1) The Contractor shall provide the Engineer-in-Charge with all submittals as
requested for in these Specifications and other Contract Documents. Although
their extent shall be to the discretion of the Contractor, they shall be complete
enough to illustrate adequately the problem of the aspect concerned for the
understanding of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(2) At any time the Engineer-in-Charge may call either for additional information,
completion of the submittals or request the Contractor not to submit some of
them.
(3) The Contractor shall submit these documents to the Engineer-in-Charge so that,
even if not specifically expressed, reasonable time will be given to the
Engineer-in-Charge to comment or approve the submittals.

1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES

1.3.1 General

(1) Indian Standards as far as possible are referred to in these Specifications.

Pertinent provisions of these standards shall apply to the work, and are hereby
incorporated in these Specifications. Where a manufacturer is named, other
manufacturers’ product will also be acceptable provided the designated material or
workmanship is of equivalent or better quality and do satisfy the relevant Indian

4
 Codes.
(2) All standards and codes employed or referred to shall be the latest current issue
in effect up to the date of Tender submission date.
(3) One complete set of standards and codes adopted for the Works shall be
submitted free of charge by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge,
immediately after the Contract has come into force or upon the Engineer-in-
Charge's request. Such copies shall also be available at the Contractor's business
domicile(s) and at Site, for the use also of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(4) In case of discrepancies between these Specifications and national or
international standards and codes, these Specifications being part of Contract
Documents shall govern, unless otherwise established by the Engineer-in-
Charge in each particular case.

1.3.2 Indian Standards, Codes, Laws and Regulations

(1) Throughout the duration of the Contract, the materials, equipment, services,
design and workmanship shall conform to applicable Indian codes, standards,
laws and regulations in force in India, if not otherwise specified.
(2) It is the Contractor's duty to acquaint himself with all available Indian codes,
standards, laws and regulations related to the Works in any way and he shall
procure and keep at the Site a copy of each of such applicable documents.

1.3.3 International Standards and Codes

The following international standards/codes series may be adopted:

a) International Standardization Organization (ISO)
b) US (ACI, ASTM, ANSI, USACE, USBR, AASTHO)
c) British (BS)
Provided that:
5
 a) The standards/codes proposed are at least as stringent as the
equivalentnational ones relevant to the Works, or if there is no applicable
national standard/code for the specific item concerned.
b) The Contractor states, prior to starting the work, the international
standard/code he proposes to apply, giving full identification of each of
them. These proposals are subject to the approval by the Engineer-in-
Charge.

1.4 SYSTEM OF UNITS

(1) The SI system of units has been used throughout these Specifications and this
system of units shall be used consequently throughout the duration of Contract for
all technical or contractual purposes.
(2) Following abbreviations are used in the Tender documents and other related
Contract Documents:

Unit Abbreviation

Length Millimetre mm

Centimetre cm

Metre m

Kilometer Km

Area : square millimeter Sq.mm.

square centimeter Sq.cm.

square metre Sq.mt.

Volume : cubic metre cum

Mass : Kilogram Kg
6
 Ton T

Metric ton MT

Density : ton per cubic metre t/m3

Force : Newton N

Kilo-Newton kN

Mega-Newton MN

Unit Abbreviation

Moment : Newton-metre N.m

Stress : Newton per square millimetre N/mm2

Kilo-Newton per square millimetre kN/mm2

Pressure : Bar Bar

Pascal Pa

Mega-Pascal Mpa

Time : Second S

Hour H

Rate of Flow : litres per second or minute l/s, l/min

cubic metres per second m3/s

cubic metres per minute m3/min

Velocity : metre per second m/s

Kilometre per hour km/h

Speed of rotation : revolutions per minute rpm

7
 Temperature : degree Celsius °C

Luminous Intensity : Lux Lx

Energy : Kilowatt hour kWh

Power : Watt W

Kilowatt kW

Megawatt MW

Slope : Vertical: horizontal v: h

Gradient : Percentage (Vertical: horizontal) %

(3) The term "day" as used in these Specifications means calendar day.
(4) Any other system of units utilised shall have only a descriptive value and shall
in no case replace the above-mentioned SI system.

8
SITE INSTALLATIONS, SERVICES AND ENVIRONMENTAL
OBLIGATIONS
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK

(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing plant, equipment, materials
and labour for the provision of all necessary Temporary works, site installationsand
services required for the realisation of the Works under this Contract.
(2) The Contractor shall design, furnish, set-up, maintain and operate at the Site all
Temporary Works, site installations and Contractor's Equipment for his own use as
specified in this Section, or required by the Contractor, including camps,
workshops, warehouses, storage and assembly areas, all machinery, vehicles,
scaffolding, equipment, water and power supply, etc.
(3) Temporary Works and services provided and operated by the Contractor shall
conform to the applicable Indian laws, regulations, standards, codes and sanitary
requirements stipulated for such purpose. In addition, they shall comply fully with
all Indian laws and regulations relating to environmental protection,
mitigating measures for reducing environmental impacts and remedial works on
completion of the Works.
(4) The design, construction, operation and maintenance of the Contractor's
Temporary Works and services may be subject to inspection by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
(5) All plants, camp facilities, installations and services provided by the Contractor
shall at all times remain his property, except when otherwise specified
hereinafter. Should, after the Completion of Contract, the Contractor wish to sell
his plants, facilities and equipment in India, he shall pay all taxes and duties
required by law as stipulated in the Conditions of Contract, and have to obtain
relevant permission from the Government for such sale.
(6) The Contractor shall construct, and maintain the temporary roads for thevarious
working areas, camps, facilities and other temporary works.
9
2.2 SUBMITTALS

(1) Within 10 days from the date of issue of the Notification of Award, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge updated layout plans
showing, at adequate scale, the locations and arrangement of all Temporary
Works and facilities. These plans shall include:

a) Camps for Contractor's employees,

b) Offices, parkingareas, are houses, storage areas, and medical care

services,

c) Water supply, sewerage, sewage treatment and disposal, power supply and
illumination, telephone service (radio and cable),

d) Temporary roadwork, including public road diversions,

e) Equipment pools and mechanical workshops,

f) Spoil areas, borrow, quarry and stockpile areas,

g) Concrete and materials processing plants, including cement storage,

h) Materials testing laboratory,

i) Security and safety arrangements,

(2) Within 10 days from the date of issue of Notification of Award, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge the following:
a) Detailed drawings at scale 1:500 showing the camp layout, buildings, roads,
recreation areas, all utilities, etc., and drawings at scale 1:50 showing
typical building construction details,
b) Drawings and specifications for the establishment of an infirmary and first
aid stations, and details of the ambulances,
c) Detailed design for industrial and potable water supply to the camps and
working areas as well as sewerage systems, sewage treatment and disposal
with estimate of number of people to be supplied with water,
d) Detailed layout drawings for electrical installations and distribution systems
10
 at the Site, showing voltages, outlets, and routing of power lines,
e) Detailed design and drawings including manufacturer's drawings for
concrete and materials processing plants in accordance with the
requirements of the pertinent Sections of these Specifications,
f) Structural Design and Drawing shall be got proof checked.
g) Detailed breakdown of all equipment to be used for material testing and in
the field laboratory in accordance with the requirements of the pertinent
Sections of these Specifications,
h) Details of the dewatering system
(3) Within 10 days from the date of issue of Notification of Award, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge an environmental monitoring and
protection plan which will describe all measures to be taken by the Contractor to
comply with the requirements of 2.18 of this Section. This plan will cover all
measures to be taken by the Contractor to prevent, minimise or make good all
possible environmental effects of the construction work, in particular:
a) Deterioration of the quality of water in rivers and streams, and of ground
water.
b) Accumulation of and pollution by solid and liquid waste material anywhere
in the project area.
c) Undesirable levels of noise, air pollution and dust both at the construction
site as well as along the access road to quarries and borrow areas.
d) Occurrence amongst site workers and their families of water-borne and
other communicable illnesses, and the deterioration of levels of hygiene in
the camps and construction areas.
This environmental plan will also describe the procedures to be adopted by the
Contractor for reporting on the environmental protection programme andfor
informing and communicating with government institutions. The
planwillalsogive details of arrangements made by the Contractor with local

11
 land-ownersforthe leasing of land for site installations, camps etc., and
willincludedrawings detailing the areas in question.

2.3 CONTRACTOR’S SITE OFFICES, STORES, WAREHOUSES,

MATERIALSYARDS

(1) The Contractor shall provide and equip, for his own and his subcontractors' use,
main and secondary offices, warehouses, materials storage areas, fuel storage
areas and explosives magazines, all of which shall be maintained in good
conditions until the Completion of Works.
(2) Listed here under are the buildings, shops and warehouses expected to be
constructed and equipped by the Contractor for use in the performance of the
Work under this Contract, in addition to facilities explicitly specified elsewhere in
these Specifications:
a) Mechanical repair shop,
b) Electrical repair shop,
c) Metalwork and wood fabrication shop,
d) Main warehouse and parts store,
e) Bulk cement silo,
f) Bagged cement store,
g) Spare parts store,
h)Gasoline and oil stations.
(3) The Contractor is required to have at the Site at least one month's
minimum reserve of materials both for construction activity and other
requirements. For the monsoon months, from June to September, when
transport to and from site may be made difficult, his reserve requirements
may need to be increased.

12
2.4 CONCRETE AND MATERIALS PROCESSING PLANTS
The Contractor shall install and erect all necessary concrete and materials
processing plants of sufficient capacity to meet the planned peak
requirements during construction. The plants shall be subject to approval
by theEngineer-in-Charge and shall be well designed and fabricated and
kept in good running order to ensure compliance with the materials quality
specifications. All control and measuring equipment shall be regularly
serviced and calibrated.
The batch mixing plant of concrete shall be fully automatic with printing
facility. Semi-Automatic or plant without printer facility will not be
allowed.

2.5 MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY

(1) The Contractor shall build and equip an adequate field laboratory for
the sampling and for testing of materials for concrete, earth, rock or any
other materials as specified in the pertinent Sections of these Specifications.
(2) The laboratory shall be located in a dust-free building properly equipped
with electricity, water, etc., and shall have enough room for storing the
samples tested as required.
(3) The equipment to be supplied and the methods of testing shall be in
accordance with the relevant Indian Standards or with requirements of the
USBR Concrete Manual and USBR Earth Manual. All apparatuses and
equipment shall be brand new, of the latest design, manufactured by a reputed
manufacturer, and properly calibrated with calibration certificate from
Indian or International Authority. The proposed type and number of items
of laboratory equipment shall be presented to the Engineer-in-Charge prior
to purchase.
(4) The Contractor shall operate and maintain the laboratory until the
Completion of Works and make all facilities and services available to the
Engineer-in-Charge as required. All sampling and testing to be undertaken
13
 shall be under the direct supervision of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
laboratory shall be run by Contractor's personnel experienced in sampling
and testing of materials, and quality control.
(5) Specialised testing which may be required and which cannot be performed
in the Contractor's laboratory due to lack of time or equipment shall be
assigned to an independent organisation at the cost of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall accept all results, instructions or restrictions stipulated by
the Engineer-in-Charge based on such tests.
(6) Upon the Completion of Works, all laboratory equipment shall remain
the property of the Contractor.

2.6 SITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

(1) The Contractor shall supply, install, operate and maintain a
telephone switchboard, complete with standby power supply, to connect his
offices with the Engineer's-in-Charge, campsite, laboratories, workshops,
stores, aggregate plants, quarry/borrow areas, batching plants, dam site
including Bund and roads and other works under the scope of work
infirmary and first aid stations and all other work areas within the Site.
(2) The Contractor shall furnish a directory of the telephones installed at the
Site and make it available to the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.7 SERVICE VEHICLES

The Contractor shall operate and maintain sufficient service vehicles for

2.8 CAMPS FOR CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES

(1) The Contractor shall design, construct, provide furnishings, maintain, and
operate two separate construction camps; one for Contractor's Indian and
expatriate staff of mid and upper level, employed at site and the other for
Contractor's labour.

14
 (2) The construction camps shall provide for the housing, feeding and recreation of
the Contractor's employees and those of his subcontractors as per Indian labour law
and other relevant regulations. The camps shall be large enough to
accommodate the anticipated peak work force.
(3) The Contractor shall be responsible for the acquisition of, and the expenses for
the required land, if not provided by the project.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary topographical surveys,
clearing, and earthwork required for the landscaping and to provide satisfactory
foundations for buildings, streets and auxiliary facilities.
(5) Food handling, preparation and serving shall be arranged by the Contractor in
properly equipped canteen buildings for all his and his subcontractors'
employees.
(6) The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the camp and the buildings in
good hygienic conditions. The standards and regulations presently in force in the
project area with regard to personnel treatment, sanitary conditions, and fire and
accident prevention shall be duly taken into account.
(7) The prices charged by the Contractor for food, beverages, etc., available in the
camp shall be calculated on a non-profit basis.

2.9 COMMERCIAL CONCESSIONS

(1) Commercial concessions such as for laundry, catering, shops, etc., granted to a
third party by the Contractor for the use of the employees and residents at the Site,
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer-in-Charge. Any concession shall be
revoked if the concessionaire violates the law or the provisions governing
the granting of the concession. Concessions shall automatically terminate upon
Completion of the Works or in the event of the termination of the Contract.
(2) No concession shall be granted for activities that are contrary to statutory
regulations or law of the land or are declared by the Engineer-in-Charge to be

15
 offensive to the community.
(3) Concessionaires will be regarded as subcontractors of the Contractor.

2.10 MEDICAL CARE FACILITIES

(1) The Contractor shall comply with laws and health standards presently in force in
India. In the event of illness of an epidemic nature breaking out, the Contractor
shall carry out and comply with all orders, arrangements or regulations,
which may be issued by the Government or local authorities.
(2) The Contractor shall construct, equip, and maintain at the Site, One clinic and
infirmary with ambulance and driver within his main camp,
(3) The construction of these facilities shall be such as to provide reasonable quiet,
privacy, communications, adequate ventilation, heating, light, hot and cold
water, toilet facilities, electrical outlets, and impervious floors, walls and roofs.

2.11 POWER SUPPLY AND ILLUMINATION

(1) The Contractor shall provide, install and keep operational throughout the Time
for Completion, own generating facilities of such capacity necessary to supply all
participants at the Site and in the camps. The power generating sets shall
beinstalled in separate concrete or steel structure buildings on concrete
foundations. The power supply to the construction sites, camps etc. shall be
designed for continuous operation, 24 hours a day, with sufficient capacity to
satisfy peak and emergency demands.
(2) The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain electrical distribution
systemswhich shall include all other necessary transformers, circuit breakers,
disconnect and safety switches, voltage regulators, transmission lines, poles, pole
hardware, conductors, meters and other equipment necessary for power
distribution throughout the Site and temporary facilities.
(3) Local standby generating units to prevent the interruption of work during the
failure of the primary power source and capable of maintaining minimum
16
 services such as illumination, water supply, dewatering, etc., safety and security
shall also be provided.
(4) The Contractor shall ensure adequate illumination for all his operations at the
Site and at the camp, including illumination of the streets.

2.12 WATER SUPPLY

(1) The Contractor shall design, install, operate and maintain two separate water
supply systems at the Site:
a) Industrial water: for general construction use, treated to the extent
necessary to meet specified requirements. (e.g. for concrete),
b) Potable water: for supply to all buildings and plants requiring high quality
water meeting statutory requirements for drinking water.
(2) Water shall be supplied by the Contractor from suitable sources available
within the Project area. The water shall be free of contamination and unaffected by
the Site construction work. In isolated areas with no sources, the Contractor shall
provide sufficient number of water carts to cover the requirements on both the
industrial as well as potable water.
(3) The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate and maintain all pumps, piping,
fittings, valves, storage tanks, purification plant and chlorination for the water
supply and distribution systems, adequate in quantity and pressure. Industrial
water shall be used for construction purposes only if of adequate quality. There
shall be no cross connections of any kind between the industrial and potable
water supply systems. Only potable water shall be piped into buildings.
(4)Throughout the duration of the construction, the Contractor shall take regular
samples from all water supplies to examine it for suitability and treatments
required and make the bacteriological tests periodically from potable water
systems.

17
2.13 SANITATION AND SEWERAGE

(1) All offices, workshops, laboratory and other occupied work buildings shall be
provided with toilets connected to properly constructed and regularly
maintained septic tanks approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(2) The campsites shall be provided with a complete, properly maintained and
operated sewerage system, including septic tanks, sewage treatment and
disposal facilities. Facilities for washing clothes shall also be provided and
linked to the sewerage system.

2.14 WASTE AND GARBAGE DISPOSAL

(1) The Contractor shall collect waste material and garbage from camp, offices and
workshops on a daily basis and transport it to an area approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge where it shall be incinerated and buried.
(2) The Site shall be kept clean and free of refuse at all times. No waste shall be
dumped in areas other than those approved by the Engineer-in-Charge for waste
disposal. No waste of any kind shall be deposited in any watercourses.

2.15 FENCING AND SITE SECURITY

(1) The Contractor's offices, workshops and storage compounds, campsites and all
construction areas where exclusion of unauthorised personnel is necessary for
safety and security, shall be adequately fenced, gated and guarded.

(2) The Contractor shall employ an adequate force of properly trained security
guards at the work site and at the construction camp on 24-hour duty including
Sundays and holidays. Storage areas shall be fenced, lighted and regularly
patrolled by security guards. Warehouse buildings and explosive magazines
shall be kept locked and keys accounted for at all times.
(3) All employees engaged in the execution and maintenance of the Works shall
wear identification badges when at the work site.
18
 (4) The Contractor shall be responsible for the losses occurring in his installations
and those of the owner resulting from carelessness on the Contractor's part.

2.16 INSPECTION BY THE ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE

The Owner and the Engineer-in-Charge have the right at any time to inspect any part
of the Contractor's temporary facilities, without advance notification, and to require
immediate rectification of any contravention of the specified requirements.

2.17 FINAL CLEAN UP

(1) Upon the Completion of Works, or when any plant has completed its functions
the Contractor shall dismantle and demobilise all temporary facilities erected by
himself or his subcontractors, and remove all debris, objectionable material, and all
other refuse which may have been deposited on Site during the construction
period. Such materials may be deposited only in areas approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
(2) All excavated areas shall be filled, graded and dressed in a clean and orderly
condition acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge. As far as possible, such areas
should conform to the natural appearance of the landscape.
(3) No demobilisation or removal of temporary facilities and equipment shall be
made without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.18 ENVIRONMENTAL OBLIGATIONS

(1) The Contractor shall, during the whole period of the Works comply fully with all
Indian laws and regulations relating to environmental protection, mitigating
measures for reducing environmental impacts and remedial workson
completion of the Works. This obligation shall extend to the constructionsites
themselves, all the Contractor’s site installations, and all quarries,borrow areas and
tips.

19
(2) Notwithstanding any specific obligations as these may be specified in prevailing
Indian laws and regulations, the Contractor shall at all times comply with the
following particular requirements for the protection of the environment, the
local population and the workers at the construction site:
(a) Collect, treat, remove from site and dispose of in accordance with the
regulations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge all domestic
and industrial waste and excess construction materials (both solid and
liquid), fuel, chemicals and other matter.
(b) Make every effort to minimise the harmful effects of transport to and from
the site, in particular vehicle emissions and noise and the control of dust on
roads.
(c) Provide its work force with fuel for cooking and heating and ensure that
workers on the site do not cut wood or other vegetation as firewood.
(d) Take measures and construct works, on the instructions of the Engineer-in-
charge, to prevent soil erosion from slopes in the construction area.
(e) Not clear any areas of forest or woodland without the authority of the
Engineer-in-charge and statutory authorities.
(3) In order to reduce adverse effect on public health resulting from the influx into
the project area on construction workers, the Contractor will be obliged to
undertake during the whole construction period the following preventive
measures:
(a) Ensure that all construction staff and workers, prior to being accepted to
work on site, submit certificates of good health and, during the construction
period, ensure that all employees are given a periodic physical examination
(at least once a year and following any serious illness) by a qualified
medical practitioner.
(b) Ensure that any workers suffering from noticeable contagious illnesses are
removed from the site for treatment and are not permitted to return to the
site without an updated medical certificate.
20
 (c) Carry out regular spraying of all parts of the site and site installations to
control mosquito vector diseases, using approved insecticides.
(d) Implement a control programme to ensure the maintenance of satisfactory
sanitary conditions on the site and in the living areas, and report to the
Engineer-in-charge all cases of serious enteric and/or water-borne illness.
(4) The Contractor will send representatives to constituted project environmental
monitoring committees or other Committee relevant to the work, as instructed
with the Engineer-in-charge, and will at all times comply with the requests of said
committees with regard to the need for environmental or health protection
measures. He will also maintain close contact with local representatives and
government institutions in addressing issues arising from the construction
activities. Such issues needing particular attention are the following:
(a) Pollution caused by construction work.
(b) Disputes related to the leasing of land for construction activities and/or site
installations etc.

(c) Disputes arising from traffic congestion and restrictions on the use of the
main project access road and roads in the project area.
(d) All matters relating to road safety and the reduction to a minimum of the
risk of traffic accidents.
(5) The Contractor will submit to the Engineer-in-charge monthly reports on
environmental performance and control. These reports will give details of all
environmental protection measures taken during the months, as well as:
(a) Any environmental problems encountered during the month.
(b) Details of health conditions, in particular any occurrence of contagious
illness and any accidents.
(c) Any notices received from government or state institutions relating to
environmental matters, and the action taken by the Contractor as a result.
(6) In view of the limited space available for the site accommodation facilitiesand
21
 in order to avoid problems of assimilation with the present populationofthe
project region, the Contractor will be obliged to keep the numberofworkers
imported from other areas to the minimum required for him tocompletethe
Works on time and in accordance with the specifications. The Contractorwill
co-operate with the local authorities at all times to prevent migration tothearea,
of unauthorized persons not involved directly in the constructionwork.Tothis
end, he will at all times strictly control the movement ofpersonsintoandoutof
the construction areas and camps.

2.19 PAYMENT FOR SITE INSTALLATION AND SERVICES

The initial mobilization costs such as purchase and transport of Contractor's

Equipment and materials to the Site, planning, designing, installing, operating,
maintaining and removing of all Temporary Works, site installations, servicesand
facilities specified in this Section, making submittals to the Engineer-in-Charge,
recruiting and transferring staff, obtaining rights of way, statutory permits and
clearances, clearing, grading and excavating in areas for temporary facilities, and any
other costs involved in preparation for constructing Permanent Works will not be paid
separately as deemed to be included in the quoted price of Scope of Works underthe
Contract.
No separate payment shall be admissible for complying with anyenvironmental
obligations required by Indian national and state laws and regulations,and/oras
described in this Section, and all such costs incurred by the Contractortothisend
shall be deemed to be included in the quoted price of ScopeofWorksunderthe
Contract.
2.20 No separate payment shall be made for site installation, services and environmental
obligations. All cost of these activities will be included in the quoted lump sum
price scope of works under the contract.

22
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.1 SAFETY PROGRAMME AND ITS IMPLEMENTATION

(1) Within 10 days from the date of issue of Notification of Award, the Contractor
shall submit, in writing, his proposal for a comprehensive safety programme
covering all aspects of the Works.
(2) This safety programme shall detail policies, procedures, and plans, which the
Contractor intends to implement to ensure the safety and health of his
employees. It shall comply with the standards and regulations in force in India
applicable to construction safety.
(3) The Contractor shall designate a competent employee specially trained and
experienced to act as Safety Officer, who will administer and be responsible for
the implementation of the safety program. He shall carry out frequent and regular
safety inspections of the working areas, materials, and equipment. The name and
qualifications of the Safety Officer shall be submitted for approval to the
Engineer-in-Charge prior to his appointment.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for enforcement of the health and safety
provisions for his subcontractors to be employed at the Site.
(5) Prior to the start of any major construction activity or hazardous operation, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval, a specific plan
for safety precautions covering such operation.
(6) All accidental occurrence with serious accident potential such as major
equipment failures, contact with high-voltage lines, exposure to hazardous
materials, slides, cave-ins, etc., shall be immediately reported to the Engineer-in-
Charge.
(7) All serious and fatal injuries and diseases caused by the progress of work shall be
immediately investigated by the Contractor and a comprehensive report shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge.
(8) In case of a fatal accident, only rescue and emergency teams and operations shall
23
 be permitted at the place of the occurrence until the Engineer-in-Charge gives
permission to resume normal operations.

3.2 SAFETY STANDARDS

a) In addition to the requirements specified herein, the Contractor shall comply

fully with all applicable national and state governments safety regulations and
standards in force in India.

3.3 PERSONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT

3.3.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall provide his and his subcontractor's personnel as well as the
Engineer's-in-Charge representatives and visitors with appropriate personal
safety equipment. The use of such equipment shall be compulsory.
(2) Every person entering the working area shall wear a protective helmet.
(3) The safety-toe footwear with steel caps shall be worn by all employees engaged
in work having an inherent danger to the feet. Light footwear such as sandals,
canvas or tennis shoes shall not be permitted for construction work.
(4) Employees engaged in work having an inherent danger of eye or face injury shall
be furnished and required to wear protection glasses, goggles or masks. Where
irritant or toxic substances may come in contact with the skin or clothing,
employees shall be wearing the protective clothing or shall be required to apply a
protective ointment by a competent physician.
(5) Employees working on steep slopes or otherwise subject to possible falls from
levels not protected by fixed guardrails or safety nets, shall be secured by safety
belts and lifelines.

24
3.4 ILLUMINATIONS AND EARTHING

3.4.1 General

All working sites in the open, transit areas, excavation sites, access to tunnels, etc., shall
be adequately illuminated during night work by electrical lights as specified in the
Section "Site Installations and Services".
3.4.2 Earthlings, Wet Work Areas, Control of Electricity Discharges
(1) All equipment and appliances, which are exposed to lightning, shall be earthed
electrically, and the effectiveness of such earthing shall be periodically checked
by the Contractor's specialised personnel.
(2) No equipment electrically powered by more than 24 Volts shall be operated by
personnel standing in water.
(3) Only air, battery-powered or hydraulic tools shall be permitted in the wet areas.

3.5 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND SAFETY ON PUBLIC ROADS

(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety along the roads related to the
Site, and he shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work
and the safety of the public on the roads affected by his activities. Where the
work will be carried out at the site of, or close to an existing road, the Contractor
shall maintain the vehicular and pedestrian traffic safe at all times. If his
operations can cause traffic hazards, he shall repair or fence or take such other
measures for ensuring safety which are satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge.
(2) Roads subject to interference by the work shall be kept open or suitable detours
shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor, who shall provide, erect, and
maintain all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient flashlights, flagmen,
danger signals, and signs.
(3) Roads, which will be closed to traffic, shall be protected by effective barricades
on which acceptable warning and detour signs shall be placed. All barricades

25
 shall be kept illuminated and all lights shall be kept on from sunset to sunrise.
(4)The Contractor shall provide temporary passes and bridges to give an access to the
existing villages, houses, etc., to the satisfaction of the authorities concerned
whenever he disturbs such existing way during the execution of the Works.

3.6 POLLUTION OF STREAMS AND RIVER WORKS

(1) The Contractor shall take all possible steps to prevent pollution of streams,
rivers, and other water supplies, at or in the vicinity of the Site and shall comply
with applicable laws, orders and regulations in force in India concerning the
control and abatement of water pollution.
(2) Under no circumstances shall the sewage from the camps, or other contaminated
water, be released directly into river or other natural streams or any open areas
without prior treatment.
 No separate payment whatsoever shall be made for the safety precautions
required to be provided by the Contractor and the entire cost thereof shall be
deemed to be included in the quoted price of Scope of Works under the
Contract.
 Any repair work or any indemnities required due to Contractor's
non-compliance with the safety requirements shall be at the Contractor's
expense.

26
 SURVEYING AND SETTING-OUT WORK

4.1 EXISTING SURVEY CONTROL POINTS

(1) Basic survey network consisting of fixed triangulation polygon points and
benchmarks exists in the project area.
(2) Prior to commencing any construction work, the Contractor shall undertake
survey for the purpose of checking these reference data and in order to satisfy
himself as to their accuracy. Should he have any objections to these data
and the relevant drawings, he shall inform the Engineer-in-Charge in writing
within One (1) weeks of receiving them from the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.2 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

4.2.1 General
(1) The Contractor shall perform all calculations, surveys and setting-out necessary
to establish the accurate location of the structures as shown on the Construction
Drawings and shall carry out all necessary surveys to verify the topographical
data used by the Engineer-in-Charge for the project design and measuring
purposes.
(2) Within 10 days from the date of issue of Notification of Award, the Contractor
shall submit his proposed survey plan to the Engineer-in-Charge. The proposed
plan shall indicate the order of accuracy for all surveys.
(3) In advance any setting-out work associated with all principal project features,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval a description of
the method and procedures he intends to use in establishing bench marks and base
lines.
(4) If the Contractor chooses to use triangulation points or bench marks other than
those furnished by the Engineer-in-Charge, he shall do so at his own expense and
risk.
27
 (5) The Contractor shall carry out topographical surveys of the original ground
surface in each sector of the Works where excavation will be necessary, and
produce sufficient and adequate cross-sections to evaluate the volumeof
excavation.
(6) The Contractor shall entrust the surveying works only to persons who by their
training and experience have sufficient qualifications and knowledge to ensure
proper fulfillment of the survey tasks assigned to them. For the performance of
the survey, the Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of reliable and
accurate instruments.

4.2.2 Bench Marks and Triangulation Stations

(1) Existing survey control point, bench marks and base lines shall be verified with
respect to permanent control points at Construction site and corresponding
bench marks and base lines established afresh as necessary to construct
eachportion of the Works.
(2) Permanent survey control points shall be established prior to starting the work
and such permanent points shall be preserved during construction.
(3) From the primary survey control points the construction surveys shall be
performed as required to locate, layout and construct each portion of the Works.
(4) Complete and adequate logs of all control and survey work shall be maintained
as it progresses. Such logs shall be available for the Engineer-in-Charge's
inspection at all times.
(5) The Contractor shall protect, preserve and keep accessible the bench marks and
triangulation stations of the basic survey and those provided by himself. Any
damage or removal of benchmarks and stations, including such of other parties
shall be prevented. Any accidental damage shall immediately be brought to the
attention of the Engineer-in-Charge. It is expressly stated that the Contractor will
be made responsible for the damage and its consequences.
(6) Benchmarks shall be of stainless steel or cast iron. In softer soil, the steel
bolt shall be embedded in a block of concrete of suitable size, and and
absolutely stable. Inscriptions shall be durable and clearly legible.
28
 (7) Subordinate points may be marked by steel pipes or pegs, subject to the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Every newly fixed point shall be checked, as
far as possible through other elements than those, which served toestablish the
point.
4.2.3 Accuracy of Surveying

(1) Horizontal distances shall normally be measured with optic or electronic

distance measuring instruments. Chaining with metallic tape shall be restricted to
measuring of short distances and will be rejected for use in survey of traverse nets.
(2) Elevations shall be determined by differential horizontal levelling.
(3) Angles shall be measured by Total Station/Latest Digital Instrument.
(4) Traverse nets shall be executed with the precision and as per Survey of India
practice and as per IS Codes.
(5) Levelling shall be checked by closing the loop to the initial benchmark.

4.2.4 Auxiliary Works

(1) The Contractor shall perform auxiliary works with regard to surveying, which
include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Perform all necessary calculations with clear presentation of calculations
and results in order to facilitate verification,

b) Expose covered bench marks,

c) Provide bench marks in lieu of and/or in addition to those in existence,

d) Remove machinery and obstructions from the required sight-lines,

e) Provide adequate lighting or shut off sources of interfering light to ensure

the necessary clear view,

29
 f) Provide adequate labour, and materials as deemed necessary and suitableby
the Engineer-in-Charge for the control and auxiliary

g) Remove all obstructive accumulation of water,

h) Carry out additional topographical surveys in cases where the existing

topographical data is, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, insufficient for
accurate measurement of the Works,

i) Carry out all necessary topographical surveys for the incorporation of

measuring equipment and instrumentation located in the Permanent Works,
j) Carry out all necessary topographical surveys for the observation of the
behavior of structures during construction.

(2) All the above shall be done in close co-ordination with the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.2.5 Damage to Crops and Vegetation

(1) No trees or crops of economic value existing at the Site shall be damaged or
removed by the Contractor during survey and cross-sectioning works prior to their
enumeration and evaluation.
(2) Throughout the surveying and setting-out the Contractor shall work closely with
the authorised local appraisers of crops and vegetation in question and shall
provide them with facilities necessary for the expeditious performance of their
duties.
(3) As soon as a section of work has been defined and valued, the Contractor shall
delineate the boundaries of the areas to be cleared by approved markings.

30
4.3 CHECKING OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK BY THE ENGINEER-IN-
CHARGE
4.3.1 Regular Checking

(1) All elements of the Contractor's survey work associated with the setting-out of
principal project features will be regularly checked by the Engineer-in-Charge
during the course of the work, and the Contractor shall provide assistance at any
time as required in the performance of such control work.
(2) The Contractor may be required to provide the Engineer-in-Charge with any
information, readings or computations for checking.
(3) The regular checks will usually be made during work breaks, but in case of
urgency, the Contractor shall restrict or stop the affected work.
(4) Any checks by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not relieve the Contractor of his
full responsibility for the accuracy of structures and parts of them with regard to
their position and dimensions.

4.4 Survey Work Performed by the Contractor

No separate payment whatsoever shall be made for the survey, investigation,

planning, design & engineering etc. of works to be provided by the Contractor and the
entire cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the quoted price of Scope of
Works under the Contract.

31
 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE IN EXECUTION OF WORKS

(1) The Contractor shall establish staff, equip and operate a comprehensive quality
assurance set-up at the site during the full period of the Works. The principal
responsibility and duty of this set-up shall be to ensure that all work carried out
and materials produced or supplied by the Contractor comply fully with the
Specifications.
With his tender, the Bidder shall submit his detailed proposal (in terms
of experienced supervisory staff, trained workmen, procedures of work,
equipments, obtaining support from outside agencies) for achieving quality in
respectofthe Barrage, Barrage, Fish Pass, Navigation lock/Channel, u/s and d/s
right and left Flank walls, u/s and d/s guide bunds and other associated works.
The Bidder’s proposal shall be specific enough to assure that all works are
executed in a professional manner and Bidder has included in his bid the
provision of employment of the best international practices of
construction in the implementation of the work.
(2) At the time of award of work, the Bidder’s proposal at the time of tender shall be
confirmed again and shall be improved, if so required.
(3) Immediately after the award of work, during mobilization phase, the Contractor
shall take systematic steps to implement all the proposals given by him for
achieving the desired quality in construction.
(4) In case Engineer-in-Charge is not satisfied with the resources employed vis-à-vis’
the commitments made in the proposal, the contractor shall take additional steps
to supplement his efforts.

5.2 CONTROL OF PROGRESS OF THE WORK

(1) Close progress control, and the preparation of corresponding progress reports,
32
 shall be an important part of the Contractor’s quality control responsibilities. The
contractor must at all times provide the Engineer-in-charge with up to date
information on the progress of work and must without delay bring to the attention
of the Engineer-in-charge all delays or occurrences which could lead todelayor
additional costs.
(2) The Contractor shall submit detailed daily/monthly/yearly progress reports to the
Engineer-in-charge, in which the contractual programme for the works is updated
and information is given on the quantitative completion of works (in the form of
tables indicating the quantities of completed work).
(3) The monthly progress reports shall give full details of any delays to work in
progress or planned delays in transport to/from the site, together with detailed
proposals for overcoming or preventing delays, and for regaining any lost time.
(4) The Contractor shall at any time, at the request of the Engineer-in-charge, submit
detailed reports on particular matters relating to the execution and progress of the
works, if such reports are required in order to assess the quality or progress of
specific activities or works.

5.3 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL STAFF

(1) The Contractor shall assign one experienced engineer to site as 24x7 full-time
quality control officer, responsible with complying with all requirement of this
Section.
(2) The experience and qualifications of this engineer shall be given in the
contractor’s tender and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-
charge.
(3) The positions, qualifications and duties, of the contractor’s quality control staff
shall be indicated in the QC organisation plan and manual respectively, and
shall likewise be subject to approval by the Engineer-in-charge.

33
5.4 CONTRACTOR’S LABORATORIES

(1) The Contractor shall establish, equip and operate on site laboratories for the
testing of the following principal construction materials:
a) Concrete, including also the testing of sand, aggregates, cement, water and
admixtures.
b) Filters, sand, loose stones and stone spalls, soil/earth envisaged in Barrage,
u/s and d/s right and left Flank walls, u/s and d/s guide bandhs, Navigation
Channels, fish Pass, flood Protection works and other associated works. Any
site testing and/or calibration of monitoring instrument.
(2) The numbers of samples to be tested, and the timing of testing, shall be as may
be given elsewhere in these specifications, or as may be instructed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
(3)The staff of the Contractor’s laboratory shall have proven experience in
similarprevious work and their qualifications shall be subject to approval by
the Engineer-in-charge.
(4) Complete records shall be kept of all laboratory tests carried out and shall be
available at any time to the Engineer-in-charge on request.
(5) The Engineer-in-charge shall be permitted at any time and without notice to
observe tests being carried out in any of the Contractor’s laboratories, to inspect
equipment or to study results.
(6) Calibration of all instrument shall be got by approved from approved institute.

5.5 MATERIALS DELIVERED TO SITE

(1) The Contractor’s quality control staff shall keep full records of all materials
delivered to site for use in the Works, and of all tests made on such materials
either prior to or following delivery to site.
(2) These records shall be available at all times to the Engineer-in-charge, together
with any factory testing certification.
34
5.6 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT AND PAYMENT

No separate payment whatsoever shall be made for the QC activities required for
theworks provided by the Contractor and the entire cost thereof shall be deemed
to be included in the quoted price of Scope of Works under the Contract.

35
PLANNING, DESIGN AND ENGINEERING OF CIVIL
WORKS

Planning, design & engineering of works

All civil works viz. planning, design, engineering for the Air-filled rubber dam&
associated works,
a) The general environment to which the concrete will be exposed on project site
during working life is classified as “Moderate” as per sub clause 8.2.2.1 of
clause 8.2.2; exposure condition of IS 456:2000. The various concrete grade of
concrete shall be based on “Moderate” conditions. The grade of concrete shall
not be less than mentioned in tender drawings.
b) The contractor has to carry out all the detailed investigation required if any, for
design & engineering.
C) design of structure is to be done as per applicable Indian standards

NWRWSK&D will not entertain any claim in regard to correctness/inaccuracy of

data provided for reference & bid purpose. Such provided data & drawing is purely
indicative & preliminary in nature.

STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR AIR-FILLED RUBBER

DAM AND ASSOCIATED WORKS

Components of Structures
1) Raft for 280 m long Air-filled Rubber Dam and 105 m long earthen
embankment.
2) Left and RightU/S and D/SRCC RetainingWalls
3) Curtain grouting as Cutoffs
(i) Under the Dam raft on upstream end
(ii) Under the Dam raft on downstream end

36
FIXED ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN

Various Elements of the Employer’s Concept Design have been indicated on

the Concept Drawings and are subjected to change where site conditions
determine otherwise or as per requirement of competent authority for approval of
design and drawings. However, such a change will be subjected to:

 The Contractor providing valid reasons for such a change; and

 The employer’s Representative’s Review and Approval, whose decision shall

be final.

 Minimum dimensions andfixedcriteriaof major civil components of

the . Air-filled Rubber dam shall be as under:

MIN DESIGN CRITERIA & MIN. DIAMENSION TO BE OBSERVED

PART – I (MAIN Dam STRUCTURE AND EMBANKMENTS)
AIR-FILLED RUBBER DAM
1 Crest R.L. Air-filled Rubber Dam 66.00 m
2 Crest R.L. of Earthen Embankment 73.00 m
3 Top R.L. of U/S Floor of Air-filled Rubber Dam 66.00 m
4 Top R.L. of D/S Floor of Air-filled Rubber Dam 64.00 m

5 Bottom R.L. of Longitudinal U/S side cut off

wall of Air-filled Rubber Dam 55.00 m

6 Bottom R.L. of Longitudinal D/S side Cut off

wall of Air-filled Rubber Dam 55.00 m
7 Size of Air-filled Rubber Dam 4 spans of 68.5mL x
2.5m Height each
8 Slope of D/S Glacis of Air-filled Rubber Dam 3:1
9 Width of crest of Air-filled Rubber Dam 8.0 m
10 Width of floor U/S cut off to D/S cut off of Air-
filled Rubber Dam 28.00 m

EARTHEN EMBANKMENT
11 Crest R.L. 73.00 m
37
 12 Width of crest 5.00 m

13 Length of Embankment (Left side) 81.00 m

14 Length of Embankment (Right side) 24.00 m

RETAINING WALLS (ABUTMENT)

15 R.L. of Top of Wall (U/S) (+) 73.00 m

16 R.L. of Top of Wall (D/S) (+) 71.00 m

17 Top with of Retaining Wall 2.00 m
18 Maximum Height of Retaining Wall (U/S) 11.80 m
19 Maximum Height of Retaining Wall (DS) 9.80 m
20 Maximum Width of Bottom wall 11.44 m
CONTROL ROOM
21 Type of structure Frame

22 Size of Control Room 20m x 10m

23 Thickness of wall (brick) 230mm

24 Height of control room 4.25 m

25 Slab thickness 150 mm

26 Column Size 450x450mm

27 Door 1.5x2.1m

28 Window (11Nos.) 1.2x1.5 m

GTS/GIS Benchmark /nearby Railway Station shall be considered as RL references.

38
DESIGN CRITERIA
a) Raft Design
The structure shall be designed for 100 years flood discharge. The design must
fulfil the criteria of safety against uplift and exit gradient.
As per relevant provision of applicable IS : 6966
b) Rubberdam Design

i. Design Code: Japanese Code 2000: Design of rubber bladder

ii. Media to Inflate: The Dam will inflate with air; no other media such as water or
combination of air and water is allowed.
iii. Design and Manufacturing conditions:
a) Water pressure corresponding of head between Average Bed level & Pond
level.
b) Overtopping of 20% of height of rubber-dam shall be allowed.
c) Operating ambient air temperature: -30 to +50°C
d) Rubber dam in deflated condition in case of maximum flood discharge.
iv. Rubber dam design shall be derived or based on Japanese Rubber dam Design
version 2000
v. Technology to show early warning of Rubber cover abrasion before water
penetration to first layer of reinforcement fabric.
vi. The rubber dam shall be designed as a single vulcanized, non-jointed Rubber
bladder system. Vulcanizing hot press shall be no less than 10 meters in length.
Composition of Rubber bladder must contain only EPDM. Use of CR and/or
SBR use is not allowed.
vii. Each single reinforcement fabric used, and horizontal/vertical tensile strength of
fabric must not differentiate more than 10 percent.
viii. Design the Dam to operate either fully inflated or partially deflated for extended
periods of over- topping without significant oscillation or wear.

39
ix. When fully deflated, the fabric must not present bulges or high points which
may be subject to damage.
x. Design rubber bladder fabric with a factor of safety of eight (FS = 8) under
normal operating conditions. Design the gate panels for adequate robustness to
resist bed load passage without damage.
xi. Dam operating times for full travel (fully inflated to fully deflated or vise-
versa):

a) Inflate in no more than sixty (60) minutes.

b) Deflate less than 60 minutes.

xii. Anchoring and clamping system
a) Design to permanently anchor the rubber dam body to the concrete
foundation.
b) Dual Anchoring system for prevention of back-drafted water.
c) Detail the anchorages in a manner that will allow reinforcement of primary
and secondary concrete without interference.
d) Design the anchoring system for maximum reliability, air tightness, and
ease of installation.
e) Design of the anchorages to permit easy unclamping and re-clamping of
the Dam bladder without damage to the fabric.

c) RCC retaining Wall

On both the sides of the Air-filled Rubber Dam, R.C.C. abutment walls
are provided both on upstream and downstream.Walls shall be designed as
earth retaining structures. Worst combination of forces such as dead
loads,
earth load, earth pressure, surcharge load, water pressure, earthquake
inertia forces including hydrodynamic force etc. as given in IS: 11130 and
other relevant applicable Indian Standards shall be taken into account. The
wall shall be designed either as counter fort RCC wall (as provided in the
40
 tender drawings) or as a cantilever retaining wall. The
safety of thewalls shall be checked against safe bearing load, sliding
and overturning as per IS:11130. The allowable bearing load shall be
adopted from field and laboratory tests as per standard procedure.
Settlement
criteria shall conform to IS:1904.

METHODOLOGY FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL OF DESIGN

DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall carry out the design of the structures in two stages i.e.
Level-1 Design: Final Conceptual Design and Level-2 Design: Construction
Design.

The Level-1 design shall be submitted to the Employer for approval within 01
(One) months after commencement date. The Level-2 design shall be
submitted to the Employer for approval 01 (One) months in advance of the
start of the said construction activity.

Drawings and documentation shall be prepared by electronic means, with

software brands and models agreed to between the Employer and the
Contractor. The Parties shall take into consideration, in the definition of the
applicable software, both for texts and graphics, that all parties involved in the
designand construction of the Works, should have unrestricted access, as far as
technology is concerned, to the information produced. The selected
limitation of access to specific information shall be made only by means of
passwords or codification.

The submission of documentation for approval, as well as all transfer of

information between parties shall be carried out by electronic means in order to
save time, but for contractual and other legal requirements / purpose paper
printed documentation is to be exchanged.

The contractor shall have to got vetted the design & drawings from IIT or any

41
other institute decided and directed by engineer-in-charge at his cost.

The contractor shall submit to the Employer for review/approval, all drawings
and documents prepared in accordance with the rules and procedures stated
hereafter. The Employers shall give his approval/comments on all design and
drawings, properly referred to him. the contractor shall not start the actual
construction prior to approval by the Employer.

ShouldtheContractorstartworkwithouthavinghandedover specifications and

drawings and should it be ascertained that such works are not in compliance with
Employer’s Requirements, then this should be treated as a "non-conformity" by
the Employer or it representative. Treatment of the non-conformity, depending
on the seriousness of the issue, may imply rejection of payment, or demolition
and/or specific corrective works to be performed before final acceptance.

In case the Employer has any comments on such documents, he shall inform the
contractor of the sameand Technical discussions shall, if required, be held
thereafter without delay to Finalize the drawings and shall proceed ahead with
the works approved drawings

The Contractor may make minor alterations to designs during the course of
construction as may be necessary or expedient, under prior intimation to the
Employer.Iferrors,omissions,ambiguities,inconsistencies, adequacies or
otherdefectsarefoundinthedesignanddrawings submitted by the
Contractor.Thesedocumentsandtheworkshallbecorrectedatthe Contractor’s
cost notwithstanding any consent or approval thereof by the
Employer/Engineer.

In the event of difference in opinion regarding any particular subject, all efforts
will be carried out in order to reach compromise. In any case the Contract
specifications and definitions and the criteria of these Employer’s Requirement
shall serve as reference for the implementation of any of the design features.

If,as the outcome of the inspection, the Employer articulates any

comments or observation on inspected documents, the Contractor will have
42
 to either acceptthe observations and modify the design accordingly or justify
thereasonsforthenon-acceptanceoftheproposed modifications.

The Contractor shall be fully responsibility for all aspects of the design,
procurement, construction and commissioning of the works.

Data contained in the Basic Design may be subject to changes that are deemed
suitable for the improvement and completion of the Project in accordance with
these Requirements.

The Contractor shall inform the Employer about the soft wares to be used for
analysis and design.

Level 1 Design
Layout &Drawings
The Level 1 Design shall include all the elements required for a full
understanding by the Employer or the Employer’s Representative of the key
features proposed, such as:

• General arrangement and layout of the Project Structures;

• Design of the Civil Structures i.e. Dam raft, Abutment walls,etc.
• Preliminary Design of the Air-filled Rubber Gates of Dam etc,

Reports

TheReportsrelatedtoLevel 1Designshallincludeallcalculations and studies

required to justify and support the proposed technical solutions. They shall
include:

• Geo-technical investigation Report

• Construction material survey Report

• Report of field and laboratory investigations performed.

43
 • Designcriteria,standardsanddesigncodesproposedforthe
development of the detailed design (Level 2);

Program and Other Documents (Overall Planning Report)

As part of the Level-1 Design, the Contractor shall also submit:

• Adetailedworkprogramincludingmicrolevelplanningand
interfaces/dependenciesbetweenvariousjobs/worksofvarious
phasesofthewholeprojectimplementationincludingdesign, material
supply, manufacture, delivery ,erection and commissioning.

• Any other technical documents to be submitted withinaccording to the

Contract.
Aftercompletion of the Level-1 Design the Contractor shall prepare a list
andatimescheduleforpreparationforthesubmissionofthe
ConstructionandManufacturingDesigndocuments.However,the contractor
can also start the level 2 designs within level 1 also.

Level 2 Design
The review/approval performed by the Employer at “Level 2” intends to
verifythattheConstructionandManufacturingdesigndocuments correspond to
the design solutions formulated during Level 1 Design.

In this regard the Contractor shall submit duly vetted design & drawings from
IIT/institute as directed by EIC for approval, the general arrangement
drawings, and relevant specifications and calculations of all components
forming part of the Works, i.e. all the documents (construction drawings,
Manufacture quality assurance and inspection plan and field quality
assurance and inspection plan, construction and erection method
statements, commissioning and testing procedures, etc.) required by the
Contractor to construct, erect and commission all the components of the
Permanent Works.

1)Civil Works
44
Submissions to the Employer’s Representative duly vetted design &
drawings for approval and comment related to the Level 2 Designinclude,
but not limited to the following (as applicable):

 Detailed Design Memos/Calculations.

 DetaileddrawingexcavationstogetherwithDetailedConcreteoutline
drawings, showing all dimensions, lifts, first and second stage
concrete, contraction and construction joints, classes of concrete and
finishing, etc.
 Detailed formwork drawing.
Concretereinforcementdrawings,showingbarsdiameters,and spacing,
supported by the necessary structural analyses and by the equipment
design data which may be necessary to check the loads and design
criteria applied.
Arrangement and details of embedded parts (water stops, piping
systems, conduits, embedded parts for equipment erection etc.).
ManufacturingQualityassuranceandinspectionplanandfieldquality
assurance and inspection plan
 Detailedmethodstatementsforallcivilconstructionactivities;and other
detailed design drawings and documents that the Employer’s may
require.

Notwithstanding any Employer’s review/approval and comment, the

Contractor shall be fully responsible for the correctness of the detailed
drawings, method statements etc. of the civil works, particularly in relationto
the loads, dimensions, embedded parts, and any other interface with the
equipment.

Any other drawing, calculation note and design document that the
Contractor may deem necessary for his own use, such as reinforcing bars
bendingschedules,materialslists,etc.shall be submitted to the Employer’s
Representative for its information.

45
 Method Statements

During the course of execution, the contractor shall submit to the

Employer, in triplicate, the updatedmethod statements for execution of all
important items of work, during excavation phase, concreting phase
including procedure and compliance documents for review/approval.
These method statements shall on one hand be consistent with drawings and
technical specifications and on the other hand take in to account all the
applicable site conditions. These method statements shall include the need of
specialized inputs required for successful execution of particular
structure.Notwithstanding anyreview/approvalcarriedoutbythe Employer,
the Contractor shall accept full responsibility for all aspects of the design,
procurement, construction and commissioning of the Permanent Works.

Air-filled Rubber Gate Works

•DetailedDesignMemos/Calculations
•CalculationscarriedoutfordeterminingtheRubber
bladderthicknesses,the
embeddedandotherstructuralcharacteristicsofthegateworks,clearly
indicating the principles on which calculations are based.
•Detailed drawings
•Generalarrangementandassemblydrawings,sufficientsub-assembly
drawings and details to demonstrate that all parts will conform to the
provisions and intent of the Contract and to the requirements of their
installationandmaintenance.Thesedrawingsshallshowallnecessary
dimensions and sub-assemblies in which the Contractor proposes to fabricate
and transport the steel elements.
•Other detailed design drawings and documents that the Employer may
require.
•Method statements
•ManufacturingQualityassuranceandinspectionplanandfieldquality
assurance and inspection plan
•O&M Manuals of the manufacturers
•Site storage manuals
46
 •Erection,testing and commissioning procedures with all erection
drawings
3)Electrical works

Within the scope of the Level 2 design of the Electric works, the Contractor
shall submit the following documents (but not restricted to) to the
Employer for it review/approval and comment, according to the Detailed
Program Schedule and in accordance with the Contractor’s Work schedule
to meet the Time for Completion.

•Preliminary material specifications for all main components.

•Standard literature and brochures;
•Summarytableoftheratingsoftheswitchboardsand with appropriate
design calculations;
•Final dimensioned drawings of all embedded parts;
•Calculations for the dimensioning of the earthling system
•Preliminary drawings embedded parts;
•Method Statements for erection and installation procedures;
•Preliminarywiringdiagramsandarrangementsoftheelectrical works.
•Preliminary cabling schedules and termination diagrams
1.6 PAYMENT

No separate payment will be made for Planning, Design & Engineering of Civil
Works including air filled rubber dam described under this section and the entire
cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the quoted price of Scope of Works
under the Contract with the duly vetted design & drawings from IIT/other
institute as directed/decided bt Engineer-in-charge

47
 SURVEY AND INVESTIGATION
Carrying out Survey and Investigation & Laboratory testing of the samples collected from
the dam area,of air filled rubber dam at pathakwadi village ta. Dilvan

SCOPE OF THE WORK

(1) Topographic Survey of the entire dam area, catchment area covering all the
components of the project, any other area directed by
Engineer in Charge with a contour interval of 1.0 meters and x Section at
every 30 m with proper scale
(2) Reservoir Area Survey To ascertain the storage capacity of the reservoir, at
different levels, Submerged area at FRL and HFLandthe topographic survey
starting from dam to tail of reservoir with a contour interval of 1.0 meters and in
the scale of 1:2000 and x sections at every 200 meters.
(3) Confirmatory Geo Technical Investigations: -
The EPC agency shall carry out detailed geotechnical investigationfor the air
filled rubber dam and associated structures as per following: -

•Bore holes for standard penetration test and sampling will be conducted for air
filled rubber damand associatedstructuresSPT will be conducted in the borehole at
appropriate interval along the depth.
•While drilling, undisturbed soil samples (UDS) will be collected at regular
interval for detailed laboratory testing. The expected sample size is 70 mm
diameter and about 350 mm long below that depth. The sample size in case of
rock can be reduced to 38 mm diameter and 150 mm long.
•Field permeability tests will be carried out at all the boreholes at the Dam
location.. These depths will be decided based on the field test data from initial two
boreholes at Dam location.

These investigation shall be conducted by engaging one or more of recognized

geotechnical agencies, for field and laboratory testing. The routine supervision of
field testing shall be done by contractor, besides collecting some samples
randomly for internal confirmations. Contractor shall get it analyzed. The

48
 geotechnical investigation reports and other available data to interpret the
results for parameters to be used in design.
(4) From the data collected from the bore holes the following STP tests shall be
carried out
•Grain size distribution of soil.
•Properties of soil- Saturated density, Moist Density, C, Ø etc.
•Modulus of subgrade reaction - for dam bays, navigation lock and fish pass.
•Sieve analysis Hydrometer analysis
•Atterberg Limits, Natural moisture contents and insitu density
•Specific Gravity, Swell pressure and free swell index
•Unconsolidated undrained triaxial test , Consolidated undrained triaxial test
with measurements of pore pressure
•Chemical analysis ,SPT/DCPT , ,Liquefaction Test

PAYMENT FOR SURVEY AND INVESTIGATION

No separate payment will be made for Survey and Investigation Works described
in this Section and the entire cost shall be deemed to be included in the quoted
price of Scope of Works under the Contract.

49
 A. WORK AND SITE CONDITION
Name of Work:Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For Construction of Air-
filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village Pathakavadi, Ta.Dolvan, Dist.
Tapi.

1.0 INTRODUCTION:
GENERALFEATURES OF THE PROJECT:
Govt. has decided to construct Hydraulic structures on major rivers / big kotars&
khadi for harvesting fair weather flow of river /kotars. Accordingly, it is proposed to
construct Air-filled Rubber Dam in Dolvan taluka of Tapidistrict.
The work under this tender includes the work of Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (EPC) Work For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC)
Work For Construction of Air-filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village
Pathakavadi, Ta.Dolvan, Dist. Tapi.

2.0 LOCATION
The proposed Hydraulic Structure is to be constructed on AmbikaRiver in
Dolvantaluka. This HydralicStucture is in scattered in taluka and interior site.For visiting
the site contact to Deputy Executive Engineer, Ver Project Sub Dn. No. ,Vyara.

3.0 COMMUNICATION
The nearest place for ordinary marketing is Unai and Dolvan which is about 10 to
15 km. from proposed site. The site is connected by M.D.R./O.D.Ris about 5km.away
from the proposed site.

4.0 DETAILS OF SOURCES OF MATERIALS ARE AS UNDER:

Sr. Name of Materials Sources Approximate
No. distance from
the site of work
1. Metal Songadh (Dist. Tapi) 50 K.M.
Dolvan(Dist.Tapi) 10 K.M.
2. Sand Tapi river 60 K.M.

50
 The above information is given in good faith and for general guidance to contractor.
The contractor shall however ensure and satisfy himself regarding all aspects viz.
the site condition, source and availability of required quantity of material including
available service etc.

5.0. Brief description of the work :-

These works are to be carried out under jurisdiction of Executive Engineer,
Ver-II Project Division, VyaraPhone no. 02626-222090Fax 02626-222090. The
work under the contract, Specification & drawing consists,Details of item of
work to be executed under the tender include the following main items.The
main work consist of Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work
For Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For
Construction of Air-filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village
Pathakavadi, Ta.Dolvan, Dist. Tapi.
(a) Care & diversion of River/drain
(b) Excavation in soil, soft rock, hard rock and Preperation of foundation
(c) Earthwork in Embankment and Backfilling Foundation Trenches using selected
soil
(d) Positioning of reinforcement bars and Providing and laying M-15And M-25
grade of Concrete in Various Parts of Dam
(e) Designing, Providing and Installing air inflated Rubber Dam and its Neccesary
components.
(f) Providing Geomembrane for Earthen Portion
(g) Placing of PVC heavy-duty water stoppers
(h) Providing sign/Data board
(i) Drilling of holes and grouting the strata with specified grout
(j) Drilling exploratory bore holes
(k) Drilling of holes and positioning anchor bars.
(l) Supplying flexible Gabbion of Size 1X1X 0.60 Mt.
(m) Dismentling existing RCC Work.
(n) Constructing Control room for operation of dam

6.0. Labour :Unskilled labour will be available nearby the site of work. All skilled,
semi-skilled and unskilled labour will have to be brought from outside.
51
7.0. Housing Accommodation :
No housing accommodation is available at the site. Godown or storage facilities are
not available at the site and the department will not be in a position to provide such
facilities at the site. The contractor shall have to make such arrangement for the
work at his own risk and cost if found necessary.
8.0. Material to be used :
In the proposed work Materials like Cement, Sand, Coarse Agreegate, Steel, Metal,
Rubble, Bricks, PVC heavyduty water stopper, PVC Pipe, NP3 RCC Pipe, G.I Pipe,
MS Steel, White Wash, B.T Stone etc. are to be used.
9.0.Water Supply:
Potable water will be available in nearby villages. Contractor shall have to make
their own arrangement for drinking water supply and for the construction purpose
on the site of work.
10. The information and data mentioned herein above as well as shown or given in
the various drawings accompanying the tender documents are for general
information only. The department shall have no responsibility in respect of accuracy
of these informations, interpretation and conclusions drawn by the contractor in so
far as the in formations/data are concerned. The contractor shall have to make their
own investigations to satisfy themselves in regard to in informations/data given
herein above.
11. It shall be deemed that the contractors have satisfied themselves as to the nature and
pertaining to transport, handling and availability and storage of materials,
availability of labour, weather condition, at site and that the tenderer has estimated
his cost accordingly and the department will bear no responsibility for any of such
knowledge of site conditions and consequences thereof.
12. Roads :
The contractor shall construct and maintain suitable inspection path or vehicle road
in the work limit. Any haul or approach roads if necessary for the contractor's work
shall be constructed/removed, if necessary, at his own cost. There will, however, be
no charge of any reasonable use of any road constructed by Government.
13. Electric Power:
The contractor shall have to make their own arrangements for getting power supply.
If any difficulty is experienced in getting the power, the department may help in
setting the difficulty to the extent possible without any obligation on the part of the
department on this issue. The power supply is available nearby the site.
52
14. Observation of forest:
During the construction period, the laborers and other persons employed by the
contractor agencies shall strictly observe the following requirements: -
(a) Shall not possess or make use of any sorts of weapons (gun, spears etc.)
explosive etc. and also shall not engage in hunting animals either for their flesh
or for their bites.
(b) Shall not fall or break the trees for use as fire wood.
(c) Purchase all the requirement of fire wood from authorized fire wood depots run
by the forest department.
15. Medical Aid:
A dispensary is not available at the site. The contractor shall make his own
arrangement for normal medical aid to their staff and labour. Serious cases have to
be sent to Civil and other Hospital at andVyara.
The contractor shall also provide at his own cost first aid arrangement at various
work spots in accordance with the labour rules and regulations and as may be
directed by the Engineer.
16. Post &Telegraph :
There is Sub Post and Telegraph office at 5 km at Unai&10KMat Dolvan. No
telephone facility is available at the work site.
17. Supply of Petrol &Diesel :
At present there is no such facility available for petrol and diesel at the work site.
But this facility is available at 5 KM of Unai.

53
 B. SPECIAL CONDITION

Name of Work: Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For

Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For Construction of Air-
filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village Pathakavadi, Ta.Dolvan, Dist.
Tapi.

1.0 The said work of Dam is a specialized work as it is to be executed on Ambika River.
There is a considerable flow in the river up to Novemnber-December and there after
the flow of water is nominal. This is for information only. The contractor shall have
to make its own inquiary and assessment regarding the flow in the river till next
June month. The time limit of the said work is 18 (Eighteen) months. Hence the
contractor shall have to complete the work within a stipulated time limit. The
contractor shall have to plan accordingly and mobilize sufficient machinery,
manpower and material. Bidders are requested to have site visit before bid
submission.

2.0 The concrete for the construction of Air-filled Rubber dam shall be manufactured
using the automatic Batching mixing plant. The plant should have an auto
measuring facility of different ingredients used for producing concrete on weight
basis and have facility of printing the batching of concrete. Ordinary mixer with
weigh batcher/Fiory mix shall not be allowed.

3.0 The work is specialised work as it shall be performed on Ambika River

which has maximum intensity of flood during monsoon season, so contractor
is strictly instructed to make site visit before quoting the rate.

4.0 ACCURACY OF LINES, LEVELS AND GRADES :

The various works shall be done true to line and grade. The periodical checking of
these by the Government staff shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility
regarding the accuracy. In case of any deviation or discrepancy in line, level or
grade at the meeting faces, the contractor shall make good the discrepancy at his
own cost and without any extra compensation for the additional work involved.
Whenever such discrepancy is found to arise at the junction of works of different
contractors, the responsibility to set right such discrepancy lies with the contractor
concerned. The Engineer shall further have the unquestioned right if need be to
54
 rectify the discrepancies and recover the costs from the contractor or contractors
according to proportion as they may consider reasonable.

5.0 TESTING OF MATERIALS AND WORKS :

5.1 All methods or procedures for execution of different items of the work and for
testing of the materials etc. shall conform to Indian standard specifications or its
latest edition unless otherwise specified.The provision of these I.S. shall be
applicable for the materials testing and for the work irrespective of whether the
same is specified in specification or else where in the tender documents.
(a) All materials before being incorporated in the work shall be inspected and if
necessary tested before being approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

The testing of the materials including concrete mix design which are to be
used in this works shall be carried out in the Government Laboratory /Govt.
Engineering College.
The samples of sand,metal, cement, water or any other materials, labours
required shall be supplied by the contractor free of cost.
The contractor shall provide and extend all facilities and co-operation
towards, collection of samples, transportation of samples to the laboratory & Govt.
Engineering College without any extra cost.
Any additional tests required to be carried out at any stage of the work as per
instruction of Engineer-in-charge shall be carried out at the Govt. lab / Govt.
Engineering College.
(b) The day to day and periodical tests to be carried out on materials mixedand placed
concrete shall be as per test schedule. The contractor shall provideall facilities, co-
operation, all labour, transport etc. for collecting samples to be tested.
An authorize representative of the contractor shall remain present at the time
when the samples are taken and shall authenticate the facts if contractor’s agent fail
to be present as aforesaid the sample taken by the Engineer-in-charge of his
representative shall be considered to be authentic. The contractor will however be
informed of the details of such samples having been taken.
(c ) The materials, mixes etc. shall be tested day to day or periodically at the
Government laboratory/ Govt. Engineering College. set up at the site of work and
near by regional established Govt. Lab. And the results given thereby shall be
consided correct and authentic. The contractor shall be given access to all
operational tests that may be carried out as aforesaid so that he may satisfy himself
regarding the procedure and methods adopted. It shall then be the contractor’s
responsibility to carry out the finished items to the standards based on the
laboratory designs and tests.
55
(d) The method of sampling and testing and the procedures standard shall be as laid
down in the test schedule.

6.0 LOAN OF GOVERNMENT TOOLS & PLANTS & MACHINERY

No machinery or any tools and plants articles are at present available with
the department. However, the machinery and tools and plants as and where
available with the department shall be supplied as per rules and regulations as per
the provisions contained in Government P.W.D.’s G.R.No. MCN/167/(97) part-
IV/H dated. 1.10.80 and as amended from time to time, it must be also noted that
machinery or equipment actually justified for use in the work and available with
the department will be given on hire. No claims for delay in procurements of such
machinery or equipment will be entertained.

7.0 SECURITY MEASURES :

In view of the strategic importance of all the projects and installations security
restriction may be imposed by the Engineer as per directions of the security
authorities and the contractor shall abide by all such instructions scrupulously. In
case a system of identity cards is introduced the contractor shall at his cost provide
for his person all such identity cards with photos, if necessary and get those duly
signed by the Engineer or his duly authorized representative. The contractor shall
also keep the Engineer in formed regarding all visitors and obtain proper permits
for their visits. No unauthorized visitors will be allowed on work site.

8.0 APPLICABILITY OF SPECIFICATION:

Considering the common and general items required in execution of
irrigation project, general subject wise specifications has been drawn and provided
separately with the tender. This provisions suitably provides requirements of
execution of each component of work in general, consistent with the present
practice of the scope of work and mode of execution and standards to be observed
etc. for the work financial limitation as regards to the admissibility of work
payment and acceptance of work against the tender requirement etc. is described.
To avoid descriptive matter suitable reference for the relevant Indian standards or
otherwise is also specified. The whole idea is to guide the tender regarding the
execution of work so as to base his rates accordingly. The general subject wise
specifications are further supplemented in separate chapter to cover the items wise
specification of work as per the BillofQuantitiesof the tender. These item-wise
specifications will cover the applicable provision of the general specifications
considering the item description as per BillofQuantitiesover and above this, the
56
 specific qualification of each item such as applicable leads, lifts, proportion of the
mix, description about the execution of the item, in detail and other applicable
aspects will be covered in such specification. Intending tenders are therefore
requested to read the tender papers on above lines and quote their rates.

9.0 PLANNING SCHEDULE OF WORK AND DELAY IN PAYMENT

9.1 The contractor shall submit detail planning schedule of work to complete the entire
work under the scope of this contract in prescribed time limit within 21 days from
the issue of Letter of Acceptance to Engineer –in-charge invariably. He shall
strictly adhere to the submitted planning else penalty will be imposed for delay as
per clause - 49 of condition of contract.No first payment will be released till
aforesaid written planning schedule is furnished.
9.2 There may be delay in payment for the works executed by the agency for want of
grant for the same; the contractor shall be bound to bear such delay without any
claim in this regard.

10.0 Recovery of rock

10.1 The hard rock quantity available from foundation excavation, shall be stacked in
the proper manner and propoer place as directed by the Engineer-i-charge. The the
amount at the rate of Prevailing S.O.R i.e.Rs. 211 per cubic meter for the quantity
of hard rock available from excavation shall be recovered from contractor in
running bill.
10.2 Royalty:
The contractoe shall heve to pay the as per prevailing norms and receipt of the
same shall be submitted to Engineer – in – charge.

11.0 Change in design and drawing

The drawings given with tender documents are on present available data.
However, during execution of work any change in design/drawing shall not vitiates
the contract and no extra payment shall be made to the contractor.
The increase or decrease in quantities under the relevant item on account of above
changes shall be paid only at the tender rate of the relevant items for increase in
quantities up to 10% of the tendered quantities and beyond 10 % increase, the
excess quantity shall be paid at approved tender rate or approved prevailing SOR
rate at the time of execution of work which ever is less..

12.0 RECOVERIES:
57
 Deductions from running account bill on account of the following items
shall be made to the extent mentioned against each item.
(i) Security Deposit at stipulated rates.
(ii) Penalty if any in full.
(iii) Expenditure incurred by Government on behalf of the contractor in full.
(iv) Hire charge to plant and equipment in full.
(v) Other recoveries in full.
(vi) Income-tax deductions.
(vii) Testing Charges.
(viii) LabourCess.
(IX) GST

13.0 There may be delay in payment for the works executed by the agency for want of
grant for the same; the contractor shall be bound to bear such delay without any
claim in this regard.

14.0 Time limit for the work is only 18 (Eighteen) Months Contractor shall strictly
made progress as per work Planning.The Contractor shall have to submit the
work completion plan and got approved from Engineer – in – charge.
15.0 As per clause-34.2 of agreement,
1. Site laboratories with temperature control and humidity control will be
established by the contractor and samples for tests as well as facilities for
testing will be provided by the contractor.
2. Frequency of tests will be decided by the Engineer in charge, if the same is not
indicated in the specifications or in the schedule of testing.
3. The tests which cannot be done in Site Laboratories / Manufacturing unit will
be carried out in the approved Laboratories or G.E.R.I. Laboratories.
4. The Laboratories testing charges will be borne or paid or recovered from the
contractor. No further testing charges on adhoc or percentage basis will be
recovered from the contractor.”
(As Per GoG NWRWS & K Department’s Circular No.
PARCH/132023/401/MICELL Dated:05/10/2023 )
All the test charges shall be borne by the contractor. If the testing will be offered
at the manufacturer lab/unit, the contractor has to make necessary arrangements
including transportation of the officers at his cost.

16.0 The foundation of the body wall of dam, side wall & apron shall be get checked by
the Executive Engineer in charge. The concrete of the body wall of Dam, side wall &
apron shall be started only after foundation approved by the Executive Engineer in
charge.
58
17.0 After visit of the work, if required, the Executive Engineer in charge shall order to
take Core Samples of the concrete & get it tested from
GERI/Govt.EngineeringCollege. After getting the test results of the core samples, the
remaining payment of concrete will be released. The Contractor has to be Carried out
Core Samples & these Charges Shall be Born by the contractor for which no payment
will be made by Department.

18.0 Mix Design to be Carried out at GERI/GOVT. Engineering College& Mix Design
Charge Born by Government Department.

19.0 PAYMENT OF SECURITY DEPOSIT

Contractor shall have to pay security deposit within prescribed time limit as specified
in clause-34 of ITB of Standard Bidding Documnets. In no case, period for paying
security deposit shall be extended and in such case tender/ contract already shall be
considered as cancelled and Bid Security of contractor shall be forfeited.An adverse
note to that effect in the confidential report of contractor shall be made under
intimation to registration authority for cancellation of registration.

20.0 Signboard:-
The Government of Gujarat, Sachivalaya, Gandhinagar, vide its circular of Narmada
water resources water supply and kalpasardeptt. No.MICELL-102010-17-(2)-k-1,
Dt.29-1-11 has stated that the contractor shall provide signboard at the site of work at
his own cost & expenses. The sign board shall display all necessary details of the
work as well as address, phone number, fax number of concerned Executive
Engineer. The contractor shall have to, at his own cost and expense, fix the board at
the site of work and shall inform and produce the photograph of the board to the
concerned Dy.Ex.Engr. and Executive Engineer. In case the above work is not done
by the contractor, a sum as fixed by the Executive Engineer shall be kept withheld
from the R.A.bill payable to the contractor and kept till the said work is completed by
the contractor.

21.0Testing: -
To execute work as per quality control criteria as specified in tender and as directed
by Executive Engineer during execution is the responsibility of contractor. So,
contractor shall have to establish its own quality control setup of skilled technical
staff which maintains required registers of testing of all materials, concrete mix and
other items under scope of tender.
Contractor shall have to establish field laboratory at work site for testing of materials
and field tests etc. with required equipments.
59
 22.0 Photography and Videography: -
Contractor shall have to carry out Photography and Videography of the work of all
stages and contractor shall have to submit 2 sets of photographs and video graphs in
soft and hard copy during Running bill and final bill.
If bidder dose not complete work of require quality as per tender specification within time
limit and also not attend the damage occurs during defect liabilities period of 3 years,
the total cost of restoration shall be recovered from the contractor. If contractor does
not pay the above cost of restoration, same will be recovered as revenue arrears as land
revenue act provision. This loss will be recovered over and above liquidity damage
recovered as per clause-49 of Conditions of Contract.
23.0 The time limits of this work is 18 Months from date of work order, the Contractor
shall have to submit planning of works for items related to Foundation excavation,
Concrete work for above work with time period available for works. Milestone dates
in Contract data will be considered with reference to time limit.

24.0All bidders have to visit the site before quoting the tender. All the bidders shall
have to make their own assessment for different resources available for
construction and approaches to the site also and accordingly to quote the rates.

25.0 For this work the stipulated time limit for the completion of work is 18 (Eighteen)
months.
26.0 The contractor shall have to submit the complete schedule and programme for
completion of work, well in advance to the Engineer-in-charge and get approved.
27.0 The concrete for the construction of Dam structureshall be produced using the
concrete Automatic Batching mixing plant. The plant should have an auto measuring
facility of different ingredients used for producing concrete on weight basis and
have facility of printing the batching of concrete. Ordinary mixer with weigh batcher

60
 and concrete florimixer machine shall not be allowed. The contractor shall heve to
mobilise sufficient nos. og transit mixers for transportation of concrete.
28.0 The contractor shall have to mobilize sufficient man-power, machinery, material on
work and to complete the workswithin a stipulated time limit.
29.0 The contractor shall have to mobilize sufficient form work (heavy form work: Acro
plates) and machinery and other required resources for this work for time bound
completion of work.
30.0 Award of the work shall be decided by the department considering the contractor’s
bid capacity and capability for completion of work, past performance records (poor
quality of work, delay in completion of work, left the work without completion etc.)
will also be considered for award of work and decision of department for award of
work shall be final and binding to all the bidders. The contractor shall have no any
right to raise the objection against the decision of department.
31.0 The payment for the work executed shall be made as per availability of fund. If the
payment will be delayed due to any reason, the contractor shall have to make his
own arrangement for financial resources for the completion of works awarded to
him within the time limit. Time limit extension will not be granted on account of
delay in payment of executed work.

61
C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1. Technical Specification of Materials

2. General Technical Specification

3. Itemwise Technical specification

62
 1. Technical Specification of Materials
GENERAL :
1. All materials to be used shall conform to I.S. 4031-1988 or the relevant specifications
asper the latest version of Indian standard, unless otherwise stated in the detailed
specifications of items of work.
2. Wherever a reference to any Indian standard appears in the specifications, it shall be
taken to meanas reference to the latest version of the standard.
3. No collection of materials shall be made before it is got approved from the Engineer-
in-charge.
4. Collection of approved materials shall be done at site of workin a systematic manner.
Materials shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration, intrusion of
foreignmatter and to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work.
5. Materials, if rejected by the Engineer-in-Charge shall beimmediately removed within
twenty-four hours of receiving such an information, Engineer-in-Charge disposeoff
such materials in a manneras he chooses and the contractor shall not be entitled to any
compensation for the cost of such materials.
6. Approvalto the samples of variousmaterials given by the Engineer-in-Charge will not
absolve the contractorfrom the responsibility of replacing the defectivematerials
brought on site of materials used in the workfound defective at a later date. The
contractor shall have no claim to any payment to compensation whatsoever on
account of any such materials being rejected by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The contractor shall beresponsiblefor observing the laws, rules, and regulations
imposed under the “MINOR MINERAL ACTS” and such other laws and rules
prescribed by central/state Govt. fromtime to time.

M1: CEMENT
1.1 Only Ordinary Portland Cement of grade 53 shall be used conforming to I.S. 12269 -
1987 or it’s latest version for the entire work under the tender in all respects and shall
be procured in bag. The contractor shall have to make his own arrangement to procure
the cement (bearing I.S.I. mark & which Cement brand / Company should be
approved by department) directly from the manufacturer / authorized Dealer of
Cement Company. The contractor shall arrange a suitable & adequate infrastructure
for procuring, conveying with loading & unloading and proper storing the same to the
site of work at his own cost with sufficient quantity for advance planning of work to
be done in next fifteen days as approved by the Engineer-in-charge of the work, so

63
 that Deptt. shall be conduct minimum required test to ascertain its quality. For
verification of such purchase, the contractor shall have to produce all the bills of
manufacturer / authorized dealer’s along with testing details (i.e. manufacturer’s test
result conducted in the it’s Q.C. laboratory for each batch of cement which is brought
to the work site) to the Engineer- in-charge of the work, so that works can be allowed
if manufacturer’s lab. Resultare found OK till the receiving of test results from
approved lab of Deptt.
1.2 All cement shall be stored in dry, water tight stored shade, facilities to protect cement
from dampness & properly ventilated structure. In case of storage of cement bag, the
floor on which cement is to be stored shall be raised at least 30cm. above ground level
& the bags shall not be piled more than 10bags height and shall be arranged in
headers & stretches fashion as close as possible. The Contractor shall be responsible
for proper storage of cement and if any damage or deterioration there in, shall be
responsible for the change or removed at his own cost.
Cement should be used in the work, in order of receipt to the store/ site, for this
purpose, such consignment it arrives should be stacked separately and play card
barring the date of arrival should be pinned to the pile. The arrangement of storage
and utilization shall be such that to ensure the utilization of the cement in order of its
arrival at the storage and the contractor shall maintain updated record which would at
any time show the date of receipt and proposed utilization of cement laying in the
store at the site.
The contractor shall provide a double locking arrangement for the store and the key of
one lock will remain with the Engineer-in-charge of the work or his authorized. The
Engineer-in-charge shall any time have an easy access to the store and the site of the
work for checking. The Engineer-in-charge or his authorized shall have authority to
check and examine the method of storage, records, accounting and security provided
by the contractor. The Contractor shall produce the proof by way of record, books,
return, Performa etc. maintain by his staff on site, on demand from Engineer-in-
charge of the work or his authorized and the contractor shall at all time keep this
records update to enable to Engineer-in-charge of the work or his authorized to apply
the check may desire to impose.
1.3 The cement brought by the contractor at the site, department shall be sampled as per
I.S. 3535 (or latest version of I.S.) & sent it in approved lab. of Deptt. for testing as
per I.S. 4031, 4032 (or latest version of I.S.). The contractor shall made arrangement
for sampling work & it’s submitted to the Government Laboratory or Govt. approved
64
 laboratory at his own cost. The testing shall be done for each consignment received at
the site. The cement consignment shall be more than 50 tons or part thereof; each
consignment shall be stacked separately.
1.4 The cement not satisfying the criteria as per I.S. 12269 for grade 53 and IS 1489 shall
be rejected and such stack of cement shall be removed immediately from the site of
work. No extra cost either for testing or for rejected cement shall not paid to the
contractor. No cement shall be used for the work without being tested and such work
shall not be paid by the Engineer-in-charge and shall be removed at contractor’s own
cost. The results of the cement should be submitted by the contractor as and when
required by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized. Manufactures result as per lot of
manufacturing will also have to be submitted.
1.5 A regular day to day account of cement received and consumed / used in the work,
together with the particulars tender item & quantity of each of the work shall be
maintained in ink by the responsible representative of the department and shall be
signed both i.e. by the departmental representative as well as the contractor, after
proper verification at the end of the day’s work. The accounting shall be shown to the
inspecting officer when asked for. The Engineer-in-charge of the work or his
authorized shall have the authority to verify the stock and check on the consumption
in any manner he thinks proper. The volume of one bag cement weight 50kg shall be
considered as 0.0342cum. for mixing in concrete
1.6 Frequency for Cement testing shall as under.
Weight of lot / batch (in tonne) No. of Sample to be taken
Up to 50 1
51 to 100 2
101 to 200 3
201 to 300 4
301 to 500 5
501 to 1000 6
1000 to 1300 7

Physical / chemical properties of cement shall confirm to IS 3535-1986 or its latest

version.

The contractor shall have to procure cement directly from the large-scale
manufacturer main producer or authorized dealer which shall confirm I.S.I. The
65
cement so purchased only shall be permitted to be used. The contractor shall
provide satisfactory evidence to the Engineer-in-Charge in support of such
purchase.

The cement after it is brought on sight (store) by the contractor, can only be allowed
to use after obtaining necessary certificate of the test from any Government
approved Laboratory/Institute about its suitability for the use on the concerned
works. The contractor shall produce/ submit the laboratory test results of cement
samples as prescribed in I.S. 12269-(1987) & I. S. 4031-1999. Manufactures
result as per lot of manufacturing will also have to be submitted. The contractor
shall collect the required samples from the cement bags brought on site or work in
the presence of Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised supervisory staff of the
department, each sample shall be of 15kg by weight. The number or sample shall be
taken as prescribed in IS 269-1976 & 4031-1968 or as revised from time to time.
The cement brought on site of work shall be utilised within six months from the
date of manufacturing. The quality of cement which does not confirm to the
requirement of I.S. standard shall have to be removed from the site of work at the
risk and cost of contractor.

The cement to be used shall be O.P.C as per I.S.12269-1987. Each bag of cement
shall contain full quantity of 50 kg. The contractor shall take every precaution to
store the cement properly so that it is not supplied by dampness of moist
atmosphere or influence of foreign matter as per the satisfaction of Engineer-in-
Charge. Cement shall be stored in such a way as to allow the removal and use of
cement in chronological order of receipti.e. first receive in first used. Different
brands of cement or cement of the same brand from the different factories shall
bestored in separate groups and shall not be mixed during use. Cement shall be kept
in a store under good condition. Any cement which is found defective shall not be
used. Daily account of receipt and use of cement bags shall be maintained by the
department and the contractor in proforma approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the scope of local transport of cement
from the site godown to the place of work.

Cement shall be kept in a store under double locking arrangements.

The cement shall be measured by one bag for all uses in concrete (except otherwise
stated) and masonry etc. In no case cement shall be measured by the boxes or other
66
 means for the volumetric proportion of concrete and mortar. For calculation for the
proportion, the volume of one cement beg taken as 0.0342 cu. Mt. (1.20 cft) and
measuring box / bag shall be of size 30 cms x 30cms x 38 cms. For weight batch of
concrete to be used, the cement shall have to be used as per actual weight and the
contractor shall not be entitled for any compensation for loss in weight due to
shifting of bags or on account of any reasons.

The cement manufactured by the mini plant shall not be allowed to use in the work.

If OPC-53 grade cement is not available in sufficient quantity in market, 53 grade

PPC cement (Portland Pozzolona Cement) will be allowed. The contractor shall
have to get the prior approval from the Engineer-in-Charge for use of PPC Cement.
Portland pozzolana cement (PPC) confirming to IS: 1469 shall be used if Portland
pozzolona cement is used, curing period will be extended one week extra without
any extrapayment

M2: SAND
General.

i) The sand to be used shall be natural sand from Tapi river only. The sand is
available in ample quantity from Tapi river. It shall be tested in Government
laboratory or Government approved laboratory. The fineness Modulus (FM)
of sand shall be as per the relevant IS and specified in
specification.Generally, FM for sand for to use in concrete construction shall
be between2 to 3.78.

ii) All the fine aggregates shall conform to IS: 383 – 1970 or its latest version and
as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. Sand to be used shall be natural as obtained
from the river bed and the maximum size shall be limited to 4.75 mm. Fine
aggregates will be tested for their gradation, silt content and fineness modulus.
Due allowance shall be made, if at the time of mixing the sand is wet. The
exact extent of such allowance or bulkage shall depend upon the quantity of
moisture in sand and it shall be decided by the Engineer-In-Charge.
67
 iii) When the quality of fine aggregate is doubtful it shall be tested for clay,
organic impurities and other deleterious substances as laid down in IS 383. It
shall not contain deleterious materials in such quantity as to reduce the strength
or durability and the mortar or concrete or to attack the reinforcement in the
case of reinforced concrete work. Sea sand shall not be used.

iv) Large quantity of sand is available in the rivers Tapi only. The contractor shall
procure approved quality of sand.

(a) Quality.

i) Sand shall consist of hard, inert, dense, durable and uncoated siliceous gritty
materials. It shall be free from injurious amount of dust, lumps soft and flaky
particles, shale, alkali, organic matter, loam and other deleterious substances.
The maximum percentage of each of the deleterious substance in sand as
delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following values.

Limits of deleterious material.

(i) Coal & lignite 1.0 percent by weight

(ii) Clay lumps 1.0 percent by weight
(iii) Material finer than 75 micron 3.0 percent by weight
IS-Sieve
(iv) Shale 1.0 percent by weight
(v) Total of percentages of all 5.0 percent by weight
deleterious material (except
Mica)

(i) Sand shall be free from injurious amount of organic impurities and sand that are
producing a colour (obtained by dissolving 9 grams of chemically pure (c.p.)
ferric chloride and 1 gram of c.p. cobalt chloride in 100 ml. of water to which
68
 one third ml of hydrochloric acid has been added) darken than the standard in the
test (organic test) for organic impurities shall be rejected.

(ii) However, the sum of the percentage of all deleterious substances, Mica, coated
grains, soft and flaky particles, Loam etc. shall not exceed by 5% of weight.
The sand impurities and sand producing a colour darker than the standard
colorimetric test for organic impurities and sand producing a colour darker
than the standard calorimetric test for organic impurities shall be rejected.

(b) Grading.
(i) Sand shall be well graded so as to impart good workability and good
finishing, Sieve analysis of natural sand shall confirm to the following limits
of gradation.

IS Sieve Cumulative percentage of weight

passing through sieve
1 10 mm 100
2 4.75 mm 92-100
3 2.36 mm 75-92
4 1.18 mm 55-82
5 600 micron 30-64
6 300 micron 10-40
7 150 micron 3-10

(i) Deviations from the prescribed limits of cumulative percentage

retained on sieve 10 mm, 4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm,600 micron,
300 micron and 150 micron IS sieves shall be permitted provided total
of such deviations do no exceed 10 percent. No deviation from the
69
 prescribed limit shall be permitted for cumulative percentage retained
on 600 microns IS Sieve.

(c) Fineness Modulus.

(i) Sand shall have a fineness modulus between 2.2 and 3.78 subject to the
gradation specified in the preceding paragraph.

(ii) The modulus shall be computed, by adding cumulative percentage of

sand retained on the standard sieves 4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm,
600micron, 300micron, 150 micron IS Sieves and dividing the sum by
100. Gradation of sand shall be so controlled that the fineness modulus
of at least 9 out of 10 consecutive test samples of finished sand shall
not vary by more than 0.10 from the average of 10 test samples. Sand
having any deviation from the specified range of gradation and fineness
modulus shall not be permitted to be used in work without the written
permission of the Engineer-In-Charge.

Fineness Modulus for sand to be used for different purposes

Sr. Type of work IS Code FM Range

No.
1 Cement Concrete IS 383 Zone – I & II 2.11 to 4.0
2 For masonary IS 2116, Table-1 1.15 to 2.95
3 For Cement IS 1542 1.2 to 2.2
Plaster
4 For sand bedding IS 383, Zone I & II 2.11 to 4.0
below pipe
(d) Testing.
The sand to be used shall be got approved by the Engineer in charge and shall
be tested in the laboratory as per the applicable IS in the approved laboratory
/ from the GERI as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

70
 The following testing frequencies shall be maintained for the same source of
fine aggregates:

Sr. Name of Test Minimum number of

No. tests specified.
1 Gradation for Fineness Modulus Fortnightly one test.
2 Silt Content Fortnightly one test
3 Moisture content Fortnightly one test.

4 Specific gravity, Soundness Once in a working

season or in change
in source
(e)Storage :
The fine aggregate should be stacked carefully on a clean hard surface so that it will
not get mixed up with deleterious foreign material.
Sand shall not be stacked in high conical heaps so that sliding down may prevent
segregation of heavier particles by sliding down. It shall be placed in layers not
thicker than those resulting from lorry loads dumped on the same place. All sand
shall be stored on the site of work in such a manner as to prevent intrusion of
foreign matter.
(f) Royalty :
The contractor shall be responsible for observing the laws, rules and regulations
imposed under the Mines and Minerals Act and such other laws and rules prescribed
by Government Departments such as Forest and Revenue and by competent. The
contractor subject to general conditions of contract shall pay local Authorities
Royalty, etc. payable for securing the material.

71
M3: WATER

Water for mixing cement mortar and concrete shall not be salty or brackish and
shall be clean, reasonably clear and free from objectionable quantities of silt and
trace of oil and injurious alkalies, salts, organic matter and other deleterious
materials which will either weaken the mortar or concrete or cause effluence or
attack the steel in R.C.C. Containers for transport storage and handling of water
shall be clean. Water shall confirm to the standard specified in IS 456-1978.As a
guidance following table represent maximum permissible limit.

Particulars Percentage by weight

Organic 0.02
Inorganic 0.30
Sulphate 0.05
Alkali chloride 0.1
PH Value 6 to 8

If required by the Engineer-in-Charge, it shall be tested by the comparison with

distilled water. Comparison shall be made by means and mortar strength as
specified in IS 269-1976 and indication of unsoundness, change in time of setting
by 90 minutes or more or decrease of more or decrease of more than 10% in
strength of mortar prepared with water samples when compared with the result
obtained with mortar prepared with distilled water shall be sufficient cause for
rejection of water under test.

Water for drinking will generally be found suitable for mortar or concrete. Water
for curing mortar, concrete or masonry should not be too acidic or too alkaline.

It shall be free of elements which significantly effect the hydration reaction or

otherwise interfere with the hardening of mortar or concrete during curing of these
which produceobjectionable stains or other unsightly depositon concrete or mortar
surface.
72
 Hard and bitter water shall not be used for curing. Potable waterwill generally be
found suitable for curing mortar or concrete or masonry.

The turbidity in water shall not be more than 2000 ppm and shall preferably be as
low as possible.

Water for curing cement mortar or concrete.

Water for curing mortar or concrete should not be too acidic or too alkaline. It should
have a PH value not less than 6.0. It shall be free of elements which significantly
effect the hydration reaction or otherwise interfere with the hardening of mortar or
concrete during curing or those which produce objectionable stains or other unsightly
deposits on concrete or mortar surfaces. Hard and bitter water containing more than
400 p.p.m. of sulphates shall not be used for curing purpose.
Seawater and water containing over 3 percent of chloride salts should not be used for
curing reinforced concrete work.
Potable water will generally be found suitable for curing, cement mortar or concrete.

M4: Black Trap Stone Coarse Aggregate:-

4.1 Coarse aggregate shall be machine crushed stone of black trap and shall be hard,
strong, dense, durable, clean, freefrom skin and coating likely to prevent proper
adhesion of mortar. All aggregates shall conform to IS 383-1963 and IS 515-1959 or
as per latest version of Indian Standard.
4.2 The aggregate shall generally be cubical in shape, unless special stones of particular
quarries are mentioned. Aggregate shall be machine crushed from the best black trap
stone as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Aggregate shall have no deleterious
reaction with cement. The size of the coarse aggregate for plain cement concrete and
ordinaryreinforced cement for plain cement shall generally be as per the table given
below.

73
 However, in case of reinforced cement concrete the maximum limit may be restricted
to 6 mm less than the minimum lateral clear distance between bars or 6 mm less than
the cover whichever smaller.
Grading of Coarse aggregate :
The grading of single size or graded coarse aggregates when tested as per IS : 2386 (Part-
I) shall be within following limit or subsequent revised IS
Table-1
Percentage passing for single sizeaggregate for
I. S. sieve nominal size.
40 mm 20 mm 10 mm
63 mm 100 --- ---
40 mm 85-100 100 ---
20 mm 0-20 85-100 ---
16 mm --- --- ---
12.5 mm --- --- 100
10 mm 0-5 0-20 85-100
4.75 mm --- 0-5 0-20
2.36 mm --- --- 0-5

Note: - [1] This percentage may be varied somewhat by the Engineer-in-charge,

when considered necessary for obtaining better density and strength of concrete.
The grading of graded coarse aggregates when tested as per IS 2386 (Part-I)
shall be within following limit or subsequent revised IS-383
IS Sieve Percentage passing for graded aggregates of Nominal
Designation size.
40mm 20mm 16mm 12.5mm
80 mm - - -
63 mm 100 -
40 mm 95 -100 100
20 mm 30-70 95-100 100 -

74
 16 mm - - 90-100
12.5 mm - - - 90 - 100
10 mm 10-35 25-55 30-70 40 - 85
4.75 mm 0-5 0 - 10 0 – 10 0 - 10
2.35 mm - - -

Table:1 Uniform grading of aggregate

Note :
This percentage may variedsome what by the Engineer
Engineer-in-charge,
charge, when considered
necessary for obtaining better density and streng
strength
th of concrete.In concrete for canal
lining the percentage at 4.75 to 10 mm fraction shall be reduced to about 5 to 10
percent of the total coarse aggregate. However, the exact gradation required to
produce a dense concrete of specified strength and desire
desiredd workability shall be
decided by the Engineer
Engineer-in-Charge.
4.3 If Single size coarse aggregates are to be used it shall confirm to the requirements in
table of IS-383
383 following nominal size shall be used at site with the other ingredients
of concrete as indicated
dicated below.

75
Note: -The nominal mix shall not be allowed for the concrete in normal case. In case of
emergency and after the approval of Engineer-in-charge and it shall be done as per
guideline given in table-9 of IS: 456-2000

4.4 Single size coarse aggregates conforming to the requirements in above table
following nominal size shall be used at site with the other ingredients of concrete as
indicated below.

The mixing shall be in a mixture or on the platform as directed in case of C.C.

1:5:10 only. For nominal mix C.C. 1:4:8, C.C. 1:3:6, C.C. 1:2:4 and C.C 1:1.5:3
mixing shall be done in the mechanical mixture only.
1. C.C. 1:5:10 Nominal size of aggregate 40 mm
2. C.C. 1:4:8 ---------do------------------- 40 mm
3. C.C. 1:3:6 ---------do------------------ 40 mm
4. C.C. 1:2:4 ---------do------------------ 20 mm
5. C.C. 1:1.5:3 ---------do----------------- 20/16 mm

Note: - Normally graded aggregates should only be used for concrete mix.

4.5 The grading test shall be taken regularly. The aggregate shall be stored separately
and handled in such a manner to prevent the intermixing of different aggregates. If
the aggregates are covered with the dust, it shall be washed with water to make it
clean.
4.6 The percentage of deleterious substances in only size of coarseaggregateas delivered
to the mixture shall not exceed the following value.
Material passing No. 100 percentage by wt.
Screen
Shale 1 percentby weight
Coal 1 percentby weight

76
 Soft fragments 1 percentby weight
Other deleterious substances 1 percent by weight
Clay lumps 1 percent by weight
4.7 The Gradingtest shall be taken in the beginning and at the change of source of
materials. The necessary test indicated in the IS 383-1970 and IS 456-1978 shall have
to be carried out to ensure the acceptability. The aggregates shall be stored separately
and handled in such a manner to prevent the intermixing of different aggregates. If the
aggregates are covered with dust, it shall be washed to make it clean. The coarse
aggregates for plain and ordinary reinforced concrete shall be measured by volume
for the moninal mix concrete and by weight for design mix concrete.
M 5: T M T Bars:
5.1 General :

All reinforcement bars, plain, tor steel (TMT) etc. specified in item shall confirm to
relevant IS standard i.e. IS: 432 for mild steel and medium tensile steel, IS: 1139 for
deformed bars, IS: 1786 for cold twisted bars etc. Wherever tested bars are to be
used, certificate for the same from manufacturer shall be submitted. The testing of
the reinforcement bar shall also be carried out in the GERI/ Government laboratory/
Govt. Approved laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

(a) Plain bars :

Plain bars to be used shall confirm to IS : 432. The general specification specified
above shall be applicable. Re-rolled bars shall not be used. Wherever specified in
drawing or where instructed plain bars shall be used.

(b) Tor steel/HYSD/TMT (FE- 415 / FE- 500)/CRS and Binding wires :
The general specifications as specified above shall be applicable. Bars shall confirm
to IS : 1608-1995, IS : 432-1982, IS : 1786-2008 and IS 1716-1985.

77
TMT bars reinforcement Fe-500 for R.C.C works shall confirm to IS : 1786-FE 500
and shall be of tested quality it shall also comply with relevant part of IS 456-1978.
Bars shall be clean, free from rust, dust, mud etc. If coils are there, they shall be first
straightened. Bars shall be cut according to the cutting length specified/approved by
department. Bars shall be bent gradually. Bars having crack or splits shall be
rejected. Bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise specified in case of higher
diameter bars. If bar is bend wrongly, it should be straightened and re bend such that
it does not injure the materials. If contractor, request factory cutting of bars as per
design drawing will be permitted by the Engineer-in-charge.
Quantity of reinforcement bars in Quintal (Qtl.) embedded in concrete shall be
paid. Weight shall be computed on cutting length approved or given multiplied by
standard weight of particular diameter of bars as per IS standards. Work shall have
to be carried out as all levels. "Rate quoted shall inclusive of wastages, cost of
binding wire etc. No separate payment will be made for binding wire. However laps,
dowels etc., shall be paid as per drawing or as approved on site.
For the purpose of payment, the bar shall be measured correct up to 100 mm. length
and weight payable worked out at the rate specified below:

1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg./Rmt. 8. 20 mm 2.47 Kg./Rmt.

2. 8 mm 0.39 Kg./Rmt. 9. 22 mm 2.98 Kg./Rmt.
3. 10 mm 0.62 Kg./Rmt. 10. 25 mm 3.85 Kg./Rmt.
4. 12 mm 0.89 Kg./Rmt. 11. 28 mm 4.83 Kg./Rmt.
5. 14 mm 1.21 Kg./Rmt. 12. 32 mm 6.31 Kg./Rmt.
6. 16 mm 1.58 Kg./Rmt. 13. 36 mm 7.99 Kg./Rmt.
7. 18 mm 2.00 Kg./Rmt. 14. 40 mm 9.86 Kg./Rmt.

78
 Testing of Steel :
Various tests for reinforcement shall be carried out in GERI/ Govt. approved
laboratory/ or Govt. laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and as under:
Frequency for steel testing (Physical properties) are as under as per IS 1786:1985.

Normal Size Quantity

of bar
Lot below 100 tonne. Lot above 100 tonne

Under 10 1 Sample from each 25 1 Sample from each 40

mm tonne tonne
10 to 16 mm 1 Sample from each 35 1 Sample from each 45
tonne tonne
Over 16 mm 1 Sample from each 45 1 Sample from each 50
tonne tonne

However, the frequency of testing shall be decided by the Engineer-In-Charge as per

necessity during the course of execution, but the frequency as mentioned above shall
not be increased in any case. i.e. nos. of sampling and testing shall be more than as
mentioned above.
For the chemical analysis of steel, the frequency shall be twice in a working season
for each diameter bar and Brand and as decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
The contractor shall have to procure TMT directly from the Main
Producer/manufacturer or it’s authorized dealer which shall conform to I.S. The steel
so purchased shall only be permitted to use. The contractor shall provide satisfactory
evidence to the Engineer-in-charge in support of purchase, test certificate of the
manufactures shall be produced, if so required by the Engineer-in-charge. If further
test be necessary, they will be done according to IS226-1968 and IS 223-1950 or as
revised from time to time.

79
M6: Binding Wires:
The binding wire shall confirm to IS 280-1972 and IS 432-1982 or asrevised from the
time to time. The mild steel binding wires shall be of 1.63 mm or 1.22 mm (16 or 18
gauge) diameter. The use of black wire will be permitted for binding reinforcement
bars. It shall be free from rust, oil paint, grease, loose scale or any other coating
which may prevent adhesion to cement concrete. The wire coils shall be stored such
as to avoid deterioration. No measurement will be taken of the wire used for binding
and tying reinforcement bars. The rate for reinforcement steel and its fabricate shall
include the cost of binding wires used for the work. Welding of bars shall only be
allowed only after the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

M-7 RUBBLE / METAL (STONE): -

1) All stones to be used on the works under these specifications, shall be obtained
from quarries approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be of sound, hard
and durable quality, free from veins, flow, cracks, earth cover, zeolite and black
in colour etc. Stone with permissible stained surface shall be allowed in the
masonry. Such stains shall have minimum oxide contains which can be washed
off or removed by wet scrubbing.
Weathered skin maximum up to 1/16" thickness shall be allowed on only one
face of stones which shall from not more than 33% of total number of stones
used in the masonry. Such stones with skins on face shall be stacked separately.
The water absorption of stone should not exceed as specified in IS code No.
1124 (1974) after being kept under water for 24 hours.
2) The contractor shall have to pay royalty for the stones as per prevailing
Government norms.
3) The stones required for the work shall be black trap obtained from approved
quarry. The stones shall be tough, durable, hard and of uniform texture. The
80
 stones shall be sound, free from flaws, cracks, veins or cavities. Stones to be
used shall be uniform. Flaky and elongated stones shall not be used. The tests for
rubble / metal stone shall be carried out at the Govt. approved laboratory/ GERI/
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge from lot of every 100 cubic meter of
rubble stones used. The test shall be carried out to ascertain size, gradation,
weight, flakiness/ elongation water absorption and specific gravity property.
When immersed in water for more than 24 hours water absorption should not
exceed 1% by weight of the stone. Specific gravity of rubble stone should be
more than 2.5.
4) The rubble shall be hard, angular to round, durable and of such quality that they
shall not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering during the life of the
structure.
5) Stones used in gabion shall normally 50 % have weight 25 kg or more.
Remaining stones shall have a weight between 10 to 25 kg. The interstices shall
be filled with appropriate size of spauls. Percentage of spauls shall not be more
than 16 % of stones by volume. It shall be seen that spauls are not concentrated
at one place only.
6) The quarry spaul shall be as uniform in size as possible. The quarry spaul shall
be hard, tough, solid, durable of black trap of close texture, free from decay and
weathering. The particles OF shall be angular and roughly cubical in shape and
round elongated or flaky materials shall be rejected.

M-8. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE

8.1 SCOPE: This specification covers the furnishing of PVC pressure pipe for Hydrulics
Structure.

8.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS:All PVC water pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in
accordance with one of the following Standard Specifications:

81
 a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 100 mm dia. for Abutment &Sidewall.
b. No Joint should be allowed.
c. Contractor will have to produce results from manufracturer.

M-9 PVC HEAVY DUTY WATER STOPS:-

GENERAL
The item include provision of P.V.C. water stops of approved quality
and size. If in case it is not available, ribbed type water stops may be allowed by the
Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion. The dimensions as well as shape and type of
water stops shall be as per approved drawing and design. The water stops shall have
a center bulb of 12.70mm inside diameter and 25.4mm outside diameter and shall be
300mm in width and shall have a minimum of 5 longitudinal ribs on each side of
central bulb.
The water stops shall be cut with sharp knife as directed, P.V.C. water stops
to be welded shall be trimmed keeping an allowance of 1.50mm for each strip to get
correct measurement. Metal strip or iron bar shall be heated by temperature around
200°C the correct temperaturee can be tested by applying a piece of the waterstop to
the hot metal strip. If the piece softens immediately on application of heat, the metal
strip has achieved satisfactory temperature. The metal strip shall thoroughly be
cleaned by heating.
The tow ends of the water stops to be jointed shall be pressed against the
surface of the hot metal strips in position. When the P.V.C. softens the two ends the
water stops shall then side away from the metal strip. They shall then be pressed
firmly against each other until the cool. It is important that during welding of two
pieces of water stops alignment of the central bulb is taken care of.

9.1 SECTION INCLUDES

 Provision of waterstop embedded in concrete and spanning control, expansion,
and/or construction joint to create a continuous diaphragm to prevent fluid
migration.
 Non-metallic waterstops for use in concrete joints subjected to chlorinated water.sea
water, and many waterborne chemicals.

9.2 PVC WAT ERSTOP FOR EXPANSION JOINTS

 Provide flexible PVC (polyvinyl chloride) waterstop as manufactured by

Greenstreak, profile style number (fill in profile style number).

82
  The PVC waterstop shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which
the basic resin is prime virgin polyvinyl choride.The PVC compound shall not
contain any scrapped or reclaimed material or pigment whatsoever.

M-10 BRICK:-

10.1 The bricks shall be made from soil of even texture and shall be uniformly well burnt in
approved kiln. It shall be uniform in size and shape and shall be free from impurities
like particles of stone, lime, kanker and other foreign materials visible to naked eye
on the surface or as seen on the fractured surface of brick obtained by breaking the
sample. The brick shall give a ringing sound when struck and its texture shall show a
homogenous, clean and dense structure and sharp edges.
10.2 Brick shall be regular and uniform in size, shape and colour and uniformly well burnt
throughout. The bricks shall be table / hand mounded and shall have plain
rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp, straight and right angle edges. The
brick shall be free from cracks or any other types of flaws. They shall have a frog of
10 mm. depth on one of the main flat faces.
10.3 The bricks shall be free from cinder, lump of lime, lamination, cracks, air holes,
soluble salts causing effloresce or any other defect which may in any way impair the
strength, appearance, durability or usefulness for the purpose intended.
10.4 The bricks shall not break when dropped on its flat face in a saturated condition from
a height of 60 cm. on other bricks.
10.5 The size of the bricks shall be unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge
depending on locally available bricks. Bricks of only one size shall be used in one
work unless specially permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge. When bricks in sizes
other than required for the works are permitted for use, the measurements to be paid
shall be limited to dimensions with use of bricks specified above or their relevant
dimensions for British size bricks whichever is less.
The following tolerance limits are permissible in the standard size on any particular
work.
Length + 4 mm.
Breadth + 2 mm.
Depth + 2 mm
10.6 The bricks shall be true to shape and size and shall be burnt in kiln. The bricks shall
have clear ringing sound when struck, should be of a uniform deep red or copper
colour and should not absorb water more than 20% of the dry weight. The
83
 compressive strength of bricks when wet should be 35 kg per cm2 minimum when
tested as per IS:1077-1986 and the bricks shall not show decrease in strength by
more than 24% when soaked in water thoroughly. One sample of brick shall be
tested for every 5,000 bricks. While sending the sample, it is necessary to send 10
bricks for determining the average crushing strength. The contractor shall make
necessary arrangements for conveying the sufficient nos. of bricks to the laboratory
for testing. The bricks shall have a fine compacted texture with rectangular faces
with parallel sides and straight edges and rectangular corners. This should conform
to the standard brick vide Indian standard code 1077-1992. All rejected bricks and
brickbats shall be stacked separately and disposed off within the time fixed by the
Engineer-In-Charge. Only those whole bricks which conform to the specifications
shall be accepted for the purpose of work. Later on any defect which may come to
the notice of the WRD , later on in the work executed and paid so far in the running
bill, the contractor is liable to remove the defective/poor quality work and
reconstruct it as per specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.7 Ten samples for each supply may be tested for water absorption, crushing strength
and average crushing strength will be the guiding factor for rejection or otherwise.
The tests of bricks shall be got done in Govt. Laboratory/ Govt. approved laboratory
/ GERI and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Bricks which do not comply with
the test results and specifications shall be rejected and removed from the site of the
work within 24 hours by the contractor at his own cost. The testing shall also be done
if the Engineer-In-Charge feels that the bricks are of inferior quality and doubtful in
strength.
10.8 The manufacturing process shall in general conform to IS : 2167-1971. Sampling and
testing of the bricks, whenever required shall be done in accordance with IS:3495-
1992 and IS - 5454 – 1978. The collection of samples and charges for transporting
up to laboratory have to be borne by the contractor.

M-11 Steel doors, Windows and Ventilators:-

11.1 Materials
(1) Hot rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel doors, windows and ventilators
shall conform to IS: 7452, which are suitable for, single glazing.
(2) Pressed steel door frames for steel flush doors shall be out of 1.25mm thick mild steel
sheets of profiles as per IS : 4351.
(3) Transparent sheet glass shall conform to the requirements of IS : 2835. Wired and
figured glass shall be as per IS : 5437.
84
(4) The hardware of fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality from the approved
manufacturers.
All the material to be used shall be of good quality. The MS plate, angles and flats
shall be of primary manufacturer/ secondary manufacture. Re-rolled sections shall not
be allowed.
11.2 Workmanship
(1) All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be of the type as specified in the
respective items of work prepared by the Contractor and of sizes as indicated in the
Drawings prepared by the Contractor prepared by the Contractor. Steel doors,
windows and ventilators shall conform to the requirements as stipulated in IS : 1038.
Steel windows shall conform to IS : 1361, if so specified.
(2) Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture. Fabrication of
the unit shall be with rolled section, cut to correct lengths and metered. Corners shall
be welded to form a solid fused welded joint conforming to the requirements of IS:
1038. Tolerance in overall dimensions shall be within ±1.5mm. The frames and
shutters shall be free from wrap or buckle and shall be square and truly plain. All
welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and contact surfaces. Punching of holes, slots
and other provisions to install fittings and fixtures later shall be made at the correct
locations as per the requirements. Samples of the units shall be got approved by the
Engineer -in- Charge before further manufacture/purchase by the Contractor.
(3) Type and details of shutters, hinges, glazing bar requirement, couplings, locking
arrangement, fittings and fixtures shall be as described in the respective items of work
and / or as shown in the Drawings prepared by the Contractor for single or composite
units.
(4) For windows with fly proof mesh as per the item of work prepared by the Contractor,
rotor operator arrangement, for the operation of the glazed shutters from the inside
shall be provided.
85
(5) Pressed steel door frames shall be provided with fixing lugs at each jamb, hinges,
lock-strike plate, mortar guards, angle threshold, shock-absorbers of rubber or similar
material as per the requirements of IS: 4351. Pressed steel door frames shall be fixed
as `built-in’ as the masonry work proceeds. After placing it plumb at the specified
location, masonry walls shall be built up solid on either side and each course grouted
with mortar to ensure solid contact with the doorframe, without leaving any voids.
Temporary struts across the width shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/sag of
the frame.
(6) Door shutters of flush welded construction shall be 45mm thick, fabricated with two
outer skills of 1.25 mm thick steel sheets, 1mm thick steel sheet stiffeners and steel
channels on all four edges. Double shutters shall have meeting stile edge beveled or
rebated. Provision of glazed viewing panel, louvers shall be made as per the items of
works and/or Drawings prepared by the Contractor. Shutters shall be suitably
reinforced for lock and other surface hardware and to prevent sagging/twisting. Single
sheet steel door shutters shall be fabricated out of 1.25mm thick steel sheets, mild steel
angles and stiffeners as per the Drawings prepared by the Contractor.
(7) Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed into the prepared openings. They shall
not be ‘built-in’ as the masonry work proceeds, to avoid distortion and damage of the
units. The dimensions of the masonry opening shall have 10 mm clearance around the
overall dimensions of the frame for this purpose. Any support of scaffolding members
on the frames/glazing bars is prohibited. The doors and windows shall be fixed in
proper line and level.
(8) Glazing of the units shall be either with flat transparent glass or wired / figured glass
of the thickness as specified in the items of works prepared by the Contractor. All
glass panels shall have properly squared corner and straight edges. Glazing shall be
provided on the outside of the frames.

86
 (9) Fixing of the glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty conforming to
IS:419 or with metal beads. Pre-formed PVC or rubber gaskets shall be provided for
fixing the beads with the concealed screws. The type of fixing the glazing shall be as
indicated in the items of work and/or in Drawings prepared by the Contractor.
(10) Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of either painting as
specified or shall be hot dip galvanized with thickness of the zinc coating as stipulated
all as described in the respective items of works prepared by the Contractor.
(11) If the doors are to be painted, before painting one coat of red oxide / zinc oxide shall
be applied and there after three coats of good quality of well-known brand / reputed
manufacturer shall be applied uniformly on metal surface.
(12) The material of the Builders hardware of fittings and fixtures of chromium plated
steel, cast brass, brass copper oxidized or anodized aluminium shall be as specified in
the items of works prepared by the Contractor. The number, size and type of fittings
and fixtures shall be as in the Drawings /items of works prepared by the Contractor.
(13) Installation of the units with fixing lugs, screws, mastic caulking compound at the
specified locations shall generally conform to the requirements of IS:1081. Necessary
holes etc required for fixing shall be made by the Contractor and made good after
installation. Workmanship expected is of a high order for efficient and smooth
operation of the units.

M- 12. Cement Mortar

12. 1. Water shall conform to specification M-1. Cement shall conform to specification
M-3. Sand shall conform to
12. 2. Proportion of Mix
12.2.1. Cement and sand shall be mixed to specified proportion, sand being measured
by-measuring boxed.
The proportion of cement will be by volume on the basis of 50 Kg./Bag of cement
being equal to 0.0342
Cu.m. The mortar may be hand mixed or machine mixed as directed.

87
 12.3. Preparation of mortar
12.3.1 In hand mixed mortar cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be
thoroughly mixed dryon a clean impervious platform by turning over at least 3 times or
more till a homogenous mixture of uniformcolour is obtained. Mixing platform shall be so
arranged that no deleterious extraneous material shall getmixed with mortar or mortar shall
flow out. While mixing, the water shall be gradually added and thoroughlymixed to form a
stiff plastic mass of uniform colour so that each particle of sand shall be completely
coveredwith a film of wet cement. The water cement ratio shall be adopted as directed.
12.3.2 The mortar so prepared shall -be used, within 30 minutes of adding water. Only
such quantity of mortar shall be prepared as can be used within 30 minutes.
M-13. Shuttering
13.1. The shuttering shall be either of wooden planking of 30 mm. minimum thickness
with or without steel lining or of steel plates stiffened by steel angles. The shuttering
shall be supported on battens and beams and props of vertical ballies properly cross
braced together so as to make the centering rigid. In places of bullie props, brick
pillar of adequate section built in mud mortar may be used.
13.2. The form work shall be sufficiently strong and shall have camber, so that it assumes
correct shape after deposition of the concrete and shall be able to resist forces
caused by vibration of live load of men working over it and other incidental loads
associated with it. The shuttering shall have smooth and even surface and its joints
shall not permit leakage of cement grout.
13.3. If at any stage of work during or after placing concrete in the structure, the form
work sags or bulges out beyond the required shape of the structure, the concrete
shall be removed and work redone with fresh concrete and adequately rigid form
work- The complete form work shall be got inspected by and got approved from the
Engineer-in-charge, before the reinforcement bars are placed in position.

M-14. Aluminiuin doors, windows, ventilators

14.1Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of extruded window sections shall conform
to I.S. designation HEA-WP of I.S. : 733-1975 and also to I.S. Designation
WVG-WP of I.S. 1285-1975. The Section shall be as specified in the drawing and
design. The -fabrication shall be done as directed.
14.2. The hinges shall be cast ~or extruded aluminium hinge of same type as in window
but of large size.
14.3 The hinges shall normally be of 50 mm. projecting type. Nonprojecting type of
hinges may also be used if directed. The handles of door shall be of specified
design. A suitable lock for the, door operatable either from outside or inside shall be
provided. It) double shutter door, the first closing shutter shall have concealed
aluminium alloy bolt at top and bottom.
88
M-15. Fixtures and fastenings
15.1. General
15.1.1. The fixtures and fastenings, that is, butt, hinges, tee an(.! strap h1n_vvs, sliding
door bolts, tower bolts, door latch, bath room latch, handles, door stopper,
casement window fasteners, casement stays andventilators catch shall be made of
the metal as specified in the item 'or its specifications.
15.1.2. They shall be of iron, brass, aluminium, chromium plated iron, chromium plated
brass, copper oxidised iron, copper oxidised brass or anodisedaluminium as
specified.
15.1.3. The fixtures shall be heavy, medium or light type. The fixtures and fastenings shall
be smooth finished and shall be, such as will ensure ease of operation.
15.1.4. The samples of fixtures and fastenings shall be got approved as regards quality and
shape before providing them. in position.
15.1.5, Brass and anodisedaluminium fixtures and fastenings shall be bright finished.
15.2. Holdfasts
15.2. 1. Holdfasts shall be made from mild steel flat 30 cm. length and one of the holdfasts
shall be bent at right angle an(] two nos. of 6 mm. diameter holes shall be made in
it for fixing it to the farme with screws. At the other end, the holdfast shall be
forked and bent at right angles in opposite directions.
15.3. Butt hinges
15.3.1. Railway standard heavy type butt hinges shall be used when so specified.
15.3.2. Tee and strap hinges shall be manufactured from M.S. Sheet.
15.4.Siding door bolts (Aldrops)
15.4. 1. The aldrops as specified in the item shall be used and shall be got approved.
15.5. Tower bolts (Barrel Type)
15.5.1. Tower bolts as specified in the item shall be used and shall be got approved.
15.6. Door latch :
15.6.1. The size of door latch shall be taken as the length of-latch.
15.7. Bathroom Latch
15.7. 1. Bathroom latch shall be similar to tower bolt.
15.8. Handle.
The size of the handles shall be determined by the inside grip length of the handles.
Handles shall have a base plate of length 50 mm. mote than the size of the handle.
15.9. Door Stoppers
15.9-1. Door stoppers shall be either floor door stopper type or door catch type. Floor
stopper shall be of overall size as specified and shall have a rubber cushion.
15.10. Door Catch

89
 15.10.1. Door catch shall be fixed at a height of about 900 mm. from the floor level so that
one part of the catch is fitted on the inside of the shutter and the other part is fixed
in the wall with necessary wooden plug arrangements for appropriate fixity. The
catch shall be fixed 20 mm. inside the face of the door for easy operation of catch.
15.11. Wooden Door Stop with hinges
15.11.1. Wooden door stop of size 100 mm x 60 mm x 40 mm shall be fixed on the
doorframe with a hinge of 75 mm size and at a height of 900 mm. from the floor
level. The wooden door stop shall be provided with 3 coats of approved oil paint.
15.12. Casement window Fastener:
Casement window fastener for single leaf window shutter shall be left or right handled
as directed.
15.13. Casement stays (Straight Peg Stay) :
15.13. 1. The stays shall be made from a channel section having three holes at appropriate
position so that the window can be opened either fully or partically as directed.
Size of the stay shall be 250 mm. to 300mm. as directed.
15.14. Ventilator Catch
15.14.1. The pattern and shape of the catch shall be as approved.
15.15. Pivot
15.15.1. The base and socket plate shall be made from minimum 3 mm. thick plate and
projected pivot shall not be less than 12 mm. diameter and 12 mm. length and shall
be firmly riveted to the base plate in case of iron pivot and in single piece base
plate in the case of brass pivot.

M-16 Paints:
16.1 (A) Oil paints
16.1.1. Oil paints shall be of the specified colour and shade, and as approved. The ready
mixed paints shall only be used. However, if ready mixed paint or specific shade or
tint is not avaibable, white ready mixed paint with approved stainer will be allowed. In
such a case, the contractor shall ensure that the shade of the paint so allowed shall be
uniform.
16.1.2. All the paints shall meet with following general requirements
(i) Paint shall not show excessive setting in a freshly opened full can and shall easily be
redispressed with a paddle to a smooth homogeneous state. The paint shall show no
curdling, livering, caking or colour separation and shall be free from lumps and skins.
(ii) The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good levelling properties and show no
running or sagging tendencies.
(iii) The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a three quarters filled closed container.

90
 (iv) The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness, grit, unevenness
and other imperfections.
16.1.3. Ready mixed paint shall be used exactly as received from the manufacturers and
generally according to their instructions and without any admixtures whatsoever.
16.2. (B) Enamel paints
16.2.1. The enamel paint shall satisfy in general requirements as mentioned in
specification of oil paints, Enamel paint shall conform to I.S. 2933-1975.

M-17. Marble Slab

17.1. Marble slab shall be white or of other colour and of best quality as approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
17.2. Slabs shall be hard, uniform and homogeneous in texture. They shall have even
crystalline grain aridfree from defects and cracks. The surface shall be machine
polished to an even and perfectly plant surface and edges machine cut true and square.
The rear face shall be rough to provide key for the mortar.
17.3. Marble slabs with natural veins, if selected shall have to be laid as per the pattern
given by the Engineer-in-charge, Size of the slab shall be minimum 450 mm x 450
mm. and preferable 600 aim x 600 mm. However, smaller sizes will be allowed to be
used to the extent of maintaining required pattern.
17.4. The slab shall not be thinner than the specified thickness at its thinnest part. A few
specimen of finished slab to be used shall be deposited by the Contracter in the office
for reference,
17.5. Except as above, the marble slabs shall conform to I.S. 1130-1969.

M-18. Nahni Trap :

18.1. Nalini trap shall be of cast iron and shall be sound and free from porosity or other
defects which affect serviceability. Tile thickness of the base metal shall not be less
than 6.5 mm. Tile surface shall be smooth and free from craze, ships and other flaws
or any other kind of defects which affect serviceability. The size of nahni trap shall
be as specified and shall be of self cleansing design.

M-19. Structural Steel

19.1. All structural steel shall conform to I.S. 226-1965. The- steel shall be in I.S.
226-1975 and shall have a smooth finish. The material shall be free other defects
affecting the strength and durability. Rivet bars shall conform
19.2. When the steel is supplied by the Contractor test certificates of the manufacturers
shall be obtained according to I.S. 226-1975 and other relevant Indian Standards.

91
M-20. Selected Earth
20.1. The selected earth shall be that obtained from excavated material- or shall have to
brought from outside as indicated in the item. If items does notindicate anything, the
selected earth shall have to be brought from outside.
20.2. The selected earth shall be good yellow soil and shall be got approved from (lie
Engineer-in-charge. In
no case black cotton soil or similar expansive and shrikable soil shall be used. At shall be
clean and free fromalrubish and perishable materials, stones or brick bats. The clods shall
be broken to a size of 50. mm orless, contractor shall make his ownarrangement at his own
Cost for land for borrowing selected earth. Thestacking of material shall be done as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge in such a way as not to intereferewith any
constructional activities and in proper stacks.
20.3. When excavated material is to be used, only select-ed stuff got, approved from the
Engineer-in-charge shall be used. It, shall be stacked separately and shall comply with all
the requirement of selected earth mentioned above.,

92
 2. General Technical Specification

1. General
1.0 The work Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC) Work For Construction of
Air-filled Rubber Dam Across River Ambika Near village Pathakavadi,
Ta.Dolvan, Dist. Tapi.is to be carried out under jurisdiction of Ver-II Project
Division, VyaraThe works contains mainly Excavation for foundation in soil, soft
rock, hard rock, Earthwork and backfilling, anchoring and placing of reinforcement,
M-15and M-25 cement concrete work, Air inflated rubber dam, Gaboin work, it’s
related works and Control room for operation and Approach Road etc.
1.1 Time limit of the work is 18 (Eighteen)Months.
1.2 The Contractor shall make his own survey, arrangement for construction materials
such like Cement, Fine aggregate, Coarse aggregate, Water, Steel, Rubber, PVC Pipe,
Bricks, G.I Pipe, RCC Pipe etc. as per tender Specification.
1.3 A motorable inspection road shall be maintained by contractor for inspection of the
work during construction period. In working period, necessary temporary inspection
facilities on site of work shall be also provide for the detailed inspection of the work.
Proper diversion roads, for highway road traffic shall be maintained by the contractor
with proper signboards and red lights on entry and exist of the division etc. as
directed by the Engineer - in - charge in during currency of the contract without any
type extra payment.
1.4 The work in general shall be carried out in workmen like manner as well as to the
correct section, better (side slope) and gradient as per drawing and to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge or his authorized any representative. The
various works shall be done true to line, level and grade. The periodical checking of
these works by Government’s staff shall not absolve the contractor of his
responsibility regarding the accuracy. In case of any deviation or discrepancy in line,
level or grade at the meeting faces, the contractor shall make good the discrepancy at
his own cost and without any extra compensation for the additional work involved.
Whenever such a discrepancy is found to arise at the junction of works of different
contractors, the responsibility to set right such discrepancy lies with the contractors
concerned. The Engineer- in -charge shall further have the unquestioned right, if need

93
 be, to rectify the discrepancies and recover the costs from the contractor or
contractors according to proportion as he may consider reasonable.
1.5 All work shall be carried out as per specification given in P.W.D. volume I & II and /
or as per relevant latest I.S.I. standard and technical specification of contract
document. The list of I.S. code & other publications for earthwork, concrete work,
steel work & other misc. work etc. are laid down in this Volume.
1.6 The site shall be cleared of all rubbish material and heaps etc. and shall be handed
over in neat and good condition after completion of the work.
1.7 The proposed methodology and program of construction including Environmental
Management plan, backed with equipment planning and deployment, duly supported
with broad calculations and quality control procedures proposed to be adopted,
justifying their capability of execution and completion of the work as per technical
specifications within the stipulated period of completion as per milestones.
1.8 The Provisions detailed below are applicable to all items of work and are deemed to
be integral part of the detailed specifications of items of work and are to be followed
strictly.
It shall be distinctly understood that the contract rate of the items is for the work
completed in all respects and shall invariably be inclusive of the cost of paras 1.8.1 to
1.8.13 below.
1.8.1 All labour, materials, use of equipment, tools, plants, appliances, etc and
scaffolding, from work, shuttering, centering etc. as may be required for satisfactory
execution and completion of the item of work.
1.8.2 Fabricating, erecting, handling, conveying, placing and keeping in position of
materisals.
1.8.3 Consolidation, vibrating, curing, finishing, etc. wherever the nature of the items is
obviously indicative of the same.
1.8.4 Racking as directed to the entire concrete surface to provide proper bond to the
abutting masonry & finishing.
1.8.5 All work tests of materials required to be carried out as per specifications or as are
required to be carried out in the opinion of the engineer-in-charge.
1.8.6 Definite particulars covered in the items of work, though not mentioned or
elucidated in its specification shall be deemed to be included therein.
1.8.7 General referenceof Indian standard given for the mode of measurement and
payment will not be considered to over ride any definite provision made therefore in
specifications of item.
94
1.8.8 For the purpose of payment, the quantity in respect of cement concrete work shall be
computed as per the size as cast (which shall be in conformity with the structural
drawings only and not finished.)
1.8.9 In case of sub-standard results of test cubes, as per specification on account of any
reasons whatsoever, the defective work shall be reconstructed or strengthened as
necessary, as required by the government, by the contractor at his risk and cost
without any extra expenditure to the Government, of replacement of such defective
work. Contractor shall take all precaution and care, during dismantling and re-doing
the work to ensure that any other work, so far executed is not damaged or affected.
1.8.10 The work shall be carried out in true line and level and in conformity with the
detailed drawings and specified patterns.
1.8.11 All works shall becarried out in a workman like manner and as per the best
techniques for the particular item.
1.8.12 All tools, templates, equipments etc. for correctexecution of the work, as well as for
checking lines, levels, alignment of the works during execution shall be kept in
sufficient numbers on the site of work.
1.8.13Scaffolding shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost for the execution of
items in which it is essential.
TESTING OF MATERIALS:
1.9 All materials before being incorporated in the work shall be inspected and if
necessary, tested before being approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Any work on
which such materials are used without prior inspection (and when necessary prior
testing) and without approval or written permission of the Engineer- in -charge may
be considered as unauthorized, defective and not acceptable.
1.10 The day-to-day / periodical tests to be carried out on materials, mixes and placed
concrete, mortar etc. shall be specified by the Engineer- in- charge or as per relevant
IS from time to time for ensuring quality and workmanship. The contractor shall
allow all facilities and co-operation towards collection of samples & testing procedure
etc. The contractor shall supply necessary materials for testing at his own cost. Also,
required labour for collecting samples of materials & transport facilities with loading,
unloading to samples of materials from work site to field laboratory / Govt. laboratory
/ Govt. approved laboratory for tests, shall be supplied by contractor free of cost to
department. Necessary arrangement for proper curing of cast specimen on work site
& transport it from work site to laboratory shall be arranged by the contractor at his
own cost.
95
1.11 The contractor shall supply necessary materials at testing laboratory for working out
suitable Mix designs at his own cost. The methods of sampling and testing, the
procedure and standards shall be as laid down by the Engineer-in-charge for the
respective item as per relevant latest I.S.I. standard. 1.12 The materials, mixes and
placed concrete, mortar, cores etc. shall be tested day to day or periodically at the
Government Laboratory / set up at the site of work by Quality Control wing of
department and the results given thereof shall be considered correct and authentic by
the contractor. The contractor shall be given access to all operations / tests that may
be carried out as aforesaid so that he may satisfy himself regarding the procedure and
methods adopted. Maintaining quality of work shall be the fully responsibility of the
contractor under supervision of Quality Control (Q.C.)) staff & execution staff of the
work.
1.13 If, department has no adequate arrangement for setup laboratory at site of work, the
contractor shall be established a laboratory with necessary required equipment with
required facilities of light, water etc. at site of work at his own cost / expenses to carry
out field test. The contractor shall be providing a set of sieves, weight batcher, stove,
pan, cube moulds, cube testing machine, slump cone with compacting rod, flakiness
& elongation gauge etc. at field lab., for field test.
1.14 For each material, minimum 10% test out of total test of each material and/ or at
least one test where total nos. of tests for any material are less than 10 (ten) shall be
carried out at GERI’s laboratory. If there is no testing facility of material at GERI for
particular type of material, the same shall be tested as testing laboaratory as decided
and directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Other tests shall be carriedout in Govt. or
Govt. approved laboratory as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1.15 The concrete mix design shall be carried out in GERI/Govt. Engineering College /
Govt. Laboratory as decided by the Engineer-in-charge and the WRD staff shall
witness the final mix.
1.16 The contractor shall submit the monthly schedule in advance for the work to be taken
up during that month and which shall be approved by the Engineer –in –charge. The
work shall be carried out in accordance with approved work schedule.

96
1.17 As per specification and relevant IS provisions, all required tests shall be carried out
for all materials and concrete used under this work. However, if there may be any
doubt regarding quality of material, further test shall be carried out as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge and no any extra cost shall be paid to the contractor. If there may
be any doubt regarding the quality of concrete, non destructive testing shall be carried
out as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and if the quality of concrete/ work found
poor/ inferior, the contractor shall have to remove the same at his cost and re-
construct as per specification at his cost.
1.18 If there is any typographical error in any clause, conditions, information and
provisions made in this tender document, it shall be corrected by the Enginner-in-
charge as per standard mening or standard norms / provisions and it shall be
accepatable and binding to the contractor. Contractor shall not be allowed to get un-
due benefits because of any typographical error.

97
 Applicable Indian Standards and other applicable provisons

(A) All items of work concrete, its constituents, methods and procedures
of manufacture shall conform to Indian Standard Specifications and
other publications listed below unless otherwise specified.
Indian Standards

1 IS: 383-1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates

from natural sources for concrete (third
revision)
2 IS : 456-2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced
concrete (third revision)
3 IS : 457-1957 Code of practice for general construction of
plain and reinforced concrete for dams and
other massive structures.
4 IS : 460-1985 Specification for test sieves (Part 1 to 3)

5 IS : 516-1959 Method of test for strength of concrete

(Amendment No.1)
6 IS : 650-1966 Specification for standard sand for testing of
cement (first revision) (Amendments No. 1,2
& 3)
7 IS : 1199-1959 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
8 IS : 1489-1976 Specification for Portland Pozzolana cement
(second revision) (Amendments No.1 to 7)
9 IS : 1791-1985 Specification for batch type concrete mixers
(second revision)
10 IS : 2386-1977 Methods of test for aggregates for
(Part I to VIII) concrete

11 IS : 2430-1986 Methods for sampling of aggregates for

concrete (first revision)
12 IS : 2505-1980 General requirements for concrete vibrators,
immersion type (second revision)
98
13 IS : 2506-1985 General requirements for screed board type
concrete vibrators
14 IS : 2580-1982 Jute sacking bags for packing cement
(second revision) (with Amendments No.1 to
3)
15 IS : 3085-1965 Methods of test for permeability of cement,
mortar and concrete
16 IS : 3535-1986 Method of sampling hydraulic cement (First
revision)
17 IS : 3873-1978 Code of practice for laying in situ cement
concrete lining of canals (first revision)
18 IS : 4031-1988 Methods for physical test for
(Part 1 to 13) hydraulic cement (first revision)
19 IS : 4032-1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic
cement (first revision)
20 IS : 4558-1983 Code of practice for under-drainage of lined
canals (first revision)
21 IS : 4634-1968 Method for testing performance of batch-
type concrete mixers.
22 IS : 4656-1968 Specification for form vibrators for concrete
23 IS : 4845-1968 Definitions and terminology relating to
hydraulic cement (Reaffirmed 1987)
24 IS : 4925-1968 Specification for concrete batching and
mixing plant
25 IS : 4926-1976 Specification for ready mixed concrete (first
revision)
26 IS : 5256-1968 Code of practice for sealing joints in
concrete lining on canals.
27 IS : 5512-1983 Specifications for flow table for use in test
of hydraulic cement and pozzolanic
materials (first revision)
28 IS : 5513-1976 Specification for Vicat apparatus (first
revision)(AmendmentNo.1)
29 IS : 5515-1983 Specification for compacting factor
apparatus (first revision)
99
30 IS : 5529-1985 Code of practice for in-situ
(Part I & II) permeability test
31 IS : 5640-1970 Method of test for determining aggregate
impact value of soft coarse aggregates
32 IS : 5816-1970 Method of test for splitting tensile strength
of concrete cylinders
33 IS : 5889-1970 Specification for vibratory plate compactor
34 IS : 5892-1970 Specification for concrete transit mixer and
agitators
35 IS : 6461 Glossary of terms relating to
(Part I to XII) cement concrete
36 IS : 6923-1973 Method of test for performance of screed
board concrete vibrators
37 IS : 6925-1973 Method of test for determination of water
soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures
38 IS : 7245-1974 Specification for concrete pavers
39 IS : 7320-1974 Specification for concrete slump test
apparatus (Amendment No. 1)
40 IS : 7861-1975 Code of practice for extreme
(Part I & II) weather concreting
41 IS : 8041-1978 Specification for Rapid Hardening Portland
cement (first revision) (Amendments No. 1
to 4)
42 IS : 8043-1978 Specification for Hydrophobic Portland
Cement (first revision) (Amendments No. 1
to 3)
43 IS: 8112-1989 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland
Cement ( First Revision)
44 IS : 8142-1976 Method of test for determining setting time
of concrete by penetration resistance
45 IS : 9013-1978 Method of making, curing and determining
compressive strength of accelerated cured
concrete test specimens.
46 IS : 9103-1979 Specification for admixtures for concrete

100
 47 IS : 9284-1979 Method of test for abrasion resistance of
concrete
48 IS : 12200-1987 Code of practice for provision of water stops
at transverse contraction joints in masonry
and concrete dams.
49 IS:12269-1987 Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland
Cement ( First Revision)

1.1.2 Other Technical Publications

1 Concrete Manual: USBR
2 ASTM: (i) C-156-80 water retention test
(ii) C-309-81 Type -2 Liquid membrane forming
compound for curing concrete
(iii) C-491-80 Water Reducing Agent
(iv) E-97 Light reflectance Test
(v) C-494-80
3 Design Aids for Reinforced Concrete SP-16(S&T)-1980
To IS: 456-2000
4 CBIP: (Manual on Canal Lining)
Note:(i)Generally the Bureau of Indian Standard code will be followed
for all items of works. Whenever this code does not exist the
reference will be taken to other technical publications directed by
Engineer-In-Charge.
(ii)Latest Version of IS and other publications shall be used.

1.1.3 LIST OF CODES AND STANDARDS

IS : 5 Colour for ready mixed paints & enamels
IS : 226 Structural steel (standard quality)
IS : 280 Mild steel wires for electrical wiring installation
IS : 694 PVC insulated cables up to 1100 V
IS : 732 Code of practice for electric wiring installation upto 650V
IS : 800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS : 875 Wind loads
IS : 1161 ERW Pipes
IS : 1239 Mild Steel tubes
101
IS : 1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of electric cables
IS : 1544 1.1 KV grade PVC Cables
IS : 1569 Capacitors for discharge lamps circuits
IS : 1777 Industrial luminaries with metal reflectors
IS : 1913 General and safety requirements for luminaries
IS : 1944 Code of practice for lighting
IS : 1947 Flood lights
IS : 2062 Steel grades
IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for LT switch gear
IS : 2149 Luminaries for street lighting
IS : 2208 HRC cartridge fuse links up to 650V
IS : 2551 Danger notice plates
IS : 2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanizing of steel
IS : 2633 Methods of testing uniformity of zinc coating
IS : 2959 Contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000 V AC
IS : 3043 Code of practice for earthing
IS : 3202 Climate proofing of electrical equipments
IS : 3961 Recommended current ratings for PVC insulated cables
IS : 4012 Dust proof electrical lighting fittings
IS : 4013 Dust tight electrical lighting fittings
IS : 4064 Air break switches for voltage not exceeding 1000 V AC
IS : 4237 General requirement of switch gear not exceeding 1000 V AC
IS : 4983 DWC Pipes
IS : 5077 Decorative lighting outfits
IS : 5216 Recommendations on safety procedures and practices in electrical work
BS: 5649 Lighting Columns
IS : 5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS : 6616 Ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapor lamps
IS : 6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting
IS : 6875 Specification of control switches for voltage not exceeding 1000 V AC
IS : 7098 1.1 KV grade XLPE Cables
IS : 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables

102
IS : 8623 Factory built assemblies of switchgear up to 1000 V AC
IS : 8828 MCBs for AC circuits not exceeding 1000 V AC
IS : 9224 Low voltage fuses
IS : 9974 High pressure sodium vapor lamps
IS : 10322 Luminaries
IS : 10810 Methods of tests for cables
High mast & mid-hinged pole shafts
TR-7 of ILE

103
(B) Important Clauses of Indian Electricity Rules 1956. Following clauses of Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956 shall in particular betaken care of in the execution of
electrical works
Clause No. Subject
3. Authorization:
29. Construction, installation, protection, operation and maintenance of electric supply
lines and apparatus.
31. Cut-out on consumer's premises.
32. Identification of earthed and earthed neutral conductors and position of switches-
and cutouts therein.
33. Earthed terminal on consumer's premises.
36. Handling of electrict supply lines and apparatus.
41. Distinction of circuits of differents voltages.
42. Accidental charge.
43. Provisions applicable to protective equipment.
44. Instructions for restoration of persons suffering from electric shock.
45. Precautions to be adopted by consumers, owners, electrical contractors, Electrical
workmen and suppliers.
46. Periodical inspection and testing of consumer's, installation,
48. Precautions against leakage before connection.
50. Supply to consumers.
51. Provisions applicable to medium, high voltage installations.
58. Point of commencement of supply.
59. Precautions against failures of supply; Notice of failures.
61. Connection with earth, (Low and Medium Voltage system).
64. Use of energy at high and extra-high voltage system.
67. Connection with earth. (High & Extra-high voltage systage.)
68. General conditions as to transformation and control of energy. All clauses under
Chapter VIII on Overhead Lines!
137. Mode of entry.
138. Penalty for breaking seal.
139. Penalty for breach of rule 45.
140. Penalty for breach of rule 82.
141. Penalty for breach of rules.

104
 (c ) National Electrical Code & Indian Electricity
Rules

INDIAN STANDARDS ON LED PUBSLISHED

Following Indian Standards on LED have been published.

IS No Title
General Lighting ‐ LEDs and LED modules –
1. 16101 : 2012 Terms and
Definitions
Self‐ Ballasted LED‐Lamps for General
2. 16102(Part 1) : 2012 Lighting Services
Part 1 Safety Requirements
Self‐Ballasted LED‐Lamps for General
3 16102(Part 2) : 2012 Lighting Services Pa
Performance Requirements
Led Modules for General Lighting‐ Safety
4 16103(Part 1) : 2012 Requirements
Lamp Control Gear Part 2 Particular
5 15885(Part 2/Sec 13) : 2012 Requirements Section
a.c. Supplied Electronic Control gear for Led
Modules
d.c. or a.c. Supplied Electronic Control Gear
6 16104 : 2012 for LED Mod
Performance Requirements
Method of Measurement of Lumen
7 16105 : 2012 Maintenance of Solid
Light (LED) Sources
Method of Electrical and Photometric
8 16106 : 2012 Measurements of S
Lighting (Led) Products
Photo biological Safety of Lamps and Lamp
9 16108 : 2012 Systems

105
 FREQUENCY OF TESTING

Sr.No Test Frequency Acceptance Criteria

1 2 3 4
(A) Earthwork
Standard 1 per 1000 m3 per source
1.5 to 1.7 gm/cc.
1 Compaction
2 Field dry density 1 per 300 m3 (i) 95% density of standard
Minimum one in each compaction
zone per layer (ii) Moisture content shall be +
2% of O.M.C

(B) Cement one sample of 15 Kg. collected from 2% bags of 50 T. lot.

(i) Setting Time
(a) Initial setting Time00 to 50 T. – 1 sample (a) Initial time- Not less than 30
minutes

(b) Final setting time 50 to 100 T. – 2 sample(b) final time- No more than
600 minutes
(ii) Fineness (By100 to 200 T. - 3 sample
90% or more shall pass from 90
sieving) micron sieve.
(iii) Consistency Test 200 to 300 T. - 4 sample About 30 percent
(iv) Compressive For O.P.C
Strength Minimum 160 Kg/cm2 at 3
300 to 400 T. - 5 sample
days.
Minimum 220 Kg/cm2 at 7
500 to 800 T. - 6 sample
days.
800 to 1300 T.-7 sampleMinimum 330 Kg/cm2 at 28
days.

Fine Aggregate(Sand)
(C)
(i) Silt content 1 per 150 m3 Upto 3%
106
(ii) Fineness modulus1 per 150 m3 2.6 to 3.78
Coarse Aggregate(Metal)
(D)
(i) Gradation Test 100 C.M. -1
Shall confirm to Mix Design
Test
101 to 500 C.M. -1
(ii) Flakiness Test Test Maximum up to 20%
501 to 1500 C.M. -1
Test
Maximum up to 30%
(iii) Impact Test 1501 to 5000 C.M. -1
Test
(iv) Soundness Test 2 per season Sodium Sulphate maximum
20% & with Magnesium
Sulphate maximum 30%
(v) Specific Gravity &2 per season Specific Gravity 2.5 to 3.0
water Absorption
Water absorption 1 to 1.5%

1 2 3 4
(E) Water
T.D.S - 300 mg/lit.
(i) Chemical Analysis1 per source
Sulphate - 500 mg/lit
Cloride - 6 to 8
Organic(Carbonic) Substances
200 mg/lit
InOrganic(Non-Carbonic)
Substances 300 mg/lit

(F) Ordinary & Controlled Concrete IS 456-2000

107
 (i) Compressive For concrete of different grade
Strength the
specified strength shall be as
1 to 5 C.M. -1 Sampleunder :
5 to 15 C.M. -2
Sample
16 to 30 C.M. -3
Sample
31 to 50 C.M. -4 7 Days 28 Days
Grade 2
Sample (Kg/cm (Kg/cm2
51 C.M. & above
4+1 Sample for each
C.M. or part thereof.
50
Note :a) 1 Sample= 6
M-10 70 100
Specimen of 15cm x
M-15 105 150
15cm x 15cm cube )
M-25 175 250
b) At least 1
Sample for a day's
work
(ii) Slump Test 1 per day 60 mm to 80 mm
(G) TMT Steel Qty
Lot below 100 tonne Lot above 100 tonne
1 sample from each
Under 10 mm 25tonne 1 sample from each 40tonne
1 sample from each
10 to 16 mm 35tonne 1 sample from each 45tonne
1 sample from each
Over 16 mm 45tonne 1 sample from each 50tonne

108
SHOWING THE DETAILS OF WIRES WITH PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Mesh Type Hexagonal 10 x 10 cms Specification

Mesh Opening D mm 100 ( Between axis of Twists) EN 10223

Mesh Tolerance (+) 16% to (-) 4% EN 10223

For length &Width +/-5%;
Tolerances (Box) For Depth D = < 0.30 m +/-10% ASTM A975
D = > 0.30 m +/- 5%

Characteristics Zn + PVC

Mesh wire Dia. mm 2.20 + 1.0 EN 10223

tolerance (+/-) 0.08 BS 1052

Zn coating Min(Gsm) 230 ASTM A641

Selvedge wire dia mm 2.70 + 1.0 EN 10223

tolerance (+/-) 0.10 BS 1052

Zn coating Min(Gsm) 260 ASTM A641

Lacing wire Dia mm 2.2 + 1.0 ASTM A975

tolerance (+/-) 0.06 BS 1052

Zn coating Min (Gsm) 220 ASTM A641

Nominal mm 0.50 ASTM A975

Minimum 0.40 ASTM A975

109
 Table 1
Material Tests Required To Be Carried Out For G.I.Wire And P.V.C.Granuals.

Galvanized wire PVC coating

Test Value Specification Test Value Specification
Tensile 350 to 500 Between 50- ASTM D 2240
strength N/mm2 EN 10223 Hardness shore 'D'

Grey RAL ASTM D 1482

Elongation 10% min EN 10223 Colour 7037

Adhesion of Tensile 20.6 Mpa ASTM D 412

No Flakes EN 10244 strength Min
ZN
Specific 1.3 to 1.35 ASTM D 792
Gravity
Abrasion < 12% Wt. ASTM D 1242
Resist Loss
Salt Spray Test
No effect ASTM B 117

Exposure to No effect ASTM A 975

UV

110
 ITEM WISE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Excavation of Structures (Item No.1,2,3,8,22)

1.0 Excavation for structures

1.1 Scope of work:-

(a) The section covers specificationforItem No.1,2,3,8,22

(b) The work to be done under these specification shall consist of furnishing all
tools, plant, labour and material required for carrying out excavation in all
strata as defined in P.W.D. Hand – Book Vol-1 1960, and it's latter revision
conveyance and disposal of the excavated stuff in varying leads maximum
up to as mentioned in the description of items, maintaining the excavated
slopes and trenches for the canal, drainage, diversion channels, drain
ditches, trenches for pipes, training and re-gradation of nallas and catch-
water drains, excavation for diversion of kotar / nallas, excavation for road
approaches and inspection path, excavation for foundation of structures,
approach channel and tail channel for the structures as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge and all operations covered within the intent and purpose
of these items. Additional excavation necessary beyond the foundation
excavation as shown on drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge
in writing shall also be a part of this work.

(c) The Contractor shall construct and maintain good diversion, in case the
existing communication lines are disturbed due to excavation of structures,
precautionary measures such as night lamp, danger fencing, signals etc.
shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost to avoid accident on the
communication lines because of construction activities.

(d) The work to be done under these specifications shall consist of excavation of
structure

111
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS:

Item No.1:-

Excavation for foundation in all sorts of soil including yellow, sandy, gravelly
soil, soft & hard murrum, etc. dry condition including depositing the excavated
stuff in uniform layers in banks or as directed etc. complete for lead up to 1.0
Km and all lifts.(By machinery (A) Above water table.

Item No. 2

Excavation for foundation in soft rock including depositing the excavated stuff
as and where directed etc. complete for lead up to 1.0 km and all lifts. (By
machinery) (b) Below water table.

Item No.3:-
Excavation for foundation in hard rock including blasting and chiseling if
necessary sorting out and stacking separately the usable rubble, depositing the
excavated stuff as and where directed including back filing trenches with
suitable excavated stuff etc. complete for lead up to 1.0 Km. and all lifts. (By
machinery), (b) Below water table.

Item No.8
Backfilling the foundation trenches around the structures etc. with selected
excavated stuff including watering, ramming, compacting etc. complete.(By
machinery)

Item No.22:-

Excavation for foundation in all sorts of soil including yellow, sandy, gravelly
soil, soft & hard murrum, etc. dry condition including depositing the excavated
stuff in uniform layers in banks or as directed etc. complete for lead up to 1.0
Km and all lifts.(By machinery (a) Above water table.

112
1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS :

The following applicable publications with latest revision shall be applicable

1.3.1 Indian Standard :

(1) I.S. 1498-1970 : Classification and identification of soils for

- general Engineering purpose (First revision)
(Amendment No.1 & 2)

(2) I.S. 2720 – : Method of test for soil (Part I to X and XIV)
1983 -

(3) IS : 3764 – :  Safety code for excavation work.

1966 - Amendment No.1)

(4) IS : 4081 – :  Safety code for blasting and related

1986 - drilling operations.

(5) IS : 4668 – :  Ammonium nitrate for explosives

1985 - (First revision) Amendment No. 1 of 1989)

(6) IS:4701-1982 : Code of practice of earthwork on Canal

-

(7) IS : 5441 – : Portable pneumatic drilling machines

1986 -

(8) IS : 6609 – : Method of test for commercial blasting

1973 - explosives and accessories (Part – I to V )

(9) IS : 7209 – : General requirements for blast hole drilling

1974 - rigs

(10) IS : 7293 – : Safety code for working with construction

1974 - machinery

(11) IS : 7632 – : Specification for detonators.

1975 -

113
 (12) IS: 11315 – : Classification of Strata
1987 -
(Part – 5)

1.3.2 Other publications :

(1) USBR : Earth manual (Second Edition 1974 –

- Reprinted 1985)

(2) Government of : The Indian Explosive Act.

India -

(3) Central water : Safety Manual

commission -

Note :- Generally the Bureau of Indian Standard code will be followed for all items
of works. Whenever this code does not exist the reference will be taken to
other technical publication directed by Engineer - in – Charge.

Other relevant IS and provisions shallalso be applicable.

1.4 SETTING OUT WORKS :-

(a) In the vicinity of the there are M type bench marks fixed by survey of India
and temporary bench marks established by the WRD which will serve as
control points for these works. If permanent or temporary benchmark is not
available near the site, the contractor shall have to take the permanent
location on near by structure and considering the arbitrary benchmark,
reference benchmarks shall be established along the canal alignment as per
requirement. The Contractor shall establish sufficient number of reference
bench marks for facilitating setting out of work and taking levels for purpose
of measurements.

(b) Before starting any work, the contractor shall erect reference bench marks,
reference lines and check profiles at convenient locations approved by
the Engineer – in – Charge. The bench mark shall be 20 cm x 20 cm x
60cm with 40 cm embedded in firm ground and 20 cm projecting
114
 above ground. The word “B.M.” showing value of R.L. shall be
conspicuously carved and painted on the bench mark. The reference line shall
comprise the base line properly dogbelled on the ground with the numbered
concrete / masonry pillars suitably spaced and dully numbered.

(c) The check profiles shall be located 30 m apart or closer as directed by the
Engineer – in – Charge so as to ensure execution of all slopes, steps and
elevation to the profile or profiles indicated in the approved drawings. All
important levels and all control points with respect to bench marks and
reference lines shall be fixed and co-related by the Engineer- in – Charge.

(d) All equipments (theodolites, levels, distometer etc.), materials and labour for
setting out works including construction of bench marks, reference lines,
check profiles and surveys, as may be required at the various stages of
construction, shall be supplied by the Contractor at his cost. The cost of such
work shall be deemed to have been included in the costs of the items in the
Schedule – B. At each site minimum following numbers of equipments shall
be provided and maintained in good condition by the contractor.

(i) Theodolites (Accuracy 1 second) 1 Nos

(ii) Levels 2 Nos
(iii) Staffs 3 Nos
(iv) Tapes, Chains, ranging rods etc. as required
All equipment shall be of standard and approved make and precision, and
shall be made available well in advance of starting of the work. All
equipment shall be maintained, repaired and got tested and certified as and
when required for its accuracy from the standard test houses or from the
manufacturers and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in– Charge.

Cost of all above shall be deemed to have been included in the rates of the
items included in the Bill of Quantities.

1.5 PREPARATION OF SITE:

1.5.1 Clearing the site:

(a) The contractor shall clear the entire area, required for setting out of all trees
stumps, roots, bushes, brush wood, rubbish of all kind loose stones and all
115
 other objectionable materials. The ownership of all the useful materials so
removed from clearing site and / or excavation shall rest with the WRD.
Cutting of all trees up to 0.50 m girth shall be covered in this item. The
contractor shall have to remove all the stumps and roots of trees for which
no additional payment shall be made. The roots of trees shall be grubbed to
an adequate depth below the ground to remove the entire roots. The
contractor shall dispose off all such materials as directed by the Engineer –
in – charge. No separate payment shall be made for this activity.

(b) Stripping

Before commencing the excavation for structure, stripping shall be carried

out if requires as per site condition. The contractor shall have to remove the
unusable soil from the top portion in a depth of @ 10 to 30 cm as directed
by the Engineer-in-charge for removing the roots of vegetation and other
unusable substances. No payment shall be made to the contractor separately
for this activity. The excavated stuff shall be removed as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.

1.5.2 RECORDING OF CROSS SECTIONS:

(a) After clearing the site prior to the beginning of excavation, initial levels
shall be taken at 3x3 meter grid or closer depending on the nature of ground
up to sufficient distance outside the limit of work and recorded in the field
book in presence of the contractor or his authorized representative. and
entered in ink in the field books by the Engineer – in – Charge in the
presence of the contractor or his authorized agent if he so desires and these
shall be binding to the contractor. The contractor or his authorized agent
shall sign the field book in token of acceptance of levels. These cross
sections shall form the basis of all future measurements and payments. The
original cross section duly signed by the contractor and by the Engineer – in
– Charge shall be preserved in safe custody by the Engineer – in – Charge.
Each dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0.01m. Any dimension
greater than 25m shall be measured with a precision of 0.1m. Areas shall be
computed to 0.01 m2 and Volumes shall be computed to 0.01 m3.

116
 These cross sections shall form the basis of all future measurements and
payments. The original cross sections duly signed by the contractor and the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be preserved in safe custody of Engineer-in-
Charge.
(b) No separate payment shall be made to the contractor for the labour,
equipment (theodolite, levels, distometer etc.) and materials required for
taking the cross sections.

1.6 PLANNING :

(a) Prior to the commencement of the work, all relevant data shall be collected
by the contractor and drawings shall be prepared by him showing the
location of the excavation, stripping and filling etc. On these drawings both
the excavation and filling if any should be shown and the quantity of
material to be excavated and filled shall be stated clearly. From the nature of
material to be excavated and the method of its disposal, the type of
excavation, the length of haul, it should be possible to select the most
suitable type of equipment for a particular job. The contractor shall present
his planning of the work along with required details to the Engineer-in–
Charge at least 15 days before starting the work. The contractor shall be
allowed to excavate as per the sequence of excavation shown in the drawing.

(b) The location and design of magazines for explosives, method of their
storage, transport and general precautions to be taken by the contractor to
prevent accidents, shall be in accordance with the provision of the Indian
Explosive Act and regulations and rules framed there under.

1.7 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL :

Except or otherwise provided in these specifications, material excavated will

be measured for excavation to the lines shown on the drawings or as
provided in these specifications, and all materials required to be excavated
will be paid for at the applicable rates in the schedule – B for excavation. No
additional allowance above the rates quoted in the schedule – B shall be
made on account of any of the material being moist, wet or slushy. Bidders
and the contractors must assume all responsibility for deduction and
117
 conclusions as to the nature of the materials to be excavated and difficulties
of making and maintaining the required excavation.

Classification of the soil :-

Excavation for structure foundation in overburden, soil, sand and murrum
includes all excavation to be done in strata other than soft and hard rock
which covers excavation in all kinds of soils such as brown soil, reddish soil,
black soil, clay, sand, gravel and murrum or mixtures of any of these soils. It
shall also include removal of boulders which are embedded in soil and can
be removed by pick bar and shovel without blasting.

The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge in connection with the classification

of excavation shall be final and shall remain binding to the contractor.

1.8 Dewatering: -
Dewatering is required to be carried out at Every stage of excavation and
Concrete and the activity is included and no separate payment will be made.

1.9 EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATION AND DISPOSAL OF THE

EXCAVATED STUFF :-

1.9.1 The contractor shall have to prepare the excavation plan and got approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge. The excavation for foundation shall be carried
out true line and level and shall have width and depth as shown in the
drawing or as directed. The contractor shall do the necessary shoring and
strutting or providing necessary slope to a safe angle at his own cost. The
bottom of the excavated area shall be both longitudinally and transversely as
directed for removing and dewatering as required by the Engineer-in-charge.
1.9.2 No earth filling will be allowed for bringing to level if by mistake or any
other excavation is made deeper or wider than that shown on the plan or
directed. The extra depth or width shall be made with concrete of same
proportion as specified for the foundation concrete at the cost of the
contractor.

118
1.9.3 The item shall include all labour and materials cost involved in excavation in
wet, dry or slushy condition and removal of excavated materials and
stacking and disposal etc. as per the instruction of the Engineer-in-charge in
accordance with drawing.
1.9.4 The shall have to remove all jungle i.e. shrubs, hedges, bushes vegetation
etc. as per the directive of the Executive Engineer.
1.9.5 The item shall include excavation in all sort of soil including sand, hard clay,
soft murrum in dry or slushy condition, soft rock, hard rock and stacking
and disposing the excavated stuff in manner as per the instruction of
Engineer-in-charge, refilling the foundation trenches, as directed.
1.9.6 The contractor shall provide necessary materials and labours and make
necessary arrangement to get line out from the Executive Engineer or his
authorized representative. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to
install sufficient reference points, bench marks etc. at his own cost and
maintain during the construction period.
1.9.7 The contractor shall perform all excavation for foundation in accordance
with line, levels, width and depth as shown on plans. If the executive
engineer or competent authority decides to take the foundation lower than
the foundation level shown on the plan, the same will have to be done by the
contractor at the same rate quoted by him for the item unless there is change
in strata, for which rates as per corresponding item shall be paid. He shall
have to preserve a clean, even and dry surface for the foundation to the
satisfaction of the engineer-in-charge for passing.
1.9.8 The excavation beyond the lines and level specified on the plan shall not be
measured and paid for unless it is passed by the engineer-in-charge in
writing. If excess excavation is done than required, it shall be filled up with
concrete or masonry of the same type as used for foundation at his own cost
and risk.
1.9.9 The sides of the excavated trenches shall be left plumb where nature of soil
admits of it the sides shall be strutted and shored carefully and adequately,
where they are liable to fall. The contractor shall clear the foundation
trenches of loose materials at his cost. The govt. shall not be responsible for
119
 any accident occurring due to slip or any other cause whatsoever may be.
The contractor shall be held responsible and liable to pay all claims under
workman compensation act.
1.9.10 The excavated materials from foundation trenches shall be dumped (not
nearer than 50 mt. and up to 1 (one km)) sufficiently away from the edge of
foundation as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
1.9.11 The bottom of foundation shall be dressed perfectly in level as directed and
all loose and soft materials shall be removed before laying of concrete.
Before laying of concrete, it shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-
charge.
1.9.12 The whole of the excavated material shall be brought to the surface and
disposed off as directed.
1.9.13 The excavated stuff of the selected type shall be used in filling the trenches or
leveling the ground in layers including ramming and watering the finished
formation levels, in case of filling shall be kept higher than the required
levels by making an allowance of 10% of depth of filling for future
settlement in case of ordinary consolidated fills and 5% in case where the
consolidation is done by heavy mechanical means. The balance of the
excavated quantity shall be removed by the contractor from the site of work
to a place as directed with lead up to 1.0 Km. and all lift.
1.9.14 The Excavated materials shall be deposited either on River Banks or in spoil
banks in uniform layers as directed by the Engineer-in-charge within a
specified lead. All usable material shall be stacked separately as directed.
1.9.15 The excavated stuff when deposited in spoil banks shall be so deposited as not
to obstruct any roads, tracks or natural drainage and not to interfere with
the construction, operation and maintenance of the work.
1.9.16 It should be noted that the contractor shall have to spoil the excess material at
least 1.0 Km away from the Structure. To facilitate the spoiling of the
materials the contractor shall have to construct the approach to bank in
advance so as to match with the Dam excavation and the spoiling of the
stuff as indicated above.
1.9.17 When the excavated material is required to be used for approach road or for
adjacent spoil bank, the lead involved shall be measured along the center
120
 line of River considering 30 m length of block as a unit and when the
excavated material is required to be used for other than approach road and
spoil banks, the lead involved shall be measured from the block of 30 m
length to the place of dumping as a straight line distance i.e. shortest
possible distance.

1.9.18 The contractor shall not sale or otherwise dispose off or remove except for
the purpose of contract / as per contract, the sand, clay, ballast, earth, soft
rock, hard rock or other substances or materials which may be obtained
from any excavation made for the purpose of the contract or produce upon
the site at time of delivery of the position of the land, but all substances,
materials, and produce shall be the property of the Government and shall be
dispose off in the manner and the place with all lead and lift where the
Engineer-in-charge may direct , which is available from excavation. The
contractor shall however, use such of the excavated useful materials or
stones, obtained from excavations as the Engineer-in-charge may direct
and approve. The selection, sorting and stacking shall be done according to
the directions of the Engineer-in charge free of charge by the contractor.
The sorting of useful excavated materials as above must be inclusive in
quoted rates.
1.9.19 After sorting of useful materials is done, the rest of the materials which is
declared not useful shall be disposed off in areas as directed with all leads
and lifts.
1.9.20 No materials shall be disposed where it will detract from the appearance or
interfere with the accessibility of the complete structures. Waste shall be
leveled and trimmed to reasonable regular lines and all the work shall be
done with reasonable neatness, excavated materials shall not be carelessly
thrown over the entire premises of work, but shall be deposited directly in
permanent position, consistent with proper execution of work. The
directives of Engineer-in-charge shall be binding in respect of location of
disposing the waste materials.
1.9.21 Dewatering Trenches & Wet Excavation
Surface or subsoil water met with during excavation shall be diverted to
nearby drain/ nalla by cutting an open channel as per site situation. When
the drain/nalla bed is higher than the subsoil water level met with, the

121
 bailing out by suitable means of pumping shall be resorted to for dewatering
in subsoil water below the drain/nalla bed level. In case where topography of
the areas is such that surface water including accumulation of rain water
during monsoon period is not possible to drain off by excavating the
channel, the bailing out by suitable means of pumping shall be resorted to
and no distinction shall be made as to whether the material being excavated
is dry moist, wet or slushy.
1.9.22 The ground water table is subject to variation during the construction period
and may vary for full depth of cutting. The Contractor shall have to carry out
the excavation work in such conditions during the construction period without
any extra cost/claim. The contractor shall have to visit the site of work, make
assessment of situation and accordingly to quote the rates.
1.9.23Tolerance
Finished section shall have a neat and smooth profile as per designed section
over cuts and under cuts shall not exceed 2.5 cm. except soft and hard rock.
For soft rock and hard rock over cut beyond specified pay line of excavation
carried out by the contractor for any purpose or reasons unless at the specified
direction of Engineer-in-charge shall be at expenses of contractor. Refilling if
require of such unauthorized excavation with concrete/masonry or other
suitable materials as may be directed by the Engineer-in-charge shall also be
done by the contractor at his own expenses.
1.9.24Desilting of Foundation
Any silting in the Foundation excavation partly or fully completed occurs due
to any reason including rains, the silt so accumulated shall be removed till the
work is completed and accepted by Department as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge. No extra payment shall be made to contractor for desilting or slush
clearance.
1.10 Pay Line :-

(a) The measurement for excavation for structures shall include only the
required excavation below the original ground surface measured to the

dimensions and slopes specified below.

122
 Sr Strata of excavation Typ Slope
. e for pay
No. of line
soil (H : V)
1 Silty sand, poorly graded sand – silt mixtures SM 1.5 to 1

2 Well graded sand, gravelly sand, little or no SW 2:1

fines
Poorly graded sand or gravelly sand, little or SP
no fines
Silty sand, poorly graded sand – silt mixtures SM

Clayey sand, poorly graded sand clay SC

mixtures
3 Inorganic clay, gravelly clay, sandy clay, CL 1.25:1
silty clay, lean clay of low plasticity
Inorganic silt, silty or clayey fine sand or
clayey silt of medium plasticity MI
Inorganis clay, gravelly clay, sandy clay, silty
clay, lean clay of medium plasticity CI

4 Soil, soft murrum & Hard murrum 1 to 1

5 Soft Rock 0.50 to

1

6 Hard Rock 0.25 to

1

(b) Pay line shall be considered as per drawing in case the actual foundation
level is as per design foundation level. If the actual foundation level is lower
than the design foundation level, the pay line shall be considered as per
drawing up to designed foundation level and as per actual excavation
beyond the designed foundation level. In case if the actual foundation level
is higher than the designed foundation level, the pay line shall be considered

123
 as per drawing considering designed foundation level but shall be restricted
up to actual foundation level.

(c) No payment shall be made for any work done beyond the specified pay line.
Not with standing the standards given above the contractor shall however be
permitted to excavated at flatter slopes in interest of stability and safety of
work without extra cost. The contractor shall take care to see that the slopes
excavated are stable and accident or slip does not occur.

(d) UNDER CUTS AND OVER CUTS:

In the event of actual line of excavation being steper than that specified
under pay line above, payment shall be made for the actual line of
excavation only. Over cut beyond specified pay line of excavation carried
out by the contractor for any purpose or reasons unless at the specified
direction of Engineer-in-charge shall be at expenses of contractor. Refilling
required of such unauthorized excavation with concrete, masonry or other
suitable materials, as may be directed by the Engineer in charge shall also be
done by the contractor at his own expenses.
(e) The excavated trenches filled up due to monsoons or any other reasons shall
be cleared as directed by the Engineer-in-charge by the contractor without
any extra cost to Government.
(f) Any shoring and strutting that may be required during excavation and
progress of work shall be deemed to be covered by the rates quoted for the
respective item of excavation.

1.11 Government is not responsible for any slips/sides. :-

The contractor shall have to take care and precautionary measures that there
may not be any Slips/sides. If any slip/slides occur on account of any
reasons, the excavation shall be properly restored to stability. No extra claim
shall be entertained for such slip/slides and their consequences. If any
accident occur due to slips/slides contractor shall be fully responsible for
damage to machinery and man power including death. The contractor shall
have to bear all the cost including paymentof all compensation which may
arise due to accident.

124
1.12Excavation for structure : (Item No. 1& 22)

Item No.1:- Excavation for foundation in all sorts of soil including yellow,
sandy, gravelly soil, soft & hard murrum, etc. dry condition including
depositing the excavated stuff in uniform layers in banks or as directed etc.
complete for lead up to 1.0 Km and all lifts.(By machinery)

(a) above water table.

Item No. 22:-

Excavation for foundation in all sorts of soil including yellow, sandy,

gravelly soil, soft & hard murrum, etc. dry condition including depositing
the excavated stuff in uniform layers in banks or as directed etc. complete
for lead up to 1.0 Km and all lifts.(By machinery (a) Above water table.

1.12.1 General
(a) The foundation levels shown on the plans accompanying the tenders are
tentative and the actual levels shall be decided by the Engineer - in - Charge
on the basis of construction stage drawing & actual site conditions revealed
after opening of the foundation. The construction stage drawing will be
provided stage wise and work shall be carried out as directed by Engineer -
in – Charge.
(b) The excavation for structures shall be done for all type of soils, sand,
murrum, soft rock & hard rock etc. according to the dimensions and size
shown on the drawings. These drawings are tentative and subject to change
but drawing issued at the time of execution shall be considered final.

(c) Before start of the excavation for the first time the free water above the
ground level of the particular location of the structure shall have to be
dewatered. Then after the level of the ground surface whether in dry, wet or
slushy conditions so obtained shall be considered as initial level for the
purpose of measurements for excavation. However for such cases, the
decision of the Engineer-in-Charge for fixing initial level shall be
considered final. The excavation shall be in dry, wet, slushy or in muddy

125
 condition. The contractor shall have to carry out the excavation in the above
condition without claiming the extra cost.

(d) The pay line quantities will be to the dimensions shown on the drawings. If
the pay line is not shown on drawing or there is any discrepancy in drawing
the decision of Engineer-in-charge shall govern. However, the excavation
shall be as judged safe and all loose materials shall be removed prior to back
filling and compaction.

(e) The recommended side slopes for pay lines are considered as quite safe and
no shoring and strutting is necessary. However, if necessity arises, the
contractor shall have to provide shoring and strutting and scaffolding and
rate for excavation will be treated as inclusive of such costs.

(f) No extra payment shall be made for the required shorting and strutting.
(g) The contractor shall provide at his cost line pegs, nails, string, lime
powder and skilled and unskilled labours and other material and equipment
for lining out of the foundation for work. During excavation of earth under
this items, if the sub soil water is met at a lower to the foundation level, the
contractor shall have to make arrangement for dewatering or pumping out
the entire quantity of water to keep foundation dry for which no additional
amount shall be payable to the contractor.

(h) Whenever ground water is met with during excavation for structures,
dewatering shall be resorted to by the contractor. No extra claim for
dewatering shall be entertained as the provision of the same shall be made in
relevant item.

(i) The excavation of structure shall include excavation in all types of soils
including yellow, sandy or gravelly soil, sand, soft and hard murrum, wet,
slushy or moist soil including capillary fringe.

(j) During rock excavation the contractor will not be allowed to dispose off the
rubble. Surplus usable rubble will be allowed to be used in construction
subject to approval of the Engineer-in-Charge regarding usability. WRD will
charge the cost for using such rubbles as per prevailing S.O.R.

126
 (k) Blasting shall be done in such a manner as not to cause over breakage which
is excessive in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge. Special care shall be
taken to prevent over breakages or loosening of material on bottom and side
slopes against which foundation concrete is to be done. Final cutting for 45
cm in hard rock shall be carried out by controlled blasting or chiselling or
with the help of pneumatic pavement breakers. If excavation is required to
be done within 30 m from the existing structure the same shall be carried out
by chiselling without resorting to blasting for which no extra rate shall be
payable. The method of drilling and blasting to be resorted to for hard rock
excavation shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.

1.12.2Over Excavation: -

(a) The work shall confirm to the true line & levels and shall be carried out
uniformly to the approved sections.Over excavation shall not be done
beyond the defined pay line. If any such over excavation is done, the same
shall be filled back with cement concrete of same grade as that may be used
and properly compacted or concrete filled as required or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. No extra claim for such over excavation, filling and
compaction of concrete / soil shall be entertained.

(b) The usable material removed from the excavation for structures shall be
used for back fill and embankment otherwise it shall be disposed off as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Item No:2 Excavation for foundation in soft rock including depositing the
excavated stuff as and where directed etc. complete for lead up to 1.0
Km and all lifts.(By machinery)
(b) below water table.
2.1 Excavation for foundation in soft rock

2.1.1 The relevant specification of item no. 1 shall be also be applicable except
that the excavation shall be carried out for foundation in soft rock not
requiring blasting.
2.1.2 The excavation in soft or disintegrated rock shall be carried out by crowbars,
pickaxes or pneumatic drills or any other suitable means.
127
 2.1.3 If contractor desires to resort so blasting, he can do so with permission of the
Engineer-in-charge but nothing extra shall be paid to him.
2.1.4 The materials available from soft rock, excavation shall be properly stacked
within 1.0Km. lead and up to as directed as above lift and shall be property of
department.
2.1.5 The classification of strata of the foundation soil shall be done by Engineer-
in-Charge and shall be acceptable to the contractor. However, this shall be
including the type of rock boulder which may be quarried or split with crow
bars, laterite and conglomerate also come under this category.

Item No:3

Excavation for foundation in hard rock including blasting and chiseling if

necessary, sorting out and stacking separately the usable rubble, depositing
the excavated stuff as and where directed including back filing trenches with
suitable excavated stuff etc. complete for lead up to 1.0 Km. and all lifts.(By
machinery)(b) below water table.

3.1. General

3.1.1 The relevant specification of item no. 1 and 2 shall be also be applicable except
that the excavation shall be carried out for foundation in hard rock requiring
blasting.
The item includes the excavation for foundation of structures in hard rock
including drilling, blasting and dewatering if required shall be done according to
the dimensions and levels shown on the drawings.
3.1.2 Usable hard rock
The contractor shall have to remove and stack usable hard rock from the site
immediately as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. In case while doing so if any kind
of problem arises due to occupancy of private land by such stacking and removal
of the same, it shall be entire responsibility of the contractor to resolve it including
compensation if any.

128
 3.1.3 The work is deemed to be carried out by machineries, or other suitable means as
approved by Engineer-in-charge.

3.2 Definition of lead and lift

3.2.1 Lead specified in item of excavation shall mean the longitudinal distance along the
River bank line parallel to the center line of the River and across River.
3.2.2 Lift in the item of excavation includes all the depth from mean ground to the River
bed level.

3.3 Recording initial cross-section

3.3.1 After clearing the site prior to the beginning of excavation, initial levels shall be
taken at 3x3 meter grid or at closer interval as per nature of ground up to sufficient
distance outside the limit of work and recorded in the field book in presence of the
contractor or his authorized representative. The cross-section shall from the base
for computing the quantities for payment. The levels shall be entered in ink or by a
ball pen in the field books by the Engineer-in-charge or his representative in the
presence of the contractor or his authorized agent if he so desires and these shall be
binding to the contractor. The contractor or his authorized agent shall have to sign
the field book and the cross-section in token of acceptance.
3.3.2 These cross-sections shall form the basis of all future measurements and payment.
The original cross-section duly signed by the contractor and the Engineer-in-
charge preserved in the safe custody of Engineer-in-charge.
3.3.3 No separate payment will be made to the contractor for the labour and material
required for taking this cross-section.

3.4 Use of Blasting materials :

3.4.1 General :
The contractor shall acquaint himself with all the applicable laws and regulations
concerning storing, handling and the use of explosive. All such laws, regulations
and rules etc. as are current from time to time shall be binding upon the contractor.
The provisions detailed in these rules are supplementary to the above laws rules
and regulations etc. and are applicable except where they conflict with the
aforementioned law etc. from time to time. Further the engineer may issue

129
 modifications alternations or new instructions from time to time; the contractor
shall comply with the same without these being made a cause for any claim.
For the blasting, the contractor shall have to get the permission from the competent
authority and follow and implement the conditions as may laid down in permission
at his cost. The Engineer-in-Charge may facilitate to get the permission.

3.4.2 Materials
All materials such as explosives detonators fuses, tamping materials etc that are
proposed to be used in the blasting operation shall have the prior approval of
Engineer-in-charge.
Black powder and safe explosives, (as commonly used in India) shall be used
wherever possible. Explosive with Nitro-glycerine shall only be used under
exceptional circumstances and where the above explosives are not effective.
The use of a fuse with only one protective coat is prohibited. The fuse shall be
sufficiently water resistant as to be unaffected when immersed in water for thirty
minutes. The rate of burning of the fuse shall be uniform and not less than 4 second
per inch of length with 10% tolerance on either side.
Before use, the fuse shall be inspected and the moist damaged or broken ones
discarded. The rate of burning of all new types of fuses or when they have been in
stock for long shall be tested before use.
The detonators used shall be capable of giving effecting blasting of the explosive.
Moist or damaged detonators shall be discarded.

3.4.3 Personnel :
Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under personal supervision of
competent and licensed persons and trained workmen deployed by the contractor.
All supervisors and workman in charge or makeup handling, storage and blasting
work shall be adequately insured by the contractors.
The storage shall be in charge of very reliable persons appointed by the contractor
in consultation with the Engineer who may if necessary, deal police Enquiries
being made as to his reliability. The Contractor shall have to produce a security for
the person in charge of the explosives if and as required by the Engineer, or the
civil authorities of the District.
The contractor shall make sure that his supervisors and workmen are fully
conversant with all the rules to be observed in storing, handling and use of the
130
 explosive. It shall be assured that the supervisor in charge, is thoroughly
acquainted with all the details of the handling and the blasting operations

3.4.4 Storage of Explosive:

The contractor shall build a magazine for storing the explosives. The site of the
magazine, its capacity and design shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and
the inspector of explosive before the construction is taken up. As a rule, the
explosive should be stored in a clean dry well ventilated bullet proof and fire proof
building or on isolated site.
The explosive, detonators and fused shall each be separately stored.
A careful and day to day account of the use of explosive shall be kept by the
contractor in an approved register and in an approved manner. The register shall
be produced by the contractor for the inspection of the Engineer-in-charge. When
so required by the later. The Engineer may also pay surprise visit to the storage
magazine. In case of any unaccountable shortage of the explosive or if the
account is not found to have been maintained in a manner prescribed by the
Engineer the contractor shall be liable to be penalized with forfeitures of security
deposit lodged by him with the government or his tender shall be liable to be
cancelled in which case he shall not be entitled to any compensation for the losses
etc. The action taken under this clause shall be in addition to that which might be
taken by the competent civil authorities in a court of law.
The magazine shall of all timed be kept scrupulously clean all the time. No
unauthorized person shall at any time be admitted inside the magazine.
The magazine shall, when not in use of authorized persons be kept well and
securely locked.
The magazine shall on no account be opened during or on the approach of a
thunderstorm and no person shall remain in the vicinity of the magazine during
such period.
Magazine shoes without nails shall, at all times be kept in the magazine, and a
wood-tub or cement through about 30cm high and 20cm in diameter filled with
water shall be fixed near the door of the magazine.Persons entering the magazine,
must put on the magazine shoes which shall be provided by the contractor for the
purpose and be careful.
(i) Not to put their feet on the clean floor unless they have the magazine shoes on.
(ii) Not to allow the magazine shoes to touch the ground outside the clean floor.
131
(iii) Not to allow any dirt or grit to fall on the clean floor.

Persons with barefoot, shall before entering the magazine dip their feet in water
and then step direct from the tub over the barrier (if there be one) on to the clean
floor.
Brush or broom shall be kept in the log by the magazine for cleaning out the
magazine on each occasion it is opened, for the receipt delivery or inspection of
explosives.
No matches or inflammable material shall be allowed in the magazine, light shall
be obtained from an electric storage battery later.
No persons having articles of steel or iron on him shall be allowed to enter the
magazine.
Oil, cotton waste and articles liable to spontaneous ignition, shall not be allowed
inside the magazine.
Workman shall be examined before they enter the magazine to see that they
havenone of the prohibited articles on their persons
No tools or implements other than those of copper brass, gunmetal or weed shall
be allowed inside the magazine. All tools shall be used with extreme genteiness
and care.
Boxes of explosive shall not be thrown down or dragged along the floor and shall
be stacked on wooden trestles. Where there are white ants, the legs of the trestles
should rest in shallow copper, lead or brass bowls containing water. Open boxes of
dynamite shall never be exposed to the direct rays of the sun.
Empty boxes or loose packing material shall not be kept inside the magazine.
The magazine shall have a lightning conductor, which shall be got tested at least
once a year, by an officer authorized by the Engineer, the testing fee shall be a
charged on the contractor which will be Rs.20 for each inspection. The contractor,
shall within 15 days comply with all the recommendations made by the affaire
testing the lightning conductor, failing which the Engineer, shall be entitled to
comply with the same at the contractor a expense, which shall not be opened to
question, or may consider any action that he may consider fit.
A notice shall be hung near the store prohibiting entrance of unauthorized persons.

The following shall be hung in the lobby of the magazine:

132
  A copy of rules both in English and in the languages which the workers
concerned are familiar with
 A statement showing the up to date stock in the magazine.
 A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lighting conductor.
 A notice that smoking is strictly prohibited.

The magazine will be inspected at least twice a year by on officer representing the
Engineer, who will see that all the rules are strictly complied with. He will notify
all commissions etc. to the contractor, who shall rectify the defects within a period
of 15 days from the date of receipt of the notice failing which the Engineer may
take appropriate action in this regard.

3.5 Use of Explosive:

For the transport of the explosive and detonators between the store and site, closed
and strong containers made of soft materials such as timber, zinc, copper, leather
and the like shall be used.
Explosive and detonators shall be carried in separate boxes and transported
separately. For the conveyance of primers special containers shall be used.
The boxes and containers used shall be kept well closed.
Explosive shall be stored and used chronologically to ensure the ones, received
earlier, being used first.
A make-up house shall be provided at each working place in which cartridges will
be made up by experienced man as required. The make-up house shall be separated
from other buildings. Only electric storage battery lamps shall be used in this
house.
No smoking shall be allowed in the make-up house.

3.6 Preparation of Primers:

 The primers shall not be prepared near upon flames: or fires. The work of
prepared of primers shall always be entrusted to the same personnel; primers shall
be used as soon as possible after they are ready.

133
3.7 Charging of Holes:
The work of charging shall not commence before all the drilling work of the site is
completed and the supervisor has satisfied him self to that effect by actual
inspection.
While charging, open lamps shall be kept away for charging with powdered
explosives, naked flame shall not be allowed.
Only wooden tamping roads, without any kind of metal on them, shall be allowed
to used.
Bore holes must be of such a size that the cartridges can easily pass down them.
Only one cartridge shall be inserted at a time and gently pressed hole with the
temping rod. the sand, clay or other tamping material used for filling the holes
completely shall not be tamped too hard.

3.8 Blasting:
Blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day, which shall have the
approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The hours once fixed shall not be altered
without prior written approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
The site of blasting operations shall be prominently demarcated by red Tapier flag.
The order to fire shall be given only by the supervisor in charge of the work and
this order shall be given only after giving the warning signal three times, so to
enable all the labour watchmen etc., to reach safe shelter and after having
ascertained that nobody is within the Tapier zone.
A bugle with a distinctive note shall be used to give the warning signal. This bugle
shall not be used for any other purpose. All the labour shall be made acquainted
with the sound of the bugle and shall be strictly warned to leave their work
immediately at the first warning signal and to make for safe shelters, and not to
leave the shelters until the clear signal has been given.
All the road and foot paths leading to the blasting area shall be watched.
In special cases, suitable extra precautions shall be taken. The Engineer may
however permit blasting for underground excavation without restriction of fixed
time, provided that, he is satisfied that proper precautions are taken to give
sufficient warning to all concerned and that the work of other agencies on the site
is not unduly hampered.
For, lighting the fuses, a lamp with a strong flame such as a carbide lamp shall be
used.
134
 The supervisor shall watch the time required for the firing of the fuses and shall see
that all the workmen are under safe shelters in good time.

3.9 Electrical firing:

Only the supervisor in charge shall kept key of the firing apparatus and he shall keep
it always with himself.
Special apparatus shall be used as a source of current for the blasting operations.
Power lines shall not be tapped for the purpose.
All the detonators shall be checked before use.
For blasts in one series only detonators of the same manufactures and of the same
group of electrical resistance shall be used.
Such of the electrical lines as could constitute Tapier for work of charging shall be
removed from the site.
The firing cable shall have a proper insulting cover so as to avoid short circulating
due to contact with water and metallic parts of rock. The use of the earth as a
return line shall not be permitted. The firing cable shall be connected to the source
of current only after ascertaining that nobody is in the area of blasting.
Before firing, the circuit shall be checked by a suitable apparatus.
After firing whether with or without an actual blast the contact between the firing
cable and the source of current, shall be cut off before any persons are allowed to
leave the shelters.
During storms, charging with electrical detonators shall be suspended. The charges
already placed into the holes shall be blasted as quickly as possible, after taking all
the safety and precaution giving necessary warning signals. If this is not possible,
the site shall be abandoned till the storm has passed.

3.10 Precautions after blasting.

After the blast, the supervisor shall carefully inspect the work and satisfy himself
that all the charges have exploded.
After the blast has taken place in underground works, the workmen shall not be
allowed to go to the face till all the toxic gases disappear from the face.

3.11 Misfires
It is suspected that part of the blast has failed to fire or is
delayedsufficienttimeshall be allowed to elapse before entering the Tapier zone.
135
 When fuses and blasting caps are used, a safe time should be allowed and then
the supervisor alone shall leave the shelter to see the misfire.
Drilling near the hole that has misfired shall not be permitted. Until one of the two
following operations have been carried out by the supervisor.
(i) The supervisor should very carefully (When the tamping is of damp clay) extract
the tamping with a wooden scarper or jet of water or compressed air (using a pipe
of soft material) and withdraw the fuse with the primer and detonator attached. A
fresh primer and detonator with fuse shall then be placed in this hole and fired.
(ii) The supervisor shall get one of the tamping cleared off and indicate the direction
by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled at least 9" away
and parallel to it, this hole should then be charged and fired. The balance of the
cartridges and detonators found in the muck shall be removed.

Before leaving his work, the supervisor should inform the supervisor of the
relieving shift of any case of misfire and shall point cut the position with a red
cross denoting the same and also state that action. if any, he taken in the zatter.
The supervisor shall at once report to the office all cases if misfire, the cause of the
misfire the steps taken in connection therewith.
The names of the supervisor in-charge of day and night shift must be noted daily in
the contractor’s office.
If a misfire has been found to be due to defective detonator, or dynamite, the whole
quantity of box from which the defective articles was taken, must be returned to
the authority as may be directed by the Engineer-in- charge for inspection to
ascertain whether the whole box containing defective materials.
Re-drilling the holes that have misfired either wholly or partly shall not be
permitted.

3.12 SHORING AND STRUTTING:

To avoid sliding of earthen side slopes necessary shoring & strutting shall be done
using wooden or M.S. sections looking to the situation of site and as directed by
the Engineer in charge, If directed layout/ for such shoring &strutting shall be get
approved. Dewatering shall be done by bailing water or by operating pump set or
by any other means without any extra cost.

136
3.13 Maintenance
The excavated foundation shall be maintained satisfactorily and protected by the
contractor at his own cost against all damage, till it is taken over by the
department. No extra payment shall be made to contractor for such maintenance.

3.14 Accident:
The contractor shall be fully responsible if any accident occurs due to carelessness in
the blasting as well as careless in storage and preservation and safety of explosives,
any all the damages and claims shall be paid by the contractor if any arise.

3.15 Mode of Measurement and Payment(Item No.1,2,3,22)

(a) All items of excavation shall be measured and paid in cubic meter basis.
The quantity of excavation shall be computed from the initial and final
cross-section as described earlier in relevant Para. No payment shall be
entertained for any excavation beyond pay line.
(b) No claim for extra rate will be entertained for any excavation that may be
required to be done for widening or deepening the foundations consequent
upon lowering foundation below the level shown on the drawings or in
met soil. The works so done will be paid at the tendered rates of item.
(c) The rate of excavation includes the excavation process, clearing of site,
prescribed lead & lifts, disposal of excavated stuff as stipulated in the
specifications, providing all tools plant machineries labor and material,
shoring and strutting where required preparation and maintenance of haul
roads, transport of excavated material to temporary stock pits/disposal
areas of point of final use, maintaining excavated slopes and trenches in
wet condition including dewatering if any etc. complete.
(D) The rates also include cost of all incidental operations required for carrying
out the work in accordance with the specifications.
(e) When the classification of the strata changes, the contractor shall bring
this to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge, who will then verify and
take levels for the changed strata for purpose of measurement and shall
be signed by the contractor in token of acceptance and the work shall not
be started before the levels so taken are signed.

137
(f) No extra rate shall be payable for excavation below designed depth
shown on the drawings. No claim for extra rate shall be entertained for
any excavation that may be required to be done for widening or
deepening the foundations consequent upon lowering of foundation
below the level shown on the drawings. The works so done will be paid
at the tendered rates of the item.
(g) No extra rate shall be payable for excavation of loose boulders which are
embedded in soil and can be removed by pick bar and shovel without
blasting.
(h) The excavation of structures shall be measured and paid on cubic metre
basis. The quantity of excavation shall be computed from the initial
and final cross sections as described in relevant para under canal
excavation. No payment shall be entertained for any excavation beyond
pay line. The rate shall include providing all the materials, tools, plants
and labour required for excavation.
(i) The rate for the respective items of excavation for structures includes the
excavation in all lifts, disposal of excavated stuff as stipulated in the
specifications, providing all tools, plant, machinery, survey instruments,
labour and material, preparation and maintenance of haul roads, transport
of excavated material to temporary stock piles, re-handling of excavated
material temporarily deposited in stockpiles to disposal areas or points of
final use, disposal of excavated waste materials, maintaining excavated
slopes and trenches, etc. complete. The cost of sorting and stacking the
useful excavated material above high flood levels will not be paid extra
and shall be deemed to have been included in the unit rate of completed
item of excavation.
(j) No extra payment shall be made for the required shorting and strutting.
(k) The rate also includes cost of all incidental operations required for
carrying out the work in accordance with the specifications. For
Foundation excavation, intermediate payment will be made at rate as
follow 95% rate of tendered rate up to 100% Qty. Remaining 5 %
payment shall be released when the backfill is completed as per designed
profile true to the line and levels and finally accepted on completion by
the Engineer – in – Charge.
(l) The rate shall be for a unit of one cubic meter.
138
 (m) The Hard Rock available from the excaxation shall be property of
Government,The Hard Rockavailable from the excavation shall have to
be disposed by the contractor and the amount of quantity of hard rock at
the prevailing SOR Rate will be recovered from contractor bill.

3.16 Backfilling of structures(Item No.8)

Item No.8
Backfilling the foundation trenches around the structures etc. with selected
excavated stuff including watering, ramming, compacting etc. complete.(By
machinary)
i. The backfill material around the structure shall be placed carefully and
spread in uniformlayer not more than 15cm thickness. The backfill shall be,
brought up asuniformly as practicable on both sides of walls where ever
applicable and all sides of structures toprevent unequal loading. Backfill
placement and compaction around structures shall berestricted until the
structure is complete.
ii. Compaction around the structurewith suitable compacting equipment in thin
layers as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
iii. All foundation trenches shall be back filled around masonry or concrete
structure as the case may be to the original surface of the ground as directed
and shall be @ in 15 cm. layers without any extra payment in this case. The
contractor shall have to back fill the excavation of structure using the
available and usable soil in a proper manner layer wise with proper watering
and compaction as directed by the Engineer-in-charge with all leads and
lifts. As the compaction is to be carried out near the structure suitable
compacting equipment as decided and directed by the Engineer-in-charge
shall be used. No separate payment shall be made to the contractor for
backfilling of over excavated portion. Over excavation shall be restored by
the contractor at his cost as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

Mode of Measurement and Payment(Item No.8) :

The measurement and payment of backfilling shall be made on cubic meter
basis. The rate includes all the cost of machineries, labors, equipments etc.

139
 complete. The rate includes all leads and lifts. If the suitable soil is not
available in sufficient quantity from excavated material, the contractor shall
have to brought from the nearby area / village tank at his cost.

3.17 Monsoon Damages

(Shall Applicable to all the items as well as all the components of work)
(1) Damages due to rain or flood either in cutting or in banks or in foundation of
structure shall have to be made good by the Contractor till the work is
accepted by the Department. The responsibility of desilting, dewatering and
making good the damages due to rain or flood rests with the contractor,
throughout the construction period of structures and not only limited to
earthwork. No extra cost is payable for such operations and the contractor
shall, therefore, has to take all necessary precautions to protect the work
done during the entire construction period. The provision made in this para
shall be applicable to all the components of the work under this contract till
completion of the entire work. The contractor shall take all precautionary
measures well prior to onset of the monsoon to prevent entry of flood waters
of drains, nallas and other area. However, any damage done to the work or
silting or slush caused shall have to be attended by the Contractor without
any extra cost to Department.
(2) During monsoon the contractor shall make available the machinery such as
pumps, excavators, dozers, rollers etc. and skilled and unskilled manpower to
attend the emergency conditions of flood inundation caused due to
construction of canal in surrounding fields, roads etc. so that the public traffic
can be maintained with least possible in convenience and damage to
public/Govt.'s property.
(3) The cost for such operations shall not be paid separately and deemed to be
included in the rates quoted in respective item of Bill of Quantities.

140
 Earthwork (Item no.4)
Item No. 4
Earthwork in embankment using selected soil,soft & hard murrum excavated
from approved borrow area / village tank etc.including conveying,
spreading in uniform layers, breaking clods and dressing to the designed
section for following leads and all lifts etc.complete.(By machinery-
Poclane) (C) For Lead Beyond 2.0 and 3.0 Km.

1. General :
Item involves earth work in embankment into the designed section and at
structures as shown in the drawing. The work includes Dewatering if Required
and earthwork in embankment and filling the earth obtained from borrows area
for all leads & lifts as specified in the item. General technical specification of
earth work shall apply.

2. Borrow Area
All material required for the construction of embankment shall be obtained
from the borrow area / spoil bank confirming the quality requirement as shown
above, as directed by Engineer in Charge. In case when material available do
not confirm to quality requirements, Contractor shall have to make his own
arrangement to get borrow area for borrowing earth of the approved quality.
Borrow areas shall not be given by the Government. If borrow area for Qty.
specified in bill of quantities is not available within specific lead, than
contractor shall made there own arangement for borrow area and no extra
payment shall be made for any extra lead.

3. Embankment
(a) The usable excavated earth from borrow area, after stripping shall be used for
constructing embankment. Bushes, roots or other perishable or unsuitable
materials shall not be placed in the embankment. Embankment materials shall
be spread up in uniform layers of 15 cm to 23 cm thickness extending to the
full width of embankment as per section. The embankment material shall be
adequately watered, when each layer is prepared with adequate moisture
content, it shall be evenly compacted. No fresh layer shall be laid until the
previous layer is properly watered and compacted, as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge.
(b) Quantity mentioned in the bill of quantities are tentative. For consideration of
excess quantities occurring in a tender for a particular item involving different
leads or lifts, the excess will be considered on the basis of total quantity for
different leads or lifts and not on individual fraction.
141
4. Measurements and Payments

(a) Running measurements shall be paid on Cubic Meter Basic.

(b) Final measurement shall be taken on cross section measurements of the
completed section of canal. For this purpose initial levels of the original ground
bank shall be taken before the work is started. The initial levels shall be taken
at intervals of 30 metersor at closer intervals at cross section and all other
places as directed by the Engineer-in-charge of the work. The points where
original cross sections are taken shall be marked by two permanent reference
marks just near the land width to facilitate taking off final cross section at these
same points the initial levels. The levels shall be taken by Project management
consultant to be employed for the work in presence of contractor and Engineer
in Charge. Contractor or his authorized representative shall sign the levels in
token of acceptance before the work is started and after completion of work
and this shall be the base of cross section measurements. Final levels shall also
be taken after the work is completed.
(c) The payment shall be made for quantity executed in cubic meter at the rate
quoted under relevant items of work. (c) No extra payment shall be made for
borrow area stripping and for the material wasted on this account. No extra
payment shall be given for earthwork & rolling watering done during
preparation of seat under embankment or for scarifying. The labour and
equipments required for the work as well as for the incidentals are also not
payable. The rates quoted for relevant items are deemed to cover such costs.
Rate is inclusive for all leads and lifts.
(d) The rates quoted cover all the activities specified for relevant items of work.

142
 CONCRETE (ITEM No. 5,6,23, 24)

Item No.5:-
Providing & Laying in position with Automatic Batch mix Plant & Transit
Mixer "DESIGN MIX" cement concrete using cement sand and crushed
aggregate for C.C./ R.C.C work including necessary formwork, centering,
scaffolding, compaction by vibrator, curing as directed with all lead & lift etc
complete without dewatering and excluding the cost of steel reinforcement.
(A) For Footing of column / Abutment / Pier / Bottom slab of barrel / Plinth
course / Coping etc.
(b) Concrete grade M-15 and MSA-40 mm

Item No.6 (i):-

Providing & Laying in position with Automatic Batch mix Plant & Transit
Mixer "DESIGN MIX" cement concrete using cement sand and crushed
aggregate for C.C./ R.C.C work including necessary formwork, centering,
scaffolding, compaction by vibrator, curing as directed with all lead & lift etc
complete without dewatering and excluding the cost of steel reinforcement.
(E) For Column / Beam / Solid Slab of Road Bridge / Barrel / Cutoff wall etc.
(n) Concrete grade M-25 and MSA-40 mm

Item No.6 (ii):-

Providing & Laying in position with Automatic Batch mix Plant & Transit
Mixer "DESIGN MIX" cement concrete using cement sand and crushed
aggregate for C.C./ R.C.C work including necessary formwork, centering,
scaffolding, compaction by vibrator, curing as directed with all lead & lift etc
complete without dewatering and excluding the cost of steel reinforcement.
(C ) iii Piers, abutment, wingwalls, headwall, returnwall etc.
(f) Concrete grade M-20 and MSA-40 mm

Item No.23:-
Providing & Laying in position with Automatic Batch mix Plant & Transit
Mixer "DESIGN MIX" cement concrete using cement sand and crushed
aggregate for C.C./ R.C.C work including necessary formwork, centering,
scaffolding, compaction by vibrator, curing as directed with all lead & lift etc
143
 complete without dewatering and excluding the cost of steel reinforcement.
(A) For Footing of column / Abutment / Pier / Bottom slab of barrel / Plinth
course / Coping etc.
(b) Concrete grade M-15 and MSA-40 mm

Item No.24:-
Providing & Laying in position with Automatic Batch mix Plant & Transit
Mixer "DESIGN MIX" cement concrete using cement sand and crushed
aggregate for C.C./ R.C.C work including necessary formwork, centering,
scaffolding, compaction by vibrator, curing as directed with all lead & lift etc
complete without dewatering and excluding the cost of steel reinforcement.
(E) For Column / Beam / Solid Slab of Road
Bridge / Barrel / Cutoff wall etc
(m) Concrete grade M-25 and MSA-20 mm

1.0 Scope of work

This specification covers the requirements of plain and reinforced cement concrete
to be used in various components of the structures. The work covered by this
chapter consist of furnishing all materials, equipment and labour for the
manufactures, transport, placing, finishing and curing of all grades of concrete in the
structure including in these specification and performing all the functions necessary
and ancillary there to etc. complete. The grade of the mix is specified in the relevant
items under Bill of Quantities.
The item of concrete will have to be split up into several items according to the
grade of concrete to be used and its locations and will be measured and paid for
accordingly. The general specifications described hereinafter shall however in
relevance, apply to all concrete items.
I.S.456-1978 or as revised from time to time shall be followed in general. Cement,
sand and black trap Metal (Coarse aggregate) shall be measured by weight. Where
it is considered not practicable to use controlled concrete, volumetric mix shall be
allowed at the discretion of Engineer-in-charge.

2.0 Applicable Publications

144
 All items of concrete works, concrete, its constituents, methods & procedures of
manufacture shall conform to the latest Indian Standard Specifications & other
technical publications listed below unless otherwise specified.
3.0 Indian Standards
1 IS :303 Specification for plywood for general purposes (Second
revision)(Amendment No.1 to4)
2 IS:432 Specification for mild steel and medium (Part-1-1982)
tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement (3rd revision)
3 IS-516 Method of test for strength of concrete (Amendment No.1)
4 IS :883 Code of practice for design of structural timber in building
(third revision)
5 IS:2505 General requirements for concrete vibrators: immersion
type.
6 IS :2506 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrators.
7 IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of
liquids ( part I to IV)
8 IS :3535 Method of sampling hydraulic cement ( First revision)
9 IS :3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for
consolidating concrete.
10 IS :4656 Specification for form vibrators for concrete.
11 IS :4925 Specification for concrete batching & mixing plant.
12 IS :4990 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work
(First revision ( Amendment No.1)
13 IS :5242 Method of taste for determining shear strength of metal (Ist
revision).
14 IS :8112 Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement
15 IS :8989 Safety code for erection of concrete frame structures.
16 IS :9077 Code of practice for corrosion protection of steel
reinforcement in RB and RCC construction.
17 IS:12269 Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement.
18 SP:16 (S& T) Design aids for reinforced concrete to IS : 456.

Only latest version of I.S. shall be followed.

In addition to above relevant Indian standards referred to section 3 shall also apply.
145
4.0 Other Technical Publications.
1 Indian Road Congress Standard specification and code of practice for
(IRC) Road Bridges.
Section – I
Section – II
Section – III
2 The United State Bureau Concrete Manual (Eighth Edition) (Revised–
of Reclamation (USBR) 1981)
3 American society for All relevant codes.
TestingMaterials (ASTM)
Note: Generally, the Bureau of Indian Standards code will be followed for all items
of works wherever this code does not exit the reference will be taken to other
technical publications.

5.0 Composition
a) Concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregates (natural / manufactured
sand), coarse aggregates (manufactured), admixtures and water, well mixed in
proportion and brought to the proper consistency. The design mix proportions shall
be adjusted to produce a durable and workable and cohesive concrete, suitable for
specified conditions of placement & design strength. The manufactured sand will be
allowed after getting the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
b) For all items of concrete in any portion of the structure or its associated works,
concrete manufactured by batching and mixing plant/concrete mixers and which
shall be termed by controlled concrete shall be used where specified.

6.0 Materials
6.1 Cement
Cement shall be procured in bags by the contractor from market at his own risk and
cost. It shall confirm the qualitative provisions made in I.S 269-1989 and the
specification shall be as specified in Technical Specification of material at Para M-1
for cement shall be apply.
6.2 Sand
The sand to be used in concrete shall be of well graded, hard, durable and as a inert
materials. It shall confirm to specification specified in the Para M-2 of Technical
Specification of material. The specification specified in I.S 383-1999 shall also
146
 apply to sand.
6.3 Water
The mixing water shall be potable confirming to specification prescribed in Para M-
3 of Technical Specification of material.
6.4 Coarse Aggregates
The coarse aggregate shall conform to the specification specified in Para M-4 of
Technical Specification of material. Specification specified I.S. 383-1999 shall also
apply to coarse aggregate.
The coarse crushed metal, aggregate for concrete shall consist of clean, hard dense,
durable, crushed metal predominately. Flaky crushed aggregate shall not be used.
The percentage of deleterious substance in any size of coarse aggregates as
delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following values. :
Materials finer than 75 micron IS sieve : 3 % by wt.
Shale : 1 % by wt.
Coal : 1 % by wt.
Soft fragments : 1 % by wt.
Other deleterious substances : 1 % by wt.
Clay lumps : 1 % by wt.
The sum of the percentages of all the deleterious substances shall however not 5
percent exceed by weight. The coarse aggregate shall satisfy the abrasion,
soundness and water absorption test as laid down in I.S. 383/1999 or relevant IS
Code.
Grading :
(i) Coarse aggregate of such a size shall be retained on mesh 3/16” square.
(ii) The gradation shall give a dense concrete of the specified strength and
consistency that will work readily into position without segregation and
without the use of excessive water content.
(iii) The gradation shall be as indicated by the project laboratory studies.

Following shall be maximum size of coarse aggregate for the different items of
work.
Sr. No. Item of Work Maximum Nominal Size of
Coarse Aggregates (MSA)
1. Foundation floor and gravity retaining 40 mm
walls (Mass Concrete)
147
 2. R.C.C. rafts, piers, abutments, cutoff 40 mm
walls, brest walls, staunching rings, pile
and pile cap etc.
3. RCC work in Main and Cross girders, 20 mm
Deck Slabs, Wearing Coat, Kerb, Parapet
walls, Approach Slab, Pier Cap, RCC
Trough, Barrel and other thin member
and zones of congestion caused by
closely spaced reinforcement bars.
4. For any other items not covered by item As specified in drawings or
1 to 3 in case not specified in
drawing, as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge

For heavily reinforced concrete members, as in the case of ribs of main beams,
maximum size of aggregate shall usually be restricted to 5 mm less than the
minimum lateral clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the
minimum cover to the reinforcement, whichever is smaller, However, if required
under special circumstances, the Engineer-in-Charge may permit an aggregate of
maximum size 25 % more than this critical spacing/ cover provided that proper
vibration is ensured.

Testing:
The following testing frequencies shall be maintained for the same source of coarse
aggregate.
Sr. Name of Test Minimum number of test specified
No.
1. Gradation Daily one test for each nominal size of
aggregates
2. Water Content Daily one test for each nominal size of
aggregates
3. Silt Content Daily one test for each nominal size of
aggregates
4. Sp. Gravity and Water Once in concrete working season.
Absorption, Impact or Petrography test as directed by the
148
 Abrasion, Density, Engineer-in-charge.
Soundness, Alkali-Acid
reactivity, Petrographic
examination

6.5 REINFORCEMENT STEEL

The reinforcement (TMT Bar) shall confirming to specification prescribed in Para
M-5,Technical Specification of material.

6.6 Admixtures:
(a) Accelerators:
Admixtures for increasing the strength of concrete at early ages may be
permitted to be used at the cost of contractors upon written approval covering
the type, amount and location of use. The amount of accelerator used shall be
not more than that necessary to reduce the desired result. Calcium chloride
shall not be used in excess of 2% by weight of cement. Accelerator shall be
measured accurately and shall be introduced into the mixer in solution of the
mixing water. Use of accelerator in the concrete shall in no way affect the
compliance with the requirements of these specifications governing protection
and curing of concrete. Accelerator shall be used by contractor and the
contractor shall not charge anything extra for cost and use of admixture.
(b) Air entraining agents and additives:
If necessary suitable air entraining agents shall be used to improve the quality
and workability of the concrete.
Air Entraining Agent (AEA) as an admixture shall be added to the concrete
batch in solution. It shall be batched by means of mechanical batcher capable
of correct measurement and in such a manner as will ensure uniform
distribution of the agent throughout the batch during the specified mixing
period. The amount of AEA used shall be such as to affect air entrapment from
4 to 6 percent by volume in that portion of the concrete containing aggregate
smaller than the 40 mm square mesh sieve after its placement and vibration in
the forms. The contractor will be allowed to use admixture, only after prior
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge and according to concrete mix design. Cost
of such admixture shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed to have
been included in the unit rates quoted by the contractor for relevant items.
149
 Only approved admixture shall be allowed for use in concrete. All tests for the
evaluation and approval of an admixture shall be carried out before use in
concrete. The suitability of an air entraining admixture shall be determined as
per the requirement of IS: 9103-1979.
7.0 Epoxy
Use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete for repairs shall be permitted on written
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Epoxy shall be applied in accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer. The cost of such repair shall be borne by the
Contractor.

8.0 Concrete for Structures

Controlled concrete shall be used for the Hydraulic structure in grades designated
asM-10, M-15, M-20 and M-25Grade Concrete. M-10 shall be treated as nominal
mix concrete as C.C. 1:3:6.
8.1 Mix Design
a) The contractor shall prepare mix design of concrete in accordance with IS 456-2000
and relevant codes to achieve desired strength durability and workability and using
approved ingredients viz. cement, fine aggregates and water. The ingredients of
concrete shall be got tested and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor
shall get approval the mix design thus prepared by him from Engineer-in-charge and
only after approval of Engineer-in-charge, the same shall be used for construction.
b) (i) The Engineer-in-charge shall check and carry out necessary tests on mix design
given by the contractor in accordance with Para (a) above to determine its strength,
workability durability as well as economy. For this purpose, the contractor shall
submit mix design and its details prepared by him to the Engineer-in-charge well in
advance of commencement of work as directed by the Engineer in charge.
ii) Department reserves right to accept or reject the mix design given by the contractor
and also to direct him to use mix design given by Engineer-in-charge. Decision in
this regard shall be final and binding to the contractor.
iii) Over and above specified in (a) above, if required Engineer-in-charge shall make a
test to determine the mix proportions required to produce the strength specified with
the material to be used in the work. (The necessary ingredients shall be provided to
department free of cost by contractor.)
c) The mix shall be designed using representative samples of approved coarse and fine
aggregates as well as cement and water to be made available by the Contractor to
150
 the Engineer-in-charge, to achieve the required workability, cohesion, strength and
durability at minimum level of cement. Mix design studies and test will be carried
out in GERI Laboratory or in Govt. approved laboratory as decided and directed by
the Engineer-in-charge.
d) The proportion of mix design ingredients shall be such that concrete has adequate
workability for conditions prevailing on the work in question and can be properly
compacted with the means available.
e) During the execution of the work if the source of any ingredient of the concrete
changes or in new working season, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer-in-
Charge sufficiently in advance so as to allow him to proportion a new mix design to
attain the specified strength of concrete. At that time the representative samples of
approved ingredient shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer-in-Charge
without any extra cost.
f) The details of mix design including the proportion of each separate size and grading
of aggregates and actual cement level required shall be declared to the Contractor in
writing by the Engineer-in-Charge.
g) As a result of para (d) if there is any subsequent change in mix design, similarly the
same shall be declared.
8.2 Strength Requirement of Concrete
Ordinary Portland cement grade 53 conforming to IS: 12269 shall be used. The
permission of Engineer-in-charge shall be obtained for other grade of concrete. The
compressive strength requirements for the various grades of controlled concrete shall
be as given in Table.
Grade of Concrete Compressive test strength in N/mm2 on 150
mm cube in accordance with IS:456-2000
Minimum at 28 Days
M10 10
M15 15
M20 20
M25 25
M30 30

In all cases the 28 day’s compressive strength specified in Table shall along be the
criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
Where the strength of a concrete mix as indicated by tests lies in between the strength
151
 for the two grades specified in Table, such concrete shall be classified for all
purposes as concrete belonging to the lower of the two grades between which its
strength lies.
The compressive strength test of concrete shall be conducted on 150 mm x 150mm x
150 mm moulded cube. The design Mix for different classes of concrete to be used
will be furnished by the department. Based on these mix proportion and by using the
same materials as approved for use in the Structure of works, concrete mixes will be
prepared in the Laboratory at frequent intervals and cubes 150 mm x 150 mm x 150
mm will be cast and tested for strength at 7 Days and 28 Days. These strengths shall
be deemed as the standard strengths. The strengths shall be deemed as the standard
strength. The strength of test specimens cast from the concrete used on the permanent
work shall be determined and these should be not less than 80 per cent of respective
Standard strength mentioned above. The testing of cubes Will be carried out as per
relevant Indian Standard Specifications. 80 per cent of the test specimens shall fulfill
the above stipulation. Also co-efficient of Variation shall not be more than 20 per
cent. The set of test cubes shall consist of 3 cubes for testing for crushing strength, at
28 days Crushing strength.
8.3 Proportioning Concrete
Except when it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that supply
of properly graded aggregates of uniform quality can be maintained till the
completion of the work, grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining the
coarse aggregate in different sizes and blending them in the right proportions as
required. Different sizes, however, shall be stacked in separate stockpiles. Required
quantity of material shall be stockpiled several hours, preferably a day, before use.
Grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked as frequently as possible,
frequency for a given job shall be determined by the Engineer-in-Charge to ensure
that the suppliers are maintaining the uniform grading as approved for samples used
in the preliminary tests. In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and
aggregate shall be determined by weight. Water shall either be measured by volume
in calibrated tank or weight. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean
and serviceable condition. Their accuracy shall be periodically checked. To keep the
specified water cement ratio constant as determined by mix design, moisture content
in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be pre-determined by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The amount of mixing water shall be adjusted to compensate for any
variations noted in the aggregate IS: 2386-1977 (Part-III) shall be referred to make
152
 suitable arrangement in weight of water. Suitable adjustments shall also be made in
the weight of aggregates to allow for variations in weight of aggregates due to
variations in their moisture content.
8.4 Mix Design and Testing :
For Design Mix Concrete, the mix design shall be designed according to IS 10262
and SP: 23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and
characteristics strength less than appropriate values given in IS – 456. The design mix
shall be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate and should result in dense and
durable concrete and also capable of giving the finish as specified. For water
retaining structures, the mix shall be also result in watertight concrete. The contractor
shall be exercise great care while designing the concrete mix and executing the works
to achieve the desired result.
The cement level for the controlled concrete shall be as under for the purpose of
working out the rates to be quoted in Schedule – B

Table No-1
Sr. No. Grade of Concrete Minimum Cement Level required in Kg
for one Cubic Meter of Concreteas
1 2 3
1 1:4:8 170 (Not Applicable for Mix Design),
Nominal Mix
2 1:3:6 205 (Not Applicable for Mix Design),
(MSA 40 mm) Nominal Mix
3 1:3:6 220 (Not Applicable for Mix Design),
(MSA 20 mm) Nominal mix
4 M-15 280
(MSA 40 mm)
5 M-15 300
(MSA 20 mm)
6 M-20 330
(MSA 40 mm)
7 M-20 360
(MSA 20 mm)
8 M-25 360
(MSA- 40 mm)
153
 9 M-25 380
(MSA- 20 mm)
10 M-30 410
(MSA- 20 mm)

However, depending on the technical requirement various size of aggregate may be

required to be used in various components of the structure.
Actual cement level required for the aggregate to be used shall be determined by
tests. The mix proportions shall be selected to ensure that the workability of the fresh
concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after
compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. When
concrete is hardened, it shall have the required strength, durability and surface finish.

A mix shall be designed to produce the grade of concrete having the required
workability and cohesiveness and characteristic strength not less than that stipulated
in IS 456 -2000. The contractor shall have to prepare the concrete mix design for a
particular grade of concrete in GERI/ Government Laboratory / Government
Approved Laboratory as directed by Engineer-in–charge. A concrete mix shall be
designed to produce the particular grade of concrete having the required workability
and characteristic strength not less than that stipulated in tender specification.
However, due to change in cement level of design mix, if it becomes obligatory to
use more quantity cement per cubic meter of concrete w.r.t. cement level mentioned
in above table No.1, the contractor shall do the same without claiming the extra cost
for use of more quantity of cement w.r.t. approved mix design, If due to change in
cement level of design mix, it is obligatory to use less quantity cement per cubic
meter of concrete w.r.t. cement level mentioned in the above table No.1, the amount
(cost) of quantity of cement used less w.r.t. cement level mentioned in the above table
No.1, shall be recovered at the base rate of Rs.5234 per metric tonneof cement from
the bill / amount to be paid to the contractor.
It shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs as directed by
the engineer-in-charge. He shall furnish to Engineer-in-charge at least 30 days before
concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for the various
concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength requirements of the
concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS:516 shall comply with the
requirements of IS:456.
154
 The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of required
workability cohesiveness, durability and strength for the job. An accurate and strict
control shall be kept on the quantity of water.
In the case of reinforced concrete work, workability shall be such that the concrete
surrounds and properly grips all reinforcement. The degree of consistency, which
shall depend upon the nature of work and methods of vibration of concrete, shall be
determined by regular slump tests. Following slumps shall be adopted for different
types of works.

Sr. No. Type of Work Slump allowed without

any admixture
1 Mass concrete for RCC Raft 45 mm to 55 mm
Foundation, Footing and Retaining
wall
2 Pier, Pier Cap, Pedestal, Transition 25 mm to 45 mm
wall
3 Thin RCC Section with congested steel 60 mm to 70 mm
4 Baffle walls, Chute Blocks and Sills 25 mm to 40 mm
5 Retaining Wall/Structure 65 mm to 100 mm

If necessary arise, slump may be changed as directed by the Engineer-in-charge in

written and the contractor shall have to carry out the work accordingly.

9.0 Production of Concrete

9.1 Production of Aggregates
Production of aggregate may include quarrying of the raw material and processing
viz. transporting, crushing, screening and washing. Water used for washing
aggregates shall be clean and free from alkali, salts and other impurities. After
washing, fine aggregates must be stored in stockpiles with a free draining base for at
least 3 days to ensure that aggregates delivered to the batching plant will have
reasonably uniform moisture content. The storage and handling shall be in such a
manner as to prevent inter-mixing of various sizes of aggregates required separately
for grading purposes. No foreign matter shall be allowed to mixed up with the
aggregates.

155
9.2 Batching& Mixing plant.
(a) The Batching and Mixing of concrete shall be done in automatic Batching
Mixing Plant with printer facility installed at site of work. Mechanical mixer
attached with weigh batch which start the weighing operation of material and stop
automatically when designated weight of each material is reached and interlocked in
a manner as specified in IS:4925-1968. In no case mixing shall be allowed outside
the batching plant i.e. mixing will not be allowed in transit mixer. The
ordinary/conventional Concrete Mixer, semi-automatic or manually operated mixing
plant, Concrete Fiori machine will not be allowed for design mix concrete Work.
(b) The prescribed amount of the various materials of concrete including water, cement,
admixtures the groupings of fine aggregates and each individual size of coarse
aggregate shall be measured and controlled within the specified limits of accuracy.
The amount of water, cement and aggregate shall be determined by weighing. In the
case of fine aggregates, the surface moisture shall be determined in accordance with
the method prescribed in Appendix–D of IS: 456-2000 and its subsequent
amendments or publications. In the case of coarse aggregates, percentage of free
water shall be determined by weighing a representative sample, then surface drying
each particle individually with a clean piece of cloth and reweighing.
(c) The proportion of various materials shall be changed as directed in order to maintain
the desired quality of the concrete. The batching equipment shall be so constructed
and operated that the combined inaccuracies in feeding and measuring the materials
shall not exceed 1½ percent for water and cement and 2 percent for each size of
aggregate.
(d) The operating performance of each scale or other measuring device shall be checked
by standard test weight to be supplied by the Contractor and test weight shall be got
calibrated by the Contractor and the test shall cover the ranges of measurements
involved in the batching operations. Tests of equipment in operation shall be made
at least once every fortnight and adjustments, repairs or replacement, be made as
necessary to meet the specified requirement for accuracy of measurement.
(e) Aggregate shall not be batched for concrete or mortar when free water is dripping
from the aggregate.
(f) Before the concreting operation start the Contractor shall provide communication
facility in the form of wireless, walkie-talkie or telephone between the batching and
mixing plant and sites of various concrete placements and got approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to keep this system in
156
 good and working condition throughout the construction period.
(g) Considering the Quantity of concrete of various grade and time limit for
completion of work, if required the contractor shall have to mobilized and
install two automatic batching mixing plant at site of work.
9.3 Mixing
(a) The Concrete ingredients shall be mixed thoroughly in mixers of satisfactory type
and size which are so designed as to ensure uniform distribution of all the
constituent materials throughout the mass at the end of the mixing period.
The plant shall be so designed and operated that all materials entering the mixer can
be accurately proportioned and readily controlled. The entire batch within the mixer
shall be discharged before recharging. The volume of mixed materials per batch
shall not exceed the rated capacity. A mixer will be considered unsatisfactory, if
from three test of any one batch, a change in slump exceeding 25mm or a change in
air content exceeding one percent is noticed between representative samples taken at
different portions of the mixer discharges.
(b) For any one batch, uniformity of fresh concrete weight of air free mortar of two
samples, one taken at the front and one at the end of the mixer discharges, when
determined in accordance with the provision of the mixer performance test, the
provision test, designation 26 in the Appendix, Concrete Manual-Eight Edition,
Revised-1981, United States Bureau of Reclamation, shall not exceed 1.6 percent of
the mean value. The adequacy of mixing shall also be determined in accordance
with “Method of sampling and analysis of concrete as per IS: 1199-1959 and its
subsequent amendment. Excessive variation on the unit weight of air free mortar
indicates that mixing time should be increased. Mixer efficiency tests shall be made
at the start of a job or at such intervals as may be necessary to ensure compliance
with the requirements for effective mixing. The minimum mixing time specified
herein may be reduced if mixer efficiency tests confirm that the reduced time
permits satisfactory mixing.
(c) The first concrete batch at the start of continuous mixing operation or after a lapse
of 30 minutes in continuous mixing operation shall be made richer by the addition
of extra cement as directed.
(d) For any one batch, the difference between the unit weights of coarse aggregate from
concrete samples from the front and end of the mixer or mixer discharge, when
determined in accordance with the above mentioned mixer performance test shall
not exceed 10 percent of the mean value.
157
(e) The mixing of each batch shall continue, for not less than the period stated in Table-
I of IS: 457 – 1957 unless tests of mixer performance show that variation in the
prescribed time is necessary or acceptable. Each mixer shall have a timing device
for indicating the completion of the required mixing period
(f) The actual time of mixing shall be checked at least twice during each shift and the
timing device shall be adjusted if there is error. The timing device shall be so
interlocked with the discharge gate of the batch hopper that the timing does not start
until the discharge gate is fully closed and all ingredients are in the drum. A suitable
record shall be kept of the average time consumed in charging, mixing and
discharging a batch during each run.
(g) The full contents of the drum shall be discharged quickly to avoid segregation.
(h) The minimum mixing periods specified are considered on the materials being fed
into the mixer in a manner which will facilitate efficient mixing and an operation of
the mixer at its designed speed. The following sequence of charging the mixer be
adopted.
i. Five to ten percent of the total quantity of water required for mixing, adequate to
wet the drum thoroughly, shall be introduced before the other ingredients in
order to prevent any caulking of the cement on the blades or sides of the mixer.
ii All dry ingredients (Cement, fine and coarse aggregate) shall be simultaneously
fed into the mixer in such a manner that the period of flow for each ingredient is
about the same. Eighty to ninety percent of the total quantity of water required
for mixing shall be added uniformly along with the dry ingredients.
iii The remaining quantity of water shall be added after all the other ingredients are
in the mixer.
iv Portion of the coarse aggregate, however, may be added last. This facilitates
clearance of the chutes and removes any fine aggregate or cement adhering to
the sides.
(i) Excessive mixing requiring additions of water to preserve the required concrete
consistency shall not be permitted. Concrete which has been kept unused for more
than 30 minutes after the addition of water shall be rejected
(j) When the mixer is stopped before placing again any ingredients in the mixer, all
hardened concrete or mortar shall be removed from the inner surface of the mixer.
(k) The re-tempering of partially hardened concrete or mortar requiring renewed mixing
with or without the addition of cement, aggregate or water shall not be permitted.

158
9.4 Temperature of Concrete and Weather Conditions
The temperature of concrete at the time of placement shall not exceed 320C.
Concreting operations shall be temporarily suspended during excessively hot
weather when the air temperature exceeds 450 C or when conditions are such that
the concrete cannot be placed at the required temperature. Wherever necessary,
exposed surfaces of fresh concrete shall be adequately shaded to the direct rays of
the sun and protected against premature setting or drying by curing under
continuous fine spray of water.
9.5 Transporting Concrete
a) Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant or batch mixer to the placing
position by means of transit mixers as rapidly as practicable by methods that will
prevent segregation or loss of ingredients or slump loss in excess of 25mm and / or
a loss in air content of more than one percent before the concrete is placed in the
works. The concrete shall be placed in in position within a period of 30 minutes.
Irrespective of haul distance, suitable agitators or transit mixer shall be used for
conveying concrete. Conveying concrete by head load shall not be permitted in any
case.
(b) If buckets are used for conveying low slump concrete they shall be capable of
promoting discharge in controlled quantities without splashing or segregating and
shall be of such capacity that there is no splitting of batches in loading buckets.
Buckets shall be of the bottom dump type permitting an even and controlled flow
into the forms or hopper without undue splashing or segregation. Conveying
vehicles shall be designed to facilitate uniform delivery rather than quick dumping.
For major pour use of crane and bucket for placement of concrete particularly in
syphon structure will not be allowed where only concrete pumps or belt creates to
achieve a minimum rate of placement of 15 to 20 cubic meter/ hour shall be used.
(c) Chutes used for conveying concrete shall be of such size and shapes as to ensure a
steady uniform flow of concrete in a compact mass without separation or loss of
ingredients and shall be protected from wind and sun where necessary to prevent
loss of slump by evaporation and shall be furnished with a discharge hopper. Free
fall or drop of concrete shall be limited to 150 cm. Chute section shall be made of or
lined with metal and all runs shall have approximately the same slopes not flatter
than 1 vertical to 2.5 horizontal. The required consistency of concrete shall not be
changed in order to facilitate chuting. Where it becomes necessary to change the
consistency, the mix shall be completely redesigned. Wherever there is a free fall
159
 within the conveying system, suitable baffle plates, splash boards or down spouts
shall be provided to prevent segregation, splashing or loss of ingredients. Wherever
it is necessary to hold the discharge end of a chute more than 3 metres above the
level of the fresh concrete, a flexible down spout shall be used to break the fall and
confine the flow. The lower end of the spout shall be held closed to the place of
deposit. Wherever depositing is intermittent, a discharge hopper shall be provided.
All chutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run. All wash water and
debris shall be disposed off outside the forms. Use of chutes shall be allowed in
exceptional circumstances and adverse placement condition only.
(d) Placement of concrete by pumpcrete has made a rapid technological advancement. It
is an acceptable method if properly planned and backed with appropriate state of art
equipment and accessories. The principal requirement is to achieve requisite
workability and strength at the prescribed cement level. Slump is the critical factor
in concrete placement by pumpcrete. In the context of attaining designed strength at
the prescribed cement level and at the same time without raising water cement ratio
for making the concrete mix workable enough for smooth pumping use of super
plasticizers may become essential. If the Contractor chooses to deploy pumpcrete
for concrete placement and uses super plasticizers for attaining the required
workability within the requisite parameters evolved through mix design studies to
the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, he shall be allowed to do so. Before
using super plasticizers necessary approval from the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
taken. No extra payment shall be made for such arrangements.
(e) Alternatively properly designed Belt-crete capable to cover of one monolith shall be
allowed to be used for conveying concrete for placement in the structures. Belt-crete
shall ensure an adequate and steady uniform flow of concrete in a compact mass
without any segregation and shall have a discharge hopper with a flexible down
spout as to ensure concrete placement as close to the place of deposit as possible
and in no case more than about a metre.
(f) Equipment used for transporting concrete from the mixer to the forms shall be
maintained free from deposits of stiff concrete and leakage of mortar. Batch
containers, transit mixers, agitators, chutes, concrete pumps, pipelines, belts and
discharge hoppers shall be thoroughly cleaned after each run. All wash water and
debris shall be disposed off outside the forms

160
10.0 Preparation for Placing Concrete
10.1 General Requirement
(a) Concrete shall not be placed until all form work required is completed, embedded
parts, reinforcement if any, installed and checked and surfaces prepared for placing.
No concrete shall be deposited until the foundation has been inspected and approved
by Engineer-in-Charge/ competent authority.
(b) All surfaces of forms and embedded materials that have become encrusted with
dried mortar or grout from concrete previously placed shall be cleaned of all such
mortar or grout before fresh concrete is placed.
10.2 Foundation surfaces
a) In the case of earth or shale foundations, all soft or loose mud and surface debris
shall be scraped and removed. The surface shall be moistened to a depth of about 15
cm to prevent the Sub grade from absorbing water from the fresh concrete. Just
before placing the concrete, the surface of the earth shall be tamped or otherwise
consolidated sufficiently to prevent contamination of concrete during placing. If
subsoil water is met with thefoundation it shall be dewatered as directed till placing
and setting of concrete. All concrete shall be placed upon clean damp surface, free
from standing or running water and never upon soft mud, dried porous earth or upon
fills that have not been subjected to approved rolling and desired compaction has
been obtained
b) Immediately before placing concrete, all surfaces of foundations upon or against
which the concrete is to be placed shall be made free from standing water, mud and
debris. The surface of absorptive foundation upon or against which concrete is to be
placed shall be moistened thoroughly and kept sufficiently wet for at least 24 hours
prior to placing concrete so that moisture will not be drawn from the freshly placed
concrete. The cleaning and roughening of the surfaces of rock shall be performed by
the use of high velocity air water jets, wet sand blasting, stiff brooms, picks or by
other effective means. The washing and scrubbing process shall be continued until
the wash water collected in puddles is clean and free from dirt. In the final cleaning
process the wash water may have to be removed by sponges. If any drilled holes are
left in the foundation surface which is no longer needed, the same shall be cleaned
with air water jetting and filled up completely with cement slurry.
c) Foundation of porous or free draining material shall be thoroughly compacted by
flushing and by subsequent tamping or rolling if necessary. The finished foundation
surface shall then be blanketed with a layer of tar paper or closely woven burlap,
161
 carefully lapped and fastened down along the seams so as to prevent the loss of
mortar from the concrete.
d) Before placing the concrete safe bearing capacity of the soil shall be checked.
10.3 Surface of Construction / Contraction joints
a) The surface of construction joints shall be clean, rough and damp but free from
standing pools of water when receiving the next lift Clean up shall comprise
removal of all laitance loose or defective concrete, coating, sand, sealing
compounds, if used and other foreign materials, if necessary by scraping, chipping
or other suitable means. The contraction joints shall be provided at equal distance of
not greater than 20 m in CD bed portion or as shown in the drawing.
b) The surface of construction joints shall be cleaned by green cutting to remove
laitance, if the next lift is planned to be placed within 3 to 4 days of the completion
of the previous lift. Green cutting shall be done within 8 to 16 hours of laying
concrete depending upon temperature, slump etc. If there is delay in placing the next
lift, the surface shall be cleaned by wet sand blasting / high pressure water jetting
just prior to placing next lift. Utilization of green cutting should be maximized. For
effective green cutting, the compressed air pressure should not be allowed to fall
below 6.33 kg/cm2 . The water pressure should be sufficient to bring the water into
effective influence of the air pressure. As an approximate estimate, the quantity of
compressed air required by the green cutting gun is 2m3 /second and the quantity of
water 273 liters /minute. Without availability of sand blasting equipment in working
condition concrete pouring shall not be allowed.
c) The method used in disposing off waste water employed in cutting, washing and
rinsing of concrete surface shall be such that the waste water does not stain, discolor
or affect exposed surfaces of the structures. Method of disposal of waste water shall
be subject to approval and at the cost of contractor.

11.0 Placing and Compacting Concrete

11.1 The contractor shall keep the Engineer-in-charge advised as to when placing of
concrete will be performed. Unless inspection is waived in each specified case by
direction from the Engineer, placing of concrete shall be performed only in the
presence of an authorized representative of the Engineer. The surface of all rock and
concrete against which concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned and
damped. After the surfaces are prepared satisfactorily, all approximately horizontal
surfaces of rock and construction joints shall be covered with a layer of mortar
162
approximately tree eighth of an inch (10mm) thick. The mortar shall have the same
proportions of water, cement, and sand as the regular concrete of mixture, unless
otherwise directed. The water cement ratio of the mortar in place shall not exceed
that of the concrete to be placed upon it, and consistency of the mortar shall be
suitable for placing and working in the manner hereinafter specified. The mortar
shall be spreaded and shall be worked thoroughly into all irregularities of the
surface. Concrete shall be placed immediately upon the fresh mortar.
(1) So far as it is practicable, concrete shall be placed directly in its final position
and shall not be caused to flow in a manner to permit or cause segregation.
Method and equipment employed in placing concrete shall ensure that
aggregate is not separated from the concrete mass.
(2) Manual concrete placing by head basket shall be permitted. The concrete shall
be used within 30 minutes of mixing. Repairing of concrete shall not be
permitted. Any concrete which has become stiff so that proper placing
without repairing can not be ensured shall be rejected.
(3) Concrete shall be compacted to the maximum practicable density in such a
manner that it is free from pockets of coarse aggregate and is in intimate
contact with surface of forms and embedded materials. Unless otherwise
permitted, all concrete except foundation concrete shall be compacted by
mechanical vibrator.
(4) Compaction concrete shall wherever practicable be carried out by the use of
immersion type vibrators. Vibrators having heads less than 100 mm in
diameter shall be operated at speed of at least 7000 revolutions per minute in
the concrete. Normally formwork shall be designed to provide for the
insertion and operation of mechanical vibrators in the placed concrete. Form
vibrators shall be used wherever internal vibration is not possible or would be
inadequate
(5) In compacting each layer of concrete the vibrator shall be operated in almost
vertical position and the vibrating head shall be allowed to penetrate and
vibrate the concrete in the upper portion of the underlying. In the area where
freshly placed concrete in each layer joints with previously placed concrete,
more vibration than usual shall be performed with vibrators penetrating
deeply at close intervals along these contacts. Layers of concrete shall not be

163
 placed until layers previously placed have been vibrated thoroughly as
specified. Contacts of the vibrating head with surface of the forms shall be
avoided.
(6) During placing and until curing is completed the concrete shall be protected
against the harmful effect of exposure to sunlight, wind and rain as directed.

11.2 In placing concrete against formed construction, joints, the surface of the joints
where accessible, shall be coated thoroughly with brooms dipped in the fresh
mortar. Where it is impracticable to apply such mortar coating, special precautions
shall be taken to ensure that the new concrete is brought into intimate contact with
the surface of the joint by careful puddling and spading with the end of suitable
tools.
11.3 Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted. Any concrete which has become so
stiff that proper placing cannot be assured, shall be wasted. Concrete shall be
deposited in all cases as nearly as practicable, directly in its final position and shall
not be caused to flow such that the lateral movement will permit or cause
segregation of the coarse aggregate from the concrete mass. Methods and equipment
employed in depositing concrete in forms shall be such as will not result in clusters
or groups of coarse aggregate particles being separated from the concrete mass, but
if clusters do occur they shall be scattered before the concrete is vibrated. A few
scattered individual pieces of coarse aggregate that can be restored into the mass by
vibration will not be objectionable.
11.4 Except as intercepted by joints, all formed concrete shall be placed in continuous
approximately horizontal layers, the depths of which generally shall not exceed
50cms (20 inches). the engineer reserves the right to require lesser depths of layers,
where concrete in 50cms (20 inches) layers cannot be placed in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications. All intersections of construction joints with
concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be made straight and level or
plumb. Construction joints shall be allowed only at places as directed by the
engineer.
11.5 In reinforced concrete work, the thickness of the layer shall be reduced to 150 mm
to 300 mm (6” to 12”) or as directed. In congested parts, care shall be taken to see
that all the bars are properly embedded and that no voids are left. On flat horizontal
surfaces, whether the congestion of steel near the forms makes placing difficult, a

164
 mortar of the same cement, sand ratio as is used in the concrete shall be first
deposited to cover the forms.
11.6 In placing uniformed concrete on slopes so steep as to make internal vibrating of the
concrete impracticable without form work, the concrete shall be placed ahead of
non-vibrated slip-form screed extending approximately 2 and ½ feet (75cm) back
from its loading edge. Concrete ahead of the slip-form screed shall be compacted by
internal vibrators so as to assure complete filling under the slip form.
11.7 If concrete is placed monolithically around openings having vertical dimensions
greater than 2 feet (0.6m), or if concrete is for decks, floor slabs, beams, girders, or
other similar parts of structure is placed monolithically with supporting concrete, the
following instructions shall be strictly observed:
(i) placing of concrete may be delayed from 1 to 3 hours at the top of openings and
at the bottoms of bevels under docks, floor slabs, beams, girders, or other similar
parts of structures when bevels are specified and at the bottom of such structural
members when bevels are not specified but in no case shall the placing be
delayed so long that the vibrating unit will not readily penetrate of its own
weight, the concrete placed before the delay. When compacting, concrete placed
after the delay, the vibrating unit shall penetrate and revibrated the concrete
placed before the delay.
(ii) The last 2 ft (0.6 mt) or more of concrete placed immediately before the delay
shall be placed with as low as slump as practicable and special care shall be
exercised to affect thorough compaction of the concrete.
(iii)The surface of concrete where delays are made shall be clean and free from
loose and foreign material when concrete placing is started after the delay.
(iv)Concrete placed over openings and in decks, floors, beams girders, and other
similar parts of structures shall be placed with as low a slump as practicable and
compaction of the concrete. The contractor shall not be entitled to additional
payment over the unit price bid in the schedule for concrete by reason of any
limitations in the placing of concrete required under the provisions of this
paragraph.

11.8Compaction:
Concrete shall be compacted to the maximum practicable density so that it is free
from pockets of coarse aggregate and entrapped air, and closes smugly against all
surface of form embedded materials. Compaction of concrete in structure shall be by
petrol /diesel driven or electric or pneumatic drive, immersion type vibrators.
165
 Concrete vibrators shall be operated at least 7,000 rpm when immersed in the
concrete. Forms vibrators where used shall be rigidly attached to the forms and shall
operate at speeds of at least 8000 rpm when vibrating concrete.
11.9 In Compacting each layer of concrete, the vibrator shall be operated in a nearly
vertical position and vibrating head shall be allowed to penetrate and re-vibrate the
concrete in the upper portion of the underlying layer. Layers of concrete shall not
place until the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly as specified.
Care shall be exercised to avoid contract of the vibrating head with surface of the
forms or displacing reinforcement or embedded metal. Large void or air pockets
which may be left in the permanently exposed faces of the structure by vibration
shall be eliminated by systematically speding the face with an appropriate flat tool.
11.10 Excessive vibration causing segregation or tending to bring an excessive amount of
water to the surface shall be avoided. Cobbles and coarse aggregate protruding from
the surface of the life shall be embedded into the mass during the initial compacting
and vibrating operations. Surface vibrators or peddlers shall not be used except for
wearing coat for the roadway.
11.11 Disturbance of the surface concrete at a construction joint during the early stages of
hardening shall be avoided. Necessary traffic on new concrete shall be on timber
walkways constructed so as not to cause injury to the concrete.
11.12 For formed concrete surface which are to be exposed to high velocities of water,
special precautions shall be taken to prevent or to minimize surface pitting without
resorting to over-manipulation of the concrete next to the form.
11.13 Inadvertent or intended re-vibration of some concrete is beneficial provided the
concrete become momentarily plastic again during re-vibration. Re-vibration shall
be resorted to only after specific instruction are given by the Engineer.

12.0 CURING OF CONCRETE

12.1 General
All equipment, material etc. needed for curing and protection of concrete shall be
kept handy and ready for installing before actual concreting begins. Detailed plans,
method and procedures whereby the various phases of curing and protection shall be
firmly established shall be settled and got approved from the engineer-In-Charge
sufficiently in advance of the actual concreting.

166
12.2 Water Curing
(a) Uniform top surfaces of walls, piers, etc. shall be moistened by covering with water
saturated material or by other effective means as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent damage by water. These surfaces and steeply sloping and
vertical formed surfaces shall be kept completely and continuously moist prior to
and during form removal by water applied on the unformed top surfaces and
allowed to pass down between the forms and the formed concrete faces. This
procedure shall be followed by the specified water curing.
(b) Concrete cured with water shall be kept wet for at least 14 days immediately
following placement of the concrete or until covered with fresh concrete by
covering with water saturated material or any other suitable method which will keep
all surfaces continuously (not periodically) wet.
13.0 Formwork:
13.1 General
a) The forms for concrete work shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to hold and
withstand the pressure of fresh concrete during compaction including live load and
shaped to the required line writhing the tolerance specified. The tolerances specified
are for finished concrete and not for the forms. Where the character of the natural
material cut into to receive a concrete structure, is such that it can be trimmed to the
prescribed lines, the use of forms shall not be required. All exposed concrete
surfaces having slopes of two horizontals to one vertical or steeper shall be formed.
The Acro Plates (heavy metal plates with heavy stiffeners) shall be used for
formwork of mass concrete.
b) Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the
required lines or to ensure against contamination of the concrete by material caving
in or sloughing from adjacent surface left by excavation or other features of the
work. All exposed concrete surface having slope steeper than two horizontal to one
vertical shall be formed.
c) Formwork may be of plywood, or of heavy steel plates (Acro plates) or of such
other suitable materials or combination of such materials.Ordinary steel plates
Formwork/timber plank formwork will not allowed. shall be substantially and
rigidly constructed to the shapes, lines and dimensions required, efficiently propped
and braced to prevent deformation due to placing, vibrating and compacting, other
incidental loads or the effect of weather. If settlement or deflection of forms under
167
 the load of fresh concrete is to be expected, allowance should be made in the
original construction of the forms so that the finished lines and dimensions of the
structures are in accordance with those specified on the drawings. The bamboos for
formwork shall be straight and in one piece. The form work for concrete shall be
designed, treating concrete as a fluid , weighing 150Lbs/cu.ft.(2400 kg/cu.mt)
addition a live load of 50 Lbs/sq.ft (245 kg/cu.mt) on horizontal projection of the
surface shall be used . The supports shall be so arranged as to keep the maximum
deflection within 1/360 of the span. Forms shall be designed and constructed to
permit early removal without injury to the concrete. Suitable devices shall be used
to hold corners, adjacent ends of panels of other forms together in accurate
alignment during compaction of concrete by vibration or other means. The forms
and their joints shall be tight enough to prevent, while vibrating, the loss of mortar
from concrete. The ties and bracings as may be necessary shall be attended to.
Forms to be used more than once shall be maintained in serviceable condition and
shall be clean, smooth and free from adhering grout before being reused. Curved
and special forms shall be of a character that will result in smooth concrete surfaces.
They shall be designed and constructed so that they will not warp or swell during
erection or placing of concrete.
d) The surface of form work shall be made such as to produce surface finishes as
specified and form work joints space be tight enough to prevent loss of liquid or
bleeding from concrete. Joints between the form work and existing concrete
structures shall also be grout tight. Formwork shall be arranged to facilitate easing
and removing of the various parts in correct sequence, without jarring or damaging
the concrete. Fixing blocks, or bolts similar devices may be embedded in the
concrete, provided they do not reduce the strength or effective cover of any part of
the structure below the required standard. But the use of through bolt shall be
avoided as far as possible. Temporary opening shall be provided at all points
necessary in the forms to facilitate cleaning and inspection immediately before
placing of the concrete.
e) Form shall overlap the hardened concrete in the lift previously placed by not less
than 75 mm and shall be tightened snugly against the hardened concrete. Particular
attention shall be paid in setting and tightening the forms for construction joints so
as to get a smooth joint free from sharp deviations or projections.
f) Molding strips shall be placed in the corners of forms so as to produce chamfered
edges as required on permanently exposed concrete surface.
168
g) The formwork for various types of vertical R.C.C. members i.e. retaining walls,
counter forts, bridge piers side walls, abutment walls or any vertical wall shall be
carried out as per drawing or any equivalent arrangement approved by Engineer-in-
Charge shall be used. Formwork shall not allow any exposure of corrosive material
after removal of formwork. The shuttering arrangement for that consisting of
through bolts (either replaceable or non-replaceable) or reinforcing bolts, washer
which shall be confirming to IS: 1786-1985. It will come in direct contact with
water, soil or any aggressive atmosphere which will ingress on corrosion of
reinforcement and ultimately lead to the deterioration of concrete which is not
permitted. It shall be consisting of projecting cores H.D.P.E (High Density
Polyethylene Extrusion) which shall beconfirming to IS: 7328-1974 and P.V.C. IS:
10515-1982 or any latest published code. After concreting work is completed the
bolt shall be removed and the hole left in concrete shall be filled in accordance with
the provision of repair of concrete as per Para 5.15.
13.2 Material to be used
a) Material used for form sheathing and lining shall conform to the following
requirements.
Required Timber Sheathing of lining Steel Sheathing or lining
Finished
F1 Any type grade timber meeting Steel sheathing permitted steel
the dimensional requirement of lining permitted exact on
surface finish except that metal surface of internal transverse
forms shall be used on surface and longitudinal joints in the
of internal transverse and structure component where
longitudinal joints in mass steel sheathing is required.
concrete gravity walls.
F2 Common grade timber of Steel sheathing permitted steel
plywood or plywood sheathing lining permitted if strongly
or lining. supported.
F3 For plain surface common Steel sheathing permitted steel
grade timber or better timber lining not permitted
sheathing or plywood.
F4 For warped surface timber Steel sheathing permitted steel
which is free from knots and lining not permitted
other imperfections and which
169
 can be cut and bent accurately
to the required shape without
splintering or splitting.
Note: Steel sheathing denotes steel sheets not supported by a backing of timber
boards; steel lining denotes steel sheets supported by a back of timber boards.
b) Timber sheathing or lining shall be of such kind and quality or shall be so treated or
coated that there will be no chemical deterioration or discoloration of the formed
concrete surfaces. The type and condition of form sheathing and lining and the
ability of forms to withstand distortion caused by placement and vibration of the
concrete, and the workmanship used in the form construction shall be such that the
formed surface will conform to applicable requirements of this specification
pertaining to finish of formed surfaces.
c) Forms for concrete surface required to receive F2 and F3 finishes shall be
constructed so as to produce uniform and consistent texture and pattern on the
concrete faces. Metal patches on forms for these faces shall not be permitted. The
form sheathing or lining shall be so placed that all horizontal form marks are
continuous across the entire surface. Where finish F2 is specified the sheathing or
lining shall be placed so that the joint marks on the concrete surface shall be in
general alignment both horizontally and vertically and the form sheathing material
used for such surfaces shall be restricted to one type in any one major feature of the
work.
d) Forms for surfaces required to receive F4 finish shall be constructed so as to
confirm accurately to the required curvature of the section. Where necessary to meet
requirements for curvature, the form sheathing shall be built up of laminated splices
cut to make right, smooth form surface. The forms shall be so constructed that the
joints marks on the concrete surface shall in general, follow the line of water flow.
After the forms have been constructed, all surfaces imperfections shall be corrected,
all the nails shall be hidden and any roughness and all angles on the surface of the
forms caused by matching the forms materials shall be dressed to curvature.
e) If temperate hard wood is used as form lining, it shall be continuously supported
with timber or plywood.
f) Embedded ties for holding forms shall remain embedded and except where F1 finish
is permitted they shall terminate not less than two diameters or twice the minimum
dimension of the tie or ten millimeters whichever is greater, from the formed faces
of the concrete. Where F1 finish is permitted, ties may be cut off flush with formed
170
 surface.
g) The ties shall be constructed so that removal of the ends or end of fasteners can be
accomplished without causing appreciable spelling at the faces of the concrete.
Recesses resulting from removal of the ends of the form ties shall be filled in
accordance with the provision for repair of concrete as per relevant para.
13.3 Form, Centering and Temporary works.
(a) The basic requirements of good formwork are strength, rigidity and conformity to
design and geometrical shapes. The formwork shall be properly designed to
withstand the loads coming over it. The formwork shall also be firm and rigid. It
shall be so strong that at the time of vibration of concrete it does not get out of
alignment and does not allow any mortar or water to leak from the gaps. It should be
so designed that it can be finely adjusted in lines and levels and can be removed
gradually by wedging action. Form oil shall be applied to facilitate easy removal of
formwork without damaging the concrete surface. In short, formwork shall be given
due importance in the concrete work. As far as possible only steel formwork shall
be used.
(b) Timber formwork can be used where special shapes are to be formed and where
repetitive use is not feasible. Plywood of good quality should be used or wood
should be lined with G.I sheeting. Green or wet timber shall not be used. If, the
formwork has been in use for sometime, its surfaces shall be checked for
geometrical shape. Defect if any, shall be corrected before use.
(c) All centering, formwork and temporary works shall be constructed according to the
approved drawings and specifications. The IS:883-1970"Code of practice for design
of structural timber in building" shall be applicable for this work.
As soon as practicable, after the acceptance of his tender, the Contractor shall
submit a scheme showing the order of precedence and method by which he proposes
to carry out work, together with such details as are necessary to demonstrate the
adequacy, stability and safety of the methods.
(d) The approval to the general scheme of centering as well as design criteria and
loading shall be obtained in good time to facilitate all preparatory works. Any delay
on this account shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
(e) After approval of the general scheme, the Contractor shall prepare detailed design
and drawings for execution of the formwork, centering and temporary work. These
shall be forwarded to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. No work shall be carried
without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
171
(f) Notwithstanding to the approval given to the design criteria and loading and the
general scheme for the centering, the entire responsibility for the satisfactory
execution of centering and all temporary works shall rest with the Contractor and he
shall be liable to pay all claims and compensation arising from any loss or damage
to life and property due to deficiency, failure or malfunctioning of the centering or
the temporary works.
(g) Forms required to be used more than once shall be maintained in serviceable
condition and shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired before reuse. Where metal
sheets are used for lining forms, the sheets shall be placed and maintained in the
forms without lumps or other imperfections. All forms shall be checked for shape
and strength before reuse.
(h) The Contractor shall procure minimum two sets of the formwork for walls and slabs.
(i) Scaffolding: -
The scaffolding, hoisting arrangements and ladders etc. required for the facility of
concreting shall be provided and removed on completion of work by the contractor
at his own expenses. The scaffolding hoisting arrangement and ladders etc. shall be
strong enough to withstand all live, dead and impact loads expected to act and shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. However contractor shall be
solely responsible for the safety of the scaffolding, hoisting arrangement, ladders
work and workman etc. and a certificate from the supervisory Engineer of the
contractor for its safety shall be furnished by the contractor before approval of
scaffolding by the Engineer-in-charge.The scaffolding, hoisting arrangement and
ladders shall allow easy approach to the work spot and offer easy inspection.
13.4 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms
At the time the concrete is placed in the forms, the surfaces of the forms shall be
free from encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign materials. Before concrete
is placed, the surfaces of the forms designated to produce F1, F2, F3, and F4,
finishes shall be oiled with commercial form oil that will effectively prevent
sticking and will not stain the concrete surface. For timber forms, form oil shall
consist of pure refined pale paraffin mineral oil or other approved form oil. For steel
forms, form oil shall consist of refined mineral oil suitably compounded with one or
more ingredients which are appropriate for the purpose. Care shall be taken to keep
form oil out of contact with reinforcement.
13.5 Removal of Forms
(a) Except or otherwise, provided in this sub clause forms shall be removed as soon as
172
 the concrete has hardened sufficiently, thus facilitating satisfactory specified curing
and earliest practicable repair of surface imperfections. Forms on upper sloping
surface of concrete, such as forms on the water sides of warped transition, shall be
removed as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging.
Any needed repair or treatment required on such sloping surface shall be performed
at once and be followed immediately by the specified curing.
(b) In order to avoid excessive stresses in the concrete that might result from swelling
of the forms, timber forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as this can be
accomplished without damage to the concrete.
(c) Subject to approval, forms on concrete surface close to excavated rock surface may
be left in place provided that the distance between the concrete surface and the rock
is less than 400mm and that the forms are not exposed to view after completion of
the works.
(d) Forms shall be removed with care so as to avoid damage to the concrete. Concrete
damaged if any in form removal shall be repaired in accordance with the provisions
for repair of concrete as per Para 5.15
(e) Minimum strength to be attained by concrete for safe removal of forms
(i) Concrete not subjected to appreciable bending or direct stress nor reliant on
forms for vertical support nor liable to injury from removal or other
construction activities, vertical or approximately vertical surface of thick
section-500 psi (35 kg/sq.cm.)
(ii) Concrete subjected to appreciable bending and for direct stress and partially
reliant on forms for vertical support.
(a) Subject to dead load only, surfaces of unloaded Columns, walls, beams,
and other than sections (750 PSI at three day)
(b) Subject to dead and live loads, galleries, loaded columns and walls. (1500
PSI at three day)
(c) Roof or floor slabs, walkways, platforms etc., press and not on boards
(2000 PSI at 20 days).
(d) Heavily reinforced beams, bridges, lock and girders and other heavily
reinforced thick section wholly reliant on forms for vertical support
(2500 PSI at 20 days).
(f) In normal circumstances and where ordinary cement is used, form may be struck off
after expiry of following period.
i. Side walls of Beams 28 to 48 hrs
173
 ii. Removal of beam soffits
(Props left under) 7 days
iii. Removal of props slab
Spanning up to 4.5 mt. 7 days
Spanning over 4.5 mt. 14 days
iv. Removal of props of beams and arches
Spanning up to 6 mt. 14 days
Spanning over 6 mt. 21 days.
The period given above in brackets are approximate and for rough guidance. The
removal of forms should entirely be based on the minimum strength specified varies
widely under different job conditions of temperature, materials and curing etc.
(g) Procedure when removing the form work :
All form work shall be removed without such hook or vibrations as would damage
the reinforcement concrete surface. Before the soffits and struts are removed, the
concrete surface shall be exposed where necessary in order to ascertain that the
concrete has sufficiently hardened.
(h) Re-Use :
Before use all form shall be inspected by the Engineer-in-charge and their suitability
ascertained. The forms shall be scarred. Cleaned and joints, repaired where required.
Inside surface shall be retreated to prevent adhesion of concrete.

14SPECIALIZED FORM WORK:

Specialized form work may be required in the case of slip form work under water
concreting, segmental construction etc. Such specialized form work shall be
designed and detailed by competent agencies and design shall be certified by
qualified Structural Engineer under his Signature and Seal and a set of complete
work drawing and installation instruction shall be supplied to the Engineer. The site
personnel shall be trained in the erection and dismantling as well as operation of
such specialized form work. In case proprietary equipment is used the supplier shall
supply drawing details, installation instructions, etc. in the form of manuals along
with the form work. Where specialized form work is used close co-ordination with
the design of permanent structure is necessary.
For slip form the rate of slipping the form work shall be designed for each
individual case taking into account various parameters including in the grade of
concrete, concrete strength, concrete temperature, ambient temperature, concrete
174
 admixtures etc. In the case of segmental construction the concrete mix shall be
normally designed for developing high early strength so t hat the form work is
released as early as possible.
In order to verify the time and sequence of striking/removal specialized form work,
routine field tests for the consistency of concrete and strength development are
mandatory and shall be carried out before adoption.
For specialized formwork, the form lining material may be either plywood or steel
sheet of appropriate thickness. Plywood is preferably where superior quality of
surface is desired, whereas steel sheeting normally used where large number of
repetitions are involved.

15.0 Finishing:
(a) General:
The concrete surface shall be termed as formed or unformed. Both types of surface
shall be finished by skilled workmen. The concrete surface shall be tested as
detailed below and compared with the tolerance fixed. The surface irregularities
shall be classified as either ‘abrupt’ or ‘gradual’ Offsets and fins caused by
displaced or misplaced form sheathing, lining or form section by loose knots in
forms or by otherwise defective form number shall be classified as ‘abrupt’ and
tested by direct measurement. Others shall be template as ‘gradual’ irregularities
and measured with a template as ‘gradual’ irregularities and measured with a
template consisting of a straight edge for plain surface or its equivalent for curved
surface. The length of the template will be 5 ft. (1.5m) for formed surface and 10 ft.
(3.0m) for unformed surface. All exposed surface shall be cleaned of all unsightly
encrustations or stain.

(b) Formed Surfaces:

Surface having slopes steeper than two horizontals to one vertical shall be formed.
The classes of finish for formed concrete surface are designated by the use of
symbols F1, F2, F3 and F4. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings,
the classes of finish shall apply as follows:
F1 – Finish:
F1 applies to formed surface upon or against which backfill or concrete is to be
placed or which will otherwise be permanently concealed. The surface requires no
treatment after form removal, except removal and repair of defective concrete and
175
the specified curing. Correction of surface irregularities will be required only for
depressor greater than 1 inch. Form sheathing may be anything that will not leak
mortar when concrete is vibrated. Form may be built with minimum of refinement.

F2 – Finish:
F2 applies to all formed surface not permanently concealed by backfill or concrete
except surface for which finish F3 or F4 is specified. This would apply to all
galleries, structures and to other permanently exposed surface for which other finish
are not specified. Surface for which finish F2 is specified will need no filling of pits
or sack rubbing and no grinding other than that needed for repair of surface
imperfection. Surface irregularities, shall not exceed ¼ inch (6mm) for abrupt
irregularities and ½ inch (12mm) for gradual irregularities.

F3 – Finish:
F3 applies to all formed surface. This shall be applicable for surfaces or structures
permanently exposed to public view when appearance is of special importance such
as parapets, spillway piers, interior and exterior walls of hoist elevator towers and
other decorative features. No general stoning or grinding will be required on
surfaces for which Finish F3 is specified, although in some cases conspicuous air
holes shall be filled by sack rubbing. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/8 inch
(3 mm) for abrupt irregularities and ¼ inch (6 mm) for gradual irregularities.
irregularities exceeding these limits shall be reduced by grinding with no.60
carborundum stone or sand grinder to a level of 1 to 20 ratio of height to length.
Immediately after removal of form work from surfaces for which f3 as required,
sack rubbed mortar finish, as described below, shall be given to fill up the air holes
and to remove difference in colour, if any, due to use of excess oil on forms and
rust stains after completing all patching, cleaning operations and correction of major
imperfections.

F4– Finish:
F4 applies to formed surfaces where accurate alignment and evenness of surfaces
are essential for prevention of destructive effect of running water e.g. it applies to
hydraulic surfaces. Such surfaces include spillway crest, spillway face, spray wall,
part of divide wall exposed to running water , intake for canals, outlet for canals,
energy dissipation for outlet works, inlet structures, spillway face , except where
176
special finish is required in addition to any necessary repairs, surface treatment will
consist of the grinding of offsets and bulges on a level of 1 to 20 gradual surface
irregularities shall not exceed ¼ inch (6mm).

Special Finish:
This finish shall be applied to star risers, and other important places where specially
smooth and even surface is required. Forms from the vertical surfaces where the
special finish is required , shall be removed between 12 to 24 hours after completion
of concreting and all required patching and repair of major imperfections shall be
done. Then the entire surface shall be wetted with a brush and rubbed with a hard-
wood float, dipped in water containing two pounds of Portland cement per gallon of
water (0.2 kg of cement per liter). Rubbing shall be continued, until all form marks
and projections are removed. Wood float rubbing shall be timed in such a way, that
the aggregate grains should not be dislodged nor so late , that the surface is too hard
to be readily dressed . curing of the surface shall be continued till the completion of
the curing period of concrete. The grindings from the rubbing operations shall be
uniformly spreaded over the entire surface with a brush in such a manner as to fill
all pits and small holes. The brushed surface shall be allowed to harden and shall
then be kept moist for at least 3 days .the final finish shall then be obtained by
rubbing with a carborudum stone of no.50 grit until the entire surface has a smooth
texture and is uniform in colour.

Unformed Surfaces:
The classes of finish specified for unformed surfaces are designated as U1, U2 and
U3. Unformed surfaces exposed to weather and those which would normally be
horizontal shall be sloped for drainage. Unless otherwise indicated, on drawings or
ordered, narrow surfaces such as the top of walls and curbs shall be sloped 3/8” per
foot (30.0 mm per meter ) of width and broader surface such as roadways, platforms
and decks shall be sloped ¼ ” per foot, (20 mm per meter). Concrete having
unformed, exposed surface shall contain just enough mortar to avoid the necessity
for excessive floating. Collection of excess mortar at the surface after thorough
compaction should be avoided and any fine materials or excess mortar worked upto
the top should be removed. No dry cement nor a mixture of dry cement and sand
shall be sprinkled directly on the surface to stiffen the mix. Use of finishing tools in
areas where water has accumulated should be prohibited. Operations on such areas
177
should be delayed for nearly 30 to 40 minutes until the water is absorbed, has nearly
30 to 40 minutes until the water is absorbed, has evaporated, or is removed by
draining or other means. The finish shall be brought to a smooth surface free from
defects and blemishes. Working of the surface of the various finishing operations
should be the minimum necessary to obtain the desired finish.

Finish U1:
Finish U1 shall apply to unformed surface finished by screeding. This finish shall be
done for all concealed surface such as floor which will be covered concrete floor
topping and for surface requiring roughness such as road surface. This is also used
as the first stage for finish U2 and U3. The finishing operations shall consist of
leveling and screeding the concrete to produce an even uniform surface and surface
irregularities of more than 3/8” (10.0 mm) shall not be permitted.

Screed Finish:
Wherever feasible, electrically operated vibroscreeds shall be used. After the
concrete is thoroughly vibrated, finishing pass of the vibrating screed should follow
with the vibrator running at low frequency. The finishing pass shall be made with
the screed sliding along the forms and shall be performed by skilled workmen.
Wherever wooden or metal screed is used, it should be removed back and forth
across the concrete with a skewing motion and advanced forward a short distance
with each movement with some excess concrete against the front face of the screed.
This will facilitate filling of low portions of concrete to the desired surface as the
template passes over. Metal edged screed should be used where minimum tearing of
surface is desired.

Finish U2:
This is a floated finish and shall be used for spillway bucket, exposed face of
spillway bridge, floors of galleries, surface of gutters and similar other outdoor
unformed surface. Floating shall be done either by vibroscreed or metal edged
screed. The concrete surface shall be left undisturbed for 30 to 45 minutes until all
surface water has disappeared and there is no visible seen. Minimum floating
necessary to produce surface uniform in texture and free from screed marks, should
be done. Wherever finish U3 is to be applied the floating should leave, small
amount of mortar without excess water at the surface to permit effective troweling.
178
 Any necessary cutting or filling should be done during the floating operations. Joints
and edges shall be finished with steel edging tools. Surface irregularities shall not
exceed ¼ inch (6 mm).
Finish U3:
This is troweled finish and shall be applicable to unformed surface permanently
exposed to view such as top of parapets, stair treads and gallery floors. When the
floated surface has stiffened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material or free
water being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be started and too long a
delay in troweling should be avoided as the surface will become too hard for
finishing. Steel troweling shall be performed with a firm pressure that will flatten
and smoothen the sandy texture left by floating and the troweling should produce,
dense, uniform surface, free of blemishes, surface irregularities more than ¼ ” (6
mm ) and trowel marks. For this regular U3 finish shall be troweled again after the
surface is nearly hardened, using glossy appearance. When the concrete surface has
hardened sufficiently, initial curing shall be done by gentle spraying of water, taking
care to protect the finished surface.

16.0 Preventing hair cracks :

Hair cracks are usually the result of concentration of water and fines at the surface
caused by over-manipulation during and by too rapid drying or cooling. When the
humidity is so low as to cause cracking of the finished surface before it can be
covered without damage, The surface should be moistened and kept moist
temporarily with a very fine spray of water supplied so as not to wash the surface
nor form pools on it. Since chilling of the green concrete increases its tendency to
crack, it is desirable that the water used for preliminary moistening not be cooler
than and should preferably be warmer than concrete.

17.0 Curing protection:

All concrete shall be protected against injury until final acceptance. Unhardened
concrete shall be protected from heavy rains and flowing water. No fire or excessive
heat shall be permitted near or in direct contact with concrete at any time. Exposed
finished surface of concrete shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun for at
least the first three days after placement. Such protection shall be made effective as
soon as practicable after placing of unformed concrete or after the removal of forms
from formed concrete. Exposed finished surface of concrete shall be protected from
179
 the direct rays of sun for at least 72 hours after placement. Concrete shall be kept
continuously moist for not less than 21 days. Construction joints shall be cured in
the ways as other concrete and shall also be kept moist for at least 72 hour prior to
the placing of additional concrete upon the joints. Approximately horizontal surface
shall be cured by sprinkling or by covering by damp sand, or may cured by covering
with mats. If damp sand is used for curing, it shall be removed completely later.
Water curing shall be used on all concrete works. It shall be applied by means of
sprays or sprinklers.
Forms shall be kept sprinkled until removal. The contractor shall protect all concrete
against injury until final acceptance by the engineer.

18.0 Repairs of concrete:

18.1 Repair of concrete shall be performed by skilled workers. All imperfection of the
concrete shall be corrected as necessary to produce smooth surface.Repairs of
imperfections in formed concrete shall be completed as soon as practicable, within
24 hours after the removal of forms. Concrete that is damaged from any cause,
concrete that is honey-combed, fractured or otherwise defective and concrete,
which because of excessive surface depressions must be removed and replaced by
dry pack mortar or as hereinafter specified.
18.2 Dry filling shall be used for holes that have surface dimensions smaller than the
depth of hole, such as for holes left by the remover of fasteners from the ends of
form, tie road for grout, insert holes and for narrow slots, out for repair of cracks.
Filling of holes left by removal of fasteners from the ends of the tie roads in the
surface, for which finish F1 is specified, will not be required. Dry pack shall not be
used for filling behind reinforcement or for filling holes that external completely
through a concrete section.
18.3 Mortar filling, placed under impact by use of mortar gun, shall be used for holes
too wide dry pack filling and too shallow for concrete filling and no deeper than
the far side of the reinforcement that is nearest concrete surface.
18.4 Concrete filling shall be used for holes extending through concrete sections, for
holes which are greater in area than one square foot (0.1 Sq.mt) and deeper than 4
inches ( 0.1 m ), and for holes, in reinforced concrete, which are greater in area
than one half square foot ( 0.05 Sq.mt ) and which extend beyond reinforcement.
All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete shall be
subject to direct by the Engineer. All filling shall be bounded tightly to the surface
180
 of the hole and shall ne sound and free from shrinkage, cracks and drumly areas
after the filling has been cured and dried. All filling in surface for which finish F3
specified shall contain sufficient white Portland cement to produce the same colour
as that of the adjoining concrete.
18.5 All patching shall be with extreme care, co that patches will not be noticeable from
a distance of 75 ft. (25mt). Coloured cement as an ingredient of the patching
mortar may be used if necessary, to produce patch of same colour as the adjoining
concrete.

19.0 Use of Dry Pack mortar for repairing of concrete:

19.1 Repair operations shall be preceded by a careful inspection to see that hole is
thoroughly. Clean and slightly wet but with a small amount of free water on the
interior surface. The surface shall then be dusted lightly and slowly with cement by
means of a small dry brush until all surface are covered and darkened by the
absorption of water by the cement. There shall be no dry cement in the hole when
packing begins and such cement, if present, shall be removed. The holes shall not
be painted with wet cement grout.
19.2 Dry pack mortar shall consist of a mixture of 1 part of cement of 2 ½ part of sand
that will pass a no 120.I.S. Sieve. White cement will be used in sufficient quantity
to produce uniform colour matching with that of surrounding concrete at points
wherever desired by the Engineer.
19.3 For packing cone-bolt holes, a leaner mixture of 1 to 3 to 1 to 3 ½ will be used.
Only enough water shall be used to produce a mortar which when used, will stick
together on being molded into a ball by slight pressures of hands, and will not
exclude water but will leave the hands damp. (The proper amount of mixing water
and proper consistency are those which will produce a filling which is at a point of
becoming rubbery, when the material is solidly packed).
19.4 Dry pack mortar shall be place and packed in layers having a compacted thickness
of about 3/8 inch (10mm). The surface of each layer shall be scratched to facilitate
bonding with next layers. One layer may follow unless appreciable rubberiness
develops, in which case work on the repair shall be delayerd 30 to 40 minutes.
Under no circumstances shall alternate layers of wet and dry materials be used.
19.5 Each layer must be solidly compacted over the entire surface by use of a hard
wood stick and a hammer. (These sticks are usually 8 to 12 inches (20 to 30cm)
long and not over 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter and are used on fresh mortar like a
181
 caulking tool). Much of tamping will be directed at a slight angle and towards the
sides of the holes to assure maximum compaction in these areas. The holes shall
not be overfilled and finishing shall be completed at once by laying the flat side of
a hard wood piece against the fill and striking used, and water must not be used to
facilitate finishing.

20.0 Requirement of Concrete Construction.

20.1 General
All concrete construction shall conform to the permissible tolerance and technical
provisions as described in this section and to the detailed requirements of the lines
grades and dimension shown in the drawing or as prescribed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The location of all the construction joints shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge. The dimension of each structure shown on the drawings
shall be subject to such changes as may be found necessary by the Engineer-in-
Charge to adopt for the structure to the conditions disclosed by the excavation.
20.2 Concrete in various components of Air-filled rubber dam structures.
a) The item of the schedule for concrete in aforesaid structure includes all concrete in
the various components of the structure and block outs.
b) Expansion joints shall be constructed as shown on the drawing or as directed. Pre-
molded bituminous fiber type expansion joint material shall be placed in the
expansion joints. Lighting recesses shall be constructed in the parapets as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge. Open joints or false joints shall be constructed as shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Preformed expansion
joint filler shall be placed in the roadway and side walls where shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
20.3 Concrete in Block outs
a) All concrete required to be placed in block outs to permit the installation and
adjustment of mechanical and other equipment shall be included in the respective
concrete as described above. The concrete surface of the block outs shall be chipped
and roughened as described hereinafter before the concrete is placed in block outs.
b) Exceptional care shall be taken in placing the concrete in block out in order to
ensure satisfactory bond with the concrete previously placed and to secure complete
contact with all metal work in the block outs.
c) The roughening of the concrete surface of the block outs shall be performed by
chipping or sand blasting as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and in such a
182
 manner as not to loosen, crack or shatter any part of the concrete beyond the
roughened surface. After being roughened the surface of the concrete shall be
cleaned thoroughly of loose fragments, dirt and other objectionable substances and
shall be sound and hard to ensure good mechanical bond between the existing and
new concrete. All concrete which is not hard, dense and durable shall be removed to
the depth required to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. While placement of
concrete, care shall be taken so as not to dislocate or disturb installation
20.4 Embedment in Concrete
In some of the locations of structures as shown on the relevant drawings a few
conduits or openings shall have to be provided through RCC/ PCC/ Masonry work.
Construction of the surface for either placement of concrete or for laying of
masonry shall have to be suitably carried out so as to meet with the placement to
such conduits or openings. No extra claim for such improvidence in construction
shall been entertained.

21.0 Construction Joints

a) Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joints, the
position and details of which shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
b) For vertical construction joints stopping boards shall be fixed previously at a
predetermined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to
prevent its displacement or bulging when concreting is completed against it.
Concreting shall be continued right up to the board. The board shall not be removed
before expiry of the specified period for removal of vertical forms.
c) Before resuming work at any construction joints when concrete has not yet fully
hardened, all laitance shall be removed thoroughly, care shall be taken to avoid
dislodgement of coarse aggregates.
d) When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be
thoroughly raked, swept cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement
grout. The neat cement grout shall be followed by a 15 mm thick layer of mortar
mixed in the same proportion as in concrete and concreting resumed immediately
thereafter. The batch of concrete shall be rammed against the old work to avoid
formation of any stone pockets, particular attention being paid to corners and close
spots.
e) In all cases, the position and detailed arrangement of all construction joints shall be
183
 predetermined and got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
f) The contractor shall construct the concrete steps near the structure. The steps shall
be construct M-15 grade as shown in drawing or as directed by the Engineer in
Charge for inspection

22.0 TESTING OF CONCRETE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

(a) Sampling Procedure:
A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete
batch has a reasonable chance of being tested i.e. the sampling shall be spread
over the entire period of concreting and shall cover all mixing units.
(b) Frequency:
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each mix shall be in
accordance with the following:
Quantity of concrete Number of samples
3
in m
1 to 5 1(6 nos)
6 to 15 2(12 nos)
16 to 30 3(18 nos)
31 to 50 4(24 nos)
51 and above 4 Plus one additional sample for Each
additional 50 m3 or part thereof.
Each sample have 6 nos. of standard
15 x 15 x15 cm concrete cubes.
Note:- At least one set of cubes in a shift irrespective of quantity of concrete
shall be taken.

(c) Test Specimen:

For controlled concrete/ nominal mix concrete, tests shall be carried out consist of
casting concrete cubes of size 15cm x 15cm x 15cm, in three separate sets and in
each set, tests shall be conducted on six specimens. Out of the six specimens in each
set, three shall be tested at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days. The
preliminary tests at 7 days are intended only to indicate the strength likely to be
attained at 28 days. In all cases, the 28 days compressive strengths shall alone be the
criterion for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.Additional cubes may be

184
 required for various purposes, such as to determine the strength of concrete at the
time of striking formwork. The specimen shall be tested as directed in IS: 516-1959.

(d) Test strength of samples:

(i) The test strength of the sample shall be the average of three specimens. Individual
variation more than 15 percent of the average of the three samples is found than the
test result of that sample is invalid andshall be deleted for the purpose of averages.
Contractor shall provide necessary unskilled labour and facilities for transport, for
collection of samples, cores, etc. and shall remain present at the time when the
samples are taken. Testing shall be carried out at the project testing laboratory or at
any other laboratory that the Engineer-In-Charge may decide upon and the results
given there by shall be considered as correct and authentic and acceptable to the
contractor. The contractor shall be given access to all operations and tests that may
be carried out as aforesaid.
The material and labour including transport for the materials for testing shall be
provided by the contractor at his cost. He shall not eligible for payment for this. The
preparation and the testing of the cubes shall be carried out by the Nigam.
(e) Acceptance Criteria :
(i) The average strength of the group of cubes cast for each day shall not be less than
the specified cube strength for the work. About 20 percent of the cubes cast may
have values less than the specified strength provided the lowest value is not less
than 85% of the specified strength.
(ii) In case on the basis of laboratory test results, it shows that the concrete does not
conform to the acceptance criteria for strength as specified above, the hardened
concrete may be acceptable after carrying out destructive or non-destructive tests as
specified in IS;456-2000 Para No 17. The Engineer-In-Charge may decide the type
of testing and acceptance of concrete on the basis of test results so obtained.
(iii) In case, the concrete does not conform to the acceptance criteria for strength as
specified above (i) and (ii) the Engineer-In-Charge reserves the right to reject the
work or accept the same at a reduced rate derived from tendered rate and as
approved by him. Whenever necessary for the purpose of obtaining economy,
workability, density, impermeability, durability or strength on account of variation
in the quality and gradation of aggregates or other materials, the Engineer-In-Charge
shall, after testing, make necessary changes in the proportion of mix. Contractor

185
 shall have to effect these changes and shall not be entitled to any compensation on
account of such changes.
(iv) In case of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used, either due to poor
workmanship or based on results of cube strength test, the hardened concrete may
be accepted after carrying out the destructive or non-destructive test as specified in
Para 17 of IS 456-2000. The Engineer-In-Charge will decide the type of test results
and acceptance of concrete on the basis of test results so obtained. The Engineer-In-
Charge will carry out the test in the presence of authorized person of the contractor.
All the facilities for carrying out such test shall have to be provided by the
contractor without any extra cost to the WRD.
(v) Whenever necessary for the purpose of obtaining economy, workability, density,
impermeability, durability or strength or on account of variation in the quality and
gradation of aggregates or other materials. The Engineer-in-charge, in consultation
with laboratory organization shall after testing make necessary changes in the
proportion of mix. Contractor shall have to effect these changes and shall not be
entitled to any compensation on account of such changes.
(vi) In case the concrete does not conform to the acceptance criteria for strength as
specified above, the Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to reject the work.
23.0 Tolerances in Concrete Construction
23.1General
(a) Permissible surface irregularities for the various classes of concrete surface finishes
specified in the relevant portion of the paragraph of “Finishes and Finishing of
Concrete Surfaces” are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from
“Tolerance” as described in it this section. Deviation from the established lines,
grades and dimensions shall be permitted to the extent set forth in this clause,
provided that lesser tolerance than that set forth in this clause may be prescribed at
site if such tolerances are considered to impair the structural action or operational
action or operational function of the structure.
(b) Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawings for any individual
structure or feature there-of, permissible deviations shall be interpreted in
conformity with the provision of this clause.
(c) Concrete work that exceeds the tolerance limits specified in this section shall be
either remedied as directed by Engineer-in-Charge or removed.

186
23.2 Tolerances for Structures
Variation in alignment, grade and dimensions of the structures from the established
alignment, grade and dimensions shown on the drawings shall be within the
tolerances specified in relevant IS code. Variation shall not be cumulative.

General:
The intent of this paragraph is to establish tolerances that are consistent with
modern construction practice, yet governed by the effect that permissible deviation
will have upon the structural action or operational function of the structure. Where
tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawing for any individual structure
or feature thereof, permissible deviation will be interpreted in conformity with the
provision of this paragraph.
The contractor shall construct all concrete structures to the exact lines, grades, and
dimensions established.
However, inadvertent variation from the established lines, grades and dimensions
will be permitted to the extent set forth herein, provided, that the Engineer reserves
the right to diminish the tolerance set forth herein if such tolerance impairs the
structural action or operational function of the structure. The notation on the
drawings of specific maximum or minimum tolerances in connection with any
dimension shall be considered as supplemental to the tolerances specified herein.
Rejected work shall be remedied or removed and replaces at the expense of and by
the contractor.
Variation in alignment, grade and dimensions of the structures from the established
alignment, grade and dimensions shown on the drawing shall be within the tolerance
specified in Table below as per relevant IS.
1 Departure from established alignment 25 mm.
2 Departure from established grade 25mm.
3 Variations from plumb as for surfaces
of columns, piers and walls when
overall length of surface is 3.0 m. or Exposed 10mm.
less.
Buried 20mm.
more than 3.0 m. Exposed 12mm.
Buried 25mm.

187
 4 Variation in cross sectional dimensions
of columns, beams, slabs, walls and
similar members of Minus 6mm.
Plus 12mm.
5 Variation in location from those
specified for slab and wall opening. 12mm.

24.0 Record of concreting operations:

A systematic joint record in the form approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be
maintained to record the details regarding weighment and use of cement, number of
mixes of concrete, and of mortar used on works, rejected mixes, locations in which
concrete or mortar is used etc. This record shall be signed by the Engineer-in-charge
or his authorized representative on the site in token of having scrutinized and
verified the correctness of the entries made in the joint record. If the contractor fails
to scrutinize and scrutinize and verify the entries and sign the joint record, the
record, as scrutinized, verified and signed by the Engineer or his representative shall
be taken as final and binding on the contractor.

CENTERING AND SCAFFOLDING:

(a) The scaffolding must take account of all construction loads as well as speed
of erection. Scaffolding may be bolted on the sleeves embedded in the
concrete wall (Initially used for fixing shuttering). After concreting, the
scaffolding will have to remain in position near stressing points till all the
stressing is completed. Complete drawings of false work, accompanied where
necessary by calculations shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer-
In-Charge, 3(three) months prior to commencement of erection.
Any modification that the Engineer-In-Charge may require shall be made by
the contractor. Notwithstanding the approval of alternation suggested by the
Engineer-In-Charge in the submitted design for any of the temporary works
etc. the contractor shall remain wholly and entirely responsible till the final
acceptance of works, for the efficiency, security and maintenance and for all
obligation and risks in regard to such work specified or implied in the
contract. He shall reinstate the work at his own cost, any mishap or accident
occur causing damage or injury there to, subject however, to such provisions

188
 of the conditions of contract as may be applicable in the case of such damage
of injury.
Scaffolding may be released as per the convenience of the work. Centering
shall be lowered only with the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge and in a
manner which shall not damage the work. Scaffolding shall rest on wedges or
sand boxes or on screw jacks in order to permit controlled deshuttering. After
initial lowering, centering shall be kept in place till all finishing, repairing
work is completed on the underside of the structure.
A suitable designed flight of stairs giving temporary access to the top shall be
provided by the contractor at his own cost as a part of the false work scheme.

26.0 Unacceptable works: (applicable to all the items under this section)
All defective concreting work including but not limited to defects arising out of
honey-combing, under sizing, under strength etc. are liable to be demolished and
rebuilt by the Contractor at his cost. In the event of such work being accepted by
carrying out repairs etc. as specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, the cost of repairs
shall be borne by the Contractor. Acceptance of such works will be in accordance
with the provisions of IS: 456-2000. In the event of the work being accepted by
giving a design concession arising out of but not limited to under sizing and strength
by accepting higher design stresses in member and accepting materials not fully
meeting the specifications etc. the Contractor shall be paid for the work actually
carried out by him at a reduced rate derived from the tendered rate as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge.

27.0 MEASUREMENT &PAYMENT: (Item No.5,6,23,24)

27.1 Measurement and payment of concrete shall be made on the basis of the actual
volume of the concrete (Cubic meter) for the class as placed within the lines as
specified or as otherwise directed by the Engineer, according to all the provisions
mentioned above. No deductions shall be made for the space occupied by the
reinforcement anchor bars and electric conduit lines etc. The quantities of all holes
and passages greater than 10 cm (4”) in dia. Shall, however, be deducted from the
total quantity to arrive at the concrete work for payment. The reinforcement, steel
and other embedded metal parts shall be separately paid at the rates accepted as per
the schedule of prices.

189
27.2 No payment will however be made for embedding fixtures or providing grooves,
block outs etc. for gates and other installations, electric conduits etc. All labour
material, plant etc. involved in providing cement slurry and mortar on rock surface
and construction joints etc. shall be deemed to be included in the unit rate to be
paid for concrete.
27.3 Measurement, for payments, for the concrete laid in pockets in the foundation shall
be made on the basis of the volume of the pockets filled.
27.4 No payments shall be made for the concrete backfill beyond the minimum lines of
excavation shown on the drawings except where such payment is
specificallyauthorized. Measurement of concrete shall be made after deducting the
volume of all recesses, passageways, chambers, openings, cavities and depressions,
but without deductions for round or beveled edges or space occupied by electrical
conduits and reinforcement.
27.5 Theunitrateforconcrete shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools and
plantrequired for mixing, placing in position, vibrating and compacting, finishing
asperdirectionof the Engineer-in-charge, curing and all other incidentalexpenses for
producing concrete of specifiedstrength to complete the structure or its components
as shown in the drawings and according to these specifications. The rate shall also
include the cost of providing, fixing and removing of all centering and
formworkrequired for the work unless otherwise specified in the contract.
27.6 Allexpenseslikelytobeincurred by the Contractor in transporting materials supplied to
him to the site of work, the expenses incurred in improving the quality of materials
to acceptable levels (such as screening, washing etc.) and the expenses incurred in
proper storage of materials as directed by the Engineer-in-charge etc. are deemed to
be included in the unit rate.
27.7 Payment for the variousgrades of concrete shall be made on the basis of unit rate
percubicmeter quoted for relevant items in Bill of Quantities.

190
 REINFORCEMENT (Item No.7,26)

1.0 REINFORCEMENT
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The section covers specifications for Item No. 8 and 28 of Bill of quantities of
Tender.
The work includes providing, cutting, bending, binding, placing, welding and
erecting in position high yield strength deformed (HYSD)/TMT steel bars or MS
bars anchor bars, anchor roads as reinforcement, anchor bars, anchor roads for
concrete of various components of structures on the canals.
1.1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ITEM:
Item No. 7 :
Providing and placing in position reinforcement bars including cutting,
bending welding, joints where necessary, hooking etc. complete as per
drawing for all lead and lifts. (b) TMT
Item No. 26 :
Providing and placing in position reinforcement bars including cutting,
bending welding, joints where necessary, hooking etc. complete as per
drawing for all lead and lifts. (b) TMT

1.1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

The following applicable publications with latest revision shall be applicable.
1. IS: 226-1975 : Structural steel (Standard Qualification)
(Fifth revision)
2. IS: 432 – 1982: : Hard drawn steel wires
(Part-II)
(Third revision)
(Reaffirmed-1989)
3. IS: 814-1986 : Covered electrodes for metal are
191
 Welding of structural steels.
4. IS: 814- 1974 : For welding products other than
(Part-I) sheets
(Fourth revision)
(With Amendment No. 1 to 3)

5. IS: 814 – 1974 :For welding sheets.

(Part-II)
(Fourth revision)
6. IS: 1139-1966:Specification for Hot rolled mild steel medium (Revised)
tensile steel and high yield strength steel deformed (Superseded bybars for
concrete reinforcement.
IS: 1786)
7. IS: 1278-1972: Filler road and wires for gas welding.
(Second revision)
(Reaffirmed-1987) (With Amendment No.1)

8. IS: 1481-1970: Metric steel scales for engineers

(First revision)
(With 2 Amendments)
9. IS: 1521-1972: Method of tensile of steel wires.
(First revision)
10. IS: 1566-1982: Specification for Hard drawn steel wire Fabric
(Second revision) for concrete reinforcement
(Reaffirmed-1989).
(Amendment No.1)
11. IS: 1608-1972(First revision): Method for tensile resting of steel
(Reaffitmed-1991) products.
192
 12. IS: 280-1978 : Method for tensile resting of steel
(Reaffitmed-1989) engineering purpose.
13. IS: 1786-1985. (Third revision): Specification for high strength deformed
steel bars& wires for concrete reinforcement
14. IS: 2502-1963(Reaffitmed-1990): Code of practice for bending and
fixing of bars for concrete reinforcements.
15. IS: 5525-1969(Re-affirmed-1990) : Recommendation for detailing of
Reinforcement in reinforced concrete works.
16. IS: 2602-1984 (third revision): Wieldable structural steel
(Re-affirmed-1990) (Amendment – 3)
17. IS: 9417-1979: Recommendations for welding cold worked bars for
reinforced concrete construction.
Other relevant IS and provisions shall also be applicable.

1.2 General

(1) TMT reinforcement bars shall meet the requirement of I.S 1786 for Fe 500 &
relevant part of I.S 456-1978.

(2) The M.S. or H.Y.S.D or TMT (Fe-415 / FE-500) bars shall be procured by the
contractor from reputed primary/secondary manufacturers. The reinforcement
bars produced by re-rolling of steel shall not be permitted.
(3) Before steel reinforcement is placed in position, the surface of the reinforcement
shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt grease and other objectionable foreign
substances likely to destroy or reduce bond. Heavy flaky rust that can not be
removed by the firm rubbing with burlap or equivalent treatment shall be
considered objectionable. The fact that light, early stage rust has no detrimental
effect on bond and hence could be disregarded, shall not be used as excuse for
careless handling and storage of steel. In storing, bars of the same size, length,
shape, and grade shall be assemble in racks and marked distinctly. Before the
reinforcement bars are fixed in position, it shall be verified, that they are of the
specified size and are cut and bent in accordance with the plans and specification.
193
 They shall be accurately placed and secured in position by means of built in
concrete blocks, metallic chairs, hangers, spacers, or other suitable devices at
sufficiently close interval so that they will not sag between supports nor be
displaced during the placing of the concrete or by any operations for the work.
Special care shall be exercised to prevent any disturbance of the reinforcement in
concrete that has already been placed. The reinforcement after being placed in
position shall be maintained in clean condition until it is completely embedded in
concrete to prevent further damage to the concrete or unsightly rust stains on a
closed concrete surface.
(4) Supports for reinforcement shall be made of cement mortar of the same water
cement ratio as the concrete to be used in the particular work.

(5) Reinforcement shall not be straightened or bent in a manner that will injure or
weaken the materials. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be
used. Bars shall be bent to the shape and dimensions shown on the drawings, or as
directed using a bar bender operated by hand or power to attain bendings, or as
directed using a bar bender operated by hand or power to attain bending to correct
specified radius. The radius for bends along the edge of bar shall be not less than 4
times the diameter of the bar. Heating of reinforcement bars to facilitate bending
will not be permitted. However, such heating is permitted in the case of large
diameter bars. The temperature of the steel shall not exceed that corresponding
cherry red colour as specified by the Executive Engineer in charge of work. The
reinforcement available from rejected concrete shall not be used.

(6) Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed in concrete as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The drawings issued with these specifications
are typical ones. Further working drawings shall be issued by the Engineer-In-
Charge for each structure during the course of the contract.
(7) Not less than 10 days prior to placement of reinforcement, the contractor shall
submit to the Engineer-In-Charge three prints and a reproducible prints of each of
reinforcement detail working drawings for approval. The Contractor’s
reinforcement detailed drawing for approval shall be prepared in accordance with
IS: 456-1978 “Code of Practice for plain and Reinforced Concrete”; IS: 2502-1963
“Code of Practice for Bending and fixing of Bars for concrete Reinforcement” and
IS-5525-1969” Recommendation for detailing of Reinforcement in reinforced
concrete work” unless otherwise shown on the reinforcement detail drawings.
194
 Contractor’s drawings shall show necessary details for checking the bars during
placement and for use in establishing payment quantities. Reinforcement bars shall
conform to requirements shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. The approval of the Engineer-in-Charge to the Contractor’s reinforcement
detailed drawings shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
correctness of details or for conformance with the requirements of these
specifications
(8) Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed in concrete where shown on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(9) As far as possible high yield strength deformed HYSD/TMT bars conforming to
IS: 1786-1985 shall be used as reinforcement as shown in the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The steel shall be used in various components
of structures as per the drawing or as per instruction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
The payment shall be made and considered as per the unit rate quoted in the item
no. 8 and 28 of Bill of quantities.
(10) The contractor shall have to procure the required category and type of steel such as
mild steel, HYSD/TMT bars and the stacking of each type steel shall be made
separately. For each type of steel, the central place for stacking shall be established
by the contractor at each site of work.
(11) The reinforcement steel shall be procured from the BIS manufactures, BIS primary
/ Secondary manufacturer or his authorized dealer only, before 15 days prior to the
using in works. The contractor shall furnish BIS manufacture’s test certificate
along with test results for each category for every lot brought to the site of work.
The manufacture’s test results shall be from the manufacture’s laboratory only.
The test results from other laboratory shall not be accepted and the consignment
will be rejected. Testing of steel shall be carried out as per relevant IS code.
Frequency for steel testing (Physical properties) are as under as per IS 1786:1985.
Normal Quantity
Size of bar
Lot below 100 tonne. Lot above 100 tonne

Under 10 1 Sample from each 25 1 Sample from each 40

mm tonne tonne
10 to 16 1 Sample from each 35 1 Sample from each 45
195
 mm tonne tonne
Over 16 1 Sample from each 45 1 Sample from each 50
mm tonne tonne

However, the frequency of testing shall be decided by the Engineer-In-Charge as

per necessity during the course of execution, but the frequency as mentioned
above shall not be increased in any case. i.e. nos. of sampling and testing shall be
more than as mentioned above.
For the chemical analysis of steel, the frequency shall be twice in a working
season for each diameter bar and Brand and as decided by the Engineer-in-
charge.
The steel conforming the required standards as per tests for which the contractor
shall have to produce the authentic certificates from the manufacturer for such
type of testing for each lot of steel manufactured at a time and transported to the
works site.

1.3 Cutting, Bending and Binding

(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy for the cutting, bending and
placing of the reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be inspected for compliance
with the requirements as to grade, size, shape, length, placing and locations after it
has been placed. No concreting shall be started unless the reinforcement as placed
in the work is finally checked, recorded and certified by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All bending shall be as per the IS:456-2000 IS : 2502 : 1963 & only cold bending
shall be allowed.
(b) Before the reinforcement is placed, the surface of the bars and the surfaces of the
metal bar supports shall be cleaned of the rust, scale, dirt, grease and other
objectionable foreign substances. After being placed, the reinforcing bars shall be
maintained in a clean condition until they are completely embedded in the
concrete.
(c ) Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and secured in positions so that the
clear distance between two main bars shall not be less than the greatest of the
196
 following :
(i) The Diameter of the bar if the diameter are equal.
(ii) Diameter of larger bar if diameter are unequal.
(iii) 5 mm more than the specified maximum size of coarse aggregate.
(d) The bars and fabric shall not be displaced during the placing of concrete. The
contractor shall also ensure that there is no disturbance of the reinforcing bars in
concrete that has already been placed.
(e) Wire for binding reinforcement shall be of soft and annealed a mild steel and shall
conform to IS:280-1978. The Binding wire may be of 16 to 18 BWG and shall
have an ultimate tensile strength of not less than 80.000 lbs/sq.inch (5624.6
kg/cm2) and yield point of not less than 55,000 lbs/sq.inch (3866.88 kg/cm2). The
provision made in M-8 (Technical Specification for materials) shall be applicable.
Chairs, hangers spacers and other supports for reinforcement may be of concrete,
metal or other approved material. Metal bar supports and spacers shall be
fabricated from non-corrodible metal. Dissimilar metals shall not be placed in
concrete at intimate proximity with each other or be joined by the conductor,
especially in the continued presence of moisture, unless it is known that no
galvanic action will result.
The minimum allowable clearance between parallel round bars shall not be less than
1.5 times the diameter of the largest bars and for square bars shall not be less than
twice the side dimensions of the larger bars or 1.5 times the maximum size of
aggregate whichever is greater and shall conform to I.S. 432-1982 or revised from
time to time.
(f) Bars crossing each other, where required shall be secured by binding wire in such a
manner that they do not slip over each other during the fixing and concreting. Wire
used for binding reinforcement shall not be measured for payments.

1.4 Splicing

(a) Where it is necessary to splice reinforcement the splices shall be made by lapping,
by welding or by mechanical means.
(b) Joints or splices in reinforcing bars shall generally be made at the location where
neither shear nor bending moment is maximum, but the Contractor would be
permitted to make joints or splices at other position provided that such positions
are approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and joints and splices in adjacent bars are
197
 staggered as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Approval of such additional
splices will generally be restricted to splices not closer than 8 m in horizontal bars
or 4 m in vertical bars measured between midpoints of laps.
(c) If the Contractor proposes, to use welded splices in reinforcing bars, the equipment
the material and all welding and testing procedures shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall also carry out test welds as
required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(d) Reinforcing bars 28 mm in diameter and larger may be connected by butt welding
provided that lapped splices will be permitted if found to be more practicable than
butt welding and if lapping does not encroach on cover limitation or hinder
concrete or reinforcement placing.
(e) Reinforcing bars 25 mm in diameter and less may be either lapped or butt welded,
whichever is the most practicable.
(f) Butt welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed under cover from weather and
may be performed either by the gas pressure or flash pressure welding process or
by the electric arc methods. The following requirements shall apply to all welding
of reinforcing bars including butt welding and the preparation of welded
reinforcement mats.
(g) Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested at the rate of 0.5 % of total number
of joints welded. Specimens shall be taken from the actual site of work. Strength of
the weld provided shall be at least 25% higher than the strength of bar.
(h) Suitable means shall be provided for holding the bar securely in position during the
welding process. Ends of bars to be spliced shall be cleaned of all dirt, scales, rust,
paint and the foreign matter before welding. All welding shall conform to the
standard welding code of practice. The welded joints shall be paid in terms of
length of the bar equal to 40 times diameter of the bars. The welded joints shall be
staggered in an approved manner. Three per cent of the of the welded joints shall
be tested for the tensile strength at the contractor” cost before placing
reinforcement and the strength shall nit be less than the standard specified for M.S.
bars.
(i) If the contractor proposes to use mechanical couplings for reinforcing bars, he
shall submit samples of the proposed coupling to the Engineer-In-Charge for
approval not less than 60 days prior to their proposed use.

198
(j) In case of welded splices for reinforcing bars conforming to IS:1786-2008,
welding shall be done in accordance with IS:9417-1979. For reinforcing bars
conforming to IS:432-(Part-I)-1982, welding shall be done in accordance with
IS:2751-1979. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall conform to IS:814
(Part-I)-1974 and IS:814(Part-II)-1974. Mild steel filler rods for Oxy-acetylene
welding shall conform to IS:1278-1972 provided they are capable of giving a
minimum butt weld tensile strength of 41 kg/mm2.
(k) Cover and cover block.:-
The clear cover and cover to the reinforcement shall be provided as shown in the
drawing. In case it is not shown, the clear cover and cover block to be ascertained
from the Engineer-In-Charge.
To maintain the correct clear cover, cement mortar block of size 5 cm x 5 cm and
thickness according to the clear cover as of the strength of the concrete shall be
fasted. The cover block shall have binding wires rigidly inserted in them to tie it
with the reinforcement. The cover block shall be sufficiently cured to attain the
required strength.
All protruding bars from concrete to which the other bars are to be spliced and that
will remain exposed to action of weather for indefinite period shall be protected
from rusting by thin coat of neat cement grout. Accurate records shall be kept at all
time of numbers, sizes, lengths and weight of bars placed in position for different
parts of the work.

1.5 Care of Placed Reinforcement and Concrete

Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent
back into their original position, care shall be taken to ensure that at no time the
radius of the bend in less than 6 diameters for deformed bars and 4 diameters for
plain mild steel bars. Care shall also be taken, when bending such bars, to ensure
that the concrete around the bars is not damaged.
Inspection before concreting:
No concreting shall be started unless the reinforcement as laid is finally checked
and certified by the Engineer-in-Charge .

199
1.6 Mode of Measurement and Payment (Item No.7& 26)

(a) Measurement for payment, for furnishing and placing reinforcing bars will
be made only on the calculated weight of the bars placed in concrete, in
accordance with the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
calculated weight for reinforcing bars shall be determined as follows.
(i) The calculated weight/meter of reinforcing bars used shall be based on the
standard weigh and the corresponding lengths of bars placed in concrete by
the Contractor as per Material specification specified M-5 and reproduced as
under.
The weight of reinforcing bars shall be based on following table:

Table : Cross Sectional Area and Mass

(IS:1786-1985)

Nominal size Cross section Mass per meter

in mm (dia) area in mm2 run in kg.

1 2 3
6 28.3 0.22
8 50.3 0.39
10 78.6 0.62
12 113.10 0.89
16 201.20 1.58
18 254.60 2.00
20 314.3 2.47
22 380.30 2.98
25 491.10 3.85
28 616.00 4.83
32 804.60 6.31

200
 36 1018.30 7.99
40 1257.20 9.86
45 1591.10 12.49
50 1964.30 15.42

(ii) All other joints or splices shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be measured as laps. Except as provided additional
joints or splices shall not be measured for payment. Payment for furnishing
and placing reinforcement bars shall be made at the rate tendered thereof in
the Bill of Quantities. The rate shall include the cost of preparing
reinforcement as per detailed drawings. The unit rate shall also include cost
of all incidental operations necessary to complete the work as per
specifications.
(iii) Supporting chairs/separators prepared from MS or HYSD/TMT
reinforcement preferably of equal dia. or as directed by the Engineer-In-
Charge shall be measured and paid for as per standard weights on the lines
of payment for reinforcing bars.
(iv) The measurement and payment shall be made per quintal (Qtl.) of steel used
in the work.

201
 Air Inflated Rubber Dam (Item No.9)

Item No:-9
Designing , providing and installing at site Air inflated Rubberdam excluding civil works
for unit rate of those components on the work site (Air filled rubberdam, tranportation,
insurance and installation guidance etc) and components such as embedded parts to fix
rubberdam with raft, Air blowers, control system etc. as per the specifications, terms and
conditions including maintenance for five years and including all duties, charges etc.
complete.(minimum thickness of rubber 34 mm)
1. General:
Rubber dams are hydraulic structures that control water in a more flexible manner
than traditional water retention structures such as barrages, dams, anicut and check
dams. It is an air-powered flexible elliptical structure made up of high-strength
rubberized material and attached to a strong concrete base. When inflated, they act as
a dam and hold water; when deflated, they act as a flood mitigation mechanism and
provide automatic sediment flushing.

2. Components of Rubber Dam:

i. Rubber Bladder
ii. Fixing Parts
a) Clamping Plate
b) Embedded Plate
c) Anchor Bolts
d) Anchor Nut and Washers
iii. Spacer and Air Supply Arrangement
iv. Air Supply Blower Skid Set Components

i. Rubber Bladder:
 High Quality EPDM with patent reinforcement fabrics in UV coating.
 Inflation Medium: Air
 Reinforcement: As per the design depth of water, number of layers of
reinforcement requirement will be decided based on tensile strength requirement.
 Abrasion indicator (Patent) coated for early warning of abrasion.
 Designed Safety Factor of Rubber bladder (FS):8

202
A. Specification of Manufactured RubberBladder:
 Protective Outer Rubber Compound : EPDM (Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer)
 ThicknessofRubberBody: based on design (min. 34 mm)
 Thickness of Outer Cover Rubber : based on abrasion rate per year.
 Total Weight of Rubber bladder with Lifting Spool: based on span size
 Reinforcement: 2-5 Layers of Nylon/Polyester layer based on design
 Abrasion indicator coated for early warning of abrasion
B. TensileStrengthofRubberBladder(AsperASTMD751):

 In water course direction: Minimum of 480-720N/mm

 In longitudinal direction: Minimum of 480-720N/mm

ii. FixingParts:
a. Clamping Plates:-
Clamping plates are essential components used in the construction of air-filled rubber
dams. These rubber dams are structures designed to control the flow ofwater in various
applications such as irrigation, water supply, flood control, and environmental protection.
Clamping plates play a crucial role in securing and sealing the rubber dam to ensure its
proper functioning. Here are detailed specifications for clamping plates used in the
construction of air-filled rubber dam:
 Material : Galvanized Ductile Cast Iron,
 Reference for testing of material: As per relevant IS Codes or ASTMA 536 Grade 80
 Reference for galvanization: As per relevant IS Codes or Accordance with ASTMA 123
 Galvanization Thickness for clamping plates: Galvanization thickness of clamping plates
will be decided based on the atmospheric conditions along with the type of water flowing
in the river. It will be calculated as per the table given below:
 C1codeisdriedinsideofmaterialsocorrosionlevelisverylow
 C2 code refers to inside condensed in atmospheric level; outside: exposed in rural inland
area. Corrosion level is low. Corrosion speed is 0.1-0.7-micron loss
 C3coderefersinsidehigh humidity and atmosphere pollution at moderate level. Outside:
City inland environment or warm temperature beach area. Corrosion level at moderate.
Corrosion speed at 0.7-2-micron loss rate
 C4 code refers inside swimming pool, chemical factory, outside: inland industrial area or
coast city area. Corrosion level: high. Corrosion rate at 2-4micro loss rate.
 C5 code refers outside: high humid industrial area or high salinity shore coastal area.
Corrosion rate: Very high. Corrosion rate: 10–20-micron loss rate
 b. Embedded Plates
Embedded plates are essential components used in the construction of air-filled rubber
dams. Embedded plates play a crucial role in securing and sealing the rubber dam to ensure
its proper functioning. Rubber bladder is tightened between Embedded and clamping
plates. Here are detailed specifications for embedded plates used in the construction of air-
filled rubber dams:
 Material: Galvanized Ductile Cast Iron,
 Reference for testing of material: As per relevant IS Codes or ASTMA 536 Grade 80
 Reference for galvanization: As per relevant IS Codes or Accordance with ASTMA 123
 Galvanization Thickness for clamping plates: Galvanization thickness of clamping plates
will be decided based on the atmospheric conditions along with the type of water flowing
in the river. It will be calculated as per the table given below:
 C1codeisdriedinsideofmaterialsocorrosionlevelisverylow
 C2 code refers to inside condensed in atmospheric level; outside: exposed in rural inland
area. Corrosion level is low. Corrosion speed is 0.1-0.7-micron loss
 C3coderefersinsidehigh humidity and atmosphere pollution at moderate level. Outside:
City inland environment or warm temperature beach area. Corrosion level at moderate.
Corrosion speed at 0.7-2-micron loss rate
 C4 code refers inside swimming pool, chemical factory, outside: inland industrial area or
coast city area. Corrosion level: high. Corrosion rate at 2-4micro loss rate.
 C5 code refers outside: high humid industrial area or high salinity shore coastal area.
Corrosion rate: Very high. Corrosion rate: 10–20-micron loss rate

c. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers (for Double Anchoring system)

 Size : Based on design
 Material : Stainless Steel

d. Anchor Nut and Washers :

 Size: Based on design
 Material: Stainless Steel
iii. Spacer in Rubber Bladder.
 Spacer Bars on river bed: 50 mm O.D. by 2 Lines.
iv. Air Supply Pipe line Nozzles
 Air Supply & Exhaust Pipeline: 220-250 mm diameter
 Drain Pipe & Pressure Sensing Pipe: 40 mm diameter
 Material: Galvanized Iron

204
 e. Other Products:

1. Air Exhaust Spacer Bars

 High pressure EPDM hoses on river bed by 50 mm out side diameter.
2. Nozzles For Air Supply, Exhaust, Drain and Pressure Sensing Pipes
 Air Supply & Exhaust Pipeline: diameter of 200A
 Drain pipe & Pressure Sensing Pipe: diameter of 40A
 Stainless Steel in AISI 304

iv.Air Supply Blower Skid Set System with Digital and Analog Regulators
(a) Blowers

 Regenerative Blower: High Efficiency IE 2 Rating Siemens/Elmo 208- 600 V 3 Phase

IP55, 60 Hz
 Built in silencer with filter and over pressure relief valve attachment on blower.
 Maximum discharge static pressure: 2,400 mm Aq/237mbar
 Initial designed inflation/deflation time is within 30 minutes.
(b) Motorized Inflation/Deflation Valves
 120V/24V DC motorized actuator with manual operated handle bar on butterfly valves.
(c) Manual valves/ by-pass valve/Emergency deflation valve.
 Butter fly valves with handle bars for manual override.
 Emergency float valve or bucket system for deflation during power outage.
(d) Digital and analog gauges/regulators
 100v-240v for digital regulators and sensors.
 Analog gauges for calibration and fail-safe regulation.
Control Panel: PLC, With HMI And SCADA Link All electric components have

accordance of IEC.

 Clear and unique package designation and labels.

 Pre-shipping photo graphs show package contents.
 Detailed bill of materials for each package

II. Design Criteria

i. Media to Inflate: The dam will inflate with air; no other media such as water or
combination of air and water is allowed.

205
Design and Manufacturing conditions:

a) Water pressure corresponding of head between Average Bed level & Pond level.
b) Over topping of 20% of height of rubber-dam shall be allowed.
c) Operating ambient airt emperature:-3 0 to + 50° C Rubber dam in deflated condition
in case of maximum flood discharge.

ii. Rubber dam design shall be derived or based on Japanese Rubber dam Design
version2000, no other studies are allowed.

iii. Technology to show early warning of Rubber cover abrasion beforewater

penetrationto first layer of reinforcement fabric.

iv.The rubber dam shall be designed as a single vulcanized, non-jointed Rubber bladder
system. Vulcanizing hot press shall be no less than 10 meters in length. Composition
ofRubber bladder must contain only EPDM. Use of CR and/or SBR use is not allowed.

v. Each single reinforcement fabric used, and horizontal/vertical tensile strength of

fabricmust not differentiate more than 10 percent.

vi. Design the dam to operate either fully inflated or partially deflated for extended periods
of over- topping without significant oscillation or wear.

vii. When fully deflated, the fabric must not present bulges or high points which may
be subject to damage.
viii. Design rubber bladder fabric with a factor of safety of eight (FS = 8) under normal
operating conditions. Design the gate panels for adequate robustness to resist bed load
passage without damage.

ix. Dam operating times for full travel (fully inflated to fully deflated or vice-versa):
a) Inflate in no more than sixty (60) minutes.
b) Deflate less than 60 minutes .

x. Anchoring and clamping system.

a) Design to permanently anchor the rubber dam body to the concrete foundation.
206
 b) DualAnchoringsystemforpreventionofback-draftedwater.
c) Detailtheanchoragesinamannerthatwillallowreinforcementofprimaryand secondary concrete
without interference.
d) Designtheanchoringsystemformaximumreliability,airtightness,andeaseof installation.
e) Designoftheanchoragestopermiteasyunclampingandre-clampingofthedam bladder without
damage to the fabric.
f)
Reference
Productswillbesuppliedincompliancewiththecurrentversionofthefollowing standards-
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

a) A29/A29M SteelBars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and Cold-Finished, General

requirements.
b) A36/A36 M Structural Steel.
c) A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
d) A123 (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
e) A536 Ductile Iron Castings.
f) C501 Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile bythe Taber
Abraser.
g) D751Method of Testing Coated Fabrics.

III. Instrumentation
i. Air Pressure Sensor:
ii. Water Level Sensor:
iii. Valve Position Switches:
 Motorized deflation and inflation valve(s).
 Mechanical fail-safe deflation valve.
 Pressure relief valve.
 Position switches may be inductive (proximity) type or mechanical type.
iv. Control system

IV. Dam Control Systems

i. All electrical devices to bear IEC, ULc or ETL approval stamps, or other marking
acceptable to the electrical inspection division.
ii. The control system shall be provided with motorized inflation/deflation valves,equipped
with manually operated handlebars on the valves to allow for manualoperation of the
rubber dam.

207
 The control system shall also include a pressure regulator, pressure relief valve set at 10%
above maximum operating pressure, emergency float valve or bucket system for deflation
during power outage and required pressure gauges. The system shall be designed to be a
complete and operations system by the Dam Supplier and come equipped as necessary to
be a slave to external programmable logic control signals/commands.

V. Control System Components:

i. Front Panel Touchscreen
 15” Touch screen with graphical real-time representations of the rubber dam, water
level, air pressure and mechanical inflation / deflation systems.
 Allows operator to select Test/Off or Automatic modes.
 Allows operator to view the minimum/maximum pressure and maximum water level set
points.
 Displays detailed diagnostics for any alarms or abnormal conditions.
 Powered by 220 V AC
 Equipped with Ethernet 10-BASE-T/100 BASE- T X port.
 Capable of remote viewing/operation through Ethernet connection.
 Data transfer to/from PLC through the Ethernet connection or other communication
protocol.
ii. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
 Allen-Bradley Control Logix or equally known.
 Powered by 220 V AC
 Provide interposing control relays between PLC outputs and large loads (motorised
valves, motor starters) if required.
 Equipall relay coils and solenoids with free wheeling diodes.
 Provide at least one dry-contactdigital output for signalling an alarmcondition.Contact
to be programmed as closed in the healthy state, open under loss of power or alarm
condition.
 Provideoe programming software license, registered to the plant Owner.
iii. Ethernet Switch
 Used to interconnect between the PLC, touchscreen, and remote-control system.
 Powered by 24 V DC.

VI. Automatic Control System for rubber dam:-

Sr.
No. Control Size Specification Qty.
Equipment
1 Regenerative SL/HL125 15.0KW,0.3KG/CM2
208
 Blower
2 Flexible Tube 125A EPDM ,FACTORY
SETTING
3 Pan Check valve 125A FACTORY SETTING
4 Safety valve PT1/2" FACTORY SETTING
5 Discharge 125A FACTORY SETTING
Silencer
OUTPUT TORQUE :
30KGF.M
ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR : 24V
DC
RATED CURRENT
8.6A,
6 Inflation valve HQ-30 OPERATION TIME:
31/26 SEC/90
7 Air Tank SEE NOTES
A3215 SCALE:0~100KPA,
8 Differential PHOTOHE VOLTAGE:24VDC
Gauge LIC
SITRANSP
9 Pressure Sensor (DIGITAL) SCALE:0.01BAR/1B
AR
PRESSURE:600KPA,
10 Solenoid valve APK21- VOLTAGE:24VDC
40A

OUTPUT TORQUE :
30KGF.M
ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR : 24V
DC
RATED CURRENT
11 Deflation valve HQ- 8.6 A, OPERATION
015PCU TIME:
31/26SEC/90
MANUAL
KEYSTONE VALVE
12 Manual Deflation Φ200 BUTTERFLY
valve VALVE
MANUAL
13 Bypass valve Φ125 KEYSTONE
209
 VALVE

Regenerative Blower:
Regenerative blowers have multi-vane impellers that rotate inside its chamber with the use
ofan electric motor. Air enters through the inlet and the force of the rotation pushes and
compresses it.
Pan Check valve:

PAN Check Valves have much shorter length and lighter than those of swing or lift check
valves because the disc stroke is short, and body has no flange.
Safety valve:

A safety valve is a valve that acts as a fail-safe. An example of safety valve is a pressure
relief valve (PRV), which automatically releases a substance from a boiler, pressure vessel,
or other system, when the pressure or temperature exceeds preset limits.
Discharge Silencers:

Discharge silencers or Steam Vent Silencers (DAS type) are used to attenuate noise
producedby the expansion of air, steam or gas at elevated pressure to atmospheric pressure.
Inflation valve:

Disclosedis aninflation valveenablinga userto quickly inflate and deflate aninflatable

object. The inflation valve can include an inflation chamber that is an adequate size to
capture a breath of air blown bya user froma distance away from an outsideopening of
theinflation chamber

 Output Torque:30 kg f.M

 Electric Actuator:24 v DC
 Rated Current 8.6A, Operation Time:31/26 sec/90

Air Tanks:

Air tanks serve as a reservoir that can take care of sudden or unusually heavy demands for
air that exceed the blower's designed capacity.
Differential Gauge:

Differential pressure gauges measure the difference between two pressures. They are
suitable for the monitoring of filter contamination, for level measurement in closed vessels,

210
 for overpressure measurement in clean rooms, for flow measurement of gaseous and liquid
media and for the control of pumping plants.
Scale:0~100KPA,VOLTAGE:24VDC
Pressure Sensor

Apressuresensor is adevicethatsensesandmeasures pressure. Inthis case,pressure is defined

as the amount of force exerted over an area. Pressure sensors allow for more specialized
maintenance strategies, such as predictive maintenance. These devices collect real-time
data on the conditions of equipment.
 Scale:0.01BAR/1BAR

Solenoid valves:

Solenoid valves are control units which, when electrically energized or de-energized,
eithershut off or allow fluid flow. The actuator takes the form of an electromagnet. When
energized,a magnetic field builds up which pulls a plunger or pivoted armature against the
action of a spring.
 Pressure:600KPA,VOLTAGE:24VDC

Bypass valve:

Controlling pump output. Pressure bypass valves serve to control pressure in a system by
diverting a portion of the flow. Typically, they bypass fluid from the outlet of a pump back
to the reservoir. A pressure bypass valve is essentially a back pressure regulator (BPR).

VII. Quality Assurance:

1. The manufacturer’s shop welds, welding procedures and welders shall be qualified and
certified in accordance with the requirements of ASTM or ASME.
2. The dam bladder Shall be shop Inspected. There shall be no repairing or adjustingon the
job site.
3. Work shall be Carried out by qualified tradesmen only.

VIII. Operational Tests:

a) General:-
The Contractor shall carry out in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge such tests on air-
filled rubber dam and allied equipment to determine that the rubber dam will fulfil the

211
 functions for which it has been designed. Tests shall be repeated, if necessary, until
successfully carried out to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge
Operational tests & Leakage tests shall be carried out after completion of otherportions of
theworkand preferably whenthe nalla have reasonable flow of water. The Engineer- in-
charge mayhave the discretiontocarry out such tests also whenthe nalla is at a level he
thinks suitable to conduct the test.

b) Inflation and Deflation Test:-

Operational tests shall be carried out on rubber dam, as soon as possible aftercompletion of
erection of the dam. The tests shall include: -

h) At least two complete inflation and deflation of the rubber bladder to its maximum level.
Thetimetakenfortotalinflationandtotaldeflationare to be noted. Anylocalized undue stresses
on the rubber bladder to be noted. Any manufacturing defect of composite sheet such as
splice separation to be noted and repaired. Similarly, any erection defects such as loose
fittings, improper sealing, etc. to be noted and rectified.

c) Leakage Test:-
Leakage tests shall be carried out with the rubber bladder filled with air to its full capacity
and at designed pressure. The rubber dam will be fully inflated to 100% of its design
pressure and soapy water shall be applied to entire clamping plates, Bubbles formation on
applying soapy water indicates air leakage. The leakage shall be recorded and checked
property.

IX. Operational Requirements:

1. The Inflated Rubber dam must:
 Maintainan inflated condition for the range of water level defined above
 Allow safe passage of flood and sediment.
 Allowo peration manually,automatically (Local PLC) and remotely (Contral Office
PLC).

2. Provide the following modes of operation:

 Test mode:Inflation/deflation is accomplished by operation push button or touch screen on
the front of the Local Operation Panel to either start/stop the blowers or open/close the
exhaust valve(s).
Mechanical fail-safe high water deflation and over pressure relief valves will remain in
service while operating in test mode.

212
 Off Mode:The blower are switch off, the motorized deflation valves are opened, and the
bladder is fullydeflated.Once bladder is deflated, the motorized deflation valve is close.

 Automatic Mode: Inflation / deflation of the dam is controlled by a programmable logic

controller (PLC). The PLC will Monitor the internal Pressure in the dam and inflates or
deflates as required to maintain pressure within the normal operating range. When the
water level approaches the maximum allowable depth, an electrical auto deflection is
initiated, and the controller automatically reverts to Off Mode. The PLC will require
operator intervention before being able to re-inflate the dam.
Mechanical fail-safe high- water deflation and over-pressure relief valves will remain in
service while operating in automatic mode.

3. The PLC will monitor a head pond level sensor in the stilling well in addition to the air
bladder pressure. If the level or pressure sensor fail or the measurement approach the
limits of the supplier’s safe operating range, the system will trigger an alarm.

4. Design the control system to provide the maximum protection against upstreamflooding by
including the following features.
 Provide two independent, automatic deflection system:
1. An electrical system that utilizes a Motor Operated exhaust Valve (MOV)
automatically (or manually) controlled by the PLC and.
2. Afail-safe mechanical float/butterfly valve which is physically actuated bya high-water
level in the head pond stilling well. Equip this fail-safe valve with an electrical sensor
such that the PLC is able to detect when this valve has operated.
 The electrical MOV auto deflation is normally programmed to actuate at a water level
50 to 100 mm below the mechanical float valve level (making it the first line of
defense).
 If high water level triggers either system, the PLC control mode will revertto "Off" to
prevent the blowers from operating.

X. Testing And Commissioning

1. All air piping shall be tested prior to covering with concrete, backfilled, or otherwise
concealed.
2. The air piping downstream of the air supply shall be tested by pressurizing to designed psi
for 24 hours. Pressure readings and ambient air temperature shall be recorded at six
different times during the test. A blind flange shall be installed on each end of piping, and
the piping shall be brought to the specified pressure utilizing an air compressor for pressure
testing. Any joints or fittings exhibiting leakage during this time shall be repaired or
213
 replaced.
3. The air piping upstream of the air supply shall be tested by pressurizing to designed psi for
24 hours. Pressure readings and ambient air temperature shall be recorded at six different
times during the test. A blind flange shall be installed on each end of piping, and the piping
shall be brought to the specified pressure utilizing an air compressor for pressure testing.
Any joints or fittings exhibiting leakage during this time shall be repaired or replaced.
4. The Dam contractor shall perform the startup, debugging, and testing of the complete
system.
5. After installation of the rubber dam system, rubber dam testing shall be conducted in the
dry. Testing shall be done in accordance with the Dam contractor's plan and issuance of
certification.
6. The rubber dam shall be fully inflated inspected for any leakage/pressure drop. Soap testing
shall be conducted on all jointed areas between the clamping plates and anchors, as well as
downstream bottom parts. The rubber dam shall be isolated from the air supply system and
held at pressure for 24 hours. Pressure and outside ambient temperature shall be recorded at
the beginning and end of the test and at four different intervals during the test.After 24
hours of inflation, all anchor bolts shall be re-torqued.
7. The rubber shall be fully raised and lowered three times using the automatic control
system. The rubber dam shall operate smoothly.
8. Rubber dam exhibiting leakage shall be repaired by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.
If the Contractor is responsible for the damage, the Contractor shall be responsible for
making the necessary repairs that shall be acceptable to the Owner. Following any
necessary repairs, that rubber dam shall be retested using the same procedure specified in
this Section.
9. After the completion of all testing, commissioning, and training shall be conducted by the
Dam Contractor.

214
 Geo Fabric Filter(ITEM NO.10)

Item No.10
Bituminous Geomembrane liner for canal: Supply, laying and joining Bituminous
Geomembrane as hydraulic liner over canal with side slope not steeper than 1(V)1(H)
including upto 200 mm overlaphaving average thickness of 4mm (minimum thickness
3.6mm)minimum width of 5 m. minimum tensile strength of 15kN/m and minimum
permissible elongation of 50% which shall be laid on the properly prepared subgrade
including import duties & custom clearance charges, transportation,
Loading/unloading, labour charges, excavation for trench. anchorage and testing which
shall confirm to ASTM/I.S standards and excluding dismantling of concrete, earthwork
preparation, dewatering overlap beyond 200 mm GST etc complete.

1.0 GENERAL:-
The surface on which Bituminous Geomembrane liner is to be laid shall be free from
vegetation and loose materials. The surface shall be well compacted, well dressed, smooth
and well leveled and free from dirt, kanakar, rock pieces etc. Good workmanship and neat
appearances is the pre-requisite for all work under this item.

2.0Material:-
Bituminous Geomembrane has excellent resistance to biological and chemical environments
normally found in soils and are stable against short-term exposure to ultraviolet radiation. it
must be suitable for applications involving the functions of soil reinforcement, separation,
stabilization and filtration. It must be suitable for used to form water bound structures.

It conforms to the property values listed below.

StandardValues Min.
Properties Standard Units Values
Width - Mtr. 5.10 5.01
RollDimension
Length - Mtr. 80 79

Thickness(Onfinishedproduct) ASTMD5199 Mtr. 4.00 3.60

Surfacemass ASMTD3776 Mm 4.85 4.30

Longitudinal 825 619

Resistancetotearing ASTMD4073 N
Crossdirecti 700 525
on
Longitudinal 27 20.3

215
 Mix.Ten Crossdirecti ASTMD7275 kN/m 24 15
sile on
Strength
Longitudinal 60 45
TensileElongation ASTMD7275 %
Crossdirecti 60 45
on
Longitudinal -20 -15
Flexibility at low
ASTMD5147 ◦C
temperature Crossdirecti -20 -15
on
StaticPuncture ASTMD4833 N 530 477
WaterPermeability(liquidtightness ASTME96 m/s 6x10-14 <
)
GasPermeability(gastightness) ASTMD1434-82 m3/(m².j.atm) 2x10-4 <

The manufacturer/supplier of Bituminous Geomembrane shall providetest certificate of

conformity for the material with every lot/shipment. The manufacturer certificate of
conformity for geotextile shall be provided for certifying that material conforms to all the
technical and special requirements. The manufacturer has in-house testing facility and
contractor shall have to verify the same before procurement.

3.0 Construction Requirements:

1)packaging and Storing: Bituminous Geomembrane material should not be directly exposed to
sunlight for a period than longer than the period recommended by the manufacturer. If stored
outdoors, they shall be elevated and protected with a waterproof cover.
2) Site Preparation: The subgrade or natural ground shall be prepared as indicated in the
construction drawing and as directed by Engineer in Charge.
3) Installation: Bituminous Geomembrane shall be laid at the proper elevation and alignment in
accordance with the installation guideline provided by the manufacturer or as directed by the
Engineer In Charge.
4) Overlap: An overlap of 300mm or as directed bythe Engineer –In- Charge shall be provided
between the adjacent rolls.
5) Any damaged Bituminous Geomembrane material shall not be allowed for use. The contractor
shall have to open the packed material onsite and if found damage, the same should be
removed from site.
4.0 Mode of Measurement and Payment(Item No.11):
Item shall be measured in square meter of net surface covered with overlap area. The rate
shall be for unit of one square meter of surface area covered including of cost of material as
well as transportation, surface preparation, laying and fixing and all the cost of labour
charges.
216
 P.V.C. heavy duty water stops (ITEM NO.11)

ITEM NO.11
Providing and fixing in position PVC heavy duty water stops in barrels, trough, and
wing wall with 25 mm wide expansion joint as shown in drawing including filling the
joints with asphalt pad or bituminous cork board of approved quality. (B) 300 mm
wide PVC water stop

General :-
(a) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water stop shall normally have a centre bulb of 12.4 mm inside
diameter and 25 mm outside diameter. It shall be 300 mm in width and shall have minimum of
two or three longitudinal ribs on each side of the bulb evenly distributed between the bulb and
the edge of the water stop. Each rib shall be 6.35 mm high and the rib adjacent to the centre
bulb shall have web thickness 12.5 mm and the rib adjacent to the edge shall have a web
thickness of 10 mm. The Contractor, however will be permitted to use water stop with
diamond shape and bulb, provided if the same conform to the specification and the functional
and constructional requirement. For this purpose, the Contractor shall write to the Engineer-in-
charge, for approval, four sets of drawing showing details of the water stop, including
dimensions, shape and detail of intersections and splices between water stops of the same size
and different sizes. Fabrication and procurement of materials shall be made only after the
approval of the drawings by the Engineer-in-charge. Any fabrication or procurement of
materials performed prior to approval of the drawing shall be at the Contractor's risk. The
Engineer-in-charge shall have the right to ask Contractor to make any changes in the drawing
which may be necessary to make the finished installation conforming to the requirements and
intent of these specifications without additional cost to the WRD. Approval by the Engineer-
in-charge to the Contractor's drawing shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to meet
all the requirements at these specifications or of the responsibility for the correctness of the
Contractor's drawings.
Provision of waterstop embedded in concrete and spanning control, expansion, and/or
construction joint to create a continuous diaphragm to prevent fluid migration. Non-metallic
waterstops for use in concrete joints subjected to chlorinated water, sea water, and many water
borne chemicals.
(b) One set of the above drawings will be returned to the contractor either approved, disapproved,
or conditionally approved and these shall be resubmitted for approval, if so directed.
The water stops shall be dense, homogeneous and free from holes and other imperfections.
The water stops shall meet the material and test requirements given hereinafter. The cross
section of the water stops shall be uniform along its length and thickness shall be symmetrical
transversely. Tolerance from the dimensions given above shall be plus 5 mm in width, plus 2
mm in thickness and plus 1 mm for other dimensions.
217
(c) Certified copies of the laboratory test reports on the physical properties of the PVC water stops
as furnished, meeting with all requirements of those specifications, be obtained by the
contractor from the manufacturer of PVC water stops and shall be submitted to the Engineer-
In-Charge for approval. Three 1.5 meter long samples of the PVC water stops shall be
obtained and given to the Engineer-In-Charge. These samples shall be furnished at least 30
days prior to embedment of any water stops in the structure.
The contractor shall arrange to obtain the water stops form the suppliers in rolls sacredly
packed, containing a single length of not less than 12 linear meters and having inside diameter
of not less than 0.3 meter.

Materials :
(a) The PVC water stops shall be fabricated by an extrusion process from an elastomeric
plastic compound the basic resin of which shall be virgin Polyvinyl Chloride. No
reclaimed Polyvinyl Chloride shall be used.
(b) The compound shall contain any additional resin, plasticizers inhibitors or other materials
needed to ensure that the finished product shall have the following physical
characteristics as per the CWC specification for PVC seal.
(i) Tensile Strength minimum : 116 kg/cm2
(ii) Ultimate elongation minimum : 300 %
(iii) Tear resistance minimum : 49 kg/cm2
(iv) Stiffness in flexure minimum : 24.6 kg/cm2
(v) Accelerated extraction
(a) Tensile strength minimum : 105 kg/cm2
(b) Ultimate elongation minimum : 250 %

(c) When tested in accordance with the effect of alkali test as described in the following
paragraphs the material shall not show an increase in weight of more than 0.25 % or a
loss in weight of more than 0.10 % after 7 days, or more than 0.40 % increase in weight
or more than 0.30 % loss in weight after 28 days. After 28 days immersion the
dimension of the sample shall not differ from those of the original sample by more than
1.0 %. After 7 days immersion the Durometer hardness reading of the sample shall not
differ by more than plus or minus 5 mm from the reading on the original sample.
When tested in accordance with the cold bend test described in the following paragraph,
the material shall show no signs of cracking or chipping
Inspection and Tests:
(a) All water stops shall be subject to laboratory tests before transport samples of the
finished water stops and material for tests shall be furnished to the Engineer-In-Charge.
All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the contractor.

218
 Samples for laboratory tests to determine physical properties of the compound shall be
taken on accordance with the random process to obtain following number of test units
from each lot received.
Size of lot received. No. of tests
45 linear meters 1
45 to 90 linear meters 2
90 to 450 linear meters 4
450 to 900 linear meters 8
Over 900 linear meters 15
Laboratory tests to determine physical properties of the water stops required to be
furnished under these specifications shall be performed on test specimens cut from test
units taken from the finished products. The contractor shall furnish the specimens at his
cost for the test at places as directed.
Test shall be made in accordance with the following methods.
(1) Tensile strength : ASTM designation D 638
(2) Elongation : ASTM designation D 638
(3) Durometer hardness : ASTM designation D 2240
(Type A)
(4) Accelerated
Contraction test
(5) Effect of Alkali : CRD-C-572-74
(6) Cold bend test
(7) Impact resistance.

Installation :
(a) Location and embedment of the PVC water stops shall be as shown on the drawing with
approximately one half of the width of the water stops embedded in the concrete on each
side of the joint. In order to eliminate faulty installation that may result in leakage. care
shall be taken that the water stops are correctly positioned and secured during installation.
All water stops shall be installed so as to form a continuous water light diaphragm in the
joint, unless otherwise shown. Adequate provision shall be made to completely protect
the water stops during the progress of the work.
(b) Additional vibration over and above that used for adjacent concrete placement. Shall be
carried out to ensure complete embedment of the water stop in the concrete. Large pieces
219
 of aggregate near the water stop shall be removed by hand during embedment to assure
complete contact between the water stop and the surrounding concrete. Splices in the
community or at the intersection of junction of PVC water stop shall be performed by
heat sealing the adjacent surface in accordance with the Manufacturer'srecommendations.
A thermostatically controlled electric heat source shall be used to make all splices. The
correct temperature at which splices should be made will differ with the material
compounds but should be sufficient to melt. All splices shall be neat with ends of the
joined water stop in true alignment. A meter box guide and portable saw shall be
provided and used to cut the ends to be joined to ensure good alignment and contact
between joined surfaces. After splicing, a remolding iron with ribs and corrugations to
match the pattern of the water stop shall be used to reform the ribs at the splices. The
continuity of the characteristic members of the cross sections of the water stop design
(ribs, tubular centre axis, protrusions, and the like) shall be maintained across the splices.
(c) Where splices are required between water stop of different sizes, the splices shall be made
as recommended by the manufacturer of the water stop and drawings showing the details
of the splices shall be submitted to the Department for approval, as required in paragraph
'General' above.
Prior to embedment, the edges of the water stop shall be secured to looped wire in the end
bulbs to improve the concrete bond as shown on the drawings. The bars shall conform to
the provision of section 'Reinforcement Steel” for fabrication and erection. The manner-
in which the water stop is secured to the reinforcing bars shall be subject to approval.
(d) The provision made in Item No. 11shall also be applicable for pre moulded asphalt pad
or bituminous crock board.

Mode of Measurement and payment: (Item No.11)

Measurement for payment for furnishing and placing PVC water stops shall be made on
the basis of Running meter measured along the centre line of the water stop with no
allowance for lap at splices and intersection. The payment shall be made at the rate quoted
for the item in Schedule-B. The unit price shall include the cost of making spices and
intersections and of furnishing all labour, equipment, and materials required for installing
the water stops and protecting the water stops from damage during the progress of the
work. The unit rate shall also include the cost of preparing and submitting the drawing,
producing samples of approval of the Engineer-in-charge and costs of all incidental work
needed to complete the work as per the specifications.

220
 PROVIDING & FIXING IN POSITION SIGN BOARD (Item no:- 12)

Item No:-12
Providing and fixing in position 1.80 m high above finished ground level canal data boards
of standard size 1.20m x 0.90m with M.S. angle 40mm x 40mm x 6mm with 3mm thick iron
plate in 1:5:10 proportion concrete block size 40cm x 40cm x 75cm including painting
existing data on the board etc. complete as directed.

General :
1.0 Material :
M.S. angle of size 40 mm x 40 mm x 6 mm shall be of standard “L” section. It shall be clean
and shall not be irregular in shape. Similarly, M.S. plate shall be of 3 mm thick and shall be
clean and approved quality. All material shall be approved by Engineer-In-Charge before use.
Paints shall be of standard approved quality.
2.0 Fabrication :
Angles and plates shall be cut in such a way that given size 1.20mx0.90m shall be maintained
by one piece of angle and plate. There should not be any joints verticals as well as horizontally.
Neat and clean welding work shall be done. All excess welding shall be removed and surface
should be made smooth. Welding shall be done in a sufficient length and number as per
requirement and as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. Ends shall be cut for 5 cm for fixing it
properly in concrete.
3.0 Painting :
Fabrication board shall be approved before painting one coat of red oxide and then painted in
two coats with an approved quality of blue colour / any other colour directed by the Engineer-
In-Charge. All other material and labour required for painting shall be provided by the
contractor. No extra cost shall be paid for this work. Painting canal names shall be carried out as
directed by Engineer-In-Charge in capital letters or as directed including making picture of
canal in different colour.
4.0 Carting :
Boards fabricated, prepared and completed as mentioned above shall be carted by the contractor
to a different place on canal or as suggested by the Engineer-In-Charge. It shall be carted safe
by and without any damage to the board as well as any other structures.
5.0 Fixing :
All above board shall be fixed in a Cement Concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement:5 sand: 10 aggregate) for
a size of 40 cm x 40 cm x 75 cm pit for both post of boards as per drawings.

221
 Excavations of the pit shall be checked before placing of concrete. Concrete shall be 1:5:10
Cement Concrete (1 Cement:5 Sand:10 Aggregate) and of standard and approved quality. The
materials to be used shall be as specified in Section-3 in relevant paragraph. Material of below
standard shall be rejected and material shall be replaced by the contractor. Concrete shall be
cured properly with water. All necessary materials and labours required to carry out this work
shall be provided by the contractor. No extra rate shall be paid for watering and curing of the
concrete. Board shall be fixed completely in plumb and vertically as directed. Board not fixed
properly shall be re-fixed by the contractor at his cost.
Concrete block of C.C. 1:5:10 shall be of the size 40 cm x 40 cm x 75 cm and shall project 15 cm
above ground level. Total height of post shall be 3 m (minimum), The exposed platform shall be
neatly finished and in shape shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

6.0 Mode of Measurement and Payment (Item No.12) :

The measurement for payment shall be per number of sign board fixed in position. The unit rate
includes the cost of materials, concrete, labour, tools, drilling ofholes, welding, fixing, curing,
lettering, painting as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

222
 GROUTING (Item No. 13,14,15,17)

Item no. 13

Drilling holes of 35 mm dia. Vertical or inclined in all formations of rock/ concrete upto
required depth including washing with air and water at required pressure for following
stage of depth (A) for 0.00 to 10.00 mtr dept.

Item No. 14

Grouting the strata with specified grout mix of prescribed production with additives and
prescribed pressure. Grouting pressure up to 3.5 kg/cm2 - DGC-4(A) Cement grout

Item no. 17
Providing deep upheavel gauge at the location and depth as directed including drilling
and groutingCM-13(A) For consolidation grouting
General:
The work of drilling the holes of 35 mm dia and up to required depth as per sub soil
strata and maximum up to 10 meter depth.

The depth of holes may be varied as per foundation strata met with during drilling
operation. The spacing of holes shall be as per site condition.

The contractor shall have to make necessary arrangement with machinery, equipment
and experience person for drilling the holes up to required depth. The holes drilled must
be straight in proper alignment direction.

The holes drilled shall be cleaned with removing of muck using compressed air &
water as required..
Pressure grouting :
Pressure grouting of rock foundations is normally carried out to fill discontinuities,
cavities or voids in rock mass by suitable materials. The grouting programme should in
conformity with the rest of the construction schedule.
The contractor shall have to plan
223
A) Curtain grouting
i) To safeguard the foundation against erodibility hazard, and/or
ii) To reduce quantity of seepage.
D) Consolidation grouting
iii) To reduce the deformability of jointed or shattered rock.

To Safeguard the Foundation againsterodability Hazards

The limiting lugeon values' given in following table are recommended for deciding the
necessity or otherwise of grouting. Lugeon values in excess of those given in the table
would indicate that grouting is desirable.

Table 1 Suggested Limiting Lugeon Values from Erodibility Consideration

Items Rock below Rock below

cutoff trench masonry Dam
Group A
5 to 10 5 to 7
Laminar Flow
Group B
3 to 5 3 to 5
Turbulent Flow
Group C
1 to 3 1 to 3
Dilation
Group D
Washout and
1 to 3 1 to 3
Hydraulic
Fracturing
Group E
3 to 5 3 to 5
Void Fill

To Reduce Quantity. of seepage for dams under 30 m height, curtain grouting should be
carried out where the water absorption exceeds 3 lugeon.

Pattern and depth of Holes and Sequence of Grouting :

The pattern and depth of holes is governed primarily by the design requirements and the
nature. of. the rock. When the purpose is consolidation, the holes are arranged in a
regular pattern over the entire surface area required to be strengthened and the depth is
determined by the extent of broken rock as well as the structural requirements regarding
the deformability and strength of the foundation. When the purpose is
224
impermeabilisation, the grout holes are arranged in a series of lines to form acurtain
approximately perpendicular
rpendicular to the direction of seepage. The depth of holes is
dependent on design considerations as also on the depth of pervious rock and the
configurationof zones of relatively impervious strata.

The size (diameter) of grout holes shall be 35 mm. In longholes

longholes the diameter at the top
of the holes may have to be larger than the final. diameter at thebottom of the hole to
facilitate telescoping or to allow for the wear of the bit.

Pattern of Holes for Curtain Grouting

Single Line Grout Curtains
Multiple Line
ine Grout curtains

Pattern of Holes for consolidation grouting

 Grout Mixture:
Rock grouting is usually performed with a mixture of cement and water with or without
additives.
The cements generally used is any of the following:
i) Ordinary Portland (OPC 53 Grade) : IS 269: 1989 or
IS 8112: 1989 or
IS 12269: 1987
Other solid materials may be used as additives to the grout mixture among which are
thefollowing:
a) Pozzolanas, such as fly ash ( see IS 3812 : 1981 ) and calcined shale ( see IS 1344
:1981). As early strength is important on most grouting jobs, the pozzolanas may
behave only as inert non-cementing fillers.
b) Fine sands ( see IS 383 : 1970) are an economical material widely used in grouting. The
use of coarse sanded grout mixtures is particularly advisable when large voids or
cavities are to be grouted.
In normal condition the cement sand ratio should be 1:3, however it may be changed as
per site condition.
WASHING AND TESTING OF HOLES SURFACE PREPARATION
Washing of holes as per IS 6066:1994
Percolation Tests as per IS 6066:1994
Jetting as per IS 6066:1994
Surface Treatment as per IS 6066:1994
INJECTION
Holes should be injected with appropriate grout material as per the specification
mentioned in IS 6066:1994
PRESSURE CONTROL
The pressure should be adequate to achieve the desired grout and the pressure should be
limited so as to avoid disturbance and upheaval of the ground and should take into
account reservoir pressure.
The true pressure at any depth should take into account the pressure head caused by the
weight of the grout in the hole, nis correction in kg/cm2 may be computed by
multiplying the depth of the bole in metres by factors relative to the water-cement ratio
given In Table 2 and added to the pressure gauge reading at the top. of the grout hole.
Table 2 Multiplying Factors
Water- Factor Water Factor
Cement Ratio Cement-Ratio
0.75 0.151 2.50 0.118
1.00 0.140 2.75 0.117
226
 1.25 0.131 3.00 0.112
1.50 0.127 4.00 0.110
1.75 0.123 5.00 0.107
2.00 0.121 10.00 0.102
2.25 0.119

Controlled pressure should be exercised as per the guidelines given in IS 6066:1994.

It is always advisable to begin with a low initial pressure say 0.10 to 0.25 kg/cm2/m of
overburden, and build-up the pressure gradually. Initially the rate of intake may be 20
l/min to 30 l/min. In order to avoid the premature build-up of high pressure a general
guideline should be followed that the pressure should be raised only when the intake
rate falls below S l/min. When surface leaks develop, pressure should be immediately
reduced. Sub-surface cracking may sometimes be indicated by an abrupt rise in the rate
of intake after grouting at a constant value of pressure for a considerable period.The
record of material consumed for every hole shall be maintained in proper form.

Mode of measurement and Payment: (Item No. 13)

The mode of measurement and payment is per running meter basis including all cost of
machinery, manpower, material etc. complete.
Mode of measurement and Payment: (Item No. 14)
The mode of measurement and payment shall be per Metric tonne (MT) basis including
all cost of machinery, manpower, material etc. complete.
Mode of measurement and Payment: (Item No. 17)
The measurement and payment for Item No. 17 shall be per nos. Including all the cost
of machinery, material, labor etc. Complete.

Item No. 15
Drilling 75 mm dia.(NX size) exploratory bore holes using tong stone carbide diamond
bits for core drilling in all formations including masonry and concrete with providing
necessary standard core boxes (from non-teak wood material) with marking details as
directed etc. complete. (B) Double tube core barrel work
75 mm dia.(NX size) exploratory bore holes shall be drilled to check the efficacy and
results of grouting operations.
Drilling the holes of 75 mm dia :

The depth of holes may be varied as per site situation and requirement. The spacing of
holes shall be as per site condition.

The contractor shall have to make necessary arrangement with machinery, equipment
and experience person for drilling the holes up to required depth. The holes drilled must
be straight in proper alignment direction.

227
 The holes drilled shall be cleaned with removing of muck using compressed air & water
as required..

TESTING THE EFFICACY OF GROUTING OPERATION

The efficacy of the grouting operation may be estimated using one of the following
methods:
a) Pre and post grouting permeability values using percolation tests.
b) Pre and post grouting P-wave velocities using seismic refraction/cross hole geophysical
techniques and changes in mass using gravity methods.
c) Pre and post grouting deformation module using static methods.
d) Pre and post measurement of pore water pressure.
Mode of measurement and payment (Item No. 15) :
The mode of measurement and payment is per running meter basis including all cost of
machinery, manpower, material etc. complete.

228
 Permeability Test(Item No.16)

Item No.16 :-
Taking permeability test with packers before and after grouting of holes.

1. 1 SCOPE OF WORK :-
The section covers specifications for Item No. 16 of Bill of quantities of Tender.
The work include drilling holes into the foundation and conducting a in-situ
permeability test by relevant method to check physical Condition of the rock formations
existing at and below the foundation. The test shall be conducted before and after
grouting of holes.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ITEM:

Item No.16 :-
Taking permeability test with packers before and after grouting of holes.

1.3 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

Sr. IS No. Title

No.

1 IS 5529-2 In-situ Permeability Tests, Part 2: Tests in Bedrock

(2006)

2 4464 : 1985 Code of practice for presentation of drilling information and

core description in foundation investigation (first revision)

3 6066 : 1994 Recommendations for pressure grouting of rock foundations

in river valley projects (second revision)

4 6935 : 1973 Method for determination of water level in a bore hole

1.4 General :-
Exploratory drilling is an important feature of subsurface -exploration for foundation
studies The examination of cores from the drill holes gives a general idea of the
physicalCondition of the rock formations existing at and below the foundation. Water
percolationtests, if performed in the holes, are of significance in interpreting the
drilling data. The water percolation tests, covered by this standard, should be
conducted in uncased and un-grouted sections of the drill holes. Packers are employed
for conducting these tests. The tests are based on -measuring the amount of water
229
 accepted by the 'test section' (of the hole) confined by a packer/packers while water is
pumped into it. The results of the water percolation tests can also be used to determine
the permeability of the strata pierced by the drill hole. The value of coefficient of
permeability obtained from the test, which is the overall value for the rock mass
including loss into cracks, fissures, joints, fault zones, etc, provides an approximate
estimate of the possible leakage that may take place through specific zones of rock in
the foundations upon impoundment of the reservoir.

1.5 QUALITY OF WATER TO BE USED FOR THE TEST :-

The tests described are of the pumping-in type, that is, they are based on measuring the
amount of water accepted by the ground through the open bottom of a pipe or through
an uncased section of the hole. Unless clear water is used, these tests are invalid and
can be grossly misleading. The presence of even small amounts of silt or clay in the
water used in the test will result in clogging of the test section and will give
permeability results that are too low. Efforts should be made to assure supply of clear
water by means of a settling tank or a filter. It is also desirable, where the climatic
conditions demand, to raise the temperature of added water higher than ground
temperature so as to preclude the creation of air bubbles in the test section that can
greatly reduce the acceptance of water.

1.6 PRECAUTIONS :-
1.6.1 On completion of drilling, the holes should be immediately capped or plugged
and protected from entry of dirt, muck, grout or any kind of waste.
1.6.2 Water -level -in the drill hole should be recorded before proceeding with the
water percolation tests.
1.6.3 A 1 .5 m section is considered suitable for performing the tests. However, the
length of the test section should be selected according to the total thickness of
the permeable stratum and geological conditions and varied locally to
accommodate the packer(s) properly. Short test sections of 1.5 m would be
preferred in thin bedded and heterogeneous strata. When the intake of water in
the test section is more than that which the pump can deliver, it is advisable to
reduce length of the section. Under normal circumstances test sections longer
than 3 m are not recommended.
1.6.4 The hole should be thoroughly flushed with clear water before -the tests are
commenced. Where core recovery is good (> 70 percent) holes should be
flushed with water under pressure, until the wash water is clear. When the
recovery is poor (< 70 percent) and the holes are liable to collapse by the
disturbance caused by washing, the holes may be cleared by gentle surging (by
moving a rubber block up and down the hole) followed by gentle flushing.
1.6.5 Drill rods of 32 mm diameter may be used for conducting the permeability tests.
It would, however, always be better to use rods of larger diameter, when
available, so that friction losses are reduced to the minimum possible.

230
1.6.6 The water swivel used in the test should preferably have a uniform inside
diameter to minimize loss of head.
1.6.7 Location of the pressure gauge between the pump and the water meter or the
water meter and the swivel may not measure the actual pressure in the test. In
order to get a representative figure of the pressure, it is recommended that the
gauge be located between the swivel and the packer.
1.6.8 Unnecessary bends in the pipe line from the pump to the swivel should-be
avoided.
1.6.9 The water used for the tests should be clear and free from silt.
1.6.10All joints and connections between the water meter and the packer should be
water-tight in order that no water loss occurs between the water meter and the
test section.
1.6.11At the time of permeability test by single packer or double packer, it should be
ensured that the packer/ packers are not leaking. A leaking packer usually causes
the rise of water level in the hole or the water may even start overflowing from
the nipple.

1.7 Mode of Measurement and Payment (Item No.16) :

The measurement for payment shall be per No.s Basis i.e. number of bore holes
tested (before and after grouting)as per requirements.
 GABION(item no. 18)
Item No. 18 :-
Supplying and laying flexible gabions of size 1m x 1m x 0.60m (mesh size
100mm x 100mm)of rope 9mm dia P.P. materials filled with 10 to 40 kg
trap rubble stone (approximate weight 0.90 tonne) as per drawing
including packing, inter locking of stones and stiching, fusing top of
gabione and tying to each other and laying to the required line, level,
slope with all leads and lifts as directed etc. Complete.

Definitions of terms:
(i) Gabion : The double twisted wire mesh container of variable sizes, uniformly
partitioned into internal cells, inter-connected with other similar units, and
filled with stone at the project site to form flexible, permeable monolithic
structures such as retaining walls, sea wall, channel, linings, revetments and
dams for erosion control project.
(ii) Double - twisted wire mesh, - a non-raveling mesh made by twisting
continuous pairs of wires through three one half turns (commonly called double
twisted) to form hexagonal shaped opening which are then interconnected to
adjacent wires to from hexagonal opening.
(iii) Selvedge wire - a terminal wire used to edge the wire mesh perpendicular to
the double twist by mechanically wrapping the mesh wire around at least 2.5
times.
(iv) Edge wire-a terminal wire of same diameter as the selvedge wire used to edge
the wire mesh Parallel to the double twist by continuously weaving it
mechanically into the wire mesh.
(v) Lacing wire -a galvanized wire or galvanized wire with PVC coating used to
assemble and interconnect empty units, to close and secure stone-filled units,
and internal stiffeners.
(vi) Stiffener-a length of galvanized wire with PVC coating used for support of
facing by connecting the front panel to the back panel Rubble/Stone.

Materials and Manufacture of wire Gabions:

(i) The wire used in the manufacture of double twisted mesh for use in gabions
shall conform to the specification given below
(ii) Double - twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same type of
galvanized steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC coating extruded on
to the galvanized steel wire. The PVC coating shall conform to the
properties given below.
232
 (iii) Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same coating
materials as the double twisted wire mesh furnished on the order and
confirming to specifications, in accordance with details given below.
(iv) Gabions shall be manufactured with all components mechanically
connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattress lid
which is produced separately from the base. All gabions shall be supplied in
the collapsed form, either folded and bundled or rolled for shipping.
(v) Below mentioned tests and testing method shall be adopted prior to
manufacture of mesh in approved laboratory of manufacturer.

MECHANICALLY WOVEN, DOUBLE TWISTED HEXAGONAL WIRE

MESH ROCKFALL NETTING
1. Terminology
Supplying and laying flexible gabions of size 1m x 1m x 0.60m (mesh size
100mm x 100mm)of rope 9mm dia P.P. materials filled with 10 to 40 kg trap
rubble stone (approximate weight 0.90 tonne) as per drawing including
packing, inter locking of stones and stiching, fusing top of gabione and tying to
each other and laying to the required line, level, slope with all leads and lifts as
directed etc. complete by Engineer-in-charge. The approximate weight of each
Gabion shall be 0.90 T (Tolerance for weight shall be +/- 5 %).
Description
This itemincludes of furnishing, assembling, and filling mechanically woven
double twist hexagonal wire mesh gabions with rock as specified in the
contract to the dimensions, lines and grades shown on the plans, or as
determined by the engineer. These specifications are mainly in accordance with
Indian Standards IS 16014 and MoRTH (Fifth Revision) 2013, Clause 2500.
Material-Gabions
LidLi
d
DiaphragmD
iaphragm End
End

BackB
ack

H
End H
End

Front
LFront
W L
W
Fig. 1

233
 Material- Gabions
1.2.1 Wire:
All tests on the mesh, lacing wire and selvedge wire must be performed
prior to manufacturing the mesh.
Tensile strength: The wire used for the manufacture of Mesh shall have
a tensile strength minimum 350 N/mm2 in accordance with IS 280. Wire
tolerances (Table under para 1.2.6) shall be in accordance with IS
16014:2012 (Class T1).
Elongation: Elongation shall not be less than 10%, in accordance with
IS 16014:2012 and MoRTH(Fifth Revision) Clause 3100. Test must be
carried out on a sample at least 20 cm long.
1.2.2 Internal Connecting Wires:
Cross Ties/ stiffener wire: Diameter 2.2 mm, Zn+ 10% Al alloy coated
wire with PVC coating, 3.2mm when measured with PVC coating.
1.2.3Zn+ 10% Al alloy Coating
 Zn+ 10% Al alloy coating: Minimum quantities of Zn+ 10% Al alloyshall be
as shown in table in following para no. 1.2.6
 Adhesion of Zn+ 10% Al alloy coating: The adhesion of theZn+ 10% Al
alloy coating to the wire shall be such that, when the wire is wrapped ten
turns around a mandrel having four times the diameter of the wire, it does
not flake or crack when rubbing it with the bare fingers in accordance with
IS 4826:1979.
1.2.4PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Coating
PVC coating thickness: Nominal – 0.5 mm, Minimum – 0.4 mm;
Specific weight: 1.3 kg/dm3 – 1.35 kg/dm3 in accordance with IS 13360,
Part3, section 1.
Hardness: between 50 and 60 Shore D, according to IS 13360, Part5, section
11
Tensile strength: Higher than 20.6 MPa, according to IS 13360, Part5, section
1
Elongation at break: not less than 200% in accordance with IS 13360, Part5,
section 1.

1.2.5 Wire mesh (10x10 mesh type):

Zn+ 10% Al alloy +PVC coated
Mesh type
“D”(mm) Diameter of wire (Inner/Outer wire)
(mm)
Mesh wire(mm)Selvedge wire (mm) Lacing wire(mm)
100x100 100mm 2.7/3.7 3.4/4.4 2.2/3.2
234
 Mesh opening: Nominal Dimension D = 100, as per Fig. 2
Tolerances in Mesh Opening size: - 2% to +2% as per relevant IS
DT mesh shall have minimum 10 numbers of mesh openings per meter of mesh
perpendicular to twist of mesh.
Procedure for verification of mesh opening
a. Gabion Box/Mattress shall be unfolded on the plain ground.
b. Any shrink in the unfolded Gabion Mesh shall be removed, by stretching the
Mesh panel.
c. Marking on the ground shall be made from the Centre of the twist of one mesh
and the second. Marking shall be done at 1 m distance.
d. The number of mesh Openings in the 1 m shall be counted & verified.

Figure (2)

Mesh Type Nominal Dimension D

D
100x100 100mm
Mesh TypeNominal Dimension D
6x8100mm

1.2.6 Tolerances
Wire: wire diameter tolerance and minimum Zn+ 10% Al alloy coating
requirement shall be as per following table
Table
Wire Diameter mm 2.2 mm 2.7 mm 3.4 mm
Wire Tolerance(+)mm 0.06 0.06 0.07
Minimum Qty of Zn+ 10% Al alloy 230 245 265
2
(gm/m )

1.2.8 Tolerance in gabion dimensions

+ 5% in all dimensions (length, breadth and height) shall be allowed as
tolerance for Gabion units.
1.2.9 Fabrication
Gabions shall be manufactured with all components mechanically
connected at the production facility. The front, base, back and lid of the
gabions shall be woven into a single unit. The ends and diaphragm(s)
shall be factory connected to the base. The lid may be a separate piece
235
 made of the same type mesh as the basket. All perimeter edges of the
mesh forming the basket and top, or lid, shall be selvedge with wire
having a larger diameter.
Gabion is divided into cells by means of diaphragms positioned at
approximately 1m centers. The diaphragms shall be secured in position
to the base so that no additional lacing is necessary at the jobsite.
1.3 Construction Requirements
Gabion filling and lacing and erection at site should be strictly as per the
instruction of approved (by engineer) manufacturer’s instructions as per
the site specific requirements.
1.3.1 Assembly
Gabions are supplied folded flat and packed in bundles. Larger units may
be supplied in rolls. The units are assembled individually by erecting the
sides, ends, anddiaphragms, ensuring that all panels are in the correct
position, and the tops of all sides are satisfactorily aligned. The four
corners shall be connected first, followed by the internal diaphragms to
the outside walls.
The procedure for using lacing wire consists of cutting a sufficient length
of wire, and first looping and/or twisting the lacing wire to the wire
mesh. Proceed to lace with alternating double and single loops through
every mesh opening, pulling each loop tight and finally securing the end
of the lacing wire to the wire mesh by looping and/or twisting. Refer
figure 3.

Figure (3)
1.3.2 Installation
After initial assembly, the gabions are carried to their final position and
are securely joined together along the vertical and top edges of their
contact surfaces using the same connecting procedure(s) described
earlier. Whenever a structure requires more than one layer, the upper
empty baskets shall also be connected to the top of the lower layer along
236
 the front and back edges of the contact surface using the same
connecting procedure(s) described in Section 1.3.1.
Rubble (Stones) :
Supplying and laying flexible gabions of size 1m x 1m x 0.60m (mesh
size 100mm x 100mm)of rope 9mm dia P.P. materials filled with 10 to
40 kg trap rubble stone (approximate weight 0.90 tonne) as per drawing
including packing, inter locking of stones and stiching, fusing top of
gabione and tying to each other and laying to the required line, level,
slope with all leads and lifts as directed etc. complete as directed by
Engineer-in-charge. The approximate weight of each Gabion shall be
0.90 T. The rubble stones of required size shall be used in the gabions as
per following gradations:

1 to 15 Kg : 40% ± 15%
15 kg to 40Kg: 60% ± 15%
The contractor shall supply at his cost all test specimen and other
samples required for various tests and got it tested for below mentioned
tests at Govt. laboratory or in the laboratory approved by Govt. The test
result shall be supplied to the Engineer-in-charge for approval. The test
result of rubble sample shall comply with specific requirements. Two set
of tests shall be carried out per season for all necessary test.
(i) Specific Gravity Test:
As per IS : 1124 – 1974 using specific gravity bottle (50 ml), value
generally shall not be less than 2.50

(ii) Water AbsorptionTest :

As per IS : 1124 – 1974, stone shall not absorb water more than 5 ( Five
) percent of its weight after 24 hours immersion in water.

(iii) Weathering Test:

As per IS : 1125 - 1976 , there should be no effect of weather to the
rubble stone. This test measures durability and strength of stone. The
value shall not exceed 10 %.
Stones of required size and weight shall be used as specified above. The
shape of the stone shall be nearly cubical. Required quantity of specific
stones shall be brought to the site and stacked as directed by Engineer-in-
charge Each stacks shall be used for the construction of gabions after
getting permission from Engineer-in-charge. Approximate weight of
stones (which is between 10 kg &40 kg). Stones from approved stacks
237
 shall be used for the filling of G.I. wire Gabion after getting permission
from Engineer-in-charge.
(iv) Petrography Test: Minimum one Petrography test shall be carried out
in GERI laboratory for each quarry material.
Stones of required size and weight shall be used as specified above. The
shape of the stone shall be nearly cubical. Required quantity of specific
stones shall be brought to the site and stacked as directed by Engineer-
in-charge Each stacks shall be used for the construction of gabions after
getting permission from Engineer-in-charge. Approximate weight of
stones (which is between 10 kg to 40 kg) in a Gabion shall be 0.90 T.
Stones from approved stacks shall be used for the filling of G.I. wire
Gabion after getting permission from Engineer-in-charge.
The contractor shall make at his own cost necessary arrangement for the
weighing of individual stones to check the size and weight of individual
stones as and when directed by Engineer-in-charge.

SHOWING THE DETAILS OF WIRES WITH PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Mesh Type Hexagonal 10 x 10 cm Specification

Mesh Opening D mm 100( Between axis of Twists) EN 10223

Mesh Tolerance (+) 16% to (-) 4% EN 10223

For length &Width +/-5%;

Tolerances (Box) For Depth D = < 0.30 m +/-10% ASTM A975
D = > 0.30 m +/- 5%

Characteristics Zn + PVC

Mesh wire Dia. Mm 2.20 + 1.0 EN 10223

tolerance (+/-) 0.08 BS 1052

Zn coating Min(Gsm) 230 ASTM A641

Selvedge wire dia mm 2.70 + 1.0 EN 10223

tolerance (+/-) 0.10 BS 1052

238
 Zn coating Min(Gsm) 260 ASTM A641

Lacing wire Dia. mm 2.2 + 1.0 ASTM A975

tolerance (+/-) 0.06 BS 1052

Zn coating Min (Gsm) 220 ASTM A641

PVC Thickness

Nominal mm 0.50 ASTM A975

Minimum 0.40 ASTM A975

Table 1
MATERIAL TESTS REQUIRED TO BE CARRIED OUT FOR

G.I. WIRE AND P.V.C. GRANUALS.

Galvanized wire PVC coating

Test Value Specification Test Value Specification
Tensile 350 to 500 Between 50- ASTM D 2240
strength N/mm2 EN 10223 Hardness shore 'D'

Grey RAL ASTM D 1482

Elongation 10% min EN 10223 Colour 7037

Adhesion of Tensile 20.6 ASTM D 412

No Flakes EN 10244 strength Mpa.Minimum
ZN
Specific 1.3 to 1.35 ASTM D 792
Gravity
Abrasion < 12% Wt. LossASTM D 1242
Resist
Salt Spray No effect ASTM B 117
Test
Exposure to No effect ASTM A 975
UV

239
 (d) Mechanical Properties of Gabions:
1) Tensile strength - The tensile strength of wire used for double
twisted mesh, lacing wire and stiffener when tested shall be in
accordance with the requirements of specification EN 10223 for soft
temper wire.
2) Mesh Strength - The minimum strength requirements of the mesh,
when tested shall be as shown in Table-2 The contractor shall carry
out these tests for every lot of 500 Nos or less in house laboratory.
Manufacturer must produce a valid test certificate for the mesh
strength with each supply.

TABLE : 2 MINIMUM MESH STRENGTH

Mesh Type 10 x 10 cm
Characteristics Zn + PVC
Mesh Wire mm 2.20
Parallel to twist K N/m 34.00
Perpendicular to twist k N/m 13.00

(e) Physical properties of Gabions:

(i) Zinc coating:The coating weights shall conform to the requirements
of specification ASTM A 641 Class-3 for zinc coating.
(ii) PVC coating: The initial properties of PVC granules used for coating
shall have a demonstrated ability to conform to the following
requirements. For these tests 2000 gms. of PVC granules used for
coating shall be supplied by manufacturer of Gabion with
manufacturer’s certificate confirming that coating is done from same
PVC granules for each lot up to 500 Nos of Gabions.
1. Specific Gravity _ In the range from 1.30 to 1.35 when tested in
accordance with Test Method D 792
2. Color - Grey RAL 7037 when tested in accordance with
D 1482.
3. Tensile strength - Not less than 20.6 Mpa when tested in
accordance with Test Method D 412.
4. Hardness _ Shore "D" between 50 and 60 when tested in
accordance with Test Method D 412.

240
 5. Brittleness Temperature - Not higher than 9 C or lower
temperature when specified by the purchaser. When tested in
accordance with Test Method D 746.
6. Resistance to Abrasion - The percentage of the weight loss shall be
less than 12% when tested in accordance with Test Method D
1242.
7. Salt spray exposure and Ultraviolet Light Exposure
8. The PVC shall show no effect after 3000 ha of salt spray exposure
in accordance with Test Method B 117
9. The PVC shall show no effect of exposure to ultraviolet light with
test exposure of 3000 ha using apparatus Type E and 63 C when
tested in accordance with Practice D 1499 and G 23
10. Evaluation of Coating after salt spray and ultraviolet Exposure
Test - After salt spray test and exposure to ultraviolet light as
specified in 10 & 11 the PVC coating shall not show cracks nor
noticeable change of color or blisters or splits. In addition, the
specific gravity, tensile strength hardness and resistance to
abrasion shall not change more than 6% 25% 10% and 10%
respectively, from their initial values. The Mesh wire shall show
no rusty spots on any part of the surface excluding the cut ends.
11. The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires
are twisted in the fabrication of the mesh.

(f) Dimensions and Tolerance:

(i) Following test shall be taken for a lot up to 500 no at site of work
(ii) The diameter of galvanized steel wire shall conform to the values plus or
minus the tolerances shown in Table-1.
(iii)The minimum and nominal thickness of PVC coating uniformly applied
in a quality workmanlike manner shall be as shown in
Table-1
(iv) Gabions shall be manufactured with a 10 x 10 mesh type having a
measured at right angles to the center axis of the opening and Parallel to
the twist along the same axis.
(v) The width and length of the gabions as manufactured shall not differ
more than +/- 5% from the ordered size prior to filling.
(vi) The height of the gabions as manufactured shall not differ more than +/-
10% if the height is less than or equal to 0.3 m and shall not differ
more than +/- 5% if the height is more than 0.3 m from the ordered size
prior to filling.
241
 (vii) Mesh opening Tolerance- Tolerance on the hexagonal, double - twisted
wire mesh opening shall not exceed (+) 16% to (-) 4% on the nominal
dimension D values mentioned in Table-1.

(g) Workmanship Designs:

Wire of proper grade and quality, when fabricated in the manner herein
required shall result in a strong, serviceable mesh - type product having
substantially uniform openings It shall be fabricated and finished in a
workmanlike manner as determined by visual inspection and shall
confirm to this specification.

Manufacture of Wire Gabions:

The manufacturer must have in house laboratory facility for carrying out
all tests specified in the tender. The manufacturer must have sufficient
capacity to manufacture and supply gabions as specified. However, the
test after supply shall be performed as and where requested by Engineer-
in-charge.

(h) Quality Control Tests for Wire Gabions:

(a)Within 10 days of receipt of work order the contractor shall submit
three specimen wire gabion along with each wires of 3 mt length
from which Gabions are manufactured conforming to specification
laid to Engineer-in-charge for approval.
(b)The contractor shall arrange for testing of Specimen gabions at
approved lab by Engineer-in-charge in presence of authorized
representative of Government of Gujarat / Third party inspection /
Quality Control approved equivalent certifying agency for
conforming the following according to laid specifications:

Mesh Strength
 Diameter of wire for mesh, selvedge border and lacing
 Tensile strength
 Galvanization
 Physical dimension of gabion
 Mesh size
 PVC coating thickness
(c)After the tests described in 1 above are found satisfactory and the
specimen gabion is found acceptable the Engineer-in-charge shall
permit the contractor to use of wire gabions needed for the work.
242
 (d) Up to500 Nos of wire gabion shall deemed to be a lot. Two
representative wire gabions shall be selected from the lot by
authorized representative of Government of Gujarat/ Third party
inspection / Quality Control and the same shall be no destructively
tested for conforming wire diameter, physical dimensions and mesh
size at site.
(e) Two gabions up to 500 nos. lot received on site shall be selected for
tests described in 1 at approved laboratory in presence of authorized
representative of Government of Gujarat / Third party inspection /
Quality Control
(f)The contractor shall bear all the expenses for transportation of samples at
laboratories as specified by Engineer-in-charge in Charge.
(i)The contractor shall provide 3.0 mt. long wire of each diameter for tests
shown in Table - 1 for each lot of 1000 Nos of gabion.

(j) Certification:
Material test certificate of materials supplied by the manufacturer shall
be produced by the contractor. The certificate shall mention that the
material meets the contract specification.

1.3.3 Mode of Measurement &Payments:

The rate for payment shall be for quantity of rubble stone filled in wire
gabions provided and laid on Slope as specified. The rate includes cost of
wire gabion and rubble stones and cost for filling and placing the gabion
in proper position. The quantity to be measured for payment for wire
gabion provided and laid as specified shall be on number basis. i.e. per
no. of gabion.
The Measurement and payment shall be for a unit of one numberof
gabion filled with stone and laid on surface including all cost of material,
labors, equipment etc. complete.

243
 Anchoring (Item No. 19)
Item No. 19 :-
Providing and fixing 3.75 m long TMT steel anchor bars of 25 mm dia by
drilling 35 mm dia hole in fouandation including necessary cutting,
bending, hoisting bars and grouting the holes with cement slurry etc.
complete (1.50 mt. to be inserted below excavated level) as directed

General:
The Item No. 21 includes the work of drilling the holes of 35 mm up to 1.5
meter depth in foundation and providing TMT anchor bars and grouting with
cement slurry the same.

The spacing of holes may be as shown in the drawing or as directed by

Engineer-in-charge subject to modification as per site condition.

The contractor shall have to make necessary arrangement with machinery,

equipment and experience person for drilling the holes up to required depth.
The holes drilled must be straight in proper alignment direction.

The holes drilled shall be cleaned with removing of muck using compressed
air& water as required. The drill hole shall be covered & protected at the top
with capping until the fixing of anchor bars. While inserting the metal roads in
drilled holes, a good quality of bonding material shall be filled in drilled holes
for proper bonding with the hard stone.

Anchoring:
The TMT Bar shall confirming to specification prescribed in Para M-5,
Technical Specification of material. Cement slurry shall be applied to the rod
before it is inserted in the hole. Than anchor rods shall be erected in position &
holes shall be completely filled with cement mortar 1:1.The bars should,as far
as possible, be fixed normal to the rock surface but at not in any case, less than
15 cm with rock face.Special care shall be taken to ensure against any
movement of bars after its initial setting.

Grouting
244
 After excavation of foundation up to the required level, the bottom surface shall
be cleaned properly and there shall not be any rock fragment and other
objectionable material. The vertical as well as bottom surface of excavation
shall be inspected by the Geologist/ Engineer-in-charge and considering the site
situation if grouting is required, the same shall be carried out by the contractor
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The grout material shall be a cement
grout. The proportion of 53 grade OPC and water shall be decided by the
Geologist/Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall have to drill the holes of ½
inch dia. at 30 cm/cm up to required depth, to fix the PVC nipple and fill the
cement grout with pressure of @ 3.50 kg/cm2. If required the pressure will be
changed by the Engineer-in-charge. The grouting process shall be continued till
the holes and cracks filled properly. After grouting the surface shall be cured
with water for minimum 7 days. The water shall be potable and free from
injurious elements. The cement and water shall confirms to the provision made
Technical specifications for material M-1 & M-3 respectively. The record of
grouting shall be maintained properly with location. After the grouting is over
the PVC nipple shall be removed and the surface shall also be made leveled
using cement mortar 1:3.

Mode of Measurement and Payment (Item No.19)

Measurement and payment shall be on No.s basis i.e number of holes in
which Anchoring is provided with grouting the holes carried is out. The
unit rate in bill of Quantities shall include material, labors, machinery,
curing etc. complete.

245
 Dismentalling the R.c.c. work (Item no:- 20)
Item No:-20
Dismantling the R.C.C. work & disposing off the stuff including stacking of the
useful materials etc. complete as directed. (a) Light reinforcement. (Main bar
up to 16mm dia.)

General :
The dismantling shall consist of dismantling the existing reinforced cement concrete
as specified of shown in the drawing. This shall consist of dismantling whole or
part of work including all relevant item as specified or shown in the drawing. The
dismantling shall always be planned before hand and shall be done in reverse order
of the one in which the structures was constructed.

The planning of dismantling shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-charge

before starting the work, however it will not absolve the contractor from the
responsibility of proper and safe dismantling The contractor shall mark the area
which is required to be dismantled and controlled dismantling shall be carried out,
so adjoining good surface will not be damaged.

Necessary propping, shoring and under pinning shall be provided for the safety of
the adjoining work or property, which is to be left intact, before dismantling and
demolishing is taken up and the work shall be carried out in such a way that no
damage is caused to the adjoining property. Wherever required, temporary
enclosures or partitions shall also be provided Necessary precaution shall be taken
to keep the dust nuisance down as and where necessary.
Dismantling shall be commenced in a systematic manner. All materials which are
likely to be damaged by dropping from a height of dismantling concrete etc. shall
246
 be carefully dismantled first the dismantled articles shall be properly stacked as
directed.
The contractor shall have to dismantle the concrete in such a way that steel in
maximum length can be made available. The contractor shall have to separate the
steel from the concrete and sake it separately as and where directed by Engineer-
in-charge.

The contractor shall have to provide all tools for the works of dismantling the
existing Cement Concrete/ Reinforced cement concrete. The dismantled materials
shall have tobe disposed off at the locationasper the directionof Engineer-In-Charge.
The dismantled useful materials shall be deposited in the specified area / at locations
as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. Duecare shall be taken while performing the
dismantling operation of existing surface so that any adjoining good surface shall
not be damaged. However, even after due care the existing good surface that was
not required to be dismantled gets damaged than the said damage shall be got
restored at the cost of the contractor as directed by Engineer- In-Charge, use of
dynamite / blasting will not be allowed for dismantling of concrete /concrete lining.

On completion of work , the site shall be cleared of all debris rubbish and cleaned
as directed.

Measurement and payment (Item 20)

The completed workshall be measured and paid on the basis of cubic meter of C.C./
R.C.C dismantled and disposed off as directed. The rate included all the cost of
tools and labours etc. complete. Any work carried out other than the specified
location / area of existing concrete surface shall not be paid for. The adjacent good
work if damaged due to careless of contractor the same shall be restored at the cost
of contractor.

247
 DIVERSION OF RIVER AND DEWATERING (Item No.21)

Item No.21
Care and diversion of River including de watering during construction of
dam and allied works as prescribed and directed etc. complete.

Scope:
The item shall include all dewatering and diversion work required in a manner
herein specified.The area under all permanent work and the adjoining areas, if
necessary shall be maintained free from water.
The contractor shall plan, construct and maintain satisfactorily necessary
diversion works and other temporary diversion and protective works and make
provision of diversion of the river and other flows and furnish, install, maintain
and operate all necessary pumping and dredging plant for dewatering the various
parts of the work and maintaining the foundation and other parts of the work as
free from water as required for approved construction operations.
The care and diversion work shall have to be reckoned and provided for any
eventualities like unseasonal floods etc.
Preliminary thought has been given to the diversion works and it is visualized that
diversion channel together with an upstream and downstream coffer dam may be
required to divert the post monsoon flow. The diversion is likely to be required
for a period of depending upon the progress of work achieved. The above scheme
is purely for general guidance only and any inference and conclusion reached
thereby the tendered are at his risk and responsibility.
The contractor will be free to suggest alternative arrangement which is considered
suitable and safe and not likely to obstruct or delay the progress which may be
approved at the description of the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall not be
entitled to any extra claim on this account.
The contractor shall fully satisfy himself about the quantum of flow to be tackled
and about the adequacy, efficiency, and safety of the care and diversion
arrangement to be adopted by him.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall however have the right to direct to enlarge or
strengthen the arrangements if he so consider in the interest of work. All such
additions, modification etc. directed by the Engineer shall be promptly executed by
248
the contractor and the same shall be deemed to be the part of the care and diversion
arrangement and included in the agreed lump sum amount accepted for the item.

Approval to layoutdesign etc . for diversion work :

All cofferdams, diversion of flow and other arrangements proposed to be made
shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-charge. On approval by the Engineer-
in-charge, they shall beconstructed and maintained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge at the contractors cost.
Approval of the plans for the diversion work by the Engineer-in-charge will not
relieve the contractor of the responsibility for adequacy of diversion and
dewatering arrangements.

Contractor to dewater whenever required:

The area under all work pertaining to the dam structure and appurtenances and the
adjoining areas as necessary shall be maintained free from water. The areas shall
also be maintained free from water after any part of the work is completed, for
inspection, safety and insisting of for any other reasons, determined, by the
Engineer-in-charge. The sumps shall be well lighted and shall be readily accessible
for inspection.
The contractor shall pump all water from the site of the dam and appurtenant work
and shall keep the foundation free from water while excavation, grouting,
concreting and continue to keep the work free from water for a period as may be
required for proper setting of concrete etc. or otherwise required for the completion
of works.

No claim for leakage:

The contractor shall not be entitled to any claims or damage on account of or by
reason of any amount of water leaking through, under or around the cofferdams,
diversion channels and other diversion protective work or over toping of the
diversion works.

Damage due to flood:

If anyfoundation pits are filled up due tofloods or flow during the progress of
works or during rainy season or due to any other cause, all pumping required to
dewater the pits and desilting shall be done without any extra cost.

Removal of cofferdams and closing of diversion cuts etc.;

249
 All cofferdams and other protectivework constructed for facility of dewatering
shall be removed after they have served their purpose in a manner and the extent
directed by the Engineer-in-charge from time to time.
All the diversion works or diversion cuts shall be closed in likewise manner. The
cofferdam on the upstream may, however, be allowed tobe submerged at the
discretion of the Engineer-in-charge. If, however, such a submergence in the
opinion of the Engineer-in-charge is likely to be detrimental to the structure or a
part of it, the upstream cofferdam shall be removed in a manner and to the extent
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
The downstream cofferdam shall be removed in such a manner as not to interfere
with satisfactory working of the energy dissipation arrangements, outlets, canals
etc.

Mode of Payments(Item No.21):

This is fixed rate (Lump Sum job) item.The payment for the item shall be made as
per the progressesof stages of the work in question.
(a) 35% of the amount shall be paid on completion of the diversion work
constructed by the bidder for regulating the safe passage of the river flow.
(b) 10% of the amount shall be paid after 40% of the structure work is completed.
(c) 25% of the amount shall be paid after 80% of the structurework is completed.
(d) Remaining 30 % amount shall be paid after satisfactory completion of the work
at the time of final bill.
This is Lump Sum Job Item having fixed rate as approved by the department.
No extra payment shall be paid to contractor in excess/addition of quoted and
approved rate for this item. No claim for compensation or extra payment shall
be accepted or extended. If the work will not be completed before monsoon, the
contractor shall have to remove the diversion work before monsoon and again
re-construct at his cost after monsoon for to complete the remaining work. The
contractor shall have to maintain, re-construct the diversion work till the
completion of work without any extra cost. After completion of work, the
contractor shall have to remove the whole diversion work satisfactorily and as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

250
 Sand filling in plinth (Item no:25)

Item no:25
Providing and Filling sand below R.C.C. raft in layers including ramming
and watering completed.

Materials:
Sand shall conform to M- 6. Free from all foreign materials, debris, plastic bags,
lumps of any kind etc complete.

Workmanship:
1.1. The sand to be used for filling shall be free from salts, organic or other
foreign matter.
1.2. The plinth shall be similarly filled with earth in layers not exceeding 20
cms. adequately watered and consolidated by ramming with iron or
wooden rammers. When filling reaches finished level the surface shall be
flooded with water for at least 24 hours and allowed to dry and then
rammed and consolidated.
1.3. The finished level of filling shall be kept to shape intended to be given to
floor.
1.4 The relevant specifications shall be followed and sand shall be filled in
under floors, including watering, ramming, consolidation and dressing etc.
complete. No extra payment for water shall be made in any case.

Mode of measurement and payment:

The relevant specifications of item filling with available soil shall be followed.
The rate includes cost of collecting carting sand with all lead and labour for
filling the same in plinth under floors.

The rate shall be for a unit of one cubic meter.

251
 MASONARY AND PLASTERING WORKS

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The section covers specification for Item No. 27, 28&29
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
Item No. 27
Providing and laying burnt brick (conventional size) masonary for
foundation in ordinary portland cement mortar 1:6 proportion including
racking out joints upto 15mm. depth curing etc. complete for all lead and
lifts.

Item No. 28
Providing cement plaster in various thickness and proportion including
smooth finishing, curing, scaffolding etc. complete for all leads and lifts as
under.
(b) Cement mortar 1:2 proportion & 12mm thick

Item No. 29
Providing 15mm thick cement plaster in single coat on Rough
(Similar)side of single or half brick walls for interior plastering upto floor
two level and finished even and smooth in (ii) Cement mortar 1:4 (1-
cement :4-sand)

1.2 BRICK MASONRY (ITEM no. 27)

1.2.1 Scope of work
The item shall include providing brick masonry in cement mortar of 1:6
proportion i.e., one part of cement and 6 parts of sand by volume with
racking out joints unto 1 cm depth, curing, plumbing, scaffolding and

252
 also include cost of all materials, labors, tool and tackles plants, etc. with
all leads and lifts.
1.2.2 Reference of IS code
The provision of latest revision of the following IS Code shall form part
of these specifications to the extent they are relevant.
IS-2250-1981 Code of practice for preparation and use ofmasonry
mortars.
IS-2116-1980 Specification for sand for masonry mortars
IS-2112-1962 Code of practicebrick work
IS-1077-1992 Common burnt clay building bricks-specifications.

IS-3495-1992 Methods of test of burnt clay building bricks.

(Part- I to III)
IS-2167-1971 Manufacturing of burnt clay brick for brick work
IS-5454-1978 Methods of sampling of clay building brick.

Note : 1) Generally the Bureau of Indian Standard Code will be

followed for all Items of works. Wherever this Code does not
exist, the reference will be taken to other technical specifications
directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
2) Latest version of I.S. shall be used where change applicable
1.3 Cement
Cement to be used shall be as specified in Technical specification for
material, under M- 1 relevant Paragraph. Cement level for brick
masonry work shall be considered as 75 kg /m3 for working out the rate
to be quoted in Bill of Quantities.
1.4 Water :
Water to be used shall be as specified in Technical specification for
material, under M- 3 relevant Paragraph.
1.5 Sand :
Sand to be used shall be as specified in as specified in Technical
specification for material, under M-2 relevant Paragraph

253
1.5.1Sand to be used in mortar shall conform to the relevant portions of IS:
2116-1980 specification for sand for masonry mortar or their latest
editions where they do not conflict with provisions made in the
document and shall conform to gradation limits given below:
IS Sieve designation Percentage by weight passing IS sieve

4.75 mm 100

2.36 mm 90-100

1.18 mm 70-100

600 micron 40-100

300 micron 5-70

150 micron 0-15

1.5.2 For cement plaster the sand shall have a fineness modulus ranging
between 2.00 to 2.95 subject to the gradation specified in the preceding
paragraph. The modulus shall be computed by adding cumulative
percentage of sand retained on the IS Sieve, 4.75 mm, 2,36 mm, 1.18
mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron and dividing the sum by
100. Any deviation from the specified range of gradation of the fineness
modulus will not be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer-In-Charge. Gradation of sand shall be so controlled that the
fineness modulus of at least 9 out of 10 consecutive tests samples of
finished sand shall not vary by more than 0.1 from the average of 10 test
samples. If sand of desired gradation is not available or if so desired by
the contractor fine aggregate may be manufactured by crushing of stone
for which no extra payment shall be made.
1.6 BRICK
1.6.1The bricks shall be made from soil of even texture and shall be uniformly
well burnt in approved kiln. It shall be uniform in size and shape and
shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime, kanker and
other foreign materials visible to naked eye on the surface or as seen on
the fractured surface of brick obtained by breaking the sample. The
brick shall give a ringing sound when struck and its texture shall show a
homogenous, clean and dense structure and sharp edges.

254
1.6.2Brick shall be regular and uniform in size, shape and colour and
uniformly well burnt throughout. The bricks shall be table / hand
mounded and shall have plain rectangular faces with parallel sides and
sharp, straight and right angle edges. The brick shall be free from cracks
or any other types of flaws. They shall have a frog of 10 mm. depth on
one of the main flat faces.
1.6.3 The bricks shall be free from cinder, lump of lime, lamination, cracks, air
holes, soluble salts causing effloresce or any other defect which may in
any way impair the strength, appearance, durability or usefulness for the
purpose intended.
1.6.4 The bricks shall not break when dropped on its flat face in a saturated
condition from a height of 60 cm. on other bricks.
1.6.5 The size of the bricks shall be unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer-In-Charge depending on locally available bricks. Bricks of
only one size shall be used in one work unless specially permitted by the
Engineer-In-Charge. When bricks in sizes other than required for the
works are permitted for use, the measurements to be paid shall be
limited to dimensions with use of bricks specified above or their
relevant dimensions for British size bricks whichever is less.
The following tolerance limits are permissible in the standard size on
any particular work.
Length + 4 mm.
Breadth + 2 mm.
Depth + 2 mm
1.6.6The bricks shall be true to shape and size and shall be burnt in kiln. The
bricks shall have clear ringing sound when struck, should be of a
uniform deep red or copper colour and should not absorb water more
than 20% of the dry weight. The compressive strength of bricks when
wet should be 35 kg per cm2 minimum when tested as per IS:1077-1986
and the bricks shall not show decrease in strength by more than 24%
when soaked in water thoroughly. One sample of brick shall be tested
for every 5,000 bricks. While sending the sample, it is necessary to send
10 bricks for determining the average crushing strength. The contractor
shall make necessary arrangements for conveying the sufficient nos. of
bricks to the laboratory for testing. The bricks shall have a fine
compacted texture with rectangular faces with parallel sides and straight
255
 edges and rectangular corners. This should conform to the standard
brick vide Indian standard code 1077-1992. All rejected bricks and
brickbats shall be stacked separately and disposed off within the time
fixed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Only those whole bricks which
conform to the specifications shall be accepted for the purpose of work.
Later on any defect which may come to the notice of the WRD , later on
in the work executed and paid so far in the running bill, the contractor is
liable to remove the defective/poor quality work and reconstruct it as per
specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1.6.7Ten samples for each supply may be tested for water absorption, crushing
strength and average crushing strength will be the guiding factor for
rejection or otherwise. The tests of bricks shall be got done in Govt.
Laboratory/ Govt. approved laboratory / GERI and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. Bricks which do not comply with the test results
and specifications shall be rejected and removed from the site of the
work within 24 hours by the contractor at his own cost. The testing shall
also be done if the Engineer-In-Charge feels that the bricks are of
inferior quality and doubtful in strength.
1.6.8The manufacturing process shall in general conform to IS : 2167-1971.
Sampling and testing of the bricks, whenever required shall be done in
accordance with IS:3495-1992 and IS - 5454 – 1978. The collection of
samples and charges for transporting up to laboratory have to be borne
by the contractor.
1.7 Mortar
The mortar shall consist of cement, sand and water thoroughly mixed in
the proportion as specified. Proportion of cement and sand shall be on
volume basis as specified in Bill of Quantities. For this purpose the
volume of 50 Kg cement bag shall be considered 0.034 m3. Due
allowance shall be made for the moisture content and mixing water shall
be added to achieve required workability.
1.7.1Mixing :
The mortar shall be prepared in Mechanical mixtures of tilting type
having calibrated water tank for storing water. The first batch of the
mortar at the commencement of work with any mixer shall be made
richer by adding 10 percent more cement over and above that required
for the particular mix. In case of mechanical mixing the mortar shall be
mixed for at least 3 minutes after addition of water. Hand mixing shall
256
 not be allowed. However in exceptional circumstances such as
mechanical breakdown of mixer work in remote areas or when the
quantities of work is very small, hand mixing shall be permitted and it
shall be done on a smooth water tight platform, large enough to allow
efficient turning over of the ingredients before and after adding water.
Mixing platform shall be so arranged that neither foreign material shall
get mixed with mortar not the mixing water flow out. Dry sand and
cement shall be mixed thoroughly by turning over to get a mixture of
uniform color. Enough water shall be then added gradually and mass
turned over till mortar of required consistency is obtained.
All ingredients shall be fed to the mixer simultaneously. The quantity of
water to achieve the required consistency shall be predetermined by trial
mix and portion of water from 5 to 10 percent shall precede and the like
quantity shall follow the introduction of other materials. The remaining
quantity of water shall be added during mixing operation. The wet
mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing. The mortar remaining
unused after above time shall be rejected and shall not be allowed to be
used.
1.7.2 Compressive strength
The C:M 1:5 mix indicates nominal mix of mortar. The governing
criteria shall be strength of mortar. Mortar shall have compressive
strength of 56 kg/cm2 at 28 days. Before the start of the work standard
test cubes of size 7.07cm x 7.07cm x 7.07cm using cement and sand to
be used on work shall be prepared and tested in the laboratory for
compressive strength. If the specified strength is not achieved the
proportion of the mix shall be varied to obtain the specified strength.
Arrangement of taking test sample as directed and transporting the same
to the Laboratory shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
1.7.3 Standard of acceptance
The average strength of the group of cubes caste on each day shall not be
less than the specified work cube strength. Twenty percent (20%) of the
cubes cast for each day may have value less than specified strength
provided the lowest value is not less than 85% of the specified strength.
The strength considered shall be at 28 days. The strength of test cubes at
7 days and 28 days shall be taken into consideration to watch the gain in
strength of mortar with respect to time and for this, comparison shall be
made with respective standard strengths. In case the results fail to fulfill
257
 the above stated strength requirement and in no case shall be less than
75% of specified strength the quantity of work done during the day if
considered acceptable shall be paid at a reduced rate as may be deemed
fit by the Engineer-In-Charge. Inferior work not meeting the acceptance
standard shall be rejected and the contractor shall bear the cost of
removal of such work and redoing the same as per specification.
The relevant portions of the followings Indian standard specification or
their latest editions where they do not conflict with specific provision
made in this document shall apply to this work.
1. IS: 2250-1981 Code of practice for preparation of
Masonry mortar
2. IS: 2116-1980 Sand for masonry mortar
1.8 Brick Masonry
The work covered under this item consists of furnishing all material,
labour, equipment and all incidental requirements of providing and
laying brick masonry in foundation and superstructure performing all
function necessary and ancillary thereto including racking out joints and
curing.
1.8.1 Preparing foundations
Masonry in foundation shall commence from the top of foundation
concrete surface which shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove loose
earth etc. The top surface of concrete shall be chipped and then coated
with cement slurry (1 part of cement to 2 parts of water) followed by 25
mm. thick layers of rich cement sand mortar of proportion 1:3 (1 cement:
3 sand) prior to laying of masonry.
1.8.2 Masonry to be done as per drawing
The work shall be done square, plumb, curved or battered as may be
required to meet the design requirements and shall be carried out in a
workman like manner with the aid of mould, templates, centering etc. as
per drawings or as directed by the relevant portions of IS:2212-1962.
Code of practice of construction of brick masonry or its latest editions
shall be treated as authority where they conflict with specific provisions
made in this document.
1.8.3 Block outs and slots to be provided by the contractor

258
 All block outs and slots etc. required for embedding foundation bolts and
other embedded parts of gates instruments for installation of gates etc. at
later stage shall be provided by the contractor without any extra cost. All
bricks shall be clean and free from dust or mud and all other loose
particles, impurities etc. to ensure good bond with mortar. All bricks
shall be soaked into water for at least two hours or as directed till air
bubbling ceases. For this purpose the brick shall be immersed in water
tanks or water pools specially prepared for the purpose.
The bricks shall be used in work as soon as taken out from the soaking
tanks. When considerable time elapses between taking out the bricks
from the tanks and their use in work the bricks shall be re-soaked as
necessary and as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Moreover every
mason (Brick layer) shall be provided with a tube or trough full of water
in which the bricks shall be immersed as directed so that no under
saturated brick is laid in the masonry.
The brick masonry work shall be done in English Bond unless otherwise
specified or directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Every course shall be
truly horizontal and wall shall be truly in plumb or as per the specified
slope. Vertical joints of alternative courses shall come directly over one
another. No damaged or broken bricks shall be used, closers shall be of
clean cut bricks and shall be placed near the end of the walls but not at
the outer edge. No brick bats shall be permitted except where absolutely
required or obtaining the dimensions of the different course for obtaining
the specified bond. Selected well shaped bricks shall be used for all
vertical and horizontal joints. Joints shall be fully filled with mortar.
Bricks shall be laid with frogs upward except in the top course bedded
and flushed with mortar. Cement mortar grouting at every fourth course
to ensure/improve filling of vertical joints of required consistency shall
be done.
1.9 General :
(a) Whenever work is to start on old surface the same shall be cleaned,
roughened and wetted before new masonry is laid over it. The work
includes cleaning the site around the work so as to restore the area to
its original condition.
(b) The WRD shall not be responsible for any damage due to floods,
rains or other causes till the work in its completed stage is finally
handed over to the department and a written acceptance that the work
259
 has been completed fully and accepted, is given by the Engineer-In-
Charge.
(c) The masonry shall be raised uniformly throughout. If break is
inevitable, sufficiently long steps shall be left out to joints the
courses to be laid later.
1.10 Limits of Masonry per day
No fresh course shall be laid unless the previously laid course is
sufficiently set. Maximum height of masonry that shall be allowed to be
constructed at a time shall not exceed one meter.
1.11 Curing
The masonry shall be kept continuously well-watered for 15 days from
the date of laying (day of laying is included in 15 days). At no time
during the curing period mortar shall be allowed to dry. Watering shall
be done in such a way as not to disturb or wash out the mortar. If the
contractor fails to make satisfactory arrangements for curing on and day
within the curing period the same shall be done by the department
without prior intimation to do so and cost there to recovered from the
contractor.
1.12 Racking of Joints
If joints are to be pointed or masonry is to be plastered then joints shall
be racked to a depth of 15 mm, till the mortar is green. If pointing or
plastering is not to be done, the mortar in the joints shall be filled and
troweled smooth while masonry is being laid.
1.13 Finishing
After the pointing is done and cured the face shall be washed down and
all the stains and adhering mortar lumps etc. shall be removed. Holes left
over for scaffolding, etc. shall be solidly filled with 1:3:6 cement
concrete and the face fixed with brick as directed to match the adjoining
work. The item includes striking out of joints up to 10 mm deep.
1.14 Defective Masonry
If any defect likes weak mortar in joints, hollows, etc. is found in the
masonry, such masonry shall be dismantled and rebuilt by the contractor
without any extra cost. Similarly any work which does not conform to
plans and specifications shall be corrected and/or redone as directed by
the Engineer-In-Charge. Where the mortar has become weak due to
260
 negligence in curing or where there is non-adherence of mortar to the
bricks, such brick work shall be removed and rebuilt by the contractor at
his own cost.
1.15 Scaffolding :
All scaffolding shall be sound and shall be considered as included in the
item. The contractor shall be responsible for accidents due to faulty
scaffolding or for any other reason. The contractor shall take necessary
measures to ensure the safety of work and working people. Any
instructions given in this regard by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
complied immediately. The contractor shall be responsible for any
damage to property or injury to persons due to his carelessness and/or
due to inadequate provisions of equipment for safety measures.
1.16 General Rules for better workmanship
General rules for better workmanship are as follows.
(i) Clean the old masonry surface prior to starting masonry by
wet sand-blasting and washing. Chipping should be resorted to in
only extreme cases.
(ii) Do not place mortar which bleed excessively.
(iii) Thoroughly and efficiently press into the old surface a layer
of mortar and build masonry on it immediately.
(iv) Shake the mortar well by vibrating and press the bricks by
hand to ensure that the excess mortar water and the entrapped air
come out and are not trapped at the bottom. The bricks shall then
be struck down by a wooden mallet or trowel and pressed towards
the adjacent bricks at the same time without touching it.
(v) Inadequate supply of brick bats, quoins in different sizes would
lead to excessive use of mortar.
(vi) Keep the surface continuously moist until the next layer is placed
after the necessary time interval and exposed surfaces shall be
kept moist for a period of not less than 15 days.
(vii) Notwithstanding the above general rules, the instruction for
attaining better workmanship issued by the authorities from time
to time during the execution for the work in different stage shall
be attended to by the Contractor without any extra claim.

261
SURFACE PREPARATION BEFORE LAYING OF BRICK MASONRY.
i) MASONRY IN CONTACT WITH FOUNDATION:
Before starting the masonry, the foundation shall toughly be cleaned for all
loose and undesired ble materials, eighther by way of wire brooms/brushes,
hammers, picks, compressed air jet, water jet, etc. so as to get cleaned hard
surface. The foundation shall be kept completely dewatered during masonry
work and till such time as would be required for masonry to set. The
foundation/top surface of old masonry shall normally be kept moisture for
twenty four hours. Before laying masonry over the finally prepared surface,
cement slurry of one cement to about 2/3 water by volume, shall be sprayed
over to cover whole surface, just before laying new masonry. A layer of 50
to 75 mm thick cement sand mortar of proportion 1:3 shall be laid over
slurry before laying masonry. No extra payment shall be made for this.

II) MASONRY IN CONTACT WITH MASONRY:

Surface of masonry shall be treated as follows before laying fresh masonry
over it. Loose stones, if any, shall be removed. Mortar joints shall be
scraped with iron rods and the expose faces of stone shall be wire brushed.
The surface shall be cleaned with air-water jet. The water collected in the
depressions of masonry shall be removed.
a) MASONRY IN CONTACT WITH OLD MASONRY:
Surface of old masonry which has been exposed for a long time, that is,
more than 28 days, shall be treated as follows. Looser stones, if any, shall be
removed. Old mortar joints shall be scraped to a depth of 15 mm or wet sand
blasted and washed with air-water jet. Immediately prior to placing of
masonry, the old masonry surface shall be treated in the same way as for
foundation masonry described above.

4.0) BRICK MASONRY IN GENERAL:

i) PROPORTION OF INGREDIENTS:
The proportion of cement mortar shall be as mentioned in detail item wise
technical specification of work.
b) WETTING OF BRICKS :
The bricks to be used shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water for about
two hours before use.
c) LAYING : Brick shall be laid in English bond unless otherwise directed or
mention in drawing. Half or cut bricks shall not be used except where
necessary to complete the bond.
A layer of mortar shall be spread on full width for suitable length of the
lower coarse. Each brick shall first be properly bedded and set home by
gently tapping with handle of trowel or wooden mallet. Side face shall be
262
 flushed with mortar before the nest brick is laid and pressed against it. On
completion of course, the vertical joints shall be fully filled from the top
with mortar The wall shall be truly in plumb. All course shall be laid truly
horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in
alternate course shall generally be directly one over other. The thickness of
brick course shall be of uniform.
The brick shall be laid with frog upwards. A set of tool comprising of
wooden straight edges, mason’s sprit level, square half meter rub,& pins,
string and plumb shall be kept on site of work for frequent checking during
the progress of work.
All the connected brick shall be kept not more than one meter over the rest
of the work.

d) JOINTS :
Brick shall be so laid that all joints are quite flush with mortar. Thickness of
joints shall not exceed 12mm. The face joints shall be racked out daily
during the progress of work as directed, when the mortar is still green so as
to provide key for plaster or pointing.
The face of brick shall be cleaned every day and all mortar dropping shall be
removed.
1.17 Quantity of Mortar
Full efforts shall be put to ensure that sufficient quantity of mortar is
used in the masonry. The quantity of mortar used shall be about 0.28 to
0.32 m3 per 1.0 m3 of masonry.
1.18 Protection of work against natural Calamities
The contractor shall to take all necessary precaution to protect the work
done against rain floods or other natural calamities etc. during
constriction period and till the possession is taken over by the WRD. No
extra payment shall be made for such protection work. Necessary
arrangement shall be made to maintain the traffic on the existing road.
1.19 Weep Holes
Weep holes using 10 cm. diameter asbestos cement pipe shall be
provided in the walls at 2m. Interval horizontally and 1mt. Interval
vertically staggered through the full width of masonry asbestos cement
pipe provided for weep hole shall be laid sloping to a grade 1 to 20
inside to outside. The opening of each weep hole of fill side shall be
covered with a non-corrodible wire mesh and provided with graded
263
 materials laid as a reverse filter and as directed by the Engineer-In-
Charge in order to prevent washing away of the fill material by the
seeping water. No deduction will be made for the holes in calculating the
volume of masonry for payment. Extra payment will not be made for
providing and fixing the asbestos cement pipes and providing and laying
the graded filter materials as stated here.
1.20 Measurement and Payment of masonry work in foundation
The unit rate for brick masonry shall include the cost of all labour
materials, tools, plants, scaffolding and other expenses incidental to the
work. The payment shall be made on cubic meter basis of the finished
work measured up to the limiting dimensions not exceeding those shown
on plans or constructed as per written instruction of the Engineer-In-
Charge.
1.21Measurement & Payments of masonry work in superstructure:(Item no. 27)
Specification same as per above except the masonry work shall be in
super structure for all lifts. Measurement & payment shall be on cubic
meter basis.

CEMENT PLASTER WORK(ITEM No.28,29)

 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF PLASTERING AND

POINTING:

1.0 MATERIALS:
i) CEMENT:
Specifications M-1 of section of material shall apply.
e) WATER:
Specifications M-3 of section of material shall apply.
f) SAND:
Specifications M-2 of section of material shall apply. The sand to be used
only after proper screening to get required FM and shall be of natural
sand and shall confirm to IS-1526 also. The FM of the coarse sand for
plastering work shall be 2.5 to 3.0 and FM fine sand for plastering work
shall not exceed 1.0.
Grading of coarse sand and fine sand shall be as given below.

COARSE SAND FINE SAND

264
 % %
PASSIN PASSIN
IS SIEVE G BY IS SIEVE G BY
DESIGNATIO WEIGH DESIGNATIO WEIGH
N T N T
4.75mm 100 4.75mm 100
2.36mm 90 – 100 2.36mm 100
1.18mm 70-100 1.18mm 70-100
600 micron 30-100 600 micron 40-85
300 micron 5-70 300 micron 5-50
150 micron 0-50 150 micron 0-10

g) MORTAR AND ITS INGRADIENTS :

Specifications laid down in IS-2250 (preparation and use of masonry
mortar) shall apply.
h) PROPORTION OF INGRADIENTS:
The cement mortar shall be obtained by mixing cement, sand and
water in the proportion as spec ified by weight or by volume. For
volumetric mix 50 kg of cement bag being equal to 0.0342 cum
i) MIXING:
The mortar shall be machine mix or hand mix as specified in respective item
of work. For major nature of job, only machine shall be allowed.
The cement mortar shall be obtain by thoughly mixing the ingredients in
mechanically operated mixer/or by hand mixed dry on a clean impervious
platform by turning over at least 3 times or more till a homogenous mixture
of uniform colour is obtain.
For machine mix. Mixing time shall commensurate with the RPM and
capacity of machine. Following points shall be carefully attended while
mixing.
The ingredients are fed into mixer simultaneously. A five to ten percent of
water shall be fed first and an equal quantity shall follow the introduction of
other material. The remaining water shall be added uniformly and
simultaneously when other materials are in the mixer. The addition of water
shall be done with calibrated bucket.

QUANTITY OF WATER:-
Mortar shall be such that the working consistency is obtained. The
consistency of mortar shall be decided on depending upon the job.

j) TIME OF USE:
Mortar shall be used in masonary within 30 minutes from the time of
adding water.

265
k) PLACING:
The mortar, shall be collected in large shollow bucket and than
transported it by mechanically or manually, to the place of requirement.
The mortar shall not be through for a height more than 60 cm, so as to
avoid segregation. Where ever mixing is done at higher elevation, chutes
formed of plain G.I. sheets can be used to transport mortar to the place of
work. Inclination of the chute should be so adjusted that segregation does
not take place.
l) SCAFFOLDING:
Wooden ballies, bamboos/steel pipes planks, treatles and other
scaffolding shall be sound and shall be examine before use Steel stage
scaffolding shall be preferred as far as possible.
m) PREPARATION OF SURFACE:
The surface to which plastering is to be done shall be cleaned of all dust,
loose mortar droppings trace of algac, efflorescence and other foreign
matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surface shall be roughed by wire
brushing / chiseling. Trimming of projections on stone/brick/concrete
surface where necessary shall be carried out to get an even surface. All
joints in stone masonry shall be thoroughly racked out to a depth of 20
mm and the joints and walls washed with fresh water. Surface shall be
wetted before plastering.
n) APPLICATION OF PLASTER:
Plastering work shall be stared from top to down wards. The plaster about
15x15 cms shall be first applied horizontally and vertically at not more
than 2 mt. intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauge. The mortar
shall then be applied in uniform surface slightly more than the specified
thickness. Then brought to a true surface by working a woode straight
edge reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways
movement at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off true with a
trowel or wooden float according to smooth or a sandy granular texture is
required. All corners, arriser, angles and junctions be truly vertical or
horizontal as the case may be shall be carefully finished. Rounding or
chamfering corners, arrises junctions etc. shall be carried out with proper
templates to the size required. In suspending the work at the end of the
day, the plaster shall be left out clean to the line both horizontally and
vertically. The edge of the old work shall be scraped clean and wetted
with cement putty before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas to enable
the two to properly join together. Each coat shall be kept damp
continuously till the next coat is applied or for a minimum period of 14
days.
o) CURING:

266
 The plastered surface shall be kept damp for a minimum period of 7 days.

Item No. 28
Providing cement plaster in various thickness and proportion including
smooth finishing, curing, scaffolding etc. complete for all leads and lifts as
under.
(b) Cement mortar 1:2 proportion & 12mm thick

Item No. 29
Providing 15mm thick cement plaster in single coat on Rough
(Similar)side of single or half brick walls for interior plastering upto floor
two level and finished even and smooth in (ii) Cement mortar 1:4 (1-
cement :4-sand)

1.3.1General:
Cement, sand and water to be used shall be as specified as specified in Technical
specification for material, under M-1 , M-2 ,M-3 under relevant Paragraph,
except that sand to be used shall pass through 16 No. B.S. sieve and on 100 Nos.
B.S. Sieve retention shall be 90%.
General specification of Plaster shall be applicable.
1.3.2 Workmanship:

Scaffolding:
Wooden ballies, bamboos planks, treatles and other scaffolding shall be sound.
These shall be properly examined before erection and use stage scaffolding shall be
provided for ceiling plaster, which shall be independent of the walls.

Preparation of back-ground:
The surface shall be cleaned of all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae,
efflorescence and other foreign matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surface
shall be roughened by wire brushing if it is not hard and by racking if it is hard. In
case of concrete surface, if a chemical retarder has been applied to the form work,
The surface shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose
particles cleaned off and care shall be taken that none of the retarder is left on the
surface. Trimming of projections on brick/concrete surface where necessary shall be
carried out to get and even surface.

267
 Raking of joints in case of masonry where necessary shall be allowed to dry out for
sufficient period before carrying out the plaster work.
The work shall not be soaked but only damped evenly before applying the plaster. If
the surface becomes dry such area shall be moistened again.
For external plaster, the plastering operation shall be started from top floor and
carried Downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations may be started
whenever the building frame and cladding work are ready and the temporary
supporting ceiling resting on the wall of the floor have been removed, Ceiling
plaster shall be completed before starting plaster to walls.

Application of plaster:
The application about 1515 cms. Shall be first applied horizontally and vertically
at not more than 2 metre intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauge. The
surface of these gauges shall be truly inplane of the finished plastered surface. The
mortar shall then be applied in uniform surface slightly more than the specified
thickness, then brought to a true surface by working a wooden straight edge
reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movement at a time.
Finally, the surface shall be finished off true with a trowel or wooden float
according as a smooth or a sandy granular texture is required. Excessive trolling or
overworking the float shall be avoided. All corners, arrises, angles and junctions be
truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be and shall be carefully finished.
Rounding or vertical or horizonal as the case may be and shall be carefully
finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arrises junction etc. shall be carried out
with proper templates to the size required.
Cement plaster shall be used within half an hour after addition of water. Any
mortar or plaster which is partially set shall be rejected and removed forthwith
from the site:
In suspending the work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left out clean to
the line both horizontally and vertically. When recommending the plaster, the
edges of the old work shall be scraped clean and wetted with cement putty before
plaster is applied to the adjacent area to enable the two to properly joint together.
Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the body of the wall and
nearer than 15 cm. To any corners or arrises. Horizontal joints in plasterwork shall
not also occur on parapet tops and copping as these invariably lead to leakage. No
portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be packed up later on.

Curing:
Each coat shall be kept dam continuously till the next coat is applied or for a
minimum period of 7 days. Moistening shall commence as soon as plaster is
hardened sufficiently. Soaking of walls shall be avoided and only as much water as
can be readily absorbed shall be used excessive evaporation on the sunny or
windward side of building in hot air or dry weather shall be prevented by handling
mattings or gunny bags on the outside of the plaster and keeping them wet.

268
Mode of measurement & payment: (ITEM No.28,29)
The rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour and scaffolding etc, involved
in the operations described under workmanship.
All plastering shall be measured in square metres unless, otherwise specified length,
breadth or height shall be measured correct to a centimeter.
Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. grooves or
open joints in brick work, stone work etc. or space between laths. Thickness of
plaster shall be average thickness with minimum 10 mm. At any point on this
surface.
This item includes plastering upto floor two level.
The measurement of wall plastering shall be taken between the walls or partition for
length and from the top of floor or skirting to ceiling for height. Depth of cover of
cornices if any shall be deducted.
Soffits of stairs shall be measured as plastering on ceilings, flowing soffits shall be
measured separately.
For jambs, soffits, sills etc. for openings not exceeding 0.5 sq. mt. Each in area for
ends of joints, beams, posts, girders, steps etc. not exceeding 0.5 sq. mt. Each in area
and for opening beams exceeding 0.5 sq.mt. and not exceeding 3.0 sq. mt. In each
area deductions and additions shall be made in the following manner:
No deductions shall be made for ends joints, beams posts etc. and opening not
exceeding 0.5 sq. mt. Each and no addition shall be made foe reveals, jambs, soffits,
sills etc. of these opening for finish to plaster around ends of joints, beams, posts
etc.
Deduction for opening exceeding 0.5 sq. mt. But not exceeding 3 sq. mt. Each shall
be made as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. sills
etc. of these openings.
(1) When both face of all wall are plastered with same plaster, deduction shall be
made for one face only.
(2) When two faces of wall are plastered with different types of plasters or if one
faces is plastered and the other pointed, deductions shall be made from the plaster or
pointing on the side of frame for door, window etc. on which width or reveals is less
than that on the other side but no deductions shall be made on the other side. Where
width of face shall be made from area of all are equal, deductions of 50% of area of
opening on each for shall be made from area of plaster and/or pointing as the case
may be.
For opening having doorframes equal to projecting beyond the thickness of wall,
full deduction for opening shall be made from each plastered face of the wall.
In case of openings of area above 3 sq. mt. Each, deduction shall be made for
opening but jambs, soffits and sills shall be measured.

The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. metre.

269
 M.S. Grills (Item No.30)
Item No.30 :-
Providing and fixing M.S. grills of required pattern to wooden frames of
windows etc. with M.S. flats at required spacings and frame alround, square or
round bars with round headed bolts and nuts or by screws. (B)
ORNAMENTAL GRILL

1.0. Materials
The structural steel shall conform to M-22.

2.0. Workmanship
2.1. The M.S. Grill shall be prepared as per the drawing or as directed for
fixing to frames of windows etc.
2.2. The grill shall be fabricated to the designs and patterns shown in the
drawings and the weight shall be asdirected, and the joints shall be reverted
or welded as shown in the plan or as directed. The grill so formed shall be
fixed into the frames of the windows etc. before they are erected in
position. The outside strip frame of the grill shall be housed to its full
thickness into the recess cut into the frame of the windows etc. The grill
shall be fixed to the frame with number of bolts and nuts or screws viz.
bolt nut/screw per 30 cm. of the length of outer strip subject to minimum
270
 of 2 Nos. on each side of the frame or as indicated in the drawing or as
directed.
2.3. The bolts and nuts or screws shall be counter sunk and shall be fixed with
the top of their heads flush with the face of the frame strips.

3.0. Mode of measurements & payment

3.1. No payment shall be made for weight of screws, bolts nuts etc. only weight
of grill shall be paid.
3.2. The rate shall be for a unit of one kg.

Window (Item No.31)

Item no: 31
Providing and fixing extruded aluminum window having extruded
aluminum Colour Powder Coated section frame main outer size 127mm x
38.10mm x 1.35mm (of Jindal Section no:2443,@ Wt.1.384
Kg/mt),horizontal Four track member size 122.20mm x 31.75mm x 1.10mm
(of Jindal Section no:8787,@ Wt. 1.205 Kg/mt), vertical member of size
122.20mm x 31.75mm x 1.50mm (of Jindal Section no:8935,@ Wt. 1.398
Kg/mt) with sliding shutters of horizontal member size 40mm x 18mm x
1.29mm (of Jindal Section no:8949 @ wt.of 0.456Kg/mt),vertical member of
size 40mm x 18mm x 1.29mm (of Jindal Section no:8947 @ wt.of
0.456Kg/mt/Section 8948,@ Wt. 0.457 Kg/mt) with 5 mm thick transparent
bronze colour tinted float glass with powder coated aluminum fittings and
fixtures and transparent silicon sealant glass fixing toframe as per details etc
complete for window.

1.0 Material
 Alluminium standard section:Alluminium used in the manufacture of
standard extruded Aluminum Four track (20 mm series) sliding shutters
with colouranodizedsection shall confirm to IS designation HEA-WP of IS
733-1975 and also designation W.V.G.- WP of IS 1285-1975 section shall

271
 be as specification in the drawing and design. All section shall be free from
any scratches or any damage on surface. All section shall have finished
luister surface on wall sides.
 The work includes standard extruded Aluminum Four track (20 mm series)
sliding shutters with above mention section, all around the glass on both
sides as directed by Engineer in charge.
 Glass: The colour tinted glass shall be of approved make having thickness
of 5mm. The glass shall be tinted float glass and free from scratches m and
cracks. The glass shall be provided on wall panel and fixed with
transparent silicon gasket
 Glazing clips: Glazing clips shall be free from any scratches or holes or
any damage of on surface all section shall have finished luster surface on
all sides.
 Rubber Gasket: Rubber gasket shall be approved make shall be free from
any scratches or holes or any damage on surface and shall have finished
luster surface on all sides.
 Fixtures
 Hinges shall be of approved make shall be free from any scratches or holes
or any damage on surface and shall have finished luster surface on all
sides.
 Handles: Handles shall be of approved make shall be free from any
scratches or holes or damages on surface and shall have finished luster
surface on all sides.
 Bolts: All bolt shall be approved make shall be free from any scratches or
holes or damages on surface and shall have finished luster surface on all
sides.

2.0 Workmanship:
The work of standard extruded Aluminum Four track (20 mm series)
sliding shuttersshall be done with extreme finishing. The particle board
shall be fixed in the bottom panel and glass shall be fixed in bottom panel
and glass shall be fitted on top panel as directed by engineer in charge
using glazing clips and rubber gasket as required. All the fixtures and
fastening shall be fitted at right place and as directed by Engineer in
charge. Floor spring shall be fitted properly so as to align the shutter
properly and shall be given trial of opening and closing properly.

3.0 Measurement
The unit rate of standard extruded Aluminum Four track (20 mm series)
sliding shutters shall include the cost of all material, cost of anodizing.
272
 Cost of all necessary fixture and fastening. Labour charge for fixing frame
and shutter at the place shown drawing and instructed by engineer in
charge, all tools and plant required for assembling and fixing in position,
finishing as per direction of Engineer in charge and all other incidental
expenses for preparing shutter of specified size complete the door structure
or its components as shown on the drawing and according the these
specification. They shall include the cost of making, fixing and making
walls good by plaster colour etc. as directed.
The standard extruded Aluminum Four track (20 mm series) sliding
shutters shall be measured for its width and height, limiting dimension to
those specification on plan or as directed.

The rate shall be for a unit of one Sq.mt.

FRP Shtter (Item No. 32)

Item No. 32
Providing and fixing FRP frame size 125x65 mm and 35mm thick FRP
shutter having extra reinforcement on sides & edges in polish finish. The
core of the shutter & frame is to be filed up with injected polyurethene foam
done in situ alongwith embedded wooden pieces for stiffening & also taking
hinges & fintures. The whole FRP frame & shutter is to be water proof
weather proof, termite proof & resistance to mild acid/alkali. Rates are to be
inclusive of S.S hinges with necessary screws & alluminium S.S fixtures &
fastenings & fastener sleeve.

1.0. Materials
Anodised aluminum butt hinges shall conform to M-15.
2.0. Workmanship
The item covers the requirement of preparation of shutters for doors,
windows, clerestory windows, their supply and fixing.
2.1. Shutters:
2.1.1. Paneled shutters shall be constructed in the form of timber frame work of
styles and rails with panel inserted of type as specified in the detailed
273
 drawings. Panel shall be fixed by providing grooves in the style and rails.
The styles and rails shall be joined to each other by mortise and tenon
joints at right angles. The shutters be non decorative type 2.1.2. All
members of the shutters shall be straight without any warp or bow and
shall have smooth, well planed faces at right angles to each other.
2.1.3. The size of styles and rails shall be as per drawings or as directed. Styles
and rails of shutters shall be made of one piece only.

2.2. Fixtures and Fastenings:

2.2.1. The rate shall include anodized butt hinges including fixing with iron
screws. The size and number of hinges shall be as per standard. door lock
&stainless steel handles are to be provided as directed.

3.0. Mode of measurement & payment

3.1. The rate for shutter includes cost of providing block and cleat for keeping
the shutter in open position if directed.
3.2. The dimension of the shutter shall be measured clear size of the shutter in
close position between the grooves of the frame.
3.3. The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. meter.

Flooring (Item No. 33)

Item No. 33
Providing and laying marble stone slab flooring over 20mm (average)base of
cement mortar 1:6 (1-cement : 6 coarse sand) or L.M. 1:1.5(1- lime putty :
1.5 - coarse sand) laid and jointed with gray cement slurry including
rubbing and polishing complete. (A) Marble slab 25mm thick

1.0. Materials
1.1. Marble stone shall conform to M-7. Water shall conform to M-3.
Cement mortar shall conform to M-12.
1.2. Marble stone shall conform to relevant Indian standard. Marble ston
shall be of antiskid type as approved.
2.0. Workmanship
 Bedding :
 The sub grade shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding shall
then be laid evenly over the surface tamped and corrected to desired level
and allowed to harden enough to offer a rigid cushion to Marble ston and
to enable the mason to place wooden planks across and squat on it.
274
  The Marble ston shall be of cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement :3 coarse sand)
or L.M. 1:1.5 of average thickness 20 mm given in the description of the
item.. The mortar shall have sufficient plasticity for laying and there shall
be no hard lumps that would interfere with the evenness of bedding. The
base shall be cleared and well wetted. The mortar shall then be spread in
thickness not less than 10 mm. at any place and average 12 mm
thickness. The proportion of the cement mortar shall be as specified in
the item.
 Fixing Marble ston :
 The Marble ston before laying shall be soaked in water for at least two
hours. Neat gray cement grout at 33 kg/ Cement/Sq.mt. of honey like
consistency shall be spread over the mortar bedding as directed. The
edges of the Marble stone shall be smeared with neat cement slurry. The
Marble ston shall be well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet
till they are properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There
shall be no hollows in bed or joints. The joints between the Marble ston
shall be as thin as possible in straight line or as per pattern.
 The Marble ston shall not have staggered joints. The joints shall be true
to centre line both ways. The Nahni trap coming in the flooring shall be
so positioned that its grating shall replace only one tile as far as possible.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed they shall be cut (Swan) to the
required size and the edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true
joints. The joints shall be filled with grey cement grout with wire brush or
trowel to a depth of 5 mm. and loose material removed. White cement
shall be used for pointing the joints. After fixing the Marble ston finally
in an even plane the flooring shall be kept wet and allowed to nature
undisturbed for 7 days. The pattern shall be approved by Engineer in
charge.
 Cleaning :
 The surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be
cleaned off before it sets. Once the floor has set, it shall be carefully
washed, cleared by dilute acid and dried. Proper precautions and
measures shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are not damaged in any
way till the completion of the construction.

3.0. Mode of measurements & payment

 The work done shall be measured in sq.mt. for visible area of work done.
The length and width of the flooring shall be measured not between the
faces of skirting or dedos or plastered face of wall as the case may be.
The paving under dedo or skirting shall not be measured. No deduction
shall be made not extra paid for any opening in the floor of area upto 0.1
sq.mt. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floors at different levels
in the same rooms.
 The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. meter.
275
 Painting (Item no: 34,35)

Item no: 34
Painting two coat (excluding priming coat ) on new steel and other metal
surfaces with enamel paint brushing to give an even shade including
cleaning the surface of all dirt, dust and other foreign matter.

1.0. Materials
The enamel paint shall conform to M-16.
2.0. Workmanship
2.1. General : The materials required for work of painting work shall be
obtained directly from approved manufactures or approved dealer and
brought to the site in maker's drums; kegs etc. with seal unbroken.
2.1.2. All materials not in actual use shall be kept properly protected, lids of
containers shall be kept closed and surface of paint in open or partially
open containers covered with a thin layer of turpentine to prevent
formation of skin. The materials which have become state or flat due to
276
 improper and long storage shall not be used. The paint shall be stirred
thoroughly in its container before pouring into small containers. While
applying also, the paint shall be continuously stirred in smaller container.
No left over paint shall be put back into stock tins. When not in use the
containers shall be kept properly closed.
2.1.3. If for any reasons, things is necessary, the brand of thinner recommended
by the manufacturer shall be used.
2.1.4. The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust,
dirt and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. No
painting on exterior or other exposed part o the work shall be carried out in
wet, damp or otherwise unfavorable weather and all the surfaces shall be
thoroughly dry before painting work is started.
2.2. Application of paint:
2.2.1. Brushing operations are to be adjusted to the spreading capacity advised by
the manufacture of particular paint. The paint shall be applied evenly and
smoothly by means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off
consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for
the first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite directions two
or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles
to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the -laying
off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute
one coat.
2.2.2. Each coat shall be allowed to dry completely and lightly rubbed with very
fine grade of sand-paper and loose particles brushed off before next coat is
applied. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and shall be got approved
from Engineer-in-charge before next coat is started.
2.2.3. Each coat the last shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper of fine
pumice stone and cleaned of dust before the next coat is applied. No hair
marks from the brush of clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels,
angles of moldings etc. shall be left on the work.
2.2.4. Special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps
etc. Approved best quality brushes shall be used.
3.0. Mode of measurements and payment
3.1. The new steel and other metal surface shall be measured under thisitem.
3.2. All the work shall be measured net in the decimal system, as executed
subject to the following limits unless otherwise stated hereinafter.
(a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 meter.
(b) Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq. meter.
3.3. No deductions shall be made for openings not exceeding 0.5 sq. mt. each
and no addition shall be made for painting to beddings, moldings, edges,
jambs, soffits, sills etc. of such opening.
3.4. In case of fabricated structural steel and iron work, priming coat of paint
shall be included with frabation. In case of trusses if measured in sq. m.
compound girders, stanchions, lattices, grader and similar work, actual area
shall be measured in sq. m. and no extra shall be paid for painting on bolts
277
 heads, nuts, washers etc. No addition shall be made to the weight
calculated for the purpose of measurements of steel and iron works for
paint applied on shop or at site.
3.5 The rate is excluding priming coat.The rate shall be for a unit of One sq.
meter.

Item no: 35
Wall painting (two coats) with plastic emulsion paint of approved brand
and manufacture on undecorated wall surfaces to give an even shade
including thoroughly brushing the surface free from mortar dropping and
other foreign matter and sand paper smooth etc. complete.

1. Material:
 Paint shall be used as per approved sample and confirming to relevant IS
codes and approved by EIC.
 All type of material shall be used as per approved make list and confirming
to relevant IS codes and approved by EIC.

2.0. Workmanship
The painting work shall be for subsequent coat of plastic emulsion paint of
approved brand & manufactures on undecorated wall surfacesfor all floors to
give an even shade as directed.
 Scaffolding: Wherever scaffolding is necessary it shall be erected in such a
way that as far as possible on part of scaffolding shall rest against the
surface to be white or colour washed A properly secured strong and well
tied suspended platform (Zoola) may be used for white washing. Where
ladders are used pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied at top and bottom to
prevent scratches to the floors and walls. For white washing of ceilings,
proper stage scaffolding shall be erected where necessary.
 Preparation of surface: The undecorated surface to be distempered shall be
thoroughly brushed from dust, dirt, grease, mortar dropping and other
foreign matter and sand papered smooth. New plaster surface shall be
allowed to dry for at least 2 months before applications of distemper.
 All unnecessary nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made
good with plaster again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A
coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches. The surface shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.
The surface affected by moulds, moss, fungi, algae lichens, efflorescence
etc. shall be treated in accordance with I.S; 2395 (Part 01) 1966. Before
278
 applying distempering, any unevenness shall be made good by applying
putty made of plaster of pairs mixed with water on entire surface including
filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
 Priming coat :
 A priming coat of primer of approved manufacture and shade shall be
applied over the papered surface in case of new work on undecorated
surface. If the distemper priming is done after the wall surface dries
completely, the distemper primer shall be applied.
 Application of primer shall be done as under: The primer shall be applied
with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall
be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards.
This entire operation will constitute on coat. The surface shall be finished
as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry
for at least 48 hours before oil bound distemper or paint is applied.
 Preparation of Mix :
 This shall be done as per manufacture's instructions. The thinning of
emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. The quantity of
thinner to be added shall be as per manufacturer instructions.
 Application :
 Before pouring into small containers for use, the paint shall be stirred
thoroughly in item container. When applying also, the paint shall be
continuously stirred in the smaller container, so that its consistency is kept
uniform.
 The paint shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and
laying off the crossing and consist of covering the area over with paint,
brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then, brushing
alternately in opposite direction two or three times and then finally
brushing lightly in direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no
brush Marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. No hair marks
from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles
of moldings, etc. shall be left on the work. The full process of crossing and
laying off will constitute one coat.
 The paint shall be applied with brush or rollers. For undecorated surfaces,
the surface shall be treated with minimum two coats of cement water
proofing paint. The second or subsequent coat shall not be started until the
proceeding coat as become sufficiently hard to resist marking by brushing
being used.

279
  The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. It shall
be even and uniform in shade without patches, brush marks, paint drops
etc.

 Precautions :
 (a) Old brushes if they are to be used with emulsion paints shall be
completely dried of turpentine or oil paint by washing in warm soap water.
Brushes shall be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept
immersed in water fusing break periods to prevent the paint from
hardening on the brush.
 (b) In the preparation of wall surfaces for plastic emulsion painting, no oil
base petals shall be sued in filling cracks, holes etc.
 (c) Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delay as they will
be difficult to remove after hardening.
 (d) Washing or surfaces treated with emulsion paint shall not be done
within 3 to 4 weeks of application.
 Protective measures : The surface of doors, windows, floors, articles, of
furniture etc. and such other parts of the building not to be white washed
shall be protected from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be
cleaned of white wash splashed if any.

3.0. Mode of measurements and payment

 All the work shall be measured in the decimal system as under:
 (a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m.
 (b) Area in individual item shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq.m.
 All the work shall be measured in sq.mt. Deductions for jambs, soffits, sills
etc. for openings not exceeding 0.5 sq.mt. each in area, for ends of joists,
posts, beams, girders, steps etc. not exceeding 0.5 sq.mt. each in area and
for openings exceeding 0.5 sq.mt. and not exceeding 3.0. sq.mt. each in
area, deductions and additions shall be made as under.
 No deductions shall be made for ends of joists, beams, posts, etc. and
openings not exceeding 0.5 sq mt. each. No addition shall be made for
reveals, jambs, soffits, sills etc. of these openings not for finish around
ends of joints, beams, posts etc.
 No deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 sq.mt. but not exceeding 3 sq.mt.
each shall be made as follows and no addition will be made for reveals,
jambs, soffits etc. of these openings.

280
 (a) When both the faces of wall surfaces are provided with finish,
deduction shall be made for one face only.
 (b) When each face of wall surface is provided with different finish,
deduction shall be made for that side of frame for door, windows, etc. on
which width of reveals is less than that of the other side. Where width of
reveals on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of area of
opening on each face shall be made from total area of finish.
 (c) When only one face of wall is treated and the other face is not treated,
full deduction shall be made if the width of reveal on the treated side is less
than that on the untreated side, but if the width of the reveal is equal or
more than on the untreated side neither deductions nor additions to be
made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills etc.
 In case of area of openings exceeding 3 sq. mt. each, deductions shall be
made for openings but jambs, soffits, sills shall be measured.
 No deductions shall be made for attachment such as casing, conducts, pipe,
electric wiring and the like.
 Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and not girth. The
quantities so measured shall be increased by the following percentage and
the resultant shall be included with the general areas:
 (a) Corrugated steel sheets……………………………………… 14%
 (b) Corrugated A.C. sheets………………………………………. 20%
 (c) Semi corrugated A.C. Sheets……………………………….. 10%
 (d) Nainital pattern roof (Plain sheeting sheets)……………….. 10%
 (e) Naintial pattern roof (with corrugated sheets)……………… 25%
 Cornices and other wall features, when they are not picked out in a
different finish/colour shall be girthed and included in the general area.
 Extra payment shall be done on ceiling and sloping roofs.
 The rate includes cost of all materials, labours, scaffolding, protective
measures etc. involved in all the operations described above. This shall
also include conveyance, delivery, handing, unloading, storing work etc.

The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. meter

281
 PVC SWR pipes (Item no: 36)

Item no: 36
Providing and laying PVC SWR pipes IS 13592 for Drain - 90 mm dia

1. Material:
 plasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to IS 4707

2. Dimensions:
 Nominal outside diameters (DN) ranging from 40 mm to 160 mm
 Wall thickness varying depending on the pipe diameter and pressure rating
282
3. Types:
 Type A: For rainwater and vent applications
 Type B: For soil and waste discharge
4. Properties:
 High tensile and impact strength
 Excellent chemical resistance
 Self-extinguishing (does not support combustion)
 Good thermal and acoustic insulation properties
5. Standards:
 Manufactured as per IS 13592:2013
 Fittings should comply with IS 14735
6. Additional considerations:
 Solvent cementing is the recommended method for joining PVC SWR
pipes.
 The system should be properly designed and installed to ensure optimal
performance and avoid leaks.
 Regular maintenance is essential to keep the system functioning properly.

7 . The rate shall be for a unit of One running meter.

PVC SWR nahni trap(Item no: 37)

Item no: 37
Providing and fixing PVC Nahni trap IS 14735 for drain – 100 mm diameter
with jail of the following nominal diameter of self cleaning design with C.I.
screaed down or higned grating including cost of cutting and making good
the walls.

1.0. Materials
1.1. The PVC trap shall conform to M-18. The C.I. hinged or screwed down
cover shall be of best quality
283
2.0. Workmanship
2.1. The Nahni trap with 100 mm. dia inlet and 50 mm. dia. outlet shall be
fixed as per drawing or as directed.
2.2. The Nahni trap shall be jointed with C.I. Pipe, 75 mm. dia. with lead joints.
The lead joints shall be done in conformation with I.S. 782.-1976.

3.0. Mode of measurements and payment

3.1. The rate includes cost of all labour, materials, tools and plants etc. required
for satisfactory completion of this item including lead, jointing and testing.
3.2. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

ELECTRICAL WORKS:-

 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS IN

GOVERNMENT BUILDING SUBJECT TO THE GENERAL
CONDITION OF CONTRACT IN FORCE (1986)

1. Wiring Rules:
The installation generally shall be carried out in conformity with relevant
Indian Standard Specifications and code of practices prevalent, Indian Electricity
Rules 1956 and Indian Electricity Act, 1910 as amended from time to time.
284
2. Definition:
The definition of terms shall be in accordance with Indian Standard code of
Practice for Electrical wiring Installation IS-732-1982 except for the definition of
point in case of Internal Electrical Installation. For definition of point wiring and
measurement of Electrical works IS-5908-1970 shall be referred to.
3. Voltage and Frequency of Supply:
All current consuming devices shall be suitable for frequency of 50 C/s and
system of voltage meant for unless otherwise specified.
4. Layout of wiring and its description:
(i) The wiring shall be carried out as per Schedule "power" wiring must be
in screwed conduit and shall be kept separate and distinct from lighting wiring.
All wiring must be done on the distribution system with main and branch
distribution boards at convenient centers and without isolated fuses. All
conductors shall be run as far as possible along the walls and ceiling as to be
easily accessible and capable of being thoroughly inspected. The balancing of
circuits will be arranged before hand by the Ex. Engineer Electrical Division.
(ii) With in one month of the taking over the installation, the contractor
shall supply to the Ex. Engineer, Elect. Division a complete set of wiring
diagrams of the same on drawings to be supplied when available by the
Executive Engineer, Electrical Division, and to the satisfaction of the Ex.
Engineer, Elect. Dn, and these wiring plans shall be "Drawings" within the
meaning of the term as used in the General Conditions of contract.
5. Conductors:
All conductors unless otherwise specified shall not be less than 1.5 Sq. mm
for point wiring and 2.5 Sq. mm for mains. Conductors for power and lighting
circuits shall be of adequate size to carry the designed circuit load without
exceeding the permissible thermal limits for the installation, and such sizes will
be stipulated in specifications and or drawings.
6. Cables:
6.1 All cables shall conform to relevant Indian Standards
6.2 Conductors of all cables except the flexible cable shall be of aluminium.
The smallest aluminimum conductors for the final circuit shall have
nominal cross sectional area of not less than 1.5 Sq. mm. The minimum
size of the aluminium conductors for power wiring shall be 4 Sq. mm
6.3.1 Conductors of flexible cables shall be of copper. The minimum cross
sectional area of such a cables shall be lf.0193 mm. The flexible cable shall
have uniform and adequate insulation.
6.3.2 Unless the flexible cables and conductors are protected by armour or tough
rubber or PVC Sheath, these shall not be used in workshops and other
places where they are liable to mechanical damage.
6.3.3 Core flexible, cables shall be used for connecting single phase Appliances
for phase, neutral & earth-connections.

7. Fall of Potential:
285
 The cross sectional area of all conductors inside buildings shall be so
proportioned to their lengths that the drop in voltage between main fuses
and the farthest point or any lamp shall not exceed three percent of the
voltage of the consumer's with all the consuming devices in use.
7.1 If the CABLE SIZE is increased to avoid the voltage drop in circuit current
rating of the cable shall be more than that for which the circuit is designed.
In each circuit or sub circuit every cable shall have a current rating not less
than that of the fuse which protects the circuit or sub circuit respectively
for current higher than the full load current.
8. Ratings of lamps and fans socket out lets: Points and exhaust fans:
8.1 Incandescent lamps installed in residential and non- residential buildings
shall be rated at 60 watts & 100 watts respectively.
8.2 Table fans and ceiling fans shall be rated at 60 watts, exhaust fan shall be
rated according to their capacity.
8.3 5 Amp. socket outlet points and 15 Amp. sockets outlet points shall be
rated at 100 watts and 1000 watts respectively for the purpose of load
assessment unless actual values of the load are known or specified.
9. Tests:
9.1 Before the installation is commissioned following tests shall be carried out.
(1) Insulation Resistance test.
(2) Polarity Tests of Switches
(3) Earth continuity tests
(4) Earth electrodes Resistance test.
9.2.1.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured between earth and the
whole system of conductors or any section-there of with all fuses in place
and all switches closed, and except in earthed concentric wiring all lamps
in position or both poles of the installation otherwise electrically connected
together- a direct current pressure of not less than twice the working
pressure provided that it need not exceed. 500 volts for medium voltage
circuits where the supply is derived from the three wire D.C. or a poly
phase A.C. System, the neutral pole of which is connected to earth either
direct or through added resistance, the working pressure shall be deemed to
be that which is maintained between the phase conductor and the neutral.
S.2.1.2 The insulation resistance shall also be measured between all conductors to
one pole or phase conductor of the supply and all the conductors connected
to the neutral or to the order pole or phase conductors of the supply with all
lamps in position and switches in 'OFF' position and its value shall be not
less than in that specified in Sub-Clause 9.2.1.3.
9.2.1.3 The insulation resistance in Megohms measured as above shall not
be less than 50 Megohms divided by the number of outlets or when PVC
insulated cables are used for wiring 12.5 megohms divided by number of
286
 outlets.
9.2.1.4 Where a whole installation is being tested, a lower value than that
given by the formula, subject to a minimum of 1 megohm is acceptable.
9.2.1.5 A preliminary and similar test may be made before lamps, etc. are
installed and in this event the insulation resistance to earth should be not
less than 100 megohms divided by the number of outlets or when PVC
insulated cables are used for wiring 25 megohms divided by number of
outlets.
9.2.1.6 The term "Outlet" includes every switch except that a switch
combined with a socket outlet, appliance or lighting fitting is regarded as
one outlet.
9.2.1.7 Control rheostat heating and power appliance and electric sign may,
if required, be disconnected from the circuit during the test, but in that
event the insulation resistance between the case or frame work, and all live
parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign, shall be not less than that
specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specification or where there is no
such specification shall be not less than half a megohm
9.2.2 Polarity Test:
9.2.2.1 In a two wire installation a test shall be made to verify that all
switches in every circuit have been fitted in the same conductor through
out& such conductor shall be labeled or marked for connection to the
phase conductor or to the non-earthed conductor of the supply.
9.2.2.2 In a three wire or a four wire installation a test shall be made to
verify that every non-linked single pole switch is fitted in a conductor
which is labeled or marked for connection to one of the phase conductor of
the supply.
9.2.2.3 The installation shall be connected to the supply for testing. The
terminals of all switches shall be tested by a test lamp one lead of which is
connected to the earth. Glowing of test lamp to its full brilliance, when the
switch is in 'on' position irrespective of appliance in position or not shall
indicate that the switch is connected to the right polarity.
9.2.3 Earth Continuity Test:
The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and metallic
envelops of cables in all cases shall be tested for electric continuity and the
electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead but excluding
any added resistance or earth leakage circuit breaker measured from the
connection with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity
conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed one ohm.

9.2.3.1 Earth Electrode Resistance Test:

Earth electrode Resistance test may be carried out by Megger Earth Testers
containing a direct reading ohm-meter, a hand driven generator and
287
 auxiliary electrodes.
9.3 On completion of an electric installation (addition and alteration) a
certificate shall be furnished by the contractor countersigned by the
certified Supervisor under whose direction supervision the installation was
carried out. This certificate shall be in the prescribed form as given in
Appendix-'B' in addition to the test certificate required by Local Electrical
Supply Authorities.
10. Joint and looping back:
Unless with the sanction of Ex. Engineer Electrical Divisions all joints in
conductor shall be means of approved mechanical connectors in suitable
and approved junction boxes but looping back system shall be preferable.
IN wiring unless otherwise specified Phase and live conduct shall be
looped at the switch box where an neutral conductor can be looped from
light, fan or socket. In non-residential buildings, neutral and earth
continuity wire shall be brought to each of the switch boards and
terminated therein with suitable connectors in Switch boards should be of
adequate size to accommodate at least one number of 5 Amps, socket
outlet and control switch in future.
11. Switches:
Main Switchgears, Switch Board and their location:
11.1 All main switches (other than those of iron clad pattern) carrying current of
10 Amp. and above shall be fitted for back connections and shall be
suitably protected.
11.2 All switches and circuit breakers shall be constructed in accordance with
the I.S. 4237-1967. General requirement for switchgear and control gear
for voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts and other relevant I.S. provided also
that spring shall be either of phosphor bronze or if steel shall be copper or
Nickel plated and that handle shall be so fastened that they do not tend to
unscrew or become loose.
11.3 All main switches shall be either of metal clad enclosed pattern or of any
insulated enclosed pattern which shall be fixed at close proximity to the
point of entry of supply.
11.4 Switch boards shall not be erected above gas, stoves, or sinks or within 2.5
m of any washing unit in the washing rooms of laundries or in the bath
rooms, lavatories, toilets or kitchens.
11.5 Switch boards, if unavoidably fixed in places likely to be exposed to
weather, to drip, or to abnormal moist temperature the outlet casing shall
be weather proof and shall be provided with glands or bushing of adopted
to receive screwed conduit according to the manner in which cables are
run. PVC and double flanged bushes shall be fitted in the holes of the
switches for entry and exit of wires.
11.6 A switch board shall not be installed so that its bottom is within 1.25 m
288
 above the floor unless the front of the switch board is completely enclosed
by a door or the switch board is located in a position to which only
authorized persons have access.
11.7 Switch boards shall be recessed in the wall if so specified in the schedule
of work or in the special specification. The front shall be fitted with hinged
panel of other suitable material such as bakelite in wood frame with
locking arrangement, the outer surface of door being flush with the walls.
Ample room shall be provided at the back for connections and at the front
between the switchgear mountings and the door.
11.8 Equipments which are on the front of a switch board shall be so arranged
that inadvertently personal contact with live parts is unlikely during the
manipulation of switchgears, changing of fuses or like operations.
11.9 No holes other than the holes by means of which the panel is fixed shall be
drilled closer than 1.3 cms. from any edge of the panel.
11.10 The various live parts, unless they are effectively screened by substantial
barriers of non-hydroscopic, non-inflammable insulating material, shall be
so spaced that space shall not be maintained between such parts and earth.
11.11 The arrangement of gear shall be such that they shall be readily accessible
and their connections to all instruments and apparatus shall also be
traceable.
11.12 In every case in which switches and fuses are fitted on the same pole, these
fuses shall be so arranged that the fuses are not alive when their respective
switches are in the off position.
11.13 No fuses other than fuses in instrument circuit shall be fixed on the back of
or behind a switch board panel or frame.
11.14 All the metal switchgears and switch boards shall be painted, prior to
erection with one coat of antirust primer. After erection they shall be
painted with two coats of approved enamel or aluminium paint as required
on all sides wherever accessible.
11.15 All switch boards connected to medium voltage and above shall be
provided with 'Danger Notice Plate' conforming to relevant Indian
Standards
12. Control at Point of Commencement of Supply:
12.1 There shall be a linked main switchgear with fuse on each live conductor
of the supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring through out the
installation shall be such that there is no break in the neutral wire except in
the form of a linked switchgear. The neutral shall also be distinctly
marked. In this connection Rule 32(2) of the Indian Electricity Rules 1966
(See Appendix 'A') shall also be referred.
12.2 The main switchgear shall be situated as near as practicable to be
289
 termination of service line and shall be easily accessible without the use of
any external aid.
12.3 On the main switchgear, where the conductor of a two wire system or an
earthel neutral conductor of a multi-wire system or a conductor which is to
be connected thereto, an indication of a permanent nature shall be provided
to identify the earther neutral conductor. In this connection Rule 32(1) of
Indian Electricity Rules 1956 (see appendix 'A') shall be referred.
13.0 Switch Board & Distribution Boards:
Metal clad switch gear shall preferably be mounted on any of the following
types of Board.
13.1 Hinged type Metal Boards:
These shall consist of a box made of sheet metal not less than 2 mm thick
and shall be provided with a hinged cover to enable the board to swing
open for examination of the wiring at the back. The joints shall be welded.
A teak wood board, thoroughly protected both inside and outside with
good insulating varnish conforming to IS : 347-1952 specification for
varnish shellac, for General purpose, and of not less than 6.5 mm
thickness, shall be provided at the back for attachment of incoming and
outgoing cables. There shall be a clear distance of not less than 2.9 cm
between the teak wood board and the cover, the distance being increased
for larger boards in order that on closing of the cover, the insulation of the
cables is not subjected to damage and no short length of cables is subjected
to excessive twisting or bending in any case. The board shall be securely
fixed to the wall by means of rag bolts, plugs or wooden Gutties and shall
be provided with a locking arrangement and an earthing stud. All wires
passing through the metal board shall be bunched. Alternatively, hinged
type metal boards shall be made of sheet covering mounted on channel or
angle iron frame.
Note : Such type of boards are particularly suitable for small switch-boards for
mounting metal-clad switchgearconnected to supply at low voltages.
13.2 Fixed type Metal Boards:
These shall consist of an angle or channel of iron frame fixed on the wall
or on floor and supported on the wall at the top if necessary. There shall be
a clear distance of one meter in front of the switch board. If there are
attachments of base connections at the back of the switch board Rules
51(1) (c) of Indian Electricity Rules', 1956 shall apply.
Note : Such type of boards are particularly suitable for large switchboard for
mounting large number or switchgears orhigher capacity metal clad
switchgears or both.
13.3 Teakwood Boards:
For small installations connected to a Single phase 230 volts supply teak
wood boards may be caused as main boards or sub-board. These shall be of
seasoned teak or other durable wood with solid back impregnated with
290
 varnish of approved quality with all joints dovetailed.
13.4 In large size medium voltage installations, before proceeding with the
actual construction of the boards, a proper drawing showing the detailed
dimensions and design including the disposition of the mountings, which
shall be symmetrically and neatly arranged for arriving at the overall
dimensions, shall be prepared and ' approved by the engineer-in-charge.
13.5 Recessing of Boards:
Where so specified, the switch boards shall be recessed in the wall. The
front shall be fitted with a hinged panel of teak wood or other suitable
material, such as bakelite, or with unbreakable glass doors in teak -wood
frame with locking arrangement, the other surface off the doors being flush
with the walls. Ample room shall be provided at the back for connection
and at the front between the switchgear mountings.
13.6 Arrangement of Apparatus:
a) Equipment which is on the front of a switch board shall be so arranged that
inadvertently personal contact with live parts is unlikely during the
manipulation of switches, changing of fuses or like operation.
b) No apparatus shall project beyond any edge of panel. No fuse body shall be
mounted within 2.5 cm. of any edge of the panel and no hole other than
holes by means of which the panel is fixed shall be drilled closer than 1.3
cms from any edge of the panel.
c) The various live parts, unless they are effectively screened by substantial
barriers of non-hydroscopic, non-inflammable insulating material, shall be
so spaced that an arc cannot maintain between such parts and earth.
d) The arrangement of the gear shall be such that they shall be readily
accessible and their connections to all instruments and apparatus shall also
be easily traceable.
e) In every case in which switches and fuses are fitted on the: same pole,
these fuses shall be so arranged that the fuses are not alive when their
respective switches are in the 'OFF' position.
f) NO fuses other than fuses instrument circuit shall be fixed on the back of
or behind a switchboard panel or frame.
13.7 Marking of Apparatus:
a) Where a board is connected to voltage higher than 250 volts, all the
apparatus mounted on it shall be marked in the following colours to
indicate the different poles or phases to which the apparatus or its different
terminals may have been connected.
Alternating Current Direct Current
Three-phase-red Three wire system-2 outer
wires
Yellow, & blue Postive red & negative blue.
Netural-black Neutral-black
Where fuse-wire three phase wiring is done, the neutral shall be in one
291
 colour and the other three wires in another colour.
b) Where a board has more than one switch each such switch shall be marked
to indicate which section of the installation it controls.
c) All markings required under the rule shall be clear and permanent.
13.8 Main & Branch Distribution Board:
13.8.1 Main and branch distribution boards shall be of any type mentioned in 13.1
13.8.2 Main distribution board shall be provided with a switch or air circuit
breaker on each pole of each circuit, a fuse on the phase or live conductor
and a link on the neutral or earthed conductor of each circuit. The
switches shall always be linked.
13.8.3 Branch Distribution Board:
13.8.3.1 Branch distribution boards shall be provided with a fuse or a
miniature circuit breaker or both the adequate rating- setting chosen on the
live conductor of each circuit and the earthed neutral conductor shall be
connected to a common link and be capable of being disconnected
individually for testing purposes. At least one spare circuit of the same
capacity shall be provided on each branch distribution board.
13.8.3.2 In residential installations, lights and fans may be wired on a
common circuit such sub circuit shall not have more than total of ten
points of lights, fans and socket outlets. The load of such circuit shall be
restricted to 800 watts. If a separate fan circuit is provided, the number of
fans in the circuit shall not exceed ten. Power sub-circuits shall be
designed according to the load but in no case shall there be more than two
outlets on each sub-circuits.

13.8.3.3 In Industrial and other similar installations requiring the use of

group control of switching operation, circuits, for socket outlets may be
kept separate from fans and lights. Normally fans and lights may be wired
on a common circuit, however, if need is felt separate circuits may be
provided for the two. The road on any low voltage sub-circuit shall not
exceed 3000 Watts. In case of new installation, all circuits and sub-
circuits shall be designed by making provision of 20 per cent increase in
load due to any future modification. Power sub- circuits shall be designed
according to the load but in no case shall there be more than four outlets
in each sub-circuits.
13.9 Installation of Distribution Boards:
13.9.1 The distribution fuse-boards shall be located as near as possible to the
centre of the load they are intended to control.
13.9.2 These shall be fixed on suitable stanchion or wall and shall be accessible
for replacement of fuses.
13.9.3 These shall be of either metal-clad type, or all insulated type. But, if
292
 exposed to weather or damp situations, they shall be of the weather proof
type and, if installed where exposed to explosive dust, vapor or gas, they
shall be of flame proof type.
13.9.4 Where two or more distribution fuse boards feed low voltage these
distribution boards shall be:
(1) Fixed not less than 2 m apart or,
(2) Arranged so that it is not possible to open two at a time, namely,
they are interlocked and the metal case is marked 'Danger 415
Volts', or
(3) Installed in a room or enclosure accessible to only authorized
persons.
13.9.5 All distribution boards shall be marked 'Lighting', 'Power', as the case may
be, and also marked with the voltage and number of phases of the supply.
Each shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of each circuit
which it controls and the current rating of the circuit and size of fuse-
element.
13.9.6 Triple pole distribution boards shall not be generally used for final circuit
distribution unless specific approval of Engineer in charge is obtained. In
special cases where use of Triple pole distribution boards are inevitable
they shall be of H.R.C. fuse type only.

13.10 Wiring and Distribution Board:

13.10.1 In wiring a branch board, total load of the consuming devices shall
be divided, as far as possible, evenly between the number of ways of the
board leaving the spare circuit for future extension.
13.10.2 All connections between pieces of apparatus or between apparatus
and terminals on a board shall be neatly arranged in a definite sequence
following the arrangement of the apparatus mounted thereon, avoiding
unnecessary crossing.
13.10.3 Cables shall be connected to a terminal only by soldered or welded
or crimped lugs using suitable sleeve, lugs or ferrules unless the terminal
is of such a form that it is possible to securely clamp them without the
cutting away of cable strands.
13.10.4 All bare conductor shall be rigidly fixed in such a manner that a
clearance of at least 2.5 cms. is maintained between conductor of opposite
polarity or phase and between the conductors and any material other than
insulating material.
13.10.5 If required, a pilot lamp shall be fixed and connected through on
independent single-pole switch and fuse to the bus- bars of the board.

293
13.10.6 In a hinged type board, the incoming and outgoing cables shall be
fixed at one or more points according to the number of cables on the back
of the board leaving suitable space in between cables, and shall also, if
possible, be fixed at the corresponding points on the switch board panel.
The cables between these points shall be arranged to form a 'U' or 'S'
shaped loop which shall be of such length as to allow the switchboard
panel to swing through an angle of not less than 90°.
14.0 Capacity of Circuits:
14.1 Lights and fans may be issued on a common circuits and such a circuit
shall not have more than a total of ten points of lights, fan, and socket
outlets, or a load of 800 watts whichever is less. The power circuits shall
be designed with a maximum of two outlets per circuits generally when
load is not known or specified. In non-residential buildings at important
District centers however one outlet per .circuit may be preferred. The
circuit shall be designed based on the loading of the circuit where not
specified the load shall be taken as 1 KW per outlet. Where the load is
more than 1 KW it should be controlled by a isolator switch or miniature
circuit breaker.

15.0 Passing Through Walls and Floors:

15.1 Where conductors pass through walls one of the following methods shall
be employed. Care shall be taken to see that wires pass very freely through
protective pipe or box and that the wires pass through in a straight line
without any twist or cross in wires, on other ends of such holes.
(a) A teak wood box extending through the whole thickness of the wall
shall be buried in the wall and casings or conductors shall be carried
so as to allow 1.3 cms air space on three sides, of the casing
conductor.
(b) The conductor shall be carried either in a rigid steel conduit
conforming to *IS : 1653-1964 specification for Rigid Steel conduits
of Electrical wiring (Revised) or a rigid non-metallic conduit
conforming to *IS : 2509-1963 specification for Rigid Non-Metallic
conduits for Electrical Installations, or in a porcelain tube of such
size which permits easy drawing in. The end of conduit shall be
neatly bushed with porcelain, wood or other approved material.
(c)Insulated conductors while passing through floors shall be protected
from mechanical injury by means of rigid steel conduit (See *IS :
1653-1964) to a height not less than 1.5m above the floors and flush
with the ceiling below. This steel conduit shall be earthed and
securely bushed.
15.2 Where a wall tube passes outside a building so as to be exposed to weather,
294
 the outer end shall be belt mounted and turned down-wards, and properly
bused on the open end.
1. Fixing to Walls and Ceilings:
Plugs for ordinary walls or ceilings shall he of well seasoned teak or other
approved hardwood not less than 5 cm long and 2.5 cm. square on the
inner end arid 2 cm. square on the outer end. They shall be cemented into
walls to within 7.5 mm ef the surface, the remaining being finished
according to the nature of the surface with plaster or lime punning.
2. Where owing to irregular crossing or other reasons the plugging of the
walls or ceiling with wood plugs presents difficulties, the wood casing,
wood batten, metal conduit, or cleat (as the case may be) shall be attached
to the wall or ceiling in an approved manner. IN the case of new building,
wherever possible, teak wood plugs shall be fixed in the walls before they
are plastered.
3. To achieve neatness, plugging of walls or ceiling may be done by an
approved type of asbestos, metallic or a fiber fixing plug.
5. Branch Switches:
Where the supply is derived from a three-wire or four-wire source, and
distribution is done on the two wire system, all branch switches shall be
placed in the outer or live conductor of the circuit and no single-phase
switch or fuse shall be inserted in the middle wire, earth or earthed neutral
conductor of the circuit. Single-pole switches (Other than for multiple
control) Carrying not more than 15 amperes may be of tumbler type which
shall be 'ON' when the handle known is down.
13. Fittings:
Where conductors are required to be threaded through tubes or channels
formed in the metal work of fittings these must be free from sharp angles
or projecting edges and such size that will enable them to be wired with the
conductors used for the final sub Circuits without removing the boarding,
taping or outer covering. As far as possible, all tubes and channels should
be of sufficient size to permit 'Looping back; of wires cables and flexible
cords other than those designed for high temperature shall not be used for
wiring fittings except for portable fittings. All fittings must have not less
than a half inch male nipple. Fittings and lamp holders for gas filled lamps
shall be adequately ventilated.

14. Where light fitting is supported by one or more flexible cords, the
maximum weight to which the twin flexible cords may be subjected shall
be as follows:
Max.
Nominal cross No. &Dia in Permissible
sectional mm of wires weight
Area cord
295
 mm2 Kg.
0.5 16/0.2 1.7
0.75 24/0.2 2.6
1.0 32/0.2 3.5
2.5 48/0.2 5.3
3.5 80/0.2 8.8
4 128/0.2 14.0
18.2 NO inflammable shade shall form a part of light fitting unless such shade
is well protected against all risks o1 fire. Celluloid shade or light fitting
shall not be used under any circumstances.
18.3 Fitting of Wire:
The use of fitting wire shall be restricted to the internal wiring and the
lighting fittings. Where fitting wire is used for wiring, for the sub-circuit
loads shall be terminated in a ceiling zone or connector from which they
shall be carried into the fittings.
19.0 Lamp Holders:
Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall be in accordance with
*IS: 1258-1967, specification for Bayonet lamp holders and all those for
use flexible pendants shall be provided with cord grips. All lamp holders
shall be provided with shade carriers. Where centre contact Edison screw
lamp holders are used, the outer or screw contacts shall be connected to the
middle wire, the neutral, and the earthed conductor of the circuit.
20.0 Outdoor Lamps:
External and road lamps shall have weather proof fittings of approved
design so as to effectively prevent the admission of moisture. An insulating
distance piece of moisture proof materials shall be inserted in the fittings.
Flexible cord and cord grip lamp holders shall not be used where exposed
to whether. In verandahs and similar exposed situations where pendants are
used, they shall be of fixed rod type.
21.0 Lamps:
All incandescent lamps, unless otherwise required and suitably protected,
shall be hung at a height of not less than 2.5 m above the floor level. They
shall be in accordance with IS : 418 : 1957 specification for Tongster
Filament General Service electric lamp:
22.0 Fans, Regulators and Clamps:
22.1.0 Ceiling fans:
Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to *IS 374- 1960
specification for electric ceiling fans and regulators (Revised) & to the
following requirements:
(a) All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special
connector boxes, to which fans rod wires shall be connected and
suspended from hooks or shackles with insulators between hooks
and suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension rod,
296
 but if joints be avoidable then such joints shall be screwed to special
couplers of 5 cm minimum length and both ends of pipes shall touch
together within couplers, and shall in addition be secured by means
of split pins; alternatively, the two pipes may be welded.
(b) Fans clamps shall be of suitable design according to the nature of
construction of ceiling on which these clamps are fitted. In all cases
fan clamps shall be fabricated from tested new metal of suitable
sizes and they shall be as close fitting as possible. Fan clamps for
reinforced concrete roots shall be buried with the casting and due
care shall be taken that they shall serve the purpose. Fan clamps for
wood beams shall be of suitable flat iron fixed on two sides of the
beam and according to the size and section of the beam one or two
mild steel bolts passing through the beam shall hold both flat irons
together. Fan clamps for steel joint shall be fabricated from tested
flat iron to fit in rigidly to the bottom flange of the beam. Care shall
be taken during fabrication that the metal does not crack while
hammering to shape. Other fan clamps shall be made to suit the
position, but in all cases care shall be taken to see that they are rigid
and safe.
Note: All fan clamps shall be .so fabricated that fans revolve steadily.
(c) Canopies on top and bottom of suspension rod shall effectively hide
suspensions and connections to fan motors, respectively.
(d) The lead-in-wire shall be of nominal cross-sectional area not less
than 1.0 mm2 with copper and 1.5 mm2 with aluminium and shall
be protected from abrasion.
(e) Unless otherwise specified, the clear distance between the ceiling
fan and the floor shall not be less than 2.75 m.
22.2.0 Exhaust Fans:
For fixing of an exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be provided in the wall to
suit the size of the frame which shall be fixed by means of rag-bolts
embedded in the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered with cement and
brought to the original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected
to exhaust fan point which shall be wired as near to the hole as possible by
means of a flexible, cord, care being taken that the blades rotate in the
proper direction.
23.0 Attachment of fittings and accessories:
23.1 In other than conduit wiring, all ceiling crosses, brackets, pendants and
accessories attached to walls or ceilings shall be mounted on substantial
teak wood blocks twice varnished after all fixing holes are made in them.
Blocks shall be not less than 4 cms. deep, Brass screws only shall be used
for attaching fittings and accessories to their base blocks.
24.0 Interchangeability:
Similar part of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse- boards ceiling
297
 roses, brackets, pendants, fans and all other fittings of the same type shall
be inter-chargeable in each installation.
25.0 Conduit Wiring System:
25.1.1 Type and size of conduit - All conduit pipes shall be conforming to *IS :
1653-1964, furnished with galvanised or stove enamelled surface. All
conduit accessories shall be of threaded type and under no circumstances
pin grip type or clamp type accessories be used. No steel conduit less than.
16 mm in diameter shall be used. The number of insulated conductors that
can be drawn into rigid steel conduit are given in Table II.
25.1.2. Bunching of cables - Unless otherwise specified, insulated
conductors of AC supply and DC supply shall be bunched in separate
conduits.
25.1.3 Conduit-joints-Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of screwed couplers
and screwed accessories only (*IS : 2667-1964).
Specification for Fittings for Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring) In
long distance strance straight runs of conduit, inspection type couplers at
reasonable intervals shall be provided or running threads with couplers and
jam-puts (in the latter case the bare threaded portion shall be treated with
anti-corrosive preservative) shall be provided. Thread on conduit pipes in
all cases shall be between 11 mm to 27 mm long sufficient to
accommodate pipes to full threaded portion of coulers or accessories. Cut
ends of conduit pipes shall have no sharp edges nor any buries left to avoid
damage to the insulation of conductors while puling them through such
pipes;
TABLE-II MAXIMUM PPERMISSIBLE NUMBER OF 250-VGRADE
SINGLE CORE CABLES THAT CAN BE DRAWNRIGID STEEL CONDUIT

(CLAUSE 6.5.1.1)
Size of Size of
cable Conduit (mm)
Number 2 5 6
Nominal and 16 : 20 : 5 : 32 : 40 : 0 : 3 :
Diamete (No. of Cable
Crossecti r in MM : : Max) : : :
onal OF
area. WIRE : : : : : : :

S B S B S B S B S B S B S B
1
1.0 1/1.12 5 4 7 5 3 10 20 14 - - - - - -
1
1.5 1/1.40 4 3 7 5 2 10 20 14 - - - - - -

298
 1
2.5 1/1.80 3 2 6 5 0 8 18 12 - - - - - -
4 ) 1/1.24 3 2 4 3 7 6 12 10 - - - - - -
(3/1.06*
)
(7/0.85)
6 ) 1/2.80 2 - 3 2 6 5 10 8
7/1.06*)
10 ) 1/3.55+ - - 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
) 7/1.40* - - 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 ) 7/1.70 - - - - 2 - 4 3 7 6 - - - -
25 ) 7/2.24 - - - - - - 2 - 4 3 7 6 9 7
35 ) 7/2.50 - - - - - - - - 2 - 5 4 6 5
50 ) 7/3.00+ - - - - - - - - 2 - 5 4 6 5
* For Cu. Conductors
only. +For Al.
Conductors only.
Note : 1 The cable shows the maximum capacity of conduits for the simultaneous
drawing-in of cables. The tableapplies to 250 volts grade cable. The
columns headed 'S' apply-to runs of conduit which have distance not
exceeding M between d/aw in boxes, and which do not deflect from the
straight by angle of more than 15°. The co lumns headed 'B' apply to runs
of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15°.
Note : 2 In case of inspection type draw-in box has been provided and if the
cables is first drawn through one straightconduit, then through the drawn
box, and then through the second straight conduit, such systems may be
considered as that of a straight conduit even if the conduit deflects
through the straight by more than 15°.
25.1.4 Protection against dampness – In order to minimize condensation or
seating inside the tube, all outlets ofconduit system shall be properly
drained and ventilated, but in such a manner as to prevent the entry of
insects as far as possible.
25.1.5 Protection of conduit against rust – The outer surface of the conduit
pipes, including all bends, unions, teesjunction boxes, etc., forming part
of the conduit system shall be adequately protected against rust
particularly when such system is exposed to weather. In all cases, no bare
threaded portion of conduit pipe shall be allowed unless such bare
threaded portion is treated with anti-corrosive preservative or covered
with approved plastic compound.
25.1.6 Fixing of conduit – Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles,
secured to suitable wood plugs orany other approved plug with screws in
299
 an approved manner at an interval of not more than one meter but on
either side of couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed
at a distance of 30 cm. from the centre of such fittings.

25.1.7 Bends in conduit – All necessary bends in the system including diversion
shall be done by bending pipes, orby insuring suitable solid or inspection
type normal bends, elbows or similar fittings; or by fixing cast iron
inspection boxes whichever is more suitable. Conduit fitting shall be
avoided as far as possible. On conduit system exposed to weather, where
necessary, solid type fitting shall be used. Radius of such bends in
conduit pipes shall be not less than 7.5 cm. No length of conduit shall
have more than the equivalent of four quarter bends from outlet, the
bends at the outlets not being counted.

25.1.8 Outlets – All outlets for fitting switches etc. shall be boxes, of suitable
metal or any other approved outletboxes for other surface mounting or
flush mounting system.

25.1.9 Conductors – All conductors used in conduits wirings shall preferably be

stranded. No single - core cable ornominal Cross-sectional area greater
than 130 mm2 shall be enclosed in a conduit and used for alternating
current.
25.1.10 Erection and earthing of conduit – The conduit of each circuit or
section shall be completed beforeconductors are drawn in. The entire
system of conduit after erection shall be tested for mechanical and
electrtoal continuity throughout and permanently connected to earth
conforming to the requirements specified under 7 by means of special
approved type earthing clamp efficiently fastened to conduit pipe in a
workmanlike manner for a perfect continuity between each wire and
conduit. Gas or water pipes shall not be used as earth medium. If conduit
pipes are liable to mechanical damage, they shall be adequately
protected.

25.2 Recessed Conduit wiring system with Rigid Steel conduits – Recessed
conduit wiring system shall complywith all the requirements for surface
conduit wiring system specified in 6.5.1.1. to 6.5.1.10 and in addition,
conform to the requirements specified in 6.5.2.1. to 6.5.2.4

25.2.1 Making of chase – The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and be of
ample dimensions to permit theconduit to be fixed in the manner desired.
In the case of buildings under construction, chases shall be provided in
the wall, ceiling etc., at the time of their construction and shall be filled
up neatly after erection of conduit and brought to the original finish of the
wall.

300
25.2.2 Fixing of conduit in chase – The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of
staples or by means of saddles notmore than 60 cm. apart. Fixing of
standard bends or elbows shall be avoided as far as practicable and all
curves maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with a lounge radius
which will permit easy drawing-in of conductors. All threaded joints of
rigid steel conduit shall be treated with some approved preservative
compound to secure protection against rust.

25.2.3 Inspection boxes – Suitable inspection boxes shall be provided to permit

periodical inspection and to facilitateremoval of wires, if necessary.
These shall be mounted flush with the wall. Suitable ventilating holes
shall be provided in the inspection box covers.
25.2.4 Types of accessories to be used – All outlets such as switches and wall
sockets, may be either of flushmounting type or surface mounting type.
(a) Flush mounting type – All flush mounting outlets shall be of cast
iron or mild steel boxes with a coverof approved insulating material
or shall be a box made of a suitable insulating material. The switches
and
other outlets shall be mounted on such boxes as would be approved.
The, metal box shall be efficiently earthed with conduit by an
approved means of earth attachment.
(b) Surface mounting type – If surface mounting type outlet box is
specified, it shall be of any approvedinsulating material and outlet
mounted in an approved manner.
25.2.5 When crossing through expansion joints in buildings, the conduit sections
across the joint may be through flexible conduits of the same size as the
rigid conduit.
25.3 Conduit Wiring System with Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits:
Rigid Non-Metallic conduits are used for surface, recessed and concealed
conduit wiring.
25.3.1 Type and size – All non-metallic conduits used shall conform to IS : 2509-
1963 The conduit may be eitherthreaded type or plain type as specified in
IS : 2509-1913* and shall be used with the corresponding accessories
(See IS : 3419-1965) specification for Fittings for Rigid Non-Metallic
Conduits).
25.3.2 Bunching off cables – Conductors of AC supply and DC supply shall be
bunched in separate conduits. Thenumber of insulated cables that may be
drawn into the conduits are given in Table III. IN this table the space
factor does not exceed 40 percent.

TABLE-MII MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE NUMBER OF 250 VOLTS

301
GRADE SINGLE- CORE CABLE THAT CAN BE DRAWN RIGID STEEL
CONDUIT
(clause 6.5.1.1)
Size of
conduit
Size of cable (mm)
Nomina No. Diameter
l in 16 20 25 32 40 50
Crossectional (No. of cable
area. mm of wires max)
2
mm
1.0 1/1.12* 5 7 13 20 - -
1.5 1/1.40 4 6 10 14 - -
2.5 1/1.80 3 5 10 14 - -
3/1.06*
4 1/1.24 2 3 6 10 14 -
7/0.85*
6 1/2.80 - 2 5 8 11 -
7/1.06*
10 1/3.55+ - - 4 7 9 -
7/1.40*
16 7/1.70 - - 2 4 5 15
25 7/2.24 - - - 2 2 6
35 7/2.50 - - - - 2 5
50 7/3.00+ - - - - 2 3
19/1.80
*For copper conductors only.
+For aluminium conductors
only.

25.3.3 Conduit joints - shall be joined by means of screwed or plain couplers

depending on whether the conduits arescrewed or plain. Where there are
long runs of straight conduit. Inspection type couplers shall be provided
at intervals. For conduit fittings and accessories reference may be made
to IS : 3419-1965.
25.3.4 Fixing of conduits – The provision of 25.1.6 shall apply except that the
spacing between saddles or supportsis recommended to be 60 cms for
rigid non-metallic conduits.
25.3.5 Bends in conduit – Wherever necessary, bends or diversions may be
achieved by bending the conduits (See6.5.3.9) or by employing normal
bends, inspection bends, inspection boxes, elbows or similar fittings.

25.3.6 Conduit fittings shall be avoided, as far as possible on outdoor system.

302
25.3.7 Outlets – All the outlets for fittings, switches, etc. shall be boxes of
substantial construction. In order to minisecondensation or sweting inside
the conduit, all outlets of conduit system shall be properly drained and
ventilated, but in such a manner as to prevent the entry of insects, etc. as
far as possible.

25.3.8 For use with recessed conduit wiring system the provisions of 6.5.2.1 to
6.5.2.4 shall apply.
25.3.9 Heat may be used to soften conduit for bending and forming joints in case
of plaint conduits. As the material soften when heated, fitting of conduit
in close proximity to hot surfaces should be avoided. Caution should be
exercised in the use of the conduit in locations where the ambient
temperature is 50°C or above. Use o f such conduits in place where
ambient temperature is 60°C or above is prohibited.

PVC INSULATED AND P.V.C. SHEATHED OR T.R.S. WIRING SYSTEM

26.0 GENERAL
This system of wiring, is suitable for low pressure installation, and shall
not be used in places exposed to sun and rain nor in damp places,
provided they are sheathed in the special approved protective covering
and well protected to withstand dampness.
26.1 Attachment to walls and ceiling:
26.1.1 All cables on brick walls, stone or plastered walls and ceiling shall be run
on well seasoned, perfectly straight and well varnished on four sides, teak
wood or any approved hardwood battens not less than 10 mm finished
thick, width of which shall be such as to suit total width of cables laid on
the batten, prior to election, these shall be painted with one coat of
varnish or approved paint of colour to match with surrounding. These
battens shall be secured to wall and ceilings by flat head wood screws to
raws plug or phill plug at an interval not exceeding 75 cm. Wood plug
can be used only with special approval of the En-gineer-in-charge. The
flat head wood screws shall be counter within wood batten and smoothed
down with file.
26.1.2 Where wiring in to be carried out along the face of the rolled steel joints, a
wooden batten of adequate width shall first be laid on the same and
dipped to it as inconspicously as possible. The wiring should then be
fixed to this backing in the ordinary way. Where wiring passes through
structural steel work, the holes shall be suitably bushed to prevent the
abrasion of the cables.
26.1.3 Attachment to false ceiling: In no case, the open wiring shall be run above
the false ceiling without the approval of Engineer-in-charge.
26.20 Link dips: Only aluminium alloy clips/joint clips shall be used. The
thickness shall be 0.32 mm (30 SWG) forlengths of 25 mm to 40- mm
and 40 mm (28 SWG) for lengths of 50 mm to 80 mm. The width shall
not be less than 8 mm in all these cases. Link clips/joint clips shall be so
303
 arranged that one single clip shall not hold more than two core or three
single core TR3 of PVC insulated and PVC sheathed uppto 2.5 sq. mm
above while a single clp shall hold a single twin core or two single core
cables. The clips shall be fixed on varnished wood batten switch iron pins
and space at interval of 15 cm both in the case of horizontal and vertical
runs.
26.3.0 Bends in wiring: The wiring shall not in any circumstance? x bent so as
to form an abrupt right angle but mustbe rounded off at the comers to a
radius not less than six times the overall diameter of the cable.
26.4.0 Protection of wiring from Mechanical Damage:
26.4.1 In cases where there are chances of any damage to wiring, such wiring
shall be drawn complying with all the requirements of conduit wiring
system.
26.4.2 Such protective covering shall in all cases be fitted on all down drops
within 1.5 m from the floor, or from floor level upto the switch board
whichever is less.
26.5.0 Passing through floors: All cables taken through floor shall be enclosed
in heavy gauge steel conduitextending 1.5 m above the floor or upto the
switch board whichever is less and flush with the ceiling below or by
means of any approved type of metallic covering. The ends of all
conduits or pipes shall be neatly bushed with porcelain wood or other
approved material. The conduit pipes, shall be securely earthed.
26.6.0 Passing through walls: When conductors pass through walls, any one of
the following methods shall beemployed. Care should be taken to see that
wires pass very freely through protective pipe or box and that wires pass
through in a straight line without any twist or cross in wires on either
ends of such holes.
(a) A box of teak wood or approved hard wood extending through the
hole thickness of the wall shall be buried in the wall and casings or
conductors and casing or conductors shall be carried so as to allow
1.3 cm air space on the three sides of the casing or conductor.
(b) The conductors shall be carried in an approved heavy gauge solid
drawn or lap weld conduit or in a porcelain tube of such a size that it
permits easy drawing in, the ends of conduit shall be neatly bushed
with porcelain, wood or other approved material.
26.6.1 Where a wall tube passes outside a building so as to be exposed to weather,
the outer end shall be bell mouthed and turned downwards and properly
bushed on the open end. The conduit shall be neatly arranged so that the
cables enter them without bending.
26.7.0 Buried cables: The TRS or PVC sheathed cable shall not normally be
buried directly in plaster. Where sospecified in the special specification
they may be taken in teak wood channeling of ample capacity or conduit
pipe buried in the wall.
304
26.8.0 Stripping of outer covering. While cutting and stripping of the outer
covering of the cable, care shall be takenthat the sharp edge of the cutting
instrument does not touch the inner insulation of the conductors. The
protective outer covering of the cables shall be stripped off near
connecting terminal and this protective covering shall be maintained upto
the close proximity of connecting terminals as far as practicable. Care
shall be taken to avoid hammering on link clips with any metal
instrument after the cables are laid. Where junction boxes are provided
they shall be made moisture proof with a plastic compound.
27.0 PAINTING WORK IN GENERAL:
27.1 Paints: Paints, oils, varnishes, etc. of approved make in original to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-chargeshall, only be used.
27.2 Preparation of surface: The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and
dusted before painting is started. Theproposed surface shall be inspected
by Engineer-in-charge or his authorized agent and shall have received the
approval before painting is commenced.

27.3 Application: Paint s hall be applied with brush. The paint shall be spread
as smooth & even as possible.Particular care shall be paid to rivets, nuts,
bolts and cover lapping. Before drawing cut, it shall be continuously
stirred in the smaller containers with a smooth stick while it is being
applied.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry out sufficiently before a subsequent
coat is applied.
27.4 Scope: Painting on old surface in indoor situations will not include primer
coat except where speciallymentioned in the schedule of work or special
specification. However, where rust has formed on iron and steel surfaces
the spots will be painted with one anti-rust primer coat.
27.5 Precautions: All furniture fixtures, glazing floors, etc. shall be protected
by covering. All stains, smears,splashing, dropping of every kind shall be
removed. While painting of wiring etc. it shall be ensured that painting of
wall and ceiling etc. is not spoiled in any way.
27.6 Painting of conduit and accessories: After installation, all accessible
surface of conduit pipes, fittings switchand regulator boxes, etc. shall be
painted with two coats of approved enamel paint or aluminium paint as
required to match the finish ' surrounding wall, trusser, etc.
28. Link clip:
The clip for batten wiring shall be of Aluminium conforming to I.S.
specification No. 2415-1975.

305
Detailed Techincal Specification for Electrification Works.

Item No.38 to 48-

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORK

1.0 INTERNAL WIRING

This section covers, definition of point wiring, system of wiring and supply,
installation, connection, testing and commissioning of point wiring for light
points, ceiling fan points, exhaust fan points, convenience socket outlet points,
power socket outlet points etc. including fixing of light fixtures, ceiling fan,
exhaust fan, wall fan etc.

1.1 STANDARDS

The following standards and rules shall be applicable:

STANDARD PARTICULAR
IS : 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (System
voltage not exceeding 650 V)
IS : 1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General)
Electrical installation.
IS : 2509 Rigid non-metallic conduits for electrical wiring.
IS : 6946 Flexible (Pliable) non-metallic conduits for electrical
installation.
IS : 1293 3 pin plugs and sockets.
IS : 8130 Specifications of conduits for electrical installation.
IS : 3854 Switches for domestic purpose.
IS : 3415 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits.
IS : 4648 Guide for electrical layout in building Indian electricity act
and rules.
All standards and codes mean the latest.

1.2 POINT WIRING

A point shall consist of the branch wiring from the distribution board together
with a switch as required, including the ceiling rose or pendant holder or swan
holder, or ceiling fan box or socket or suitable termination. A point shall
include, in addition, the earth continuity conductor / wire from the distribution
board to the earth pin / stud of the outlet / switch box and to the outlet points.
The point wiring shall be carried out in the under mentioned manner:
Supply, installation, fixing of conduits with necessary accessories, junction /
pull / inspection / switch boxes and outlet boxes.
Supplying and drawing of wires of required size including earth continuity
306
 wire.
Supply, installation and connection of flush type switches, sockets, cover
plates, switch plates, etc.
The point shall be complete with the branch wiring from the Switch board to
the outlet point, Pre laid conduit with accessories, junction, pull, inspection
boxes, control switch, socket, outlet boxes, ceiling roses, button / swan holder,
connector etc.

1.3 POINT
The point shall include supply, installation, connection, testing and
commissioning of point as described under “point wiring”.
The point shall consist of wiring from the outlet point to the switch board as
required with a connector/ plate/ ceiling rose fan box with hook socket with
switch. The point shall include in addition to phase and neutral wire a PVC
insulated earth continuity wire from switch to outlet. The point shall consist of
the circuit wiring form LDB to outlet point through switch and/or socket,
switch board as required and including the outlet points with connector, fan
hook box or sockets. A point shall include in addition to phase and neutral wire
a PVC insulated Earth continuity wire from LDB to the final termination at
outlet points.

1.4 SYSTEM OF WIRING

The system of wiring shall consist of single core, PVC insulated, 650/1100 volt
grade, copper conductor FRLS wires laid through concealed PVC conduits as
directed.

1.5 GENERAL

The contractor shall submit for approval, the drawing of conduit layout
indicating the route of the conduits, number and size of the conduits, location
of junction / inspection / pull / outlet boxes, size and location of switch boxes,
number and size of wires pulled through each conduit and all other necessary
relevant details prior to laying of conduits. Only after the drawings are
approved, the contractor shall proceed the work of conduit laying.
Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the contractor shall carefully examine
the working drawings prepared by him and approved by the Consultant
indicating the layout, satisfy himself about the sufficiency of number and sizes
of conduits, location of junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes
and other relevant details. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be
brought to the notice of the Owner’s site representative. Any modifications
suggested by the contractor shall be gotten approved before the actual laying of
conduits is commenced.
In laying of conduits it is important that not more than two right angle bends
are provided for each circuit and as far as possible. No junction box shall be
307
 provided in the entire length of conduit run for drawing of wires. Only switch
outlets, lighting fixture outlets, equipment power outlets and socket outlets
shall be considered for drawing of wires.

1.6 MATERIAL
1.6.1 PVC MEDIUM DUTY CONDUITS:
All non-metallic PVC conduits shall conform to IS: 9537. The conduit shall be
plan and type as specified in IS: 9537 and shall be used with the corresponding
accessories (Refer IS: 3419 specification for fittings for rigid non PVC metallic
conduits). PVC conduits shall be rigid unplasticized, medium gauge having 1.6
– 1.8 mm. wall thickness up to 20 mm. diameter conduit and 1.8 - 2 mm. wall
thickness for all sizes above 20 mm. diameter.
1.6.2 BOXES:
All the boxes for switches, sockets and other receptacles, junction boxes, pull
boxes and outlet boxes shall be provided. Separate screwed earth terminal shall
be provided in the box for earthing purpose. All boxes shall have adequate no.
of knock out holes of required diameter for conduit entry. Switch boxes to
receive switches, socket outlets, power outlets, telephone outlets, fan
regulators, etc. shall be fabricated to the approved shape and size to
accommodate all the devices without overcrowding. Outlet boxes to receive
ceiling fan shall be fitted with adequately sized rod / hook to fix ceiling fan.
The boxes shall be of minimum depth of 65 mm.

1.6.3 COVER PLATE:

The cover of the boxes to receive outlet points shall be provided.

1.6.4 CABLES & WIRES:

The cables shall conform to IS: 694. For all internal wiring FRLS wires of 650
/ 1100 volts grade, single core shall be used.
The conductors shall be plain annealed copper conductors complying with IS:
1554.
The conductors shall be circular copper conductor.
The insulation shall be PVC complying with the requirements of IS: 694. It
shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form a compact homogenous
body.
The thickness of PVC insulation shall be as set out in the relevant standards
The cores of all cables shall be identified by colours in accordance with the
following sequence.

Single phase - Red

Three phase - Red, Yellow, Blue
Neutral -Black
Earth -Green or Green/Yellow

Means of identifying the manufacturer shall be provided throughout the length

308
of cable.
Unless otherwise specified in the drawings the size of the cables used for
internal wiring shall be as follows:
In case of circuit wiring for lights, exhaust fans, convenience socket outlet
points (P+N+E):3 nos. of 1.5 mm.² - From switch board to outlet points
Wiring System For Point/Independent Plug wiring above 10 mtr of Length,
additional lengthwill be added at rate of mains. For point wiring in bathroom,
washbasin and W/C area in quarters reduce overall rate by 50% of point
wiring for light.

Wiring shall be done only by the looping system. Phase/live conductors shall
be looped at the switch box. For point wiring, neutral wire/earth wire looping
for the 1st point shall be done in the switch box; and neutral/earth looping of
subsequent points will be made from point outlets.
In wiring, no joints in wiring will be permitted anywhere, except in switch box
or point outlets, where jointing of wires will be allowed with use of suitable
connector
The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in the
neutral wire except in the form of linked switchgear. Light, fans and call bells
shall be wired in the ‘lighting’ circuits. 15A/16A socket outlets and other
power outlets shall be wired in the ‘power’ circuits. 5A/6A socket outlets shall
also be wired in the ‘power’ circuit both in as well as non‐ buildings. Separate
Live, Neutral, Earth wire run from DB and it is not count as mains.

Capacity of Circuit
Power circuit in non‐ building will have only one outlet per circuit.

Load more than 1 KW shall be controlled by suitably rated MCB and cable
size shall be decided as per calculations.

1.6.5 SWITCHES:
Switches shall conform to IS: 3854, IS: 1293 and IS: 4615. The switches shall
be single pole, single or two way and shown on the drawings or as specified.
They shall be of Modular type rated for 250 volt, and of full 5 / 15 A capacity.
They shall be provided with insulated dollies and covers.
The switches shall be rocker operated with a quite operating mechanism with
bounce free snap action mechanism enclosed in an arc resistant chamber. The
switches shall have pure silver and silver cadmium contacts. The switches shall
be flush modular type the make of the switches shall be as indicated in the
drawings or BOQ or make of material or as suggested and approved by the
PMC / Consultant / client. The switches installed in outdoor area shall be
industrial, metal clad type, and shall be provided in weather proof enclosures,
complete with weather proof gasket covers.
1.6.6 SOCKETS:

309
 The sockets shall conform to IS: 1293. Each socket shall be provided with
control switch of appropriate rating. The sockets shall be Modular type, rated
for 250 volts, and either of full 5 A or 15 A capacity, as mentioned on the
drawings.
Sockets shall be of five or six pin type, the top pin is being connected to earth
continuity conductor. The socket shall be flush modular type. The sockets
installed in machine room, plant room or wet / damp area shall be metal clad
weather proof type. The finishing and make of all the sockets shall be same as
light switch. The socket shall have fully sprung contacts and solid brass
shrouded terminals to ensure positive electrical connections.
The sockets shall be provided with automatic shutters, which opens only when
earth pit of the plug inserts in the socket.
The socket shall be provided with three pin plug top suitable to the socket and
of the same make as socket.
1.7 DRAWING OF CONDUCTORS
The drawing and joining of copper conductor or wires shall be executed with
due regard to the following precautions, while drawing insulated wires into the
conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks which may cause
breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends.
Insulation shall be shaved off for a length of 15 mm at the end of wire like
sharpening of a pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it square or
ringing.
PVC insulated copper conductor wire ends before connection shall be properly
soldered (at least 15 mm length) with soldering flux / copper solder, for copper
conductor. Strands of wires shall not be cut for connecting to the terminals. The
connecting brass-screws shall have flat ends. All looped joints shall be soldered
and connected through terminals block / connectors. The pressure applied to
tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, neither too much nor too less.
Conductors having nominal cross section are exceeding 4 sq. mm shall always
be provided with crimping type cable sockets. At all bolted terminals, brass flat
washer of large area and approved steel spring washers shall be used. Brass
nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.
Only certified wire man and cable jointers shall be employed to do joining
work.
For all internal wiring PVC insulated wires of 650 / 1100 volts grade shall be
used. The sub-circuit wiring for point shall be carried out in looping system
and no joint shall be allowed in the length of the conductors. No wire shall be
drawn in to any conduit, until all work of any nature that may cause injury to
wire is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that no damage
occurs to the insulation of the wire. Before the wires are drawn into the
conduits the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, and dirt or
any other obstruction by forcing compressed air through the conduits.
Maximum permissible number of 1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that
may be drawn into rigid non metallic or PVC Conduits are given below:

310
 Size of wires Nominal CrossMaximum number of wires within conduit size
(mm)
section Area (Sq. mm.) 20 25 32 40 50
1.5 5 10 14 -- --
2.5 5 8 12 -- --
4 3 7 10 -- --
6 2 5 8 -- --
10 -- 3 5 6 --
16 -- 2 3 -- 6
25 -- -- 2 4 6
35 -- -- -- 3 5

1.8 JOINTS
The wiring shall be by looping back system, and hence all joints shall be made
at main switches, distribution boards, socket outlets, lighting outlets and switch
boxes only. No joints shall be made inside conduits and junction boxes. Joints
where unavoidable, due to any specified reasons, prior permission in writing
shall be obtained from the client before making such connections. Joints by
twisting conductors are prohibited.
No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase, neutral,
and/or protective conductors in wiring shall be permitted.
There shall be no joints in the through‐runs of cables. If the length of final
circuit or sub main is more than the length of a standard coil, thus necessitating
a through joint, such joints shall be made by means of approved mechanical
connectors in suitable junction boxes. Termination of multistranded conductors
shall be done using suitable crimping type thimbles.
1.9 LOAD BALANCING
Balancing of circuit in three phase installation shall be planned before the
commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.
1.10 EARTHING
All earthing systems shall be in accordance with IS: 3043 - 1985 code of
practice for earthing.
1.11 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
Before a completed installation is put into service, the following tests shall be
complied with.
1.11.1 INSULATION RESISTANCE
The insulation resistance shall be measured by applying 500 volt megger with
all fuses in places, circuit breaker and all switches closed.
The insulation resistance in giga ohms of an installation, measured shall not be
less than 50 mega ohms divided by the number of points on the circuit.
The insulation resistance shall be measured between
EARTH TO PHASE
EARTH TO NEUTRAL
311
 PHASE TO NEURAL
PHASE TO PHASE
1.11.2 EARTH CONTINUITY PATH:
The earth continuity conductors shall be tested for electrical continuity and the
electrical resistance of the same along with the earthing lead but excluding any
added resistance or earth leakage circuit-breaker, measured from the
connection, with the earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity
conductor in the completed installation and shall n4ot exceed one ohm.
1.11.3 POLARITY OF SINGLE POLE SWITCHES:
A test shall be made to verify that every no-linked, single pole switch is
connected to one of the phase of the supply system.
1.11.4 COMPLETION CERTIFICATES:
All the above tests shall be carried out in presence of client and the results shall
be recorded in a prescribed forms. Any default during the testing shall be
immediately rectified and that section of the installation shall be re tested. The
completed test result from shall be submitted to the client for approval.
On completion of an electric installation a certificate shall be furnished by the
contractor, countersigned by the certified supervisor under whose direct
supervision the installation was carried out. This certificate shall be in a
prescribed form as required by the local electric supply authority.
1.12 Telephone Wiring
Telephone wiring is to be provided for each quarter. Such telephone wiring to
be brought to a tag‐block at a suitable point in ground floor. Provisions shall be
kept for suitable entry‐pipe for laying incoming telephone cable.
1.13 TV Cabling
Internal TV cabling shall be provided, with one outlet up to quarters. Similarly,
from suitable point at Terrace floor, TV cabling shall be provided. With use of
suitable splitters, such TV cabling to be connected to each quarter.
1.14 External Pipe Network for Laying Telephone and TV Cabling for the Colony
Starting from a suitable room, pipe network may be provided to lay
telephones/TV cables for the colony. Suitable road cross pipe and manholes to
be provided for drawing such cables and their maintenance
2.0 LT Switchgear, Distribution Boards & LT Panel
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (DB’s)
Distribution Boards (DB’s) shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase/single
phase, 415/240 volts, 50 cycles, neutral grounded at transformer. The DB shall
be minimum di-electric strength of 2.5 KV / Sec. All Distribution Boards shall
manufactured by a manufacturer listed in Appendix-I.
DB’s shall comply with the latest Relevant Indian Standards and Electricity
Rules and Regulations and shall be as per IS-13947-1993.
2.1 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
DB’s shall be IP 43& made out of 1.6 mm or 16 Gauge thick high quality
CRCA sheet steel and shall be pre-treated and powder coated sheet steel used
in the construction of DB shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a
rigid support for all component. DB shall be suitable for indoor / outdoor
312
 installation, wall mounting free standing type, in double door construction.
The Distribution Boards shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin
proof and shall be with hinged doors, Neoprene gasket, padlocking
arrangement. All removable/ hinged doors and covers shall be grounded by 4.0
sq mm tinned stranded copper connectors. Distribution Boards shall be suitable
for the climatic conditions. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam
welded, all welding, slag shall be rounded off and welding pits wiped smooth
with plumber metal. The general construction shall confirm to IS-8623-1977
(Part-1) for factory built assembled switchgear & control gear for voltage up to
and including 1100 V AC.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and
holes in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes
tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with wing nuts. Self
threading screws shall not be used in the construction of DBs.
Three phase boards shall have phase barriers and a wire channel on three sides.
Neutral bars shall be solid tinned copper insulated bars with tapped holes and
chase headed screws. For 3 phase DB’s, 3. Independent neutral insulated bars
shall be provided. All DB’s shall be internally pre-wired using copper insulated
PVC wires brought to a terminal strip of appropriate rating for outgoing
feeders.
Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the DB’s
in conformity with the location of cable/conduit connections. Detachable sheet
steel gland plates shall be provided at the top / bottom to make holes for
additional cable entry at site if required.
Distribution Boards shall comprises of the following:
A panel for mounting where appropriate incoming supply circuit breaker &
other auxiliaries for Control & distribution as required.
Installation accessories shall be part of the DB for fixing conductor and rails
for mounting MCB’s and RCCB’s etc. neutral bus bars & earthing bus bars
required in the circuit. All busbars in the FDB shall be insulated type.
Service cable /interconnection shall be part of the Distribution Boards.
The board shall be installed at a height such that the operating is within reach
of the normal human height i.e. 1.2 to 1.8 meters from finish floor level.
Degree of protection shall be IP-52 for indoor application, IP-54 for kitchen &
laundry and IP-55 for outdoor application.
All three phase distribution boards shall have 4 rows and single phase
distribution boards shall have single rows for housing of MCB’s and RCCB’s
unless noted otherwise.
Phase segregation to be maintained in all three phase distribution boards.
Earthing shall be provided in each FDB’s.
2.1MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) & MCCB MCB
Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with IS-8828-1996/IEC898-1995.
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type for 240/415 VAC
50 Hz application with magnetic thermal release for over current and short circuit
protection. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10 KA at 415 VAC. MCBs
313
 shall be DIN mounted. The MCB shall be Current Limiting type (Class-3). MCBs
shall be classified (B,C,D ref IS standard) as per their Tripping Characteristic
curves defined by the manufacturer. The MCB shall have the minimum power loss
(Watts) per pole defined as per the IS/IEC and the manufacturer shall publish the
values. MCB shall ensure complete electrical isolation & downstream circuit or
equipment when the MCB is switched OFF.
The housing shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The
terminals shall be protected against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection.
All DP, TP, TPN and 4 Pole miniature circuit breakers shall have a common trip
bar independent to the external operating handle.
MCB should be having an integrated label holder with dual side din rail locking
facility. Incoming & Outgoing should have facility for termination of Busbar &
Cable separately.
Cable termination facility should be up to 35 sq. mm.
MCCB
The MCCB shall be thermal magnetic having features of indication and
protection for overload, short circuit, earth fault. MCCB should be confirming
to IS 13947 or IEC-947.
Important Parameters
Sr No Parameters Data
1 Rated Operating Voltage 500 V
2 Rated Insulation Voltage 1000 V
3 Rated Impulse Withstand voltage 8 Kv
4 Rated ultimate short ckt breaking capacity @ 415V 35 kA
5 Rated Short time withstand current for 1sec 35kA
6 Rated Short time withstand current for 3 Seconds --
7 Rated short circuit making capacity @ 440V ac 105kA
8 Protection range for over load and short circuit from 40% to 100%
9 Utilization category B
10 Mechanical Life operations without Maintenance 4000
11 Mechanical Life operations with Maintenance 4000
Electrical Life operations @ 440V without
12 4000
maintenance
13 Number of poles 3 or 4 as applicable

The MCCB shall be with protections and having various setting range as below
with 2NO+2NC auxiliary contacts.
Protection Current Adjustment Time Adjustment
Overload ( Ir ) 0.4 – 1 times In Min. 5 Setting
Short circuit 1.5 – 10 times Ir Min. 4 Setting
Instantaneous 1.5 – 11 times In Fixed
Earth fault 0.2 – 1 times In Min. 4 Setting
Following constructional features are required:
314
 Trip free mechanism
Total segregation between power and front shield so as to guarantee maximum
operational safety.
Operating lever should indicate true position of contacts.
Provision for ROH with door interlock facility and pad lock facility. Adjustable
shaft for ROH.
2.3RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER CURRENT OPERATED
TYPE (RCCB)
I. System of Operation
Residual Current Circuit Breaker shall confirm to IEC 61008.RCCB shall work
on the principle of core balance transformer. The incoming shall pass through
the torroidal core transformer. As long as the currents in the phase and neutral
shall be the same, no electro motive force shall be generated in the secondary
winding of the transformer. In the event of a leakage to earth, an unbalance
shall be created which shall cause a current to be generated in the secondary
winding, this current shall be fed to a highly sensitive miniature relay, which
shall trip the circuit if the earth leakage current exceeds a predetermined
critical value. RCCB shall be current operated independent of the line voltage,
current sensitivity shall be of 30 / 100 mA at 240/415 volts AC and shall have a
minimum of 20,000 electrical operations.
It should provide full protection as envisaged by IE rules – 61-A, 71 – ee, 73 –
ee, 1985 and also rule 50 of IE rule1956.

II. Mechanical Operation

The moving contacts of the phases shall be mounted on a common bridge,
actuated by a rugged toggle mechanism. Hence, the closing /opening of all the
three phases shall occur simultaneously. This also shall ensure simultaneous
opening of all the contacts under tripping conditions.
III. Neutral Advance Feature
The neutral moving contact shall be so mounted on the common bridge that, at
the time of closing, the neutral shall make contact.First before the phases; and
at the time of opening, the neutral shall breaks last after allowing the phases to
open first. This is an important safety feature which is also required by
regulations.
MCB should be having an integrated label holder with dual side din rail
locking facility. Incoming & Outgoing should have facility for termination of
Busbar & Cable separately.
Cable termination facility should be up to 35 sq. mm.
IV. Testing Provision
A test device shall be incorporated to check the integrity of theearth leakage
detection system and the tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to
service, pressing the test knob shall trip the ELCB / RCCB and the operating
handle shall move to the "OFF" position.

2.4 EARTHING
315
 Earthing shall be provided as per IS: 3043-1987.
2.5 PAINTING
All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid,
cold rinsing, phosphating, passivaiting (seven tank processing) and then
painted with electrostatic paint (Powder coating). The shade of colour of panel
inside/outside shall be of Siemens gray paint shade no. RAL-7032 of IS Code
No.5.
2.6 LABELS
Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder.
Circuit diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the distribution
panels shall be pastedon inside of the panel door and covered with transparent
plastic sheet.
2.7 TESTING
Testing of panels shall be as per following codes:
IS: 8623 (Part -I) 1977 for factory built assemblies of switch gear for voltages
upto and including 1000 VAC.
IS: 13947: 1993 Degree of protection
2.8 WIRING
In wiring a distribution panel it shall be insured that total load of various
distribution panel and/or consuming devices is divided evenly between the
phases and number of ways as per Consultants drawing.
3.0 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
3.1 SCOPE
This section shall cover supply of medium voltage cables.
3.2 STANDARDS
The following standards and rules shall be applicable:
IS: 1554 PVC insulated electric cables (heavy duty).
IS: 1753 Aluminium conductors for insulated cables.
IS: 3961 Recommended current ratings for cables.
IS: 8130 Aluminium conductors for insulated cables
Indian Electricity Act and Rules.

3.3 MEASUREMENTS
The cables will be measured in meters. The unit rate shall include cutting the
cable into required lengths, packing, loading, unloading, insurance,
transportation, delivery to stores/site as per work order, stocking in stores,
testing of cables at stores etc. of medium voltage cable.
3.4 GENERAL
The medium voltage cables shall be supplied, laid, connected, tested and
commissioned in accordance with the drawings, specifications, relevant Indian
Standards specifications, manufacturer’s instructions. The cables shall be
delivered at site in original drums with manufacturer’s name, size, and type,
clearly written on the drums.

316
3.5 MATERIAL
The MV cables shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC
sheathed of 1100 volts grade aluminium or copper conductor, armoured and
unarmoured heavy duty, conforming to IS : 7098 Part I IS : 1988 Part I. as
asked for in the schedule of quantities.
3.5.1 All XLPE Aluminium/Copper Power cables shall be 1100 Volts grade, multi
core constructed as per IS: 7098 Part-I of 1988 as follows:
a) Stranded Aluminium /Copper conductor of high conductivity upto 4 mm.²
size, the conductor shall be solid and above 4 mm.², conductors shall be
concentrically stranded as per IEC: 228.
b) Cores laid up
c) The inner sheath should be bonded over with thermo-plastic material for
protection against mechanical and electrical damage.
d) Armoring should be provided over the inner sheath to guard agains
mechanical amage. Armouring should be Galvanised steel wires or galvanised
stee strips. (In single core cables used in A.C. system armouring should be non-
magnetic hard aluminium Wires/Strips. Round steel wires should be used
where diameter over the inner sheath does not exceed 13 mm; above 13 mm
flat steel armour should be used. Round wire of different sizes should be
provided against specific request.)
e) The outer sheath should be specially formulated heat resistant black PVC
compound conforming to the requirement of type ST2 of IS: 5831-1984
extruded to form the outer sheath.
3.5.2 Conductor shall be of electrolytic Aluminium/Copper conforming to IS: 8130
and are compact circular or compact shaped.
3.5.3 Insulation shall be of XLPE type as per latest IS general purpose insulation for
maximum rated conductor temperature 70 degree centigrade.
3.5.4 In Inner sheath laid up cores shall be bonded over with thermoplastic material
for protection against mechanical and electrical damage.
3.5.5 Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion and
lapping up process only.
Armouring shall be of galvanised steel wire/flat.
Galvanised steel flat strip / round wires applied helicaly in single layers
complete with covering the assembly of cores.
For cable size upto 25 Sq. mm. : Armour of 1.4 mm dia G.I. round wire
For cable size above 25 Sq. mm. : Armour of 4 mm wide 0.8 mm thick
G.I. strip
Repaired cables shall not be used.
Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS: 3961.
The XLPE insulated cables shall conform to latest revision IS read along
with this specifications. The Conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper
circular/ sector shaped and compacted. In multi core cables the core shall be
identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring of insulation as following.

317
CORE IDENTIFICATION:
Two core : Red and Black
Three core : Red, Yellow and Blue
Four core : Red, Yellow, Blue and Black
Single core : Green, Yellow for earthing
Black shall always be used for neutral.
The XLPE insulated 1100 Volts grade power cables shall conform to latest IS
and shall be suitable for a steady conductor temperature of 70 degree
centigrade. The conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper as called for in
the Schedule of quantities. The outer sheath shall be as per the requirement of
type ST-2 of IS: 5831 of 1984.
The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and
underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of
flooding by water.
Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in
meters at every one meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.
Cables shall be supplied in non returnable wooden drums as per IS: 10418.
Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to
eliminate ingress of water during transportation, storage and erection.
The product should be coded as per IS :- 7098 Part-I as follows :-
Aluminium Conductor A
XLPE Insulation 2X
Steel round wire armour W
Steel strip armour F
Steel Double round wire armour WW
Steel Double strip armour FF
Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armourWa
Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa
PVC outer sheath Y

3.6 GENERAL
All cables shall be adequately protected against any risk of mechanical damage
to which they may be liable in normal conditions of handling during
transportation, loading, unloading etc.
The cable shall be supplied in single length i.e. without any intermediate joint
or cut unless specifically approved by the client.
The cable ends shall be suitably sealed against entry of moisture, dust, water
etc. with cable compound as per standard practice.

TESTING
3.6.1 FINISHED CABLE TESTS AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS:
The finished cables shall be tested at manufacturer’s works. Following routine
tests for each and every length of cable and copy of test results shall be

318
 furnished for each length of cable alongwith supply. If specified, the cables
shall be tested in presence of clients representative.
(a) VOLTAGE TEST:
Each core of cable shall be tested at room temperature at 3 KV A.C. R.M.S. for
a duration of 5 minutes.

(b) CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE TEST:

The D.C. Resistance of each conductor shall be measured at room temperature
and the results shall be corrected to 20° c. to check the compliance with the
values specified in IS 8130 - 1976.
Prior to dispatching cables, and at the time of delivering the cables at stores,
following tests shall be carried our:-
Insulation Resistance test between phases and phase to Neutral and phase to
earth.
Continuity test of all the phases, neutral and earth continuity conductor.
Sheathingcontinuity test.
Earth resistance test of all the phases and neutral.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Indian Standard Code
of practice and Indian Electricity Rules. The Vendor shall provide necessary
instruments, equipments and labour for conducting the above test and shall
bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried our in
the presence of the client and results shall be recorded in the prescribed forms.

3.8 CABLE MARKING

EMBOSSING ON OUTER SHEATH:
The outer sheath shall be legibly embossed with following legend:
ELECTRIC CABLE: 1100 V, SIZE: 3.5 C x ----- mm ².
Manufacturer’s Name & year of manufacturing.

3.9 SEALING, DRUMMING & PACKING

After tests at the manufacturer’s works, both ends of the cable shall be sealed
to prevent the ingress of moisture during transportation and storage.
Cable shall supplied in length of 500 ± 10% meters on packed non-returnable
drums of sufficientlysturdy construction.
Cables of length more than 250 meters shall also be supplied on non-returnable
drums.
The spindle hole shall be 110 mm minimum diameter.
Each drum shall bear on the outside flange, legibly and indelibly in the English
literature, a distinguishing number, the manufacturer’s name and particulars of
the cable i.e. voltage grade, length, conductor size, cable type, insulation type
and gross weight shall also be clearly visible. The direction for rolling shall be
indicated by an arrow. The drum flange shall also be marked with
manufacturer’s name and year of manufacturing etc.

319
4.0 LIGHTING FIXTURES & ACCESSORIES
The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed in position
complete and ready for service, in accordance with details, drawings,
manufacturer's instructions and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
4.1 SCOPE:
Scope of work under this section shall include inspection at
suppliers/manufacturer’s premises at site, receiving at site, safe storage,
transportation from point of storage to point of erection, erection and
commissioning of light fittings, fixtures and accessories including all necessary
supports, brackets, down rods and painting etc as required.
4.2 STANDARDS:
The lighting and their associated accessories such as lamps, reflectors,
housings, ballasts etc., shall comply with the latest applicable standards, more
specifically the following:
General and safety requirements for Luminaries:
Part-1 Tubular fluorescent lamps - IS – 1913 (Part-1)
Bi-pin lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps - IS - 3323
Electronic Ballasts for fluorescent lamps –
General & Safety requirement - IS – 13021 (Part-1)
Electronic Ballasts for fluorescent lamps –
Performance requirement - IS – 13021 (Part-2)
Tubular Fluorescent lamps - IS - 2418 (Part-1to4)
Luminaries – General requirement - ARE – 10322 (Part-
1)
Luminaries – Constructional requirement - ARE – 10322 (Part-
2)
Luminaries – Screw and Screw less termination - ARE – 10322 (Part-
3)
Luminaries – Methods of Tests - ARE – 10322 (Part-4)
Particular requirement – General purpose Luminaries - IS–10322(Part-5 / Sec 1)
Particular requirement – Recessed Luminaries - IS–10322 (Part-5/Sec–2)
Particular requirement – Luminaries for Road and
Street lighting - IS–10322 (Part-
5/Sec-3)
Particular requirement – Portable General
purpose Luminaries - IS–10322 (Part-5/Sec-
4)
4.3 LIGHT FITTINGS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
a). Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation under
atmospheric conditions without reduction in lamp life or without deterioration
of materials and internal wiring. Degree of protection of enclosure shall be IP-
65 for outdoor fittings except bulkhead fitting. Bulkhead fitting shall be
provided with IP-54 protection.
320
b) Fittings shall be so designed as to facilitate easy maintenance including
cleaning, replacement of lamps/ ballasts.
c). All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps. All mercury vapour and
sodium vapour lamp fittings shall be complete with accessories like ballasts,
power factor improvement capacitors, starters, etc. Outdoor type fittings shall
be provided with weather proof junction boxes (IP-55) and IP-54 Control gear
boxes.
d) Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-out connection by
1100 V PVC insulated copper conductor wires up to 4 sq.mm. the internal
wiring should be completed by the manufacturer by means of standard copper
wire and terminated on the terminal block.
e) All hardwares used in the fitting shall be suitably plated or anodized and
passivated.
f) Earthing: Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal. All
metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded and connected to
the earthing terminal so as to ensure satisfactory earthing continuity throughout
the fixture.
g) Painting/Finish: All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and
degreased and the fittings shall be free from scale, rust, sharp-edges, and burns.
h) The housing shall be powder coated/stove-enameled or anodised as required.
The surface shall be scratch resistant and shall show no sign of cracking or
flaking when bent through 90 deg. over 12 mm dia mandrel.
i) Metal used in BODY of lighting fixtures shall be not less than 22 SWG or
heavier if so required to comply with specification of standards. Sheet steel
reflectors shall have a thickness of not less than 20 SWG. The metal parts of
the fixtures shall be completely free from burns and tool marks. Solder shall
not be used as mechanical fastening device on any part of the fixture.

4.4. LIGHT FITTINGS – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Box Channel Type Industrial Fittings
Box type slim line channel must be in screw less construction manufactured
from M.S. CRCA sheet steel powder coated with MS CRCA cover, powder
coated white. Light reflection surface in Box/Channel type fittings shall be in
a POLYESTER PRECOATED STEEL having a reflection factor of not less
than 80%. SCREWLESS DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION Light fixtures shall
be preferred due to their ease of maintenance, especially for box/channel for
box/channel type fixtures.
Moisture Proof Industrial Fittings
Surface mounted totally enclosed moisture proof fixtures must be in
polycarbonate body and diffuser with transparent prismatic interior and smooth
exterior and frosted end. Fixture must be completely sealed with polyerethane
double gasket to achieve IP 65 protection. Fixture is complete with CRCA
steel white powder coated / enameled finish reflector.
18 W / 36 W Fluorescent and 36 W CFL Low Glare Light Fittings

321
 Recessed mounted, modular fluorescent lighting fixture made of CRCA Sheet
steel powder coated (white) housing, electro chemically brightened and
anodised reflector, three dimensional cross louvers with concave contours,
fresnel top at louver saddle to increase efficiency. The luminance of <200
cd/M2 at 63 degree viewing angle in all directions so as to confirm Cat-2
classification of CIBSELG3
4.5 Accessories for Light Fittings Reflectors
The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel/aluminium /Silvered
glass/Chromium plated sheet copper as required. The thickness of reflectors
shall be as per relevant standards. Reflectors made of steel shall have stove
enameled/ vitreous enameled/epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for
reflectors shall be anodized/epoxy stove enameled /mirror polished. The finish
for the reflector shall be as specified. The reflectors shall be free from
scratches / blisters and shall have a smooth and glossy surface having optimum
light reflecting coefficient. Reflectors shall be readily removable from the
housing for cleaning and maintenance without use of tools.
4.6 Lamps
4.6.1 TLD
Lamp shall be environment friendly low pressure mercury discharge lamp with
mercury content less than or equal to 5 mg. The lamp shall have minimum
lumen maintenance of 85 and CRI of 85. The lamp must comply to ROSH
(Restriction of Hazardous substances) and covered by WEEE. Lamp should
be fully re-cyclable. The lamp should be low on maintenance with life of 40
K hours in case of electromagnetic ballast and 65 K hours in case of HF ballast
up to 10% failure. The discharge glass shall be lead free.
TLD Lamps shall be minimum tri-phosphor type and have bi-pin bases. Colour
spectrum of light shall be equivalent to “PHILIPS color 84 or color 86 color 82
or “OSRAM color 21 or color 11 or color 41 (as required at site)”.
The fluorescent Tubes (TLD) should have cool daylight colour designation.
But Architects reserve the right to prescribe either Cool Daylight or Bright
White or Incandescent Colour Designations for TLD. NO extra payment will
be made over the quoted rate of bidder for this. The 36 W fluorescent tubes
will have Nominal Luminous Flux of not less than 3350 lumens whether so
mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities or not.
T 5 – High efficiency eco-friendly lamps
T-5 lamp shall be environment friendly low pressure mercury discharge lamp
with mercury content less than or equal to 3 mg. lamp should have lowest CO2
emission compared to any other comparable light source (40% less than a TL-
D standard lamp, 26% less than TL-D / 80). T-5 lamp shall be 100% lead free.
T-5 lamp shall be designed for operation with electronic gear and well suited
for dimming. Maximum lumen output to be reached at approx 35oC in free
burning position. T-5 lamp can be ignited from -15oC to + 50oC. Lamp
should be fully recyclable and must comply to ROSH (Restriction of
Hazardous substances) and shall be covered by WEEE. T-5 shall have 16 mm
in diameter service life of TL-5 lamp should be 10% more than TL-D lamps. T-
322
 5 lamp shall have lumen efficacy of up to 104 Lux / W and shall have excellent
colour rendering to En 12464 (Ra 80 to 89).
4.6.2 Compact fluorescent lamp shall have same luminous flux and power
consumption as fluorescent tubes but less than half the length and more
compact than U-shaped and circulator lamps. CFL shall be suitable for use
with conventional control gear & standers and for HF electronic control gear.
CFL lamp shall be non integral type of OSRAM / PHILIPS only.
4.7 HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC BALLAST
 High frequency electronic ballast shall be used with fluorescent / Compact
Fluorescent Lamps wherever specified in the schedule of quantities. High
frequency electronic ballast shall comply to the following:
 IEC 927, IEC 928 for ≤10% total harmonic distortion.
 EMI / RFI – Confirming to FCC / VDE Class A/B.
 Line Transient as per IEEE C62.41.
 Ballast Crest Factor C1.7%.
 No Stroboscopic Effect
 Constant Wattage / Light output between 240 V ± 10%.
 Circuit protection for surge current and inrush current.
 Short circuits, open lamp protection
 PF > 70 for fluorescent / T5 lamp and CFL.
 Deactivated lamp protection
 Suitable for use with single and twin lamps
 RFI < 30 MHz EN 55015
 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) ≤10%
 Immunity to interference EN 61547
 Safety EN 60928 / IEC 928 / IS 13021 (Part I)
 Performance EN 60929 / IEC 929 / IS 13021 (Part II)
 Vibrations & Bump tests IEC 68-2-6 FC IEC 9001
 Quality Standard ISO 9001
 Environmental Standard ISO 14001
 Emergency Lighting Operation VDE 0108
 Total System consumption (lamps + ballast) for 1x 28 W T-5, shall not exceed
32 W5

5.00 EARTHING SYSTEM

5.1 EARTHING
The system shall be TNS with four wire supply system (R,Y,B,N and 2 Nos. E)
brought from the main L T Panel. All the non-current carrying metal parts of
electrical installation and all metal conduits trunking, cable sheaths,
switchgear, distribution panels, light fittings and all other parts made of
metal shall be bonded together and connected by means of specified earthing
conductors to an efficient earthing system. All metal work such as pipe lines,
ducts, cable trays, stair case railing etc shall be bonded to earth.
All earthing shall be in conformity with IS: 3043 1987, and the basic system of
earthing shall be TNS.
323
5.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
Earthing conductors shall be of copper 8 SWG / GI (25X3 MM) as mentioned
in schedule of quantities and shall be protected against mechanical injury and
corrosion.
5.3 SIZING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS
The cross sectional area of earthing conductor shall not be smaller than half of
the largest current carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 Sq.mm. If
the area of the largest current carrying conductor or bus bar exceeds 160
sq.mm then two or more earthing conductors shall be used in parallel, to
provide at least half the cross sectional area of the current carrying conductor
or bus bars. All fixtures, outlet boxes, junction boxes and power circuits up to
15 amps shall be earthed with PVC insulated FRLS copper wire.
All 3 phase switches and distribution panels up to 60 amps rating shall be
earthed with 2 Nos. distinct and independent 4 mm dia or 8 SWG copper / GI
wires. All 3 phase switches and distribution panels up to 100 amps rating shall
be earthed with 2 Nos. distinct and independent 6 mm dia copper / GI wires.
All switches, bus bar, ducts and distribution panels of rating 200 amps and
above shall be earthed with minimum of 2 nos separate and independent 25
mm x 3 mm copper / GI tape.
5.4 CONNECTION OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS
Main earthing conductors shall be taken from the earth connections at the main
L T panel to an earth electrode with which the connection is to be made. All
joints in tapes shall be with four rivets and shall be brazed in case of copper
and by welding bolting in case of GI, wires shall be connected with crimping
lugs, all bolts shall have spring washers. Sub- mains earthing conductors shall
run from the main distribution panel to the sub distribution panel. Final
distribution panel earthing conductors shall run from sub-distribution panel.
Circuit earthing conductor shall run from the exposed metal of equipment and
shall be connected to any point on the main earthing conductor, or its
distribution panel. Metal conduits, cable sheathing and armouring shall be
earthed at the ends adjacent to distribution panel at which they originate, or
otherwise at the commencement of the run by an earthing conductor in
effective electrical contact with cable sheathing. Where equipment is connected
by flexible cord, all exposed metal parts of the equipment shall be earthed by
means of an earthing conductor enclosed with the current carrying conductors
within the flexible cord. Switches, accessories, lighting fitting etc. which are
rigidly secured in effective electrical contact with a run of metallic conduit
shall not be considered as a part of the earthing conductor for earthing
purposes, even though the run of metallic conduit is earthed.
The plate/pipe electrode, as far as practicable, shall be buried below permanent
moisture level but in no case not less than 2.5 M below finished ground level.

324
 The plate/pipe electrode shall be kept clear of the building foundation and in
no case, it shall be nearer by less than 2 M from outer face of the respective
building wall / column.
The plate electrode shall be installed vertically and shall be surrounded with
150 mm. thick layers of Charcoal dust and Salt mixture.
19 mm. dia. G.I. pipe for watering, shall run from top edge of the plate / pipe
electrode to the mid level of block masonry chamber.
Top of the pipe shall be provided with G.I. funnel and screen for watering the
earth / ground through the pipe.
The funnel with screen over the G.I. pipe for watering to the earth shall be
housed in a block masonry chamber as shown in the drawing.
The masonry chamber shall be provided with a Cast Iron hinged cover resting
over the Cast Iron frame which shall be embedded in the block masonry.
Construction of the earthing station shall in general be as hown in the drawing
and shall conform to the requirement on earth electrodes mentioned in the
latest edition of Indian Standard IS : 3043, Code of Practice for Earthing
Installation.
The earth conductors (Strips / Wires copper / Hot dip G.I.) inside the building
shall properly be clamped / supported on the wall with Galvanized Iron clamps
and Mild Steel Zinc Passivated screws / bolts. The conductors outside the
building shall be laid at least 600 mm. below the finished ground level.
The earth conductors shall either terminate on earthing socket provided on the
equipment or shall be fastened to the foundation bolt and / or on frames of the
equipment. The earthing connection to equipment body shall be done after
removing paint and other oily substances from the body and then properly be
finished.
Over lapping of earth conductors during straight through in joints, where
required, shall be of minimum 75mm. long.
The earth conductors shall be in one length between the earthing grid and the
equipment to be earthed.
EARTH LEADS AND CONNECTIONS:
Earth lead shall be bare copper or Galvanised steel as specified with sizes
shown on drawings. Copper lead shall have a phosphor content of not over
0.15 %. G.I strips buried in the ground shall be protected with bitumen and
hessian wrap or polythene faced hessian and bitumen coating. At road crossing
necessary Hume pipes shall be laid. Earth lead run on surface of wall or ceiling
shall be fixed on saddles so that strip is at least 8 mm away from the wall
surface.
The complete earthing system shall be mechanically and electrically bonded to
provide an independent return path to the earth source.

5.5 PROHIBITED CONNECTIONS

Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water or
inflammable liquid,structural steel work, metallic enclosures, metallic conduits
and lightning protection system conductors shall not be used as a means of
325
 earthing an installation or even as a link in an earthing system. The electrical
resistance measured between earth connection at the main L T panel and any
other point on the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the
passage of current necessary to operate or circuit breakers, and shall not
exceed 1 ohm. All switches carrying medium voltage shall be connected with
earth by two separate and distinct connections.
The earthing conductors inside the building wherever exposed shall be
properly protected from mechanical injury by running the same in G I pipe of
adequate size. The overlapping in strips at joints where required shall be
minimum 75 mm. The joints shall be riveted and brazed in case of copper and
by welding / bolting in case of GI in an approved manner. Sweated lugs of
adequate capacity and size shall be used for termination of all conductor wires
above 6 sq.mm size. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed
after the metal body is cleaned of paint and other oily substances and properly
tinned. Equipotent bonding of all metallic structures shall be done.
5.6. EARTHING
The following must always be ensured in earthing system.
- All earths must be interconnected at the earth pits. This includes generator
neutrals,
transformer neutrals, transformer body, lightning protection system earths,
UPS earths etc.
- Extraneous conductive parts such as gas pipes, other service pipes and ducting
risers
and pipes of fire protection equipment and exposed metallic parts of the
building
structure.
5.7 The Contractor shall get the soil resistivity test done at his own cost of the area
where earthing pits are to be locate d before starting the installation.

5.8 RESISTANCE TO EARTH

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm.

5.9 SPECIFICATION FOR HOT DIP GALVANIZING PROCESS FOR

MILD STEEL
USED FOR EARTHING FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Quality of Zinc
Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of
IS: 209-1992.
II. Coating Requirement
Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm
in accordance with IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.
The weight of coating expressed in grams per square metre shall be calculated
by dividing the total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated
surface.
326
 The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux,
ash and dross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs,
rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters.
Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid,
cold rinsing and then galvanizing. Jointing of earthing tape shall be by
welding. All joints and cut ends shall be properly painted with aluminum
paint.
5.10 TEST:
The entire earthing installation shall be tested as per requirements of Indian
Standard Specification IS: 3043.
The following earth resistance values shall be measured with an approved
earth megger and recorded.Each earthing station earthing system as a
wholeEarth continuity conductors
Earth conductor resistance for each earthed equipment shall be measured
which shall not exceed 5 ohm in each case.
Measurements of earth resistance shall be carried out before earth connections
are made between the earth and the object to be earthed.
All tests shall be carried out in presence of the client’s representative.

6. LED LIGHT SPECIFICATIONS

SITC OF LED LIGHT LUMINAIRES:-

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ENERGY EFFICIENT LED
BASED LUMINARIES UNIT: -Thisspecification is for technical and general
requirements design, development, manufacturing, testing and supply of
energy efficient LED luminary for street light complete with all accessories,
LED lamps with suitable current control driver circuit and required optics
including mounting arrangement.
CODES & STANDARDS: -
IEC 60529 Classification of degree of protections provided by enclosures (IP
Codes)
EN 55015, CISPR15 Limits and methods of measurement of radio
disturbance characteristic of electrical lighting and similar equipment.
IEC 62031 LED modules for general lighting-Safety requirements
IEC 61547-EMC Immunity requirement
IEC 60598-2-1 Fixed general purpose luminaries
IEC 60598-1 Luminaries - General requirement and tests
IEC 61000-3-2 Electro Magnetic compatibility (EMC)- Limits for Harmonic
current emission
-– (equipment input current ≤ 16 A per phase.
IEC 60068-2-38 Environmental Testing: Test Z- AD: composite temperature/
humidity cyclic test
IEC 61347-2-13 Lamp control gear: particular requirements for DC or AC
supplied electronic
control gear for LED modules.
327
 IS 10322 Specification for the luminaries
IS 4905 Method for random sampling
LM 79 LED luminary photometry measurement.
LM 80 Lumen Maintenance
IEC 62384 DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED modules
performance requirements
IEC/ PAS 62612 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting services-
Performance requirements

CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
General:

 Luminaries shall be made of die cast aluminium/ extruded Aluminium body

with powder coated finish having safety.
 Heat sink used should be aluminium extrusion having high conductivity. Heat
sink should be integrated within luminaries and efforts shall be made to keep
the overall outer dimensions
 optimum such that it permits sufficient heat dissipation through the body itself
so as to prevent abnormal temperature inside the luminaries and consequential
damage to cover, gasket material, LEDs, lenses and drivers.
 LED must be mounted on Metal core PCB with suitable large area surface by
means of fins to dissipate the conduct heat. The fins must be exposed to
ambient flowing air.
 All luminaries shall be provided with toughened glass of min. 0.8 mm
thickness of sufficient strength. UV stabilized Poly carbonate material is also
acceptable. High efficiency prismatic diffuser/Lens under the LED chamber to
protect the LED and luminaries shall be provided.
 The minimum IK protection of optic cover shall be IK 05. The test material
certificate shall be provided.
 Suitable number of LED lamps shall be used in the luminaries. The
manufacturer shall submit the proof of procurement of LEDs from OEMs at
the time of testing.
 Suitable reflector/ lenses may also be provided to increase the illumination
uniformity and distribution.
 The electrical component of the LED and LED driver must be suitably
enclosed in sealed unit to function in environment conditions mentioned
earlier.
 The connecting wires used inside the luminaries, shall be low smoke halogen
free, fire retardant e-beam cable and fuse protection shall be provided in input
side.
 Design of the thermal management shall be done in such a way that it shall not
affect the properties of the diffuser.
 The equipment should be compliant to IEC 60598-1, IEC 62031 and IEC/PAS
62612 depending on the type of luminary.

328
  The LED Module(s), Driver gear, etc. shall be designed in such a way so that
temperature of heat sink shall not exceed 70° C.
 All the material used in the luminaries shall be halogen free and fire retardant
confirming to standard
 The infrastructure for Quality Assurance facilities to verify/ test/ prove above
specifications must be available at the manufacturing facility. The compliance
shall be indicated clearly in the tender itself.
 All fasteners must be of stainless steel.
 Heat sink must be thermally connected to MCPCB/ LED light source.
 High power and high lumen efficient LEDs suitable for following features shall
be used:
 The working life of the lamp at junction temperature of 85° C (max) at
operating current shall be more than 50,000 working hours of accumulative
operation and shall be suitable for continuous operation of 24 hours per day.
These features shall be supported with datasheet.
 Adequate heat sink with proper thermal management shall be provided.
 Lumen maintenance report as per LM 80 guidelines shall be produced for the
power LEDs used.
 Thermal management shall be in such a way that LED soldering point
temperature shall not go beyond 75° C.
 The LED luminaries shall be free of glare.

LED DRIVER Specification:

 Current waveform should meet relevant nation and international standard.

 LED Driver shall withstand double phasing, 415 voltage up to level mentioned
elsewhere in tender and restore once normal working when normal voltage is
applied.
 The life of the driver should more than 25000 Hrs.
 Maximum Temperature rise <= 30º C @ 45º C Tamb. With safety margin of
10º C.
 The control gear should be compliant to IEC 61347-2-13, IEC 62031 and IEC
62384 as per the requirements.
 The driver of the luminaries should have Short Circuit, Over Voltage, over
current, over temperature, Under Voltage, String Open protections.

The electronic components used shall be as follows:-

The protective cum adhesive coating used on PCBs should be cleared and
transparent and should not affect colour code of electronic components or the
product code of the company.
The construction of PCBs and the assembly for components for PCBs should
be as per IS standards.

329
Illumination Level:
The luminaries shall be so designed that the illumination level shall be evenly
distributed and shall be free from glare. The lux distribution curve/ graph/
spatial distribution shall be submitted.
DATA SHEET: LUMINARIES

Sr. Parameter Data/ Details of LED luminary

No.
Rated Input Power of LED 20/25 34
1
luminary (max.) Watts
Initial Output of System
2 (including all losses) Lumen
2000/2500 3230
(min.)
5500° K ± 500° K
3 Correlated Colour Temperature
(ANSI Binning)
4 Colour Rendering Index (min.)
> 80  80

GENERAL DATA SHEET

Sr. No. Parameter Value/Detail
1 Rated Supply Voltage 230 V ~, 50 Hz
2 Input supply voltage range 120-270 V
3 Expected Input Frequency 50 Hz +/- 3%
4 Working Temperature +5° to +50° C
5 Working Humidity 10% - 90% RH
6 Usage hours Dusk to dawn
7 Power Factor ≥0.90
8 Index of Protection Level IP 20
9 Surge Protection 2.5 -3.0 KV, 4KV For St Light Fitting
10 Driver Efficiency > 85%
11 Junction Temperature of LED< 85° C
12 Rated Life @ L70 50,000 burning hours at 35° C ambient
13 Nominal Correlated Colour temperature
3000° K to 6000° K
Temperature
14 Dispersion Angle Minimum 120°
15 Tilting angle Adjustable
16 Maintenance factor 0.85
of
17 luminaire
Colour Rendering Index ≥65
18 Total Harmonic Distortion < 10 % (EMI/ EMC Certification)

Particulars and Details to be submitted by the bidder:

330
 In order to properly assess and due diligence on submissions, the Bidder
should provide following information on the quality and photometric of
proposed luminaries.
General Description
Following details of the proposed luminary shall be submitted.

Electrical specifications
Electrical ratings of the proposed luminary product shall be submitted.

LED chip and driver information

LED chip and driver information of the proposed luminary product shall be
submitted.

Photometric information to be submitted.

TESTS & CERTIFICATES:

Tests are classified as:–
 Type test
 Acceptance test
 Routine rest.
The luminaries' should be tested as per IEC 60598-2-3: 2002 standards and
following test reports should be submitted: -

 Heat Resistance Test

 Thermal In SITU Test
 Ingress Protection Test
 Drop Test
 Electrical/ Insulation Resistance Test,
 Endurance Test,
 Humidity Test,
 Electrical and Photometric Measurements Test Report (IES LM 79)
 LED Lumen Maintenance Test Report (IES LM 80)
 Vibration test as per ANSI
Type Test: -
Type test certificates for both the luminaries' shall be provided with the
technical-bid.

Acceptance Tests: -
These tests are carried out by an inspecting authority at the supplier’s premises
on sample taken from a lot for the purpose of acceptance of a lot. Acceptance
tests shall not be carried out from particular size from the lot on which type
tests have already been conducted. Recommended sampling plan is given
below.
Sample size and criteria for conformity
331
 The luminaries shall be selected from the lot at random. In order to ensure
randomness of selection, procedures given in IS 4905-1968 (Reaffirmed 2001)
may be followed.
Routine Tests:
These tests shall be performed by the manufacturer on each complete unit of
the same type and the results shall be submitted to the inspecting agency, prior
to offering the lot for acceptance test. The firm shall maintain the records with
traceability.
Test Scheme& Quality Assurance: -
Method of Testing: -
Visual and Dimensional Check:
The unit shall be checked visually for all dimensions as per approved design
and drawing.
General workmanship should be good; all the components properly secured
and sharp edges shall be rounded off. Check the marking and quality of the
workmanship visually. Check the rating and make of electronic/ electrical
items.
Resistance to humidity test
This is carried out by suspending the painted panels in corrosion chamber
maintained at 100% RH and temperature cycle of 42 to 48° C for 7 days and
examining it for any sign of deterioration and corrosion of metal surface.
Insulation resistance test
The insulation resistance of the unit between earth and current carrying parts
shorted together shall not be less than 2 MΩwhen measured with 500 V
megger.
HV test
Immediately after insulation resistance test, an AC voltage of 1.72 KV rms
(1500 + 2 x rated voltage) of sine wave form of 50 Hz shall be applied for one
minute between the live parts and frame. There shall not be any kind of break
down, flashover or tripping of supply.
Over voltage protection
The LED Driver Shall be cut off once voltage exceeds 288 V AC. It shall be
reconnected when supply comes within limit.
Surge protection
It shall withstand a surge of 2.5-3 KV at the input terminals for all types and
4KV for Street Light fitting.

Reverse polarity
The Luminaries' shall withstand polarity reversal. It shall be operated with
reverse voltage for Min. 1 minute at maximum value of voltage range. At the
end of this period, the supply shall be made correct polarity and Luminary shall
operate in a normal way.
Temperaturerise Test:
Temperature rise Test shall be conducted at 100 V ~ with full load. The
temperature rise shall be recorded by temperature detectors mounted at the
332
 specified reference points on the body of semiconductors, capacitors and other
components as agreed between purchaser and manufacturer. The maximum-
recorded temperature under worst conditions shall be corrected to 55° C and
compared with maximum permissible temperature (for power devices at
junction). Under loading conditions as specified above, the corrected
temperature of the power devices shall have a safety margin of minimum 10°
C.
Temperature at junction shall not exceed 100° C when corrected to 55° C. The
Luminaries' shall also be subjected for short time rating after continuous
loading to ensure the temperature rise is within the permissible limit. The
maximum temperature rise of the electronics devices on the PCBs shall be in
limit for industrial grade components suitable for 85° C environment. In case
of exceeding limit, use of MIL-grade component shall be considered keeping
RDSO informed.
Ra (Colour Rendering Index) measurement test
The lumen is the unit of luminous flux, which is equal to the flux emitted in a
solid angle of one steradian by a uniform point source of one candela.
The initial reading of the chromaticity co-ordinates x & y shall be within 5
SDCM (Standards Deviation for Colour matching) from the standardised rated
value as per Annex: D of IEC 60081- 1997.
The initial reading of the general colour-rendering index (Ra) shall not be less
than the rated value decreased by 3.
The lumen maintenance of the lamp shall not be less than 80% of the initial
lumen after 20,000 burning hours and 70% of the initial lumen after 50,000
hours. The initial lumen will be taken after 100 hours aging.
Environmental tests (Prototype Test)
 The Luminary shall meet the following tests as prescribed in IEC–60571.
 Dry heat test.
 Damp heat test
 Test in corrosive atmosphere
 Combined dust, humidity and heat test
Reliability Test
The reliability can only be determined in actual service. However, the
following tests shall be carried out on the prototype to simulate as close as
possible, the service conditions.
There shall be no failure during this test.
The light unit shall be mounted in an oven maintained at 45° C.
The light will be operated at the specified maximum voltage and at 45° C for a
period of 100 hours.
Photometry Test: -
The test shall be carried out for Total Luminous Flux, Luminous Intensity
Distribution, Electrical Power, Luminous Efficacy (calculation), Color
Characteristics– Chromaticity, CCT & CRI etc. as per IES LM 79.

Life Test
333
 The lumen maintenance & life test shall be done as per IES LM 80 for LEDs.

Endurance Test
The Luminaire shall be kept “ON” with input voltage of 250 V ~ for 200 hours.
After this the Luminaire is subjected to 20,000 cycles of “ON” and “OFF”,
each cycle consisting of 3 seconds “ON” and 10 seconds “OFF” period.
Luminaire should survive this test. Test is to be continued for 20,000 cycles,
followed by performance test.

Safety:
The Luminaire shall comply with the safety requirements as per IEC 61195.
All Tests defined for acceptance other than LM 79 and LM 80 are allowed to
carry out at Manufacturer works.

INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS

Division office shall not be responsible for infringement of patent rights arising
due to similarity in design, manufacturing process, use of the components, used
in design, development and manufacturing of these light luminaires and any
other factor which may cause such dispute. The responsibility to settle any
issue rises with the manufacturer.
MARKING:
The following information shall be distinctly and indelibly marked on the
housing:
Year of manufacture/ Batch Number/ Serial Number
Name of Manufacturer (Engraving only, stickers not allowed)
Rated watt and voltage Input frequency

8. SPECIFICATIONS OF STREET LIGHT POLE & ACCESSORIES

Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of octagonal pole (GI):

Design Considerations:
The Octagonal Poles shall be designed for followings:
to withstand the maximum wind speed of 47m/secmaximum stress at wind
speed of 47m/sec shall not exceed 80% of the strength of steel.
The detail of top loading i.e. the weight and area of top luminaries are worked
out based on this consideration.
Maximum deflection of the pole shall meet the requirement of BS 5649: part 6
1982.
Constructional Features:

334
 The pole shall be made from HR sheet and shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS
2629/IS 2633/IS 4759 standards with minimum coating thickness of 85
micron.
The pole shaft shall have Octagonal cross section and shall be continuously
tapered with single longitudinal welding. There shall not be any
circumferential welding. The welding of pole shaft shall be done by
Submerged Arc Welding process using state of the art know how.
All Octagonal Pole shafts shall be provided with the rigid Flange plate of
suitable thickness with provision for fixing four bolts. This base plate shall be
fillet welded to pole shaft at two locations i.e. from inside and outside.

Embedded Termination Box:-

Door (Termination Box):-
Door height should be 2000mm above from the bottom of the Pole and door
opening should be hinged type with necessary special locking bolt.
An adequate door opening shall be provided at the base of the pole and the
opening shall be such that it permits clear access to equipment like termination
plate, MCB, cables, etc. The door opening shall be complete with a close
fitting, vandal resistant, weather proof hinged type with mechanical internal
lock with special paddle key.
The door shall have required width-having height of minimum 500mm at the
elevation of 500 mm from the Base Plate. The door shall be vandal resistance
and shall be dust proof to ensure safety of inside connections. The door shall be
flush with exterior surface and shall have suitable locking arrangement.
The door opening shall be carefully designed and reinforced welded steel
section, so that undue buckling of the cut section under heavy wind conditions.
Terminal plate
Terminal plate made up of Bakelite with appropriate current rating, SP MCB (L
Series) and stud type terminal shall be mounted at the base of the pole. If a
particular light fitting has to be manually operated the same can be done by this
MCB provided at the base compartment.
The provided terminal shall be suitable for loop-in-loop-out of max. 4 Core x
25 sq mm armoured cable. 1 No. of SP 6 Amp MCB (L Series) per luminary
shall be provided having rupturing capacity ≥ 9 kA.
The cable shall be terminated at connector in the pole using ISI Marked XLPE
1.1 KV grade insulating tape roll with appropriate colour code. All items shall
be fixed on the Bakelite sheet of suitable size having 12 mm thickness. There
shall also be welded a clit of size 40 x 40 x 4 mm for the purpose of earthing.
The pole shall be adequately strengthened at the location of the door to
complete for the loss in section.
Pole drawings (of manufacturer) must be got approved from concerned
department.

MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION:
Octagonal Poles: Steel confirming to St 35 or required grade
335
 Foundation Bolts: As per relevant IS
Base Plate : IS 226/IS 2062 steel

The steel used to manufacture steel poles is as per BSEN 10025 grade S355 Jo.
Yield strength Min. 355N/mm2 and Tensile strength 490 - 630 N/mm2.
Please note that among the various standards mentioned, most stringent will
apply.

Indicative Dimensions for 4 mtr height pole:

HEIGHT (Min.) - 4 meter
O.D. TOP (Min.) - 70 mm
O.D. BOTTOM (Min.) - 135 mm
THICKNESS (Min.) - 3 mm
BASE PLATE (Min.) - 200 x 200 x 12 mm (PCD 200 mm)
Dimensions mentioned above are for generally used poles and indicative only.
Illumination design (Which includes pole dimensions) shall be got approved.
SUPPLY, ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING OF DETACHABLE
BRACKETS: -
2 (g) Single arm 0.5 m
2 (h) Double arm 1.0 m
Providing Street Light pole bracket consisting of medium class MS pipe of 4.2
cms. Outside dia 2.9 W.T complete with suitable sleeve tubing (If required) 45
cms. long M.S. pipe (Medium Class). Suitable for 76.5 mm /80mm / required
size of pole top/ Wall mounting having sufficient fasteners for fixing the
brackets and having spread as mentioned and having inclination up to 115 deg.
with vertical plane & suitable welded stays, reducer and with check nuts
complete painted with one coat of Red oxide / PU base primer and two coats of
Aluminium / PU paint. paint with required nos of arms.
The bracket shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS 2629/IS 2633/IS 4759
standards.

SUPPLY, LAYING, TESTING AND CONNECTING UNARMOURED CABLE:

The item includes supply, laying, testing and commissioning of round 3 X 1.5
sq. mm for LED luminaries flexible unarmored single PVC insulated copper
conductor cable 1100 V grade to be laid through the pole from luminaries to
junction box by experienced technician without any damage. The cable joint
shall not be allowed. Termination glands/lugs etc shall be included in the item.

12. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE PANEL

SCOPE OF WORK
This scope shall cover design, manufacture, check test, and supply of medium
and low voltage motor/power control Panel boards, MCB distribution boards
etc. as described in this specification, as per drawings and schedule of
quantities.
336
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
All the Panels shall be metal clad, totally enclosed, rigid, floor mounting, air
insulated, cubicle type suitable for operation on three phase/single phase, 415
V/240 V, 50 Hz., neutral effectively grounded at transformer and short circuit
level as mentioned in the drawings.
All the outdoor panel shall be double door type with IP54 protection class
construction.
All the indoor panel shall have IP51 protection class construction.
The painting of all the metal part shall be as per the painting specification
defined in the datasheet.
The Panels shall be designed to withstand heaviest condition at site, with
maximum expected ambient temperature of 45°c, 90% humidity and salty,
dusty weather.
STRUCTURE
The Panels shall be metal clad enclosed and be fabricated out of high quality
CRCA sheet, suitable for indoor installation having dead front operated and
floor mounting type.
All CRCA sheet steel used in the construction of Panels shall be 2 mm. thick
and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all
components. Joints of any kind in sheet steel shall be seam welded, all welding
slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.
The Panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and
degree of protection being not less than IP: 51. Gaskets between all adjacent
units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints dust proof.
All doors and covers shall be fully gasketed with foam rubber and/or rubber
strips and shall be lockable.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame and
holds in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes,
taped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with bolts and nuts. Self-
threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Panels.
A base channel of 100 mm. x 50 mm. shall be provided at the bottom. A
clearance of 300 mm. between the floor of the Panels and the bottom of the
lower most units shall be provided.
Panels shall be preferably arranged in multi-tier formation. The Panels shall be
of adequate size with a provision of 20% spare space to accommodate possible
future additional switchgear. The size of the Panels shall be designed in such a
way that the internal space is sufficient for hot air movement and the electrical
component does not attain temperature more than 450c. The entire electrical
component shall be derated for 500c. The ratings indicated in the drawing are
derated for 500c.
Knock out holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Panels
in conformity with the number, and the size of incoming and outgoing
conduits/cables.

337
 Alternately, the Panels shall be provided with removable sheet steel plates at
top and bottom to drill holes for cable/conduit entry at site.
The Panels shall be designed to facilitate easy inspection, maintenance and
repair.
The Panels shall be sufficiently rigid to support the equipment without
distortion under normal and under short circuit condition. They shall be
suitably braced for short circuit duty.

PROTECTION CLASS:
All the indoor Panels shall have protection class of IP 51 for indoor installation
and IP 54 for outdoor installation.

PAINTING:
The painting shall be with 2 coats of epoxy primer along with two coats of PU
paint [Anti-corrosive paint]. Paint shade shall be confirmed with the client.

CIRCUIT COMPARTMENTS:
Each circuit breaker and switch fuse unit shall be housed in separate
compartments and shall be enclosed on all sides. Sheet steel hinged lockable
door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker/switch fuse unit in `ON’ and
`OFF’ position. Safety interlocks shall be provided for air circuit breaker to
prevent the breaker from being drawn out when the breaker is in `ON’ position.
The door shall not form an integral part of draw out position of the circuit
breaker. All instruments and indicating lamp shall be mounted on the
compartment door. Sheet steel barriers shall be provided between the tiers in a
vertical section.

INSTRUMENT COMPARTMENTS:
Separate adequate compartment shall be provided for accommodating
instruments, indicating lamps, control contactors/relays and control fuses etc.
These components shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any
danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker/switch fuse
unit, busbar and connections.
BUS-BARS:
The busbar shall be air insulated and made of high quality, high conductivity,
high strength Aluminum.
The busbar shall be of 3 phases and neutral system with separate neutral and
earth bar. The bus bar and interconnection between bus bars and various
components shall be of high conductivity Aluminum. The busbar shall be of
rectangular cross-section designed to withstand full load current for phase bus
bars and half rated current for neutral bus bars and shall be extensible on either
side. The busbar size shall be as per drawing. The busbar shall have uniform
cross-section throughout the length.

338
 The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable PVC
sleeve and be colour coded in red, yellow, blue and black to identify the 3
phases and neutral of the system if specified in datasheet. The busbar shall be
supported on unbreakable, non-hydroscopic AMBICA DIVISION/DMC
insulated supports at sufficiently close intervals to prevent bus bars sag and
shall effectively withstand electromagnetic stresses in the event of short circuit
capacity of 15 KA RMS symmetrical for 1 sec. and a peak short circuit
withstand of 31.5 KA minimum.
The bus bar shall be housed in a separate compartment. The bus bar shall be
isolated with 3 mm. thick Bakelite sheet to avoid any accidental contact. The
bus bar shall be arranged such that minimum clearance between the bus bars to
be maintained as below:
Between phases : 25 mm. minimum
Between phases and neutral: 25 mm.
Between phases and earth : 25 mm.
Between neutral and earth : 20 mm. minimum
All bus bar connections shall be done by drilling holes in bus bars and
connecting by chromium plated or tinned plated brass bolts and nuts.
Additional cross-section of bus bar shall be provided in all Panels to cover up
the holes drilled in the bus bar. Spring and flat washers shall be used for
tightening the bolts.
All connections between bus bars and circuit breakers/switches and cable
terminals shall be through aluminum strips of proper size to carry full rated
current. These strips shall be insulated with insulating tapes.

ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION:

Terminal for both incoming and outgoing cable connections shall be suitable
for 1100 V grade, aluminum/copper conductor PVC insulated and sheathed,
armoured cable and shall be suitable for connections of solder-less sockets for
the cable size as indicated on the appended drawings for the Panels.
Power connections for incoming feeders of the main Panels shall be suitable
for 1100 V grade aluminum conductor (LT XLPE) cables.
Both control and power wiring shall be brought out in cable alley for ease of
external connections, operation and maintenance.
Both control and power terminals shall be properly shrouded.
10% spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. Sufficient
terminals shall be provided on each terminal block, so that not more than one
outgoing wire is connected per terminal.
Terminal strips for power and control shall preferably be separated from each
other by suitable barriers of enclosures.
Wiring inside the modules for power, control, protection and instruments etc.
shall be done with use of 660/1100 V grade, PVC insulated copper conductor
cables conforming to IS: 694 and IS: 8130. Power wiring inside the starter
module shall be rated for full current raring of respective contactor, but not less
than 4.0 sq.mm. crosssection area. For current transformer circuits, 2.5 sq.mm.
339
 copper conductor wire shall be used. Other control wiring shall be done with
1.5 sq.mm. copper conductor wires. Wires for connections to the door shall be
flexible. All conductors shall be crimped with solderless sockets at the ends
before connections are made to the terminals.
Control power for the Motor starter module shall be taken from the respective
module switchgear outgoing. Control power wiring shall have control fuses,
(HRC fuse type) for circuit protection. All indicating lamps shall be protected
by HRC fuses.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the layout of wiring is neat and
orderly. Identification ferrules shall be fitted to all the wire termination for ease
of identification and to facilitate checking and testing.
Spring type washers shall be used for all copper and aluminium connections.
Final wiring diagram of the Panels power and control circuit with ferrules
numbers shall be submitted along with the Panels as one of the documents
against the contract.
TERMINALS:
The outgoing terminals and neutral link shall be brought out to a cable alley
suitably located and accessible from the panel front. The current transformers
for instruments metering shall be mounted on the disconnecting type terminal
blocks. No direct connection of incoming or outgoing cables to internal
components of the distribution board is permitted; only one conductor may be
connected in one terminal.
WIRE-WAYS:
A horizontal PVC wire way with screwed covers shall be provided at the top to
take interconnecting control wiring between different vertical sections.
CABLE COMPARTMENTS:
Cable compartments of adequate size shall be provided in the Panels for easy
termination of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top.
Adequate supports shall be provided in the cable compartments to support
cables. All outgoing and incoming feeder terminals shall be brought out to
terminal blocks in the cable compartment.

EARTHING:
Copper earth bus of 40 X 6 mm shall be provided in the Panels for the entire
length of the panel. The frame work of the Panels shall be connected to this
earth bar. Provisions shall be made for connection from this earth bar on both
sides of the panels to the main earthing bar coming from the earth pit. Door
earthing shall be provided for all the compartments.
The earth continuity conductor of each incoming and outgoing feeder shall be
connected to this earth bar. The armour shall be properly connected with
earthing clamp, and the clamp shall be made for connection from this earth pit
on both sides of the Panels.
The earth continuity conductor of each incoming and outgoing feeder shall be
connected to this earth bar. The armour shall be properly connected with
earthing clamp, and the clamp shall be ultimately bonded with the earth bar.
340
LABELS:
Engraved metal labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeders.
Single line circuit diagram showing the arrangements of circuit inside the
distribution board shall be pasted on inside of the panel door and covered with
transparent laminated plastic sheet.

NAME PLATE:
A name plate with the Panel’s designation in bold letters shall be fixed at top of
the central panel. A separate name plate giving feeder details shall be provided
for each feeder module door.
Inside the feeder compartments, the electrical components, equipments,
accessories like switchgear, control gear, lamps, relays etc. shall suitably be
identified by providing stickers.
Engraved name plates shall preferably be of 3 ply,(Red-White-Red or Black-
White-Black) lamicold sheet. However, black engraved Perspex sheet name
plates shall also be acceptable. Engraving shall be done with square groove
cutters.
Name plate shall be fastened by counter sunk screws and not by adhesives.

DANGER NOTICE PLATES:

The danger notice plate shall be affixed in a permanentmanner on operating
side of the Panels.
The danger notice plate shall indicate danger notice both in Hindi and English
and with a sign of skull and bones.
The danger notice plates, in general, meet the requirements of local inspecting
authorities.
Overall dimensions of the danger notice plate shall be 200 mm. wide x 150
mm. high.
The danger notice plate shall be made from minimum 1.6 mm. thick mild steel
sheet and after due pre-treatment to the plate, the same shall be painted white
with vitreous enamel paint on both front and rear surface of the plate.
The letters, the figures, the conventional skull and bones etc. shall be
positioned on plate as per recommendation of IS: 2551-1982.
The said letters, the figures and the sign of skull and bones shall be painted in
signal red colour as per IS: 5-1978.
The danger plate shall have rounded corners. Location of fixing holes for the
plate shall be decided to suit design of the Panels.
The danger notice plate, if possible, be of ISI certification mark. Suitable
Voltage rated rubber mates to be provided.

INTERNAL COMPONENTS:
The Panels shall be equipped complete with all types of required number of
auto transformer starters, switch fuse units, contactors, relays, fuses, meters,
341
 instruments, indicating lamps, push buttons, equipment, fittings, bus bars,
cable boxes, cable glands etc. and all the necessary internal connections/wiring
as required and as indicated on relevant drawings. Components necessary for
the proper and complete functioning of the Panels but not indicated on the
drawings shall be supplied and installed on the Panels.
All parts of the Panels carrying current including the components, connections,
joints and instruments shall be capable of carrying their specified rated current
continuously, without temperature rise exceeding the acceptable values of the
relevant specifications at the part of the Panels.
All units of the same rating and specifications shall be fully interchangeable.
COMPONENTS
GENERAL:
The type, size and rating of the components shall be as indicated on the
relevant drawings. While selection of the capacity of the components resulting
from the prevailing conditions like ambient temperature shall be allowed for.
The thermal and magnetic trip rating shall be compensated for the ambient
temperature. The ratings indicated on the drawing are ratings anticipated at
prevailing site conditions.

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

Miniature Circuit breakers shall be current limiting type conformed with
British standard BS: 3871 (Part I) 1965 and IS: 8825. The housing of MCBs
shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The fault current of
MCBs shall not be less than 9000 A at 230 V. The MCBs shall be flush
mounted and shall be provided with trip free manual operating mechanism with
mechanical `ON’ and `OFF’ indications.
The circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the
breaker on a faulty circuit.
The MCB contacts shall be silver nickel and silver graphite alloy and tip coated
with silver. Proper arc chutes shall be provided to quench the arc immediately.
MCBs shall be provided with magnetic fluid plunger release for over current
and short circuit protection. The overload or short circuit device shall have a
common trip bar in the case of DP and TPN miniature circuit breakers. All the
MCBs shall be tested and certified as per Indian Standards, prior to installation.

FUSE:
Fuses shall be of high rupturing capacity (HRC) fuse links and shall be in
accordance with IS: 2000-1962 and having high rupturing capacity of not less
than 35 MVA at 415 V. The back-up fuse rating for each motor/equipment shall
be so chosen that the fuse does not operate on starting of motors /equipment.
HRC fuses shall be of the make as specified in Make of Material.

AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER:

Construction:
342
 The ACBs shall have following features:

1. Motorized with 230 V A.C. motor.

2. 230 V A.C closing and shunt trip coil
3. Draw out type with "service", "test", "isolated" and "maintenance" position.
4. Safety shutter of Fibre glass/polycarbonate sheet of 2mm thickness shall be
provided
5. Mechanically trip free plus anti-pumping feature is to be provided.
6. Electrical trip free plus anti pumping shall be provided with relay ONLY and
not by contactors.
7. Electrical/Mechanical operation counter shall be provided.
8. Door interlock with defeat features to be provided.
9. ACB shall be lockable in isolation position.

Release:
1. Thermal Magnetic release shall be direct acting type, tripping ACB
mechanically.
2. Short circuit, overload and earth fault protection shall be provided.
3. Vendor to suggest release type for feeders of supply range characteristic and
accuracy.

ACB Performance:
1. ACB performance inside panels at ambient 50 Degree.
2. Ith Symmetrical breaking, 35KA
3. Making capacity peak 87.5 KA
4. Short time rating, 1sec. 35KA

CONTACTORS:
The contractors shall meet with the requirements of IS: 2959 and BS: 775.
The contractors shall have minimum making and breaking capacity in
accordance with utilisation category AC3 and shall be suitable for minimum
Class II intermittent duty. If the contractor forms part of a distribution board
then a separate enclosure is not required, but the installation of the contractor
shall be such that it is not possible to make an accidental contact with live
parts.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER:
Where ammeters are called for C.T.s shall be provided for current measuring.
Each phase shall be provided with separate current transformer of accuracy
Class I and suitable VA burden for operation of associated metering and
controls. Current transformer shall be in accordance with IS: 2705 - 1964 as
amended upto date.

PUSHBUTTONS:
343
 The push button unit shall comprise of the contact element, a fixing holder, and
a push button actuator. The push button shall be momentary contact type. The
contacts shall be of silver alloy and rated at 10 Amps. continuous current
rating. The actuator shall of standard type and colour as per its usage for ON,
OFF and TRIP.

INDICATING LAMPS:
Indicating lamps shall be transformer operated low voltage rated and shall be
supplied complete with translucent covers to diffuse the lamp light. Colour
shade for the indicating lamps shall be as below – the LED shall be 22.5 mm
and self coloured:

ON indicating lamp : Red

OFF indicating lamp : Green
TRIP indicating lamp : Amber
PHASE indicating lamp : Red, Yellow, and Blue

DIGITAL MULTI FUNCTION METER

The load manager shall be digital type with RS485 port. It should measure
KW, KVA, KVAR, V, I, PF etc.
DRAWING &INFORMATION
Prior to fabrication of the Panels the supplier/contractor shall submit for
consultant’s approval the shop/vendor drawing consisting of G.A. drawing,
sectional elevation, single line diagram, bill of material etc. and design
calculations indicating type, size, short circuiting rating of all the electrical
components used, busbar size, internal wiring size, Panels dimension, colour,
mounting details etc.. The contractor shall submit manufacturer’s catalogues of
the electrical components installed in the Panels.

INSPECTION &TESTING
At all reasonable times during production and prior to transport of the Panels to
site, the supplier/contractor shall arrange and provide all the facilities at their
plant for inspection.
Testing of Panels shall be carried out at factory and at site as specified in
Indian standards in the presence of consultant. The test results shall be
recorded on a prescribed form. The test certificate for the test carried out at
factory and at site shall be submitted in duplicate to the consultant for
approvals.

METHODOF MEASUREMENT
All the items will be measured as mentioned in Bill of quantity.
TRANSPORT, DELIVERY &STORAGE
The prices shall be F.O.R. site basis including packing & forwarding charges.
The quoted price must include all the costs for necessary mode of
344
 transportation up to the final location of site or site store. All incidental
expenses during transportation shall be part of quoted prices including transit
insurance. The charges for loading and unloading of equipments at site should
form part of offer.

GUARANTEE &WARRENTY
The Bidder shall stand guarantee for the performance of entire equipment and
components for twelve (12) months from the date of issue of Completion
certificate of the whole work.

NOTE: VENDOR MUST HAVE CPRI APPROVED LICENSE FOR

ELECTRICAL PANEL MANUFACTURING.

11. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

GENERAL
Provide split system air conditioning system consisting of indoor air
handling/fan coil unit(s), outdoor condensing unit(s), refrigerant piping,
fittings, valves and accessories, and controls.
Perform all Work required to provide and install the factory assembled split-
system air-conditioning and / or heat-pump system refrigerant piping, valves,
filters driers, and any refrigerant specialties equipment such as suction
accumulators, site glass, receivers, strainers, etc. as specified in this
specification, indicated, or noted on the Owner’s Contract Documents with
supplementary items necessary for proper installation and testing and operation
of the unit(s).

REFERENCE STANDARDS
The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project
unless identified by a specific edition date.
All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract
shall be applicable to this Project.
All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable
requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
ANSI/AMCA Standard 205-12 - Energy Efficiency Classification for Fans.
ANSI/ARI 410 - Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
ANSI/ARI 460 - Remote Mechanical-Draft Air Cooled Refrigerant
Condensers.
ANSI/ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment.
ANSI/ARI 340-360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and
Heat Pump Equipment.
ANSI/ARI 270 -Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.

345
 ANSI/ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning
Condensing Unit(s)..
ANSI/ARI 500-2000 Variable Capacity Positive Displacement Refrigerant
Compressors and Compressor Unit(s). for Air Conditioners and Heat Pump
Applications.
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise .
Buildings.
ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Field Service.
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
AWS A5.8 - Specification for Brazing Filler Metal.
ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years documented
experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product.
Provide capacity ratings with ARI certification. Energy Efficiency Rating
(EER) and Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than prescribed by
ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator
coils when tested in accordance with ARI Standards.
Insulation shall be a flexible, closed-cell elastomeric pipe insulation AP
Armaflex, AC Accoflex. Adhesive shall be Armaflex 520, 520 Black or 520
BLV Adhesive. The insulation must conform to ASTM C534 Grade 1, Type,
and shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu-in./h-ft2-°F at a
75°F mean temperature as tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C
518.
Insulation materials shall have a flame-spread index of less than 25 and a
smoke-developed index of less than 50 as tested in accordance with ASTM E
84. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming
particles, and the flame shall not be progressive.

SUBMITTALS
Product Data:
Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, and supply air fan
performance such as capacity, brake horsepower, wheel type and finishes of
materials. Submit electrical load characteristics, voltage, amperage, and rough-
in connection requirements for electrical and refrigerant tubing.
346
 Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring
diagrams for signal interlocks and control wiring, clearly indicating
factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
Record Documents:
Electrical and refrigerant tubing drawings with noted seal procedures and
sealant material products and product material data sheets.
Include manufacturer's install installation instructions.
Provide operation and maintenance manual.
Submit manufacturer’s certificate that coils are tested in accordance with and
rated in accordance with ARI 410.
Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace failed components, materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

Operation and Maintenance Data

The contractor shall provide closeout documents for the unit(s) which includes
emergency operation (if applicable), normal operating and maintenance
(O&M) manuals, in addition to any field change documents that affect the
operation or maintenance of the unit(s).
Permanently mount condensate trapping calculation instructions within the unit
O&M Manual that illustrates the unit casing at the condensate drain
connection.
Per the Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide Start-up information and
maintenance required prior to Start-up of the unit(s).

DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING

Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions
of Division 01 and Division 20.
Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with
factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage and make
any necessary replacement. If the damage can be repaired notify Owner for
acceptance prior to preforming work. Any replacement or repair due to
damage to a product will be at no expense to the Owner.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Protect openings in casing and seal them with plywood and plastic sheeting to
keep dirt, debris moisture from entering the air handler and, also protect coils
connections from entry of dirt and moisture with pipe caps or plugs.
Protect all coils to avoid damage; if the coils are damage they shall be replaced.

WARRANTY
A minimum 5 year compressor warranty, 10 year warranty on condenser coil,
and evaporator coil, 1 year parts and labor warranty on the rest of the system
controls and components.
347
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal,
state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide one refrigerant line filter drier and outside pressure taps in each
refrigerant circuit on brazed tubing refrigerant piping systems.
Manufacturers
American Standard
Trane
York
Daikin / McQuay
Mitsubishi
L.G. & reputed companies.

AIR HANDLING / FAN COIL UNIT

Fabricated exterior unit casing shall be constructed with minimum of 18 gauge
galvanized steel, painted with epoxy based enamel paint. Provide color chart
for color selection by Architect.
All are to be double wall with a minimum 2 inch microbial resistant and
cleanable foam insulation liner with an R value of 12 or greater. Unit access
panels must be removable.
Fabricate fan deck of galvanized steel.

Primary Drain Pan:

Unit(s) shall have a fire retardant, closed cell foam insulated, rust-inhibiting
IAQ stainless steel drain pan across the full width of the unit, extending from
the cooling coil to the end of the unit.
Drain connection shall be minimum 7/8-inch outside diameter, copper
construction.
Arrange coil and drain pan connections on the side of the unit as shown on the
Drawings.
Each unit shall be provided with integral mounting brackets adequate to
support the unit’s weight.
Each unit shall be provided with a one (1) inch discharge and inlet duct collar.
Furnish access doors as required to service all elements of the unit from each
side of the unit, not from the bottom.
Fan(s) shall be direct drive with centrifugal, single width wheel mounted on
vibration isolators.
Fan wheel design must meet Fan Efficiency Grade requirements and tested and
certified in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AMCA Standard 205-
12.
Fan motors that are 1 hp or less shall be Electronically Commutated Motor
(ECM) motor with an Electronic Speed Control (ESC) module. Fan motors
348
 greater than 1 hp shall be three-phase, suitable for Variable Speed Drive (VFD)
service in total compliance.

COILS
Coils shall be comprised of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper
tubes. If the cooling coils are used to cool mixed air (outside air and return air)
the coil shall be comprised of copper fins mechanically bonded to copper
tubes.
Test all coils for maximum system design working pressure and or static
pressure based on the type of refrigerant being used.
Heating and cooling coils shall be sized as required to meet or exceed industry
standards, capacities, and notes, on the Drawings.
air cooled condensing units
Provide air cooled condensing units as scheduled. Units shall be self-
contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired suitable for outdoor use
consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-
cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver and screens.
Provide corrosion resistant materials for unit parts which come in contact with
refrigerant.
Provide timer conduits to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
Fabricate cabinet from galvanized steel, equipped with removable access doors
or panels with quick fasteners. The cabinet and framing shall be protected from
environmental elements using a powder coat or epoxy paint finish capable of
withstanding 500-hour salt spray exposure per ASTM B117.
Compressor: [Hermetically sealed scroll with capacity modulation] or [semi-
hermetic] type with positive lubrication, crank case heater, un-loader for
capacity modulation, motor over load protection, service valves, filter drier,
suction and discharge valves, with gauge ports, and high and low pressure
safety controls.
Condenser:
Coils shall be made from seamless copper tubing with mechanically bonded
aluminum fins and capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray exposure per
ASTM B117.
Provide condenser fans which discharge, vertically and that have direct drive
fans resiliently mounted with guard and motor.
Provide unit with high and low pressure cutouts for compressor, non-recycling
pump down, reset relay and oil pressure safety control (7 1/2 ton units and
larger).
Provide anti-short cycle timer for loss of power conditions to protect the
compressor.
Low suction pressure cut out switch to reduce probability of pulling non
condensable gases into the refrigerant system.
Note to A/E add this sentence if the application and ASHRAE zone minimum
temperatures is appropriate for this requirement; “Provide with controls to

349
 permit operation down to 0 degree F ambient temperature at minimum
compressor load.”
PipinG
Copper Tube and Fittings:
Drawn-Temper Copper Tube per ASTM B 280, Type ACR, clean, dry and
capped.
Annealed-Temper Copper Tube per ASTM B 280, Type ACR, clean, dry and
capped. Annealed copper tubing shall not be used for piping larger than 0.625
O.D.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
Bronze Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-7 (50% silver), BCuP5
(15% Silver).
Filter Section:
Refer to Section 23 40 00 – Filters, and Drawings for additional requirements.
Filters shall have a maximum width of 24 inches.
The air handling unit manufacturer shall provide one (1) set of scheduled filters
for each air handling unit as shown on the Drawings. The filters shall be boxed
and placed within the air handling unit during shipment. The box shall identify
the type of filter and be labeled with the corresponding air handling unit
identification tag number.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and piping suspension
and support system components with other construction trades, including light
fixtures, HVAC ducts and equipment, fire-suppression-system piping,
equipment components, and fire and/or smoke partition assemblies.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installations through wall or foundation penetrations.
Coordinate and verify core bores for conduit and pipe sleeve installations on
existing facilities to preclude cutting rebar in the concrete floor or conduit
supported directly on the bottom of the concrete floor.
Verify the proper sleeve penetration detail is being applied prior to core boring
or drilling for fire and or smoke wall partitions and floors.
Assure refrigerant piping, valves and specialty items are stamped or certified to
meet refrigerant design pressures for the following refrigerants.
Select pipe, fittings, and components that have design pressure ratings per
ASHRAE 15 but not less than the following system design pressures:

Refrigerant Type Low Side (psig)High Side (psig)

R-134a (Air Cooled)115 225

R-410a (Air Cooled)260 510

INSTALLATION

350
 Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local
requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of
authorities having jurisdiction.
All installations shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations:
Air cooled condensing units shall have the proper clearance requirements that
not only meet space requirements to permit proper air flow and for
maintenance or removal needs.
Air handling or fan-coil units should be located to allow full access to perform
preventative and replacement maintenance which also includes space for coil
removal. Units shall not be located above or near electrical panels or
electronic control panels.
Provide sufficient access space and install refrigerant valves, strainers, and
driers at a height that is easily accessible for maintenance.
Contractor shall furnish and maintain and replace clean pre-filter media in each
air handling unit as listed in the equipment schedule on the Drawings during
start-up and construction. The Contractor shall install the tagged set of new
filter products provided by the air handling unit manufacturer for each unit
after it has been tested, commissioned and receives final acceptance by the
Owner.
Condensate P-traps shall be properly sized for air handling unit design negative
or positive static pressure based on relevant location of fan being upstream or
downstream of the coil.
Installation of refrigerant piping hangers and supports:
Purging with 99.9% nitrogen gas must be used when brazing copper tubing,
fittings, and valves. The brazing filler material is specified in piping section of
this specification.
Manufacturer’s requirements must be followed when brazing specialty items
and valves.
All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of
adjustable ring-type hangers. Unistrut® type trapeze hangers shall be used
where pipes run side by side. Hanger spacing shall be as follows:

Horizontal:
Copper Piping Maximum Spacing
3/8-inch and under 4 feet
1/2-inch through 3/4-inch 6 feet
1 – inch through 1-1/2-inch 8’ feet
2 – inch through 1-1/2-inch 10’ feet

Vertical copper piping shall be supported at 10 feet intervals maximum.

Round rods supporting the pipe hangers shall be of the following dimensions:

Piping Diameter Rod Diameter

2-inch and under 3/8-inch
351
 2-1/2 to 3-inch 1/2-inch

Rods for trapeze hangers shall be minimum of 3/8 - inch and shall have the
equivalent cross section listed above per pipe supported. The use of pipe
hooks, chains, perforated iron strapping or wire for pipe supports is not
permitted.
Insulated pipes shall be protected using galvanized steel shields similar to
Grinnel Figure 167 or 360 or equal, galvanized steel shield by Pipe Shields
Incorporated.
Place a hanger within 1'-0" of each side for each horizontal elbow.
Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2" minimum after piping is
erected.
Use plastic coated straps on copper pipe.
Where permitted by the A/E or Owner soft copper tubing shall be fastened to
the building structure with Unistrut® type supports, Unistrut® type clamps and
cushion inserts. Clamps shall not be spaced greater than 4'-0" apart.

TESTING
Leak Testing Requirements:
If the copper tubing is charged with refrigerant to connect the air cooled
condensing unit with the air handler or fan coil unit use proper leak detection
instruments to assure no refrigerant is leaking from the mechanical tube
connections between the cooling coil and the condensing unit.
Brazed refrigerant copper tubing shall be evacuated using the deep vacuum
method the system is thoroughly dry to ensure the system is thoroughly dry
and free of non-condensibles and leaks.
A micron gauge with a range from 50 to 9,000 micron shall be used to read the
vacuum reading.
Evacuation is considered to be complete when a system holds an absolute
vacuum at 500 microns for 20 minutes.
Performance Testing:
Performance test shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s pressure and
temperature charts for entering air temperatures of the outside coil and inside
coil including amperage and voltage readings, to assure the unit is operating
properly.

GAURANTEE:
The contractor shall guarantee the equipment against all defects of materials
and workmanship for the period of twelve (12) months from the date of issue
of Completion certificate of the whole work by the engineer in charge.

Any defects arising during the guarantee period shall be rectified and made
good by the vendor at his own risk & cost to the satisfaction owner.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

352
AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS:
Inspection & testing shall be carried out in the presence of engineer in charge
of ULBC Inv Division No.2,Valod / TPI person of all electrical and fire system
related equipment, however contractor should have to submit company/
manufacturer test certificate for the same. Each major component of the
electrical and fire system related equipment shall be subjected to shop tests by
the respective manufacturer and corresponding test reports/certificates shall be
furnished by him along with supply document of equipments.
Electrical and Fire system related equipment:
Each assembled equipment shall be shop tested by the manufacturer in
presence of TPI/ ULBC Inv Division No.2,Valod’s representative to determine
the following characteristics within the operating range as specified.
All Test Report
Data Sheet
Efficiency curve
Total power consumed
All the test shall be conducted in accordance with the relevant IS /
manufacturers testing standards and shall be witnessed by the end user at
manufacturers works. Each equipment performance shall be documented by
obtaining concurrent reading showing all electrical and mechanical parameters,
and it should be match with its data sheet and must be followed the IS
standards. Such reading shall be documented for at least 5 no of same
equipment.

POST INSTALLATION/PRE COMMISSIOING CHECKS:

All Electrical and Fire system related equipment shall be commissioned only
after due pre-commissioning checks after installation. For this, authorized and
qualified representative of manufacturer shall oversee and confirm the
workmanship of equipment installation. All pre commissioning checks, as
enlisted in equipment manual, shall be witnessed by manufacturer’s
representative.
First time starting of the equipment (after pre commissioning checks) shall be
carried out only after satisfactory installation certificate/acceptance by
manufacturer representative. In any case, contractor shall not be allowed to
commission the equipment without confirmation of installation and satisfactory
pre commissioning checks by manufacturer representative.

POST COMMISSIOING/FIELD TESTING:

After installation equipment offered will be subjected to testing in field for its
satisfactory & trouble free working for maximum test working hours. If the
field performance is found not to meet the requirement, then the equipment
shall be rectified and / or replaced by the vendor.

IS Code & Act for Electrical Work

353
 All Specification, standard, publication etc. specified mean the latest standards,
publication etc. pertaining to Electrical Installation and should conform to the
following wherever applicable.
Indian Electricity Act 1910 with its amendments.
Indian Electricity Rules 1956 and its amendments.
Indian Electricity supply Act, 1948.
Regulation for Electrical Equipment in building by I.E.F. London.
The Factory Act 1948 and its amendments.
I.S.-732-1982 Part-l, II & III code of practice for Electrical wiring and fittings
in buildings for low and medium voltages.
I.S. 4064-1967 H.D. Air break switches and fuses for Voltages not exceeding
1100 volts.
I.S. 3043 – Earthing code of practice for
I.S. - 1554 Part-l - 1970 PVC insulated (Heavy duty) Electrical Cables for
working voltages up to and including 1100 volts.
IS : 694 - 1964 Part-ll - PVC insulated cable with Aluminum conduits (revised)
for voltages up to 1100 volts.
IS : 5908-1970 - Electrical installations in buildings, method of measurements
of.
IS : 4237-1967 - General requirement for switchgear and control gear for
voltage not exceeding 1000 volts.
IS : 1653-1964 - Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (revised).
IS : 2509-1973 - Rigid steel conduits for electrical installation. (First revision).
IS : 1258-1967 - Bayonet landholders (First revision)
IS : 418-1957 - Tungsten-Filament General service electric lamps (Third
revision)
IS : 374-1966 - Fans and Regulators, ceiling type, electric (Second revision)
IS : 2667-1964 - Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS : 3419-1976 - Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits (First revision)
National Electric Code, 1986.

SPECIAL CONDITION

(1) Point wiring shall be from the distribution box or fuse board, No sub main
shall be
measured.
(2) Samples of materials shall be given to Engineer-in-charge and approval
should be taken
in writing before its use.
(3) Fabrication drawing should be get approved from the Engineer-in -charge
prior to
Manufacturer.
(4) Pipe laying lay out shall be as per consultants drawings.
(5) There shall be no junction in wiring out let box shall be used after bond.
(6) Electrical contractor shall make good the civil work if chased of damaged.
354
 (7) Electrical Engineer-in-charge opinion shall be final and binding on
contractor.
(8) Qualified labour and supervisors shall work at site.
(9) Electrical Contractor shall not permit unqualified labour contractor to work
at site. He shall observe Govt. rules regarding control of labour. He shall
submit test report and carry our tests as required and furnish detailed drawings
on completion of work. The responsible authorized person by the contractor
should be available of site daily when work is in progress.
(10) The work shall be carried out during working days between 8.00 A.M. to
6.00 P.M. only. The cable trench should not remain open for more than 24
hours after excavation. If contractor intends to work on holiday or outside
working hours specified, he shall take prior permission from the Engineer-in-
charge. In that case overtime to the staff shall have to be paid by the
Contractor. The Electrical appliance-materials shall be bear the ISI mark or
declaration indicating manufacture's names and appliances material used
having been manufactured in accordance with the manufactures' certificate
issued by the Government of Gujarat and confirming to the standard specified
by the I.S.I. shall be given by the contractor.
(11) Cost of all test should be bare by contractor/ Tenderer, carried out for
Electrical and
Fire System related equipment in presence of TPI/PMC/ DIVISION
representative.
(12) Defect liability period of 3(Three) year for all electrical item shall be
consider after
work completion certificate given by engineer in charge.
(13) OTHER DETAILS:

Scope of work:
The Contractor’s scope of work covers supply, installation, commissioning and
testing of complete Electrical installation as specified in material specification
and bills of quantities.
Location:
The works are to be carried out Navsari. All electrical equipment and gear shall
be designed for an average ambient of 45˚C with a peak of 50˚C.
Power Supply:
Power will be made available at 415/240 V 3 phase 4 wire 50 Hz earthed
neutral system and all equipment shall be suitable for the above power supply
with a variations of ± 12½ %. Any equipment / component operating at other
than the above power supply shall be provided with necessary transformer.
Drawings, Specifications & Deviations:
Deviations of any kind in technical specifications will not be entertained.
In case of discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the tenderer
shall assume the more stringent of the two and furnish his rates accordingly.
The contractor shall prepare fabrication and working drawings and all work
shall be as per the approved working drawings. Approval of drawings does not
355
 relieve the contractor of his responsibility to meet with intents of the
specifications. All such drawings for approval shall be in duplicate.
Equipment data shall be submitted along with the filled tender. Tenderer not
submitting data in full will do so at the risk of their being evaluated with such
information as may be available with the consultants. It is believed that the said
makes meets the intents of the specifications and have sufficient field
experience behind.
Time of Completion:
The work shall be completed as indicated in the tender conditions.
Tools and Spare Parts:
All tools, tackle, scaffolding and staging required for erection and assembly of
the equipment and the contractor himself shall obtain installation covered by
the contract. All other materials such as foundation bolts, nuts etc. required for
the installation of the –plant shall also be supplied and included in the contract.
Tenderer should submit the spares recommended by him for two years
operation of each type of equipment covered by these specifications on
completion of work.

Testing & Handing over:

The contractor shall carry out tests on different equipment as specified in
various sections in the presence of representative of Employers, Engineer-in-
charge and Consulting engineers in order to enable them to determine whether
the plant, equipment and installation in general comply with the specifications
as well as relative latest IS rules and regulation.
All equipment shall be tested after carrying out necessary adjustments and
balancing to establish equipment ratings and all other design conditions. At
least six sets of readings shall be taken for each item tested and submitted.
The project shall be handed over after satisfactory testing along with six sets of
documentation along with two sets of soft copy each consisting of:
i) Detailed equipment data as approved by the Consulting
Engineers/Employer.
ii) Manufacturer’s maintenance and operating instructions.
Set of drawings, showing plant layouts, piping, ducting, cabling etc.
Approved test reading and certificate of local authorities.
List of recommended spares.
Submission of the above documentation shall form a precondition for the final
acceptance of the plant and installation and final payment.
Performance guarantee:
All equipment and the entire installation shall be guaranteed to yield the
specified ratings and design conditions as per latest IS rules and regulations.
Any equipment found short of the specified ratings by more than the allowable
tolerance as determined by the test readings shall be rejected.

Defects Liability:

356
 As per relevant general conditions of the contract. Defect liability period of
3(Three) year for all electrical item shall be consider after work completion
certificate given by engineer in charge.
Statutory Inspections:
The contractor shall be fully responsible for meeting all the statutory
obligations & local inspectorate pertaining to the works carried out by them.
The contractor should prepare all working drawings and obtain approval of
competent authorities and also have the equipment and installation inspected
and got approved. The Employers directly against demand in writing from the
appropriate authority and all other expenses for submission and approval of the
various and relevant statutory will pay all official fees/bodies shall be
embodied in the tender prices.

General Conditions:
The tender shall be governed by general conditions of contract forming part I
of this tender. Wherever conflicting, the general conditions shall prevail.
Safety Precautions:
A competent and authorized supervisor shall be on the site whenever the
contractor’s men are at work. The supervisor should ensure that all plant and
machinery used on the site are rendered safe for working and meets with the
Indian or International safety standards applicable for the use and operation of
such machinery. The supervisor should also ensure that the workmen are
supplied with and made to use safety appliances such as safety belts, life lines,
helmets etc. The supervisor shall not leave the work site without permission
from Employer’s project manager or his nominee.
Smoking shall not be encouraged on the site but altogether strictly prohibited
in areas where combustible and inflammable goods/materials are stores or
lying about.
Any hot job such as welding, soldering, gas cutting shall not be carried out
without the permission of the Engineer-in-charge. Such jobs shall not be
carried out where inflammable materials are stored or lying about. All electric
connections shall be through adequately sized mechanically protected cables
without any joints and with proper and adequate terminals. All power supplies
shall be through properly rates fuses with isolating devices. No such hot jobs
shall be carried out on holidays and without the presence of the Contractor’s
supervisor.
It is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor to practice the principles of
‘Safety First’ during the entire tenure of work with adequate insurance
covering injury or death to workmen, loss by theft or damage to materials and
property in position or not and third party.
The contractor should clear the site of all debris every day to avoid accidents.
In case this is not done, the owners may engage necessary labour to maintain
the cleanliness of the premises and removal of debris and debit all or part of the
expenditure so incurred from the contractor/s.

357
Temporary wiring:
Whenever any temporary wiring is done, all precautions for safety are taken as
well as it is not hazardous to anybody. Any accidents happen because of
temporary or permanent installation, it will be entire responsibility of
contractor for all compensation to concern parties.
Employed will not be responsible for such accidents, mistake etc.

Compilation Drawings:
The contractor shall to submit 6 sets of as built drawings with 2 sets of soft
copy showing substation layout, single line diagrams, circuit distribution
layout, conduit layout, quantities of junction boxes, distribution boards, switch
boards, circuit mains, mains, low voltage systems layout, security systems
layout etc. complete in all respect.

SPECIAL CONDITION FOR TESTING

(CONTRACTOR TO READ THIS CAREFULLY)
SCOPE :
Contractor should have to take all necessary Routine testing/ random testing of
equipments and component prior to supply as per the guidelines / rules /
sampling method etc. of IS at manufacturing works or other standard lab in
presence of Division representative ( E.I.C ) as witness testing. Any deviation
in parameters which is not as per IS is not accepted and client reserve the rights
to reject the same at any stage of the project.

VENDOR LIST FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE FOR SOR ITEMS

Sr.No.Item Approved Make Make Offered By
Contractor
1 Shockproof Havells Crabtree, C&S,
Accessories Anchor, Schindler
Modular Type
2 L.T Cable & Wire R.R. Kable, Havell's, Finolex,
Torrent, Anchor
3 Cable Gland JAISON/3D/ COMMET /
HMI ( ISI
MARKED)
4 Lugs & Sockets DOWELLS / ISMAL /3D /
JAISON
5 Panel Board CPRI APPROVED ( to be got
Manufacturer approved prior to supply)
6 MCCB / ACB / MCB Havells, C&S, Siemens, GE,
/ DB /ELCB Schindler
358
7 Changeover Switch Havells, C&S, Siemens, GE,
Schindler
8 Busbar Chamber Havells, C&S, Siemens, GE,
Schindler
9 Switch gear & Havells, C&S, Siemens, GE,
control Gear Schindler
10 Earthing Ashlok, Green Wire, ARVI
11 PVC Conduits Precision, Anchor, Polycab
&Trunking
12 Telephone / LAN D-Link, Finolax, RR Kable,
Cable Polycab
13 Capacitor ( Double Havells, Matrix, PMX, Jilco
layer APP type)
14 Energy meter ENERCON/YOCOGAVA/FL
UKE/KRYCARD/SAM/ABB
/ SCHNIDER or équivalent
15 Digital Meters RISHABH (L&T) /
CONZERVE / HPL /
ENERCON / KRYCARD /
YOCOGAVA
16 Selector Switch KEYCEE / SALZER /
SIEMENS / JYOTI
17 LT Terminal ELEMEX/CONNECTWELL/
Connectors WAGO/NUTAN
18 ASHMOR / KAPPA / JYOTI
C.T ( Cast resin) / ABB / SILKANA /
GILBERT / PRECISE
19 Indicating Lamp RAAS CONTROL / TEKNIK
/ VAISHNO /
BINAY/ESBEE (L&T)
20 Push Button SIEMENS / RAAS
CONTROL / L&T / BINAY
21 Switch Disconnector Havells, C&S, L&T,
Fuse unit Siemens, GE, Schindler
22 Cable trays Silverline /Indiana/ Sharda/
B.M.Engineering/
Tushartech/ Superfab/ BVK
enterprise or equivalent
23 APFC Relay Enercon, Epcos, Triniti. or
équivalent
24 Filament Lamps / Philips, Crompton, Halonix,
Flourescent Tubes Havells

359
25 Compact Fluorescent Havells, Philips, Crompton,
Lamps /LED Light Osram, KeselecSchreder
26 Metal Helide Lamps Havells, Halonix, ,Bajaj,
Philips, Crompton
27 Energy Saving T-5 Havells, Philips, Crompton,
Tube Fitting / CFL Halonix, Bajaj
Indoor Type
28 Sodium Vapour Havells, Philips, Crompton,
Lamp Fitting (Post Halonix, Bajaj, Thorn,
Top Lantern/Street KeselecSchreder
Light
29 Flood Light Havells, Philips, Crompton,
Halonix, , Bajaj,
KeselecSchreder
30 Electronic Ballast Havells, Philips, Crompton,
Halonix, , Bajaj,
KeselecSchreder
31 Exhaust Fan / Ceiling Usha, Havells, Crompton,
Fan Bajaj, Almonard, Orient
32 UPS Uniline, VSC, GE
33 Junction Box Sintex, Esco, EPP
34 Power & Control C&S, trinity, Nippen,
Panel / Panel Standard, L&T
Accessories
35 Rigid PVC Pipe Precision, Anchor, Polycab,
Astral
36 Dimmable Ballast Osram, Phillips, GE, Bajaj
37 D.G.Engine Cummins, Layland, Greaves
38 Alternator Crompton /Stamford/
Kirloskar / Caterpillar
39 Battery Exide /Standard Farukava/
LFucas / Prestrolite or
equivalent
40 Over current relay, ABB /EssunRayRoll
Earth fault relay AREVA/Schneider/Siemens
or equivalent
41 DISTRIBUTION Havells, C&S, L&T,
BOARDS Siemens, GE, ABB,
42 BALLAST: - BAJAJ/ PHILIPS /
CROMPTON/ OSRAM or
equivalent
43 Anti Vibration Pad Dunlop / Polybendindia / or
equivalent
360
44 Air Conditioner, Panasonic, Dikin, ,
Water Coolers Mitshubishi, LG, Voltas,
Carrier, USHA
45 DWC Pipe Gemini
46 ELEVATORS / LIFT MITSUBISHI / ORBIS /
KONE / SCHINDLER /
OMEGA/OTIS
47 EPABX Cisco / Avaya / MATRIX /
PANASONIC
48 LAN SWICTH Cisco/ HP /Alcatel-lucent
49 PUMP MOTOR SET LUBI / CROMPTON /
KIRLOSKAR / CRI
50 STARTER C&S, L&T, HAVELLS,
SIEMENS, GE
51 OCTAGONAL UTKARSH, VALMONT,
POLE TRANSRAIL, BAJAJ

Note: -
For any other item, not mentioned in above list, approval must be taken before
supply.
The bidder must be required to fill the blank cells provided above otherwise
their offer shall be liable rejection and price bid shall not be opened. Further,
make offered must be as per tender specifications/ conditions only, failing
which their offer shall be liable for rejection.
Technical literature must be enclosed with the technical bid for the equipments/
components offered. Otherwise offer of such bidder shall be rejected.
The successful tenderer will have to supply the makes from above in
consultation with the Client without any extra cost.
Tenderer should have to specify the list of makes & model considered in the
tender while quoting the rates in the tender, in covering letter of separate letter
enclosure. However, the final decision for accepting make specified by
tenderer would be of client.
As far as possible, the successful tenderer will have to place order directly to
the manufacturer OR it’s authorized dealer.
The Client have right to check the challans of supplier.
Make of components required to be used by contractor to complete the
installation, if not mentioned anywhere, shall be required to GOT IT
APPROVED by Client before installation in writing manner.
Within a week of work order, the contractor shall submit the sample of each
item / component of above mentioned approved make for the approval of the
Client.
Along with the bid, a quality assurance plan (QAP Document) shall be
submitted by Vendor for Client’s review for each supply/erection activity

361
 involved in the project; successful vendor shall have to accept the final QAP
modified by client if it is further improved to ensure better project quality.

Item No. 38
Supplying & erecting in earth pit of minimum bore dia. 225 mm size
approved make Safe Earthing Electrode consisting Pipe-in-Pipe Technology
as per IS 3043-1987 made of corrosion free hot dipped G.I. Pipes having
Outer pipe dia of 80 mm having 80-200 Micron galvanising, Inner pipe dia of
40 mm having 200-250 Micron galvanising, connection terminal dia of 14
mm with constant ohmic value surrounded by highly conductive compound
with high charge dissipation suitable for following type of applications with
chamber and heavy duty cover (A)(approved make OEM has to submit test
certificate including value of earth resistance of installation duly stamped
and signed by agency and officer Incharge has to ensure the value of
earthing resistane mentioned in test Certificate) & having backfilling
compound of (B) Inner chemical (CCMCompound)- Resistivity :- 0.2
ohm/meter testing as per IEC 62561-2017,Voltage drop:-<1 voltatno load &
dry form, Sulphar content:-<2%(C)Backfill Compound :- Earthing
compound should be capable to retain moisture for long time Necessary test
report must be submitted by Agency.
[C]For Electrical Installation covering Transformer Neutrals, Lightning
arrester Earthing, A.C. Plant & Sensitive Computer System (like
Automation, SCADA)i.e.independent Earthing located in other than normal
soil i.e. Soft Rock, Marshy Soil etc..-Length of Pipe : 3 Mtrs. -Back filling
Compound :2 nos Bags of 25 Kg.

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 39
Supplying and erecting, commissioning and testing of Diesel Generating set
confirming to IS:4722:1968 & BS:5514 having continuous rating, 3phase, 415
volts, 50 cycles A.C. supply comprising of a totally enclosed air/water cooled
diesel engine with multi-cylinders developing suitable BHP not less than
following capacity at 1500 RPM with 10%overload for one hour in 24 hours with
standard accessories like flywheel, lubricating oil cooler, "A" class governor,
heavy duty fuel wheel and lubricating oil filter, oil bath air filler, lubricating oil
pressure gauge, end exhaust manifold, standard set of tools with adjustables
panners, screw drivers, cylinder head to cover, joint cylinder head to exhaust,
element lube oil filter, 12/24 volts electric starting equipment complete with
362
 standard heavy duty battery, dynamo, cut-outs, ammeter ,necessary wiring,
pressure gauge, starteretc and heavy duty Residentialty pe exhaust silencer and
vertical hot air duct both logged with asbestos rope, save oil trays, exhaust piping
of required length, standard wall/floor mounted fuel with level indicator and
piping and drip proof alternator, self excited, self regulated, screen protected, with
excitation system, capable of delivering the rated system output at 415volts,
3phase, 0.8PF, 50Hz, 4wire, running at 1500 RPM, conforming to IS-4722-1968
with voltage regulation+/-5% of rated voltage from no load to full load. Both the
engine and alternator fitted on a common fabricated steel base plate with
antivibration mounting engine and alternator both connected to each other by
flexible flange coupling and with floor/wall mounted control panel box
comprising of voltmeter ammeter, selector switches, ACB/MCCB/MCB of
adequate capacity, indicator lamps duly wired with HRC fuses. The alternator &
control panel shall be connected with provided suitable capacity armoured cable
and complete with Acoustic enclosure (canopy)made out of 16 SWGCRCA Sheet,
sound absorbing material Rock wool of 64 density &100 mm thick conforming to
IS:8183/PU Foam of 40 Density-atleast 40mm. The resin bonded rock wool
covered from inside the canopy by perforated sheet with 3/4 mmholes, sound level
not more than 75 dB at a distance of 1 mtr, as per PVCT norms. Erection,
commissioning and satisfactory testing as per requirement with first filling of fuel,
oil, etc. with guarantee/Warrantee of complete system for Two years.& with
obtaining all necessary certificate from Electrical Inspector. The Capacity and
Ratings of DG sets are as below.
(M)Continuous rating of 125 KVA, BHP not less than 154 BHP
The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal
Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 40
Supplying and erecting approved make single phase servo controlled voltage
stabilizer suitable for input voltage range 180/25OV. And output voltage
range 225/235V. A.C. complete erected. (C) 4.0 KVA
The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal
Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 41
Providing and erecting Approved make Ceiling fan with double ball bearing
ISI mark with condenser A.C. 23OV. 50c/s. 1200 mm. sweep complete,
363
 canopy erected on existing hook or clamp with earthing. [Make shall be
approved by Engineer in charge]

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 42
"Supplying and erecting LED indoor fittings with LEDs of wattage 0.2 Watt
to 0.5 Watt assembled on single MCPCB, with housing used as a heat sink
shall be made of thick sheet Steel conforming to IS: 513/CRCA/ aluminium
die cast powder coated and high U.V. & corrosion resistance with diffuser
with company mark/name 160 to 270 V,Power Factor more than 0.95, THD <
15 %,CCT 3000 K to 6500K, Luminaire efficacy> 85 lumens/watt ,LED
efficiency-110 lumens/watt LED driver efficiency > 85 % CREE / OSRAM /
PHILIPS Lumileds / NICHIA / SEOUL/Bridgelux make LED used for
luminaire. ( fitting required LM-79 & LM-80 Certificates)(NOTE: Below
description have shown ranges of Wattage capacity of LED fittings.The
Engineer incharge may select any wattage capacity between the ranges
shown.)"
(A) Tube Light with integral driver (V) 36-40 Watts, Surge-2 KV, IP-20, 4
feet Cat.III

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 43
Supplying and erecting LED street light/Flood light fittings with High power
White LEDs wattage of 3 Watt and above assembled on single MCPCB,
efficiency more than 130lm/wand corrosion free High pressure die cast
aluminum housing with smooth finish powder coated and heat sink extruded
aluminium with diffuser and Polycarbonate optics/ lenses, with toughened
glass with company mark/name engraved or embossed 160to270V,Power
Factor more than 0.95 , THD < 10%, CCT 3000 K to 5700 K , Uniformity
ratio > 0.45, Luminaire efficacy >100 lumens/watt. LED driver efficiency >
85%. ( fittings required LM-79 & LM-80 certificates )( NOTE: Below
description have shown ranges of Wattage capacity of LED fittings. The
364
 Engineer incharge may select any wattage capacity between the ranges
shown.)
(B)FloodLight(IP-65), Surge protection-4K Vintegral and, Light must have
440 V AC line supply with over-voltage protection.

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 44
Providing following type of Modular Type Accessories mounted with PVC /
metallic/Wooden box, single mounting base frame covered with textured /
metallic/white front plate , modules erected with necessary connections as
per site situation directed by Engineer In charge.
(9) 16 Amp. SP one way switch Cat.III
(10) 6/16Amp. Universal socket Cat.III

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.
Item No. 45
Providing and erecting Inverter based approved make split air-conditioning
unit consisting of condensing unit with variable speed fan motor, inverter
type hermetically sealed rotary compressor with accessories etc. duly
connected separately erected evaporating unit and blower motor with its
accessories by means of extra supplied proper insulated copper tubing.drain
PVC pipes suitable for (cost includes Eco Friendly green gas charging and
15A plug top & Remote Control & MS Stand) with necessary core cutting.
(2)For 4/5 Star Rating of current year (B) for 1.5 ton capacity

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.
Item No. 46
Point wiring for FAN with 2-1.5 sq.mm & earth wire of 1.5 sq.mm (Green)
both are of .ISI marked 1.1 KV Grade FRLS PVC insulated multi strand
copper wires up to 10 mtr length, in below type of pipe erected with 6A
365
 Modular type switch and hum free EME four or more step type electronic
fan regulator with separately mounted and accessories with earth continuity
of following type erected on PVC / Metallic/Wooden box, single mounting
base frame covered with textured/metallic/white front plate modules erected
on / in wall / ceiling as per pipe erected. with necessary ceiling rose /
H.D.Connector as directed.
(f) with medium class Rigid PVC pipe and accessories erected concealed in
wall/ceiling complete Cat. III

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 47
Point wiring for Light / Bell with 2-1.5 sq.mm & earth wire of 1.5 sq.mm
(Green) both are of ISI marked 1.1 KV grade FRLS PVC insulated multi
strand copper wires up to 10 mtr length , in below type of pipe erected with
6A Modular type switch / bell push & accessories and earth continuity of
following type, erected on PVC / Metallic/Wooden box, single mounting base
frame covered with textured/metallic/white front plate modules erected on /
in wall / ceiling as per pipe erected, with necessary Lamp holder/ceiling rose /
H.D.Connector as directed.
(f) with medium class Rigid PVC pipe and accessories erected concealed in
wall/ceiling complete Cat. III

The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal

Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Item No. 48
Point wiring for Individual Plug with & earth wire of 1.5 sq.mm (Green)
both are of ISI marked 1.1 KV grade FRLS PVC insulated multistrand
copper wires upto 10 mtr length, in below type of pipe erected complete with
Modular type switch & 5 pin Plug erected on PVC/Metallic/Wooden box
covered with appropriate front plate modules erected on/in wall/ceiling as per
pipe erected with following type of accessories.
366
 [I]For 6A Plug and 6 as witch with 2-1.5 sq.mm Cu. Wire from nearby
switch board /mcb db board
(f)with medium class Rigid PVC pipe and accessories erected concealed in
wall/ceiling complete Cat.III
The technical specification of this item is as per the “Detailed Techincal
Specification for Electrical Items” covered in this Tender.

Operation & Maintenance (O&M)

Preface

The contractor shall operate and maintain all the works executed by him as a
whole with due care and diligence. All the manpower, machineries, plants,
equipments, vehicles and other facilities shall have to be arranged and
provided by the contractor as per the provision of the contract. Terms and
Conditions narrated in tender documents of this Project are also equally
applicable in the Operation and Maintenance period.

Scope of Work

The O & M period of this contract shall be 10 years including Defect Liability
Period of 5 years. During O & M period, the Contractor shall have to operate,
maintain and upkeep the following services:
 Operation and Maintenance of all civil structures, dam structure,
Protection works, approach road etc.
 Operation and Maintenance of gates/components including all the
components/parts.
 To carry out repair works to stop Leakage / seepage of water
 To repair Civil works damages,
367
 To maintain Lighting and Electrification work of all the components of
project including Building, Road, etc.
 To maintain all Land scraping works
 Maintenance of Building, other allied works within the Project premise
 All the internal Roads, approach road and functional areas shall have to be
kept neat and clean.

For any additional work, which is not included in the scope but is required to
meet operational and maintenance shall also be taken into consideration to
meet the project purposes.

The items and consumable, which are having life lesser than the O&M period
of 10 years shall be replaced as and when their life ends and or as per
manufacturer’s recommendation to upkeep the system operations in good
working conditions.

At the time of such repairing, all the required shall have to be provided by the
contractor. The contractor shall keep sufficient stock / inventory of all such
items. Such repairing shall immediately be carried out by the contractor at his
own cost including labour, excavation cutting, fitting, welding, testing,
refilling etc. to complete.

Due to carelessness of persons engaged by contractor if any loss of property

or crop in private land occur, the compensation shall have to be paid by
contractor. If contractor fails to do so and complain is received by department
then the department will make the payment to private owners and recovery
will be made from contractor’s bill.

Contractor shall have to carry out leak detection survey (visual) along the
embankment each month and leakage observations and repairing work record
shall be maintained chainage wise by contractor.

368
Administrative Provisions
Risk and Obligations of the Contractor

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of the facility (or) any
part thereof (or) materials and plant from the date of issue of Interim
Certificate from the department for the whole of the Works, to the date of
completion of the Operation and Maintenance period.

 In the case of risks causing loss (or) damage any such determination shall
take into account of the responsibility of the Contractor.

 If any loss or damage happens to the facility (or) any part thereof (or)
materials and Plant for incorporation therein, during the O & M period for
which the Contractor is responsible for the care thereof, or from any cause
whatsoever, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, rectify such loss (or)
damage so that the facility (or) any part thereof (or) materials and Plant
confirm in every respect with the provisions of the Contract to the
satisfaction of the Department. The Contractor shall also be liable for any
loss or damage to the works in the course of O & M carried out by him for
the purpose of complying with his obligation under this Clause.

Defect Liability and O&M Period

The O&M Period shall commence from the issue of Completion Certificate
for a period of ten (10) years as per clause 33 of Conditions of Contract
(Volume-I, PART-B), including defect liability period. In case of foreclosure
of O & M for any reason, the defect liability period shall continue for Five (5)
years.

Insurance

The Contractor shall, without limiting his or the Employer’s obligations and
responsibilities insure

369
 The Works, together with materials for incorporation therein, to the full
replacement cost.

 The Contractor’s Equipment and other things brought onto the Site by the
Contractor, for a sum sufficient to provide for their replacement at the
Site.

The insurance detailed above shall be in the joint names of the Contractor and
the Employer at the Contractor’s cost and shall cover the Employer and the
Contractor against all loss or damage from whatsoever cause arising, from the
start of the operation and maintenance to the date of completion of operation
and maintenance period.

Any amounts not insured or not recovered from the insurers shall be borne by
the Contractor in accordance with their responsibilities under this chapter.

The Contractor shall also, except if and so far as the Contract provides
otherwise, indemnify the Employer against all losses and claims in respect of:

 Death of or injury to any person, or,

 Loss of or damage to any property (other than the Works)

Which may arise out of in consequent of the Operation and Maintenance of

the facility and the remedying of any defects therein, and against all claims
proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
thereof or in relation thereto.

The insurance policy shall include across liability clause such that the
insurance shall apply to the Contractor and to the Employer as separate
insurers.

The Employer shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or

compensation payable to any workmen or other person in the employment of
370
 the Contractor or any Subcontractor. The Contractor shall indemnify and keep
indemnified the employer against all such damages and compensation, and
against all claims, proceedings, damages, costs, charges, and expenses
whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

In the event that the contractor fails to comply with the above provisions, the
Engineer-in-charge shall take necessary actions to get the insurance with the
above coverage and all the costs thereof shall be recovered from the amount
payable to the contractor.

Personnel

All Contractors’ personnel employed at the project premises at any time

during the period covered by the present Contract will be provided by him.
The Employer is not liable for personnel in any way and cannot be held
responsible in the event of litigation of any sort between the Contractor and
members of personnel or their representatives.

All decisions related to staff numbers, timing and qualifications should be got
approved from the Engineer-in-charge.

The Contractor undertakes to comply with applicable legislation and the codes
of labour laws, occupational and safety hazards preventive measures on
matters of health, hygiene and safety, and shall assume responsibility for
works required in the event of any change in applicable regulations.

The Contractor will provide the minimum following personnel for the full
term of operation and maintenance period. Details of qualifications and
experience required shall be as under:

Detail of Qualified & Experienced personnel

371
 Sr. No. Category of No. of Person Educational Qualification
Staff Required Required
1 Project Manager 1 B.E. (Civil) - as and when
required
2 Site Supervisor 1 B.E. (Civil) - as and when
required
3 Site Supervisor 1 B.E. (Mechanical) as and
when required
4 Site Supervisor 1 Diploma (Mechanical) during
monsoon period
5 Civil Engineer 1 Diploma (Civil) during
monsoon period
5 Electrician 1 as and when required
6 Security Staff 3 -
10 Safety Person 1 -

All staff is to be deployed for 365 days for each year.

Above staff requirement is minimum, additional staff required for smooth and
efficient operation of the system is to be deployed by the contractor as per
requirement for which no extra payment will be admissible.

For the non-compliance of employment of key personnel: If the successful

bidder does not recruit / depute the key personnel identified as per schedule,
then the department shall arrange for such manpower. All the cost and
consequences in this regard shall be borne by the contractor.

Computer / Printer and Accessories

The contractor has to provide at site One (1) nos. Computers with internet
connection, one (1) printer, scanner & copier, consumables and all required
stationer with all peripherals and all licensed software s (updated from time to
time) to keep and maintain all the records, data maintenance schedules in soft
and hard copies.

372
Assignment

The Contractor will not be entitled to sub-contract any part of his obligation to
any third party without prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

Completion of the Contract

On the date of Contract Completion or if the Contract is terminated, all the

installations, works and equipment placed under the Contractor’s
responsibility shall be handed over to the Employer, at no cost, in good
working condition, except for normal wear and tear. The Employer may
perform any inspections, tests or expert appraisals he shall consider necessary
with a view to checking that the property is in good working order.

At the end of O&M period, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the
Final Certificate within one month.

373